Shenzhen Samkoon Technology Corporation Ltd.

SK SERIES HMI
INSTRUCTION
SK SERIES HMI INSTRUCTION
1. HMI Specification ................................................................................................................................................ 7
2. Preface .................................................................................................................................................................8
3. Hardware Manual ............................................................................................................................................. 10
3.1 General .................................................................................................................................................... 10
3.2 Mounting dimensions ............................................................................................................................. 15
3.2.1 SK-035 .......................................................................................................................................... 15
3.2.2 SK-043 .......................................................................................................................................... 16
3.2.3 SK-050 .......................................................................................................................................... 19
3.2.4 SK-057 .......................................................................................................................................... 20
3.2.5 SK-070 .......................................................................................................................................... 20
3.2.6 SK-102 .......................................................................................................................................... 23
3.2.7 SK-104 .......................................................................................................................................... 24
3.2.8 SK-121 .......................................................................................................................................... 25
3.3 HMI Structure ..........................................................................................................................................25
3.3.1 Power Interface ............................................................................................................................26
3.3.2 Front panel ...................................................................................................................................27
3.3.3 Communication port ....................................................................................................................27
3.3.4 Pin .................................................................................................................................................28
3.3.5 Running Indicator Lights .............................................................................................................. 29
3.4 Technical Parameters .............................................................................................................................. 30
3.5 Wiring ...................................................................................................................................................... 39
4. Quick start of SKTOOL ....................................................................................................................................... 41
4.1 What's SKTOOL ........................................................................................................................................41
4.2 System demand .......................................................................................................................................43
4.2.1 Software demand .........................................................................................................................43
4.2.2 Hardware demand ....................................................................................................................... 43
4.3 Set up Software .......................................................................................................................................44
4.4 Uninstall Software ...................................................................................................................................50
4.5 Run SKTOOL .............................................................................................................................................53
4.6 Edit Interface and System Composition ..................................................................................................54
4.6.1 Edit Interface ................................................................................................................................54
4.6.2 System Composition .................................................................................................................... 79
4.7 Basic Operations ..................................................................................................................................... 80
4.7.1 Mouse usage and shortcut keys .................................................................................................. 80
4.7.2 Common terms ............................................................................................................................ 82
5. Basic steps of creating a new project ............................................................................................................... 84
5.1 Create new project ..................................................................................................................................84
5.2 Set parameters and add graphic object ..................................................................................................89
5.3 Download configuration engineering ..................................................................................................... 95
5.4 Upload configuration engineering ..........................................................................................................99
5.5 Upload historical data record ............................................................................................................... 100
5.6 Pack/Unpack ......................................................................................................................................... 101
6. SKTOOL Configuration Guide .......................................................................................................................... 103
6.1 Screen Operations .................................................................................................................................103
6.1.1 Create a New Screen ..................................................................................................................104
6.1.2 Modify Screen Property .............................................................................................................105
6.1.3 Delete Screen ............................................................................................................................. 106
6.1.4 Copy Screen ............................................................................................................................... 107
6.1.5 Automatic sorting ...................................................................................................................... 107
6.2 Graphics editing commands ................................................................................................................. 108
6.2.1 Group and Ungroup ................................................................................................................... 109
6.2.2 Layer ...........................................................................................................................................110
6.2.3 Rotaty ......................................................................................................................................... 112
6.2.4 Align ........................................................................................................................................... 114
2
This chapter details operations of drawing basic graphics with SKTOOL. ......................................................... 118
Contents： .......................................................................................................................................................... 118
6.3.1 Line .............................................................................................................................................119
6.3.2 Polyline .......................................................................................................................................120
6.3.3 Curve / Arc ................................................................................................................................. 121
6.3.4 Free Line .....................................................................................................................................122
6.3.5 Rectangle ....................................................................................................................................123
6.3.6 Rounded Rectangle .................................................................................................................... 124
6.3.7 Circle/Ellipse ...............................................................................................................................125
6.3.8 Polygon .......................................................................................................................................126
6.3.9 Sector ......................................................................................................................................... 127
6.3.10 Text ........................................................................................................................................... 128
6.3.11 Table .........................................................................................................................................129
6.3.12 Scale ......................................................................................................................................... 130
6.3.13 Open Library ............................................................................................................................ 132
6.3.14 Extern Picture ...........................................................................................................................134
6.3.15 Regular polygon ....................................................................................................................... 137
6.4 SKTOOL Advanced controls ...................................................................................................................138
6.4.1 GIF Display ..................................................................................................................................139
6.4.2 Trend Chart ................................................................................................................................ 141
6.4.3 XY Trend Chart ........................................................................................................................... 146
6.4.4 Historical Trend Chart ................................................................................................................ 147
6.4.5 Dynamic Circle ........................................................................................................................... 152
6.4.6 Dynamic Rectangle .................................................................................................................... 154
6.4.7 Alarm Display ............................................................................................................................. 156
6.4.8 Alarm Bar ................................................................................................................................... 157
6.4.9 Historical Alarm Display ............................................................................................................. 159
6.4.10 Graphic Move ...........................................................................................................................160
6.4.11 Meter ....................................................................................................................................... 162
6.4.12 Historical Data Display ............................................................................................................. 165
6.4.13 Message Display .......................................................................................................................168
6.4.14 Flow block ................................................................................................................................ 170
6.4.15 Timer ........................................................................................................................................ 171
6.4.16 Multi-function Button ..............................................................................................................177
6.4.17 Pie Chart ...................................................................................................................................179
6.5 SKTOOL Basic controls ...........................................................................................................................180
6.5.1 Bit Button ................................................................................................................................... 181
6.5.2 Word Button ...............................................................................................................................191
6.5.3 Bit Lamp ..................................................................................................................................... 193
6.5.4 Screen button .............................................................................................................................195
6.5.5 Function Button ......................................................................................................................... 198
6.5.6 Multi-state Button ..................................................................................................................... 202
6.5.7 Multi-state Indicator Lamp ........................................................................................................ 206
6.5.8 Numerical Display ...................................................................................................................... 211
6.5.9 Numerical Input ......................................................................................................................... 216
6.5.10 ASCII Display .............................................................................................................................221
6.5.11 ASCII Input ................................................................................................................................223
6.5.12 Bar Graph ................................................................................................................................. 224
6.5.13 Time Display .............................................................................................................................228
6.5.14 Date Display ............................................................................................................................. 229
6.5.15 Week Display ............................................................................................................................230
6.5.16 Static Picture ............................................................................................................................ 232
6.5.17 Picture Display ......................................................................................................................... 232
6.6 SKTOOL New controls ........................................................................................................................... 234
6.6.1 Arc Chart .................................................................................................................................... 235
6.6.2 Stepping Button ......................................................................................................................... 236
3
 6.6.3 Radio Button .............................................................................................................................. 237
6.6.4 Combo Box ................................................................................................................................. 238
6.6.5 Slider .......................................................................................................................................... 240
6.6.6 Animation ...................................................................................................................................241
6.6.7 Message Board ...........................................................................................................................245
6.6.8 Data Group Display .................................................................................................................... 246
6.6.9 Keyboard .................................................................................................................................... 248
6.6.10 Recipe Selector ........................................................................................................................ 250
6.6.11 Recipe Display .......................................................................................................................... 252
6.6.12 Qrcode ......................................................................................................................................254
6.6.13 Operation Log .......................................................................................................................... 255
6.6.14 Corner Flow Block .................................................................................................................... 256
6.6.15 Multi Window .......................................................................................................................... 258
6.6.16 Path display .............................................................................................................................. 262
Path display general dialog box .......................................................................................................................... 262
Index of related elements: point, line, arc, circle, thickness, color ....................................................................263
Address description of the reception area of the selected report .................................................................... 265
6.6.17 Scroll bar .................................................................................................................................. 266
6.6.18 Pipeline .................................................................................................................................... 271
6.6.19 Dial ........................................................................................................................................... 279
6.7 SKTOOL Control Instructions .................................................................................................................285
7. Script ................................................................................................................................................................288
7.1 Introduction to C language ................................................................................................................... 289
7.1.1 Data type of C language .............................................................................................................289
7.1.2 Initial value of variable and type conversion .............................................................................296
7.1.3 One-dimensional array .............................................................................................................. 298
7.1.5 Section summary ....................................................................................................................... 302
7.2 C language programming preliminary .................................................................................................. 304
7.2.1 Statement of C program ............................................................................................................ 304
7.2.2 Branch structure program ......................................................................................................... 306
7.2.3 switch statement ....................................................................................................................... 310
7.2.4 Loop structure program .............................................................................................................311
7.2.5 for statement ............................................................................................................................. 313
7.2.6 break statement .........................................................................................................................314
7.2.7 continue statement ....................................................................................................................315
7.2.8 Section summary ....................................................................................................................... 315
7.3 Script function introduction ..................................................................................................................317
7.3.1 Use script function to program ..................................................................................................318
7.3.2 Function button introduction in script editor ........................................................................... 319
7.3.3 Macro Encryption/Decryption ...................................................................................................322
7.3.4 New create script ....................................................................................................................... 326
7.3.5 Use internal storage area in script .............................................................................................327
7.4 String handling functions ...................................................................................................................... 328
7.5 Data operation function ........................................................................................................................333
7.6 Data switch function ............................................................................................................................. 337
7.7 Math arithmetic functio ........................................................................................................................340
7.8 Communication function ...................................................................................................................... 345
7.9 CAN communication function ...............................................................................................................351
8. Simulation ....................................................................................................................................................... 354
8.1 Offline Simulation ................................................................................................................................. 354
8.2 Online Simulation ..................................................................................................................................356
9. System Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 358
9.1 Communication Port Property ..............................................................................................................358
9.2 Setting ................................................................................................................................................... 360
9.2.2 HMI parameter settings .............................................................................................................365
9.2.3 HMI State ................................................................................................................................... 371
4
 9.2.4 PLC Control .................................................................................................................................372
9.2.5 Clock ...........................................................................................................................................375
9.2.6 File Encryption ........................................................................................................................... 377
9.2.7 HMI Protection ...........................................................................................................................378
9.2.8 Variable Table .............................................................................................................................383
9.2.9 The operation setting .................................................................................................................384
9.2.10 Text Library ...............................................................................................................................385
9.2.11 Address Library ........................................................................................................................ 388
9.3 Screen ....................................................................................................................................................392
9.4 Window ................................................................................................................................................. 393
9.5 Historical Data Collector ....................................................................................................................... 394
9.6 Alarm settings ....................................................................................................................................... 400
9.6.1 Digital Alarm Login .....................................................................................................................400
9.6.2 Analog Alarm Login ....................................................................................................................406
9.6.3 Discrete alarm login ................................................................................................................... 408
9.6.4 Alarm Display Controls ...............................................................................................................410
9.7 Recipe ....................................................................................................................................................413
9.8 Data Transmission ................................................................................................................................. 419
9.9 Global Script ..........................................................................................................................................421
9.10 Init Script ............................................................................................................................................. 422
9.11 Trigger_Script ...................................................................................................................................... 422
9.12 Data forwarding .................................................................................................................................. 425
9.13 Schedule Table .................................................................................................................................... 426
10. Reserved Registers of SKTOOL System ......................................................................................................... 431
10.1 LB .........................................................................................................................................................431
10.2 LW ........................................................................................................................................................439
10.3 RWI ..............................................................................................................................................459
11. Connection among multiple screens and machines .....................................................................................461
11.1 “One machine with multiple screens” connection ............................................................................ 461
11.2 “One screen with multiple machines” connection ............................................................................ 466
11.3 Penetration connection ...................................................................................................................... 469
11.4 Modbus TCP/IP ....................................................................................................................................474
12. Device driver ................................................................................................................................................. 479
12.1 Samkoon device driver ........................................................................................................................484
12.2 AIBUS device driver .............................................................................................................................487
12.3 Allen-Bradley device driver .................................................................................................................490
12.4 CAN Device Driver ...............................................................................................................................499
12.5 Delta device driver .............................................................................................................................. 502
12.6 Emerson device driver ........................................................................................................................ 504
12.7 Fatek device driver ..............................................................................................................................507
12.8 Fuji device driver .................................................................................................................................510
12.9 GE device driver .................................................................................................................................. 512
12.10 HaiWell device driver ........................................................................................................................ 515
12.11 Hitachi device driver ......................................................................................................................... 517
12.12 HollySys device driver ....................................................................................................................... 520
12.13 IDEC device driver ............................................................................................................................. 523
12.14 Inovance device driver ......................................................................................................................526
12.15 Keyence device driver ....................................................................................................................... 528
12.16 Koyo device driver .............................................................................................................................532
12.17 LG device driver ................................................................................................................................ 535
12.18 Matsushita device driver .................................................................................................................. 540
12.19 Mitsubishi device driver ....................................................................................................................543
12.20 Modbus device driver ....................................................................................................................... 552
12.21 Modicon device driver ...................................................................................................................... 556
12.22 Nanda device driver ..........................................................................................................................559
12.23 Omron device driver ......................................................................................................................... 561
5
 12.24 Siemens device driver .......................................................................................................................565
12.25 TaiAn device driver ............................................................................................................................572
12.26 TaiLing device driver ......................................................................................................................... 575
12.27 Techwayson device driver .................................................................................................................577
12.28 Vigor device driver ............................................................................................................................ 580
12.29 Xinje device driver ............................................................................................................................ 582
12.30 Yokogawa device driver .................................................................................................................... 587
12.31 ZhengHang device driver .................................................................................................................. 589
13. Number signals of communication errors between HMI and PLC ...............................................................593
14. Appendix ....................................................................................................................................................... 596
14.1 Export data via U disk ......................................................................................................................... 596
14.2 Picture Format .................................................................................................................................... 598
14.3 Update project via U disk ....................................................................................................................599
14.4 Update recipe via U disk ..................................................................................................................... 600
14.5 Dial switch ........................................................................................................................................... 601
15. Operation case (Supplement) ....................................................................................................................... 603
15.1 A simple macroblock ...........................................................................................................................603
15.2 Free Port Communication Protocol Case ............................................................................................612
15.4 Recipe Case ......................................................................................................................................... 626
15.5 Digital Alarm Login .............................................................................................................................. 629
15.6 Analog Alarm Login ............................................................................................................................. 635
15.7 Usb update PLC program .................................................................................................................... 637
16. Remote .......................................................................................................................................................... 641
16.1 Remote profile .................................................................................................................................... 641
16.2 Remote configuration ......................................................................................................................... 641
16.3 VNC function ....................................................................................................................................... 647
16.4 Remote case ........................................................................................................................................648
17. FAQ & Solutions ............................................................................................................................................ 654
18. Contact .......................................................................................................................................................... 659

6
 1. HMI Specification
Welcome to SKTOOL online help that is meant to help you learn with the application of SKTOOL.

1. Hardware Manual

Introduce hardware structure of Samkoon HMI.

2. Quick Start

Introduce briefly features of the configuration software of Samkoon SK HMI, SKTOOL.

3. Create a New Project

Describe methods and steps for creating a project with SKTOOL.

4. SKTOOL Configuration Guide

Describe applications of other controls in SKTOOL.

5. Script instruction

Describe functions and applications of the SKTOOL script.

6. SKTOOL simulation

Introduce off-line simulation and online simulation functions of SKTOOL.

7. System settings

Describe the HMI settings of system parameters for setting HMI on SKTOOL.

8. Reserved Registers of SKTOOL System

Describe the registers reserved by the HMI system and their functions.

9. Device drivers

Introduce how to connect SK series HMI (Samkoon) and PLC.

10. Contact information

7
 2. Preface

Thank you for choosing the SK series HMI products of Shenzhen Samkoon Technology Corporation Ltd. HMI is
commonly known as the touch screen.

Shenzhen Samkoon Technology Corporation Ltd., concentrated in industrial visual and touchable control
products --- research and development of human-machine interface core technology, is a national high-tech
enterprise that is professional in developing, manufacturing and distributing the most advanced industrial
products. After the accumulation of 12 years, Shenzhen Samkoon Technology, with the profound knowledge,
attracts domestic and global related industries via its strong R & D and innovation capabilities, 100%
completely independent intellectual property rights of core technology without any system basement as well
as cost-effective advantage.

Samkoon SK series human-machine interface (HMI) is mainly applied in the field of industrial control to
achieve visual and touchable control with its excellent performance in various industries, such as textile
machinery, jigger machinery, plastic and rubber machinery, injection molding machinery, packaging
machinery, ultrasonic equipment, electronic welding equipment, printing machinery, food machinery, medical
machinery, woodworking machinery, lifting equipment, intelligent buildings, water treatment equipment,
power systems, rail transit, cola system, petrochemical system, air conditioning industry, tire industry,
measurement and control equipment, teaching instrument, advanced manufacturing system and equipment
and other common equipment control industry. Having occupied the leading position in the domestic market,
it obtains a common reputation by virtue of its excellent product quality, stable software running and
powerful product features.

In view of requirements of various industrial control engineering design and construction, software
development staffs of Samkoon are committed to the development and application of universal configuration
software. In order to meet the world's vast industrial configuration needs, Samkoon launches “SKTOOL” to the
whole China and even the world, a universal version of industrial automation configuration screen editing
software.

SKTOOL is a universal industrial automation configuration software meant for the rapid construction and
production of embedded computer monitoring system. Based on the development and application
experience of configuration software, adopting the advanced computer software technology to construct the
graphical interface of the user running system by employing the window as the unit, it provides users with
solutions to practical project problems through animation display, alarm processing, process control and
report output etc., by collecting and processing filed data. It has a wide range of applications in the field of
automation.

In order to satisfy the users’ needs to use SKTOOL, we have written this manual introducing details about
system structure and features. Users can create own configuration only through simple operation so as to free
users from cumbersome programming, making it handier for more users.

This manual explains how to operate the SK series configuration software SKTOOL. Please read it carefully to
ensure correct applications.

When you cannot find a specific control in the help document, you can open the corresponding control in
SKTOOL; click the “Help” button in the lower right corner of the control to jump to the corresponding help.

Due to the limited level of the author, errors or inappropriate places are inevitable. Criticism and correction
are well welcome. If you need further information about SKTOOL configuration software and more technical
support, please contact us through the following ways. Sincerely at your service.
8
 Shenzhen Samkoon Technology Corporation Ltd.

Address： 3rd Floor, Block 1, Shenzhen software park, Middle Zone of High-tech,

Nanshan District, Shenzhen, China.

Tel：0755-29419068

Fax：0755-29455559

E-Mail：[email protected]

Web：http://www.samkoon.com.cn

9
 3. Hardware Manual

This chapter summarizes the hardware part of SK series HMI, introduces the hardware dimension of products,

including the models of SK-035F, SK-035U, SK-043F, SK-043H, SK-043U,SK-050H, SK-070F, SK-070G, SK-070M,

SK-070H,SK-070F, SK-102H, SK-102C, SK-121F. Users can install them according to relevant dimensions. Refer

to specific parameters for principle and composition of HMI, technical parameters of operating environment

and correct method of wiring.

Contents：

 General

 Mounting dimensions

 HMI Structure

 Technical Parameters

 Wiring

3.1 General

Samkoon SK series HMI is a high-quality human-machine interface product. The entire HMI integrates the CPU
unit, input and output unit, display screen, memory and other module units. It can be widely used in control
systems in all walks of life. The optimized design of software and hardware makes the product meet the
needs of machine control in terms of touch accuracy and accuracy, as well as screen color.

SK series HMI has made great improvements on the previous basis. Compared with before, the startup speed
is faster, the page switching speed is faster, the communication speed is also faster, and the HMI sensitivity is
higher.

The following is the introduction of Samkoon SK series HMI:

1. CPU Unit

Using ARM Cortex_A8 processor, the operation speed is faster, the power consumption is smaller, and the
operation is more stable.

2. Touch panel display unit

Using a four-wire resistive touch panel, the touch precision is accurate, durable, and the touch life is long. The
display is TFT LCD with 260,000 true color display.

10
 3. Communication module

Adopt anti-interference, anti-high voltage, lightning strike design, enhance the accuracy and reliability of
communication, support RS232, 485, 422 communication.

4. Storage unit

The FLASH which is kept after power off is used as ROM, and the access speed is fast.

5. Power Module

Adopt high-precision switching power supply, low power consumption.

6. Chip

What is used is TI's AM3352 chip based on ARM Cortex-A8 core. The chip has the following advantages: First,
the chip is the one with the most complete public information in the history of TI; second, it is the one with
the clearest product positioning, an industrial control MCU; third, it is the only MCU that integrates two
MACs.

USB USB
size user Aspect COM
model Resolution color CAN RJ45 WIFI 4G device programming
(inch) memory ratio number
port interface

SK-035FE 3.5 320×240 262144 12M 4:3 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

SK-035UE 3.5 320×240 262144 12M 4:3 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

SK-043FE 4.3 480×272 262144 12M 16:9 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

SK-043HS 4.3 480×272 262144 12M 16:9 1 0 1 0 0 1 1

SK-043HE 4.3 480×272 262144 12M 16:9 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

SK-043UE 4.3 480×272 262144 12M 16:9 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

SK-043TE 4.3 480×272 262144 12M 16:9 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

COM1:2
32
SK-043QE 4.3 480×272 262144 12M 16:9 0 0 0 0 1 1
COM2:4
22/485

COM1:2
32
COM2:4
SK-043QT 4.3 480×272 262144 12M 16:9 22/485 0 0 0 0 1 1
terminal
:COM2(
485)

11
 SK-050HS 5.0 800×480 262144 12M 16:9 1 0 1 0 0 1 1

SK-050HE 5.0 800×480 262144 12M 16:9 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

SK-057FE 5.7 640×480 262144 12M 4:3 2 0 0 0 0 1 1

SK-070FS 7.0 800×480 262144 12M 16:9 2 0 1 0 0 1 1

SK-070FE 7.0 800×480 262144 12M 16:9 2 0 0 0 0 1 1

SK-070HS 7.0 800×480 262144 12M 16:9 2 0 1 0 0 1 1

SK-070HE 7.0 800×480 262144 12M 16:9 2 0 0 0 0 1 1

SK-070GS 7.0 800×480 262144 12M 16:9 2 0 1 0 0 1 1

SK-070GE 7.0 800×480 262144 12M 16:9 2 0 0 0 0 1 1

SK-070GG 7.0 800×480 262144 12M 16:9 2 1 1 0 1 1 1

SK-070GW 7.0 800×480 262144 12M 16:9 2 1 1 1 0 1 1

SK-070MS 7.0 800×480 262144 12M 16:9 2 0 1 0 0 1 1

SK-070ME 7.0 800×480 262144 12M 16:9 2 0 0 0 0 1 1

COM1:2
32/422/
SK-070MS v3 7.0 800×480 262144 12M 16:9 485 0 1 0 0 1 1
COM2:4
85

COM1:2
32/422/
485
SK-070ME v3 7.0 800×480 262144 12M 16:9 0 0 0 0 1 1
COM2(o
ptional):
485

SK-070MG 7.0 800×480 262144 12M 16:9 2 1 1 0 1 1 1

SK-070MW 7.0 800×480 262144 12M 16:9 2 1 1 1 0 1 1

COM1:2
32
COM2:4
SK-070QT 7.0 800×480 262144 12M 16:9 22/485 0 0 0 0 1 1
terminal
:COM3(
485)

SK-070QS 7.0 800×480 262144 12M 16:9 COM1:2 0 1 0 0 1 1

12
 32
COM2:4
22/485
terminal
:COM3(
485)

SK-102HS 10.2 1024×600 262144 12M 16:9 2 0 1 0 0 1 1

SK-102HE 10.2 1024×600 262144 12M 16:9 2 0 0 0 0 1 1

COM1:2
32/422/
SK-102HS v3 10.2 1024×600 262144 12M 16:9 485 0 1 0 0 1 1
COM2:4
85

COM1:2
32/422/
SK-102HE v3 10.2 1024×600 262144 12M 16:9 485 0 0 0 0 1 1
COM2:4
85

SK-102CS 10.2 1024×600 262144 12M 16:9 2 0 1 0 0 1 1

SK-102CE 10.2 1024×600 262144 12M 16:9 2 0 0 0 0 1 1

SK-102CG 10.2 1024×600 262144 12M 16:9 2 1 1 0 1 1 1

SK-102CW 10.2 1024×600 262144 12M 16:9 2 1 1 1 0 1 1

COM1:2
32
COM2:4
SK-102QT 10.2 1024×600 262144 12M 16:9 22/485 0 0 0 0 1 1
terminal
:COM3(
485)

COM1:2
32
COM2:4
SK-102QS 10.2 1024×600 262144 12M 16:9 22/485 0 1 0 0 1 1
terminal
:COM3(
485)
13
 SK-104FS 10.4 800×600 262144 12M 4:3 2 0 1 0 0 1 1

SK-104FE 10.4 800×600 262144 12M 4:3 2 0 0 0 0 1 1

SK-121FS 12.1 800×600 262144 12M 4:3 2 0 1 0 0 1 1

SK-121FE 12.1 800×600 262144 12M 4:3 2 0 0 0 0 1 1

SK-121FS 2.0 12.1 1024×768 262144 12M 4:3 2 0 1 0 0 1 1

SK-121FE 2.0 12.1 1024×768 262144 12M 4:3 2 0 0 0 0 1 1

COM1:2
32/422/
SK-156QS 15.6 1920×1080 262144 12M 16:9 485 0 1 0 0 1 0
COM2:4
85
Samkoon SK series HMI has the following models:

An example of the model SK-035FE shown in the figure above:

SK: Indicates the SK series of HMI,

035: indicates the size (3.5 inches),

F: Indicates the model number, and there are H, M, G for the model number

E: Indicates that the HMI is an economical type, if it is S, it means that the HMI is a standard type, G means a
model with 4G, and W means a model with WIFI

Samkoon SK series HMI is an open man-machine interface product that provides a standard serial interface to
connect with other devices. The supported communication method is mainly serial communication, which
supports communication with mainstream PLCs on the market today, such as Samkoon FGs, Mitsubishi,
Siemens, Omron, Modicon and so on. At the same time, communication drivers can be developed according
14
to customer requirements.

The configuration software of Samkoon SK series HMI is SKTOOL. SKTOOL provides users with functions such
as screen configuration, drive settings, and controls.

3.2 Mounting dimensions

The following is detailed introduction to mounting dimensions of SK HMI. Please install HMI in accordance
with fixed mounting dimensions to avoid damaging products.

The table below lists mounting dimensions of all SK series products:

SK-035

SK-043

SK-050

SK-057
Model
SK-070

SK-102

SK-104

SK-121

3.2.1 SK-035

Dimensions: 135×89×39
Installation hole size: 123×80

15
SK-035UE model product size (mm)
Dimensions: 96×81×47
Installation hole size: 92×77

3.2.2 SK-043

Dimensions: 150×93×39
16
Installation hole size: 141×84

Product size (mm) of SK-043H model:

Dimensions: 173×95×39
Installation hole size: 163×85

Product size of SK-043U model (mm):

Dimensions: 138x86x38
Installation hole size: 132×80

17
Product size (mm) of SK-043T model:
Dimensions: 139x86x38
Installation hole size: 132×80

Product size (mm) of SK-043Q model:

Dimensions: 139x86×31
18
Installation hole size: 132×80

3.2.3 SK-050

Dimensions: 165×103×39
Installation hole size: 157×95

19
3.2.4 SK-057

Dimensions: 177x140x40
Installation hole size: 163x133

3.2.5 SK-070

Dimensions: 227×153×40
Installation hole size: 210×144

20
Product size (mm) of SK-070H model:
Dimensions: 205×145×38
Installation hole size: 192×138

Product size of SK-070G model (mm):

Dimensions: 225×153×40
Installation hole size: 210×144

Product size (mm) of SK-070M model:

Dimensions: 205×145×40
Installation hole size: 192×138
21
Note: SK-070ME/MS v3 version COM2 only supports 485

Product size (mm) of SK-070Q model:

Dimensions: 203×145×35
Installation hole size: 192×138

22
3.2.6 SK-102

Dimensions: 275×211×44
Installation hole size: 259×201

Product size of SK-102C model (mm):

Dimensions: 274×180×40
Installation hole size: 255×167

Product dimensions of SK-102H v3 model (mm):

Dimensions: 273×211×39
23
Installation hole size: 259×201

Note: SK-102HE/HS v3 version COM2 only supports 485

Product size (mm) of SK-102Q model:

Dimensions: 273×211×44
Installation hole size: 259×201

3.2.7 SK-104

Dimensions: 312×225×55
24
Installation hole size: 285×212

3.2.8 SK-121

Dimensions: 340×256×54
Installation hole size: 330×246

3.3 HMI Structure

The entire structure of Samkoon SK series HMI consists of display area, indicator light, power interface and
communication ports. Color of all models accords to the industrial design standard, with the feature of soiling
resistance so as to work in harsh factory environment, and indicator lights on the front panel meant to check
the equipment status. Power interface and communication ports are located at the bottom of the HMI, which
meets the design criteria.
25
Figure 1-11 shows the structure of HMI.

Figure 1-11 Structure

 Ethernet port: Connection of Ethernet cable

 USB-B: Insert the U disk
 USB-A: Connect with PC; download the configuration file from PC to HMI
 Communication Interface: Communicate with PLC

3.3.1 Power Interface

The power interface of the Samkoon SK series HMI locates in the back panel. With DC24V power supply (±
15%), it shields effectively against interference, enhancing the anti-disturbance performance of the entire
system. Figure 1-12 is a view of power interface:

Figure 1-12 power interface

26
3.3.2 Front panel

Figure 1-13 is a view of front panel, including display screen and indicator lights:

Figure 1-13 SK series front panel

3.3.3 Communication port

Communication ports of HMI are located in the bottom panel. Models of SK-121F ， SK-102H ， SK-102C ，
SK-070G，SK-070M，SK-070H，SK-070F provide two standard serial communication ports while those SK-035F，
SK-035U，SK-043F，SK-043H，SK-043U，SK-050H adopting a 9-core D-type interface for connection to a PLC
or other controller and also for communication, provide one standard serial communication port.

When using a shielded cable, RS232 communication distance shall not go over 15 meters. For connection to
the computer, it has a USB communication interface used for downloading configuration (data transmission).
The transmission rate can be up to 10Mbps. Definition of communication interface differs if it is connected to
different PLC (Please inform us the type of PLC to be connected when ordering for facilitating the distribution
of communication cables).

The model in Figure 1-14 is equipped with double serial and USB-A port, the model in Figure 1-15 is equipped
with single serial and USB-A port:

27
 Figure 1-14 Side panels of SK（double serial）

Figure 1-15 Side panels of SK（single serial）

3.3.4 Pin
Pareto diagram of 9-pin communication port，as figure 1-16：

28
 Figure 1-16 9-pin communication port

This port is used to connect PLC or other controllers with RS232 / RS422 / RS485 communication port

Pin RS232 RS422 RS485

1
2 RX
3 TX
4
5 GND
6 RX-
7 RX+
8 TX- B
9 TX+ A

3.3.5 Running Indicator Lights

Indicator lights of the touch screen consist of three LEDs, including Power (PWR), Run (RUN) and

communications (COM), just as shown in Figure 1-17.

Figure 1-17 SK series Running Indicator Lights

29
PWR turns green when it is powered;

RUN turns yellow if CPU works normally while it lights out if CPU fails;

COM turns yellow when the touch screen is connected to PLC.

Table 1-1 shows the display states of the 3 LED indicator lights on different working state.

Device state Green LED（PWR） Yellow LED（RUN） Yellow LED（COM）

No power supply ○ ○ ○

Power on ●

CPU running ● ●
Communication with
● ● ※
connected device

○：LED is OFF; ●：LED is ON; ※：LED is flashing

Table 1-1

3.4 Technical Parameters

This table lists major technical parameters of SK series products:

SK-035

SK-043

SK-050

Model SK-057

SK-070

SK-102

SK-104

30
 SK-121

 Support up to ten formulas;

 Support up to 512 items of data transmission;

 Support up to 4sets of historical data collectors;

 Support up to ten sets of digital alarm;

 Support up to ten sets of analog alarm;

 Maximum number of screens and controls depends on the memory they occupy.

3.4.1 SK-035
network port none
USB programming interface 1
USB device port none
COM port COM1: RS232, RS422, RS485
Display specifications 3.5" (L:W = 4:3)
Resolution 320×240
brightness 350cd/㎡
color 262,144 colors
Contrast 400 : 1
Backlight life 50,000 hours
touchpad 4-wire high precision touchpad
RAM 128M
Power supply DC24V(±15%)
Power consumption 3W
CE certification Complies with EN50022 and EN50024 standards
FCC Compatibility Complies with FCC, Class A
Pressure test 1000V AC, 1 minute
Protection class IP65 (front panel)
Working temperature 0～55℃ (no freezing)
Working environment humidity 5～95%RH (non-condensing)
shell plastic Engineering plastic ABS+PC

31
Dimensions 135×89×39(mm) 96x81x47(mm)
Hole Size 123×80(mm) 92x77(mm)
weight About 0.2kg

3.4.2 SK-043
network port none none 1 none

USB
programming 1
interface
USB device port 1

COM1:232
COM1:232
COM port COM1:RS232,RS422,RS485 COM2:422/485
COM2:422/485
terminal:COM2(485)

CAN port 1 none

Display
4.3"(L:W = 16:9)
specifications
Resolution 480×272

brightness 400cd/㎡

color 262,144 colors

Contrast 400 : 1

Backlight life 50,000 hours

touchpad 4-wire high precision touchpad

RAM 128M

Power supply DC24V(±15%) (DC12~24V)±15%

Power
3W
consumption
CE certification Complies with EN50022 and EN50024 standards

FCC Compatibility omplies with FCC, Class A

Pressure test 1000V AC,1minute

Protection class IP65（front panel）

Working
0～55℃（no freezing） -20～55℃（nonefreezing）
temperature
Working 5～95%RH（non-condensing）

32
environment
humidity
shell plastic Engineering plasticABS+PC

Dimensions 150×93×39(mm) 173×95×39(mm) 138x86×38(mm) 139x86×31(mm)

Hole Size 141×84(mm) 163×85(mm) 132×80(mm) 132×80(mm)

weight About 0.27kg

3.4.3 SK-050
network port 1 none
USB programming interface 1
USB device port 1
COM port COM1: RS232, RS422, RS485
Display specifications 5.0" (L:W = 16:9)
Resolution 800×480
brightness 350cd/㎡
color 262,144 colors
Contrast 400 : 1
Backlight life 50,000 hours
touchpad 4-wire high precision touchpad
RAM 128M
Power supply DC24V(±15%)
Power consumption 4W
CE certification Complies with EN50022 and EN50024 standards
FCC Compatibility Complies with FCC, Class A
Pressure test 1000V AC, 1 minute
Protection class IP65 (front panel)
Working temperature 0～55℃ (no freezing)
Working environment humidity 5～95%RH (non-condensing)
shell plastic Engineering plastic ABS+PC
Dimensions 165×103×39(mm)
Hole Size 157×95(mm)
weight About 0.33kg

33
3.4.4 SK-057
network port none
USB programming interface 1
USB device port 1
COM port COM1/COM2: RS232, RS422, RS485
Display specifications 5.7" (L:W = 4:3)
Resolution 640×480
brightness 400cd/㎡
color 262,144 colors
Contrast 400 : 1
Backlight life 50,000 hours
touchpad 4-wire high precision touchpad
RAM 128M
Power supply DC24V(±15%)
Power consumption 6W
CE certification Complies with EN50022 and EN50024 standards
FCC Compatibility Complies with FCC, Class A
Pressure test 1000VAC, 1 minute
Protection class IP65 (front panel)
Working temperature 0～55℃ (no freezing)
Working environment humidity 5～95%RH (non-condensing)
shell plastic Engineering plastic ABS+PC
Dimensions 177x140x40
Hole Size 163x133
weight About 0.51kg

3.4.5 SK-070
network port 1 none 1 none 1 none 1

USB programming interface 1

USB device port 1

COM port COM1/COM2:RS232,RS422,RS485

CAN port none 1

34
4G none 1 none

WIFI none none 1

Display specifications 7"(L:W = 16:9)

Resolution 800×480

brightness 450cd/㎡

color 262,144 colors

Contrast 400:1

Backlight life 50,000 小时

touchpad 4-wire high precision touchpad

RAM 128M

Power supply DC24 V (±15%)

Power consumption 5W

CE certification Complies with EN50022 and EN50024 standards

FCC Compatibility omplies with FCC, Class A

Pressure test 1000V AC,1minute

Protection class IP65（front panel）

Working temperature 0～55℃（no freezing）

Working environment humidity 5～95%RH（non-condensing）

shell plastic Engineering plasticABS+PC

Dimensions 227×153×40 mm 203×145×40 mm 225×153×40 mm

Hole Size 210×144 mm 192×138 mm 210×144mm

weight About 0.27kg About 0.7kg

The main technical parameters

SK-070MS SK-070ME
model SK-070MS SK-070ME SK-070MG SK-070MW SK-070QT SK-070QS
v3 v3

network port 1 none 1 none 1

USB
programming 1
interface
USB device
1
port
COM port COM1/COM2:RS232,RS422,RS485 COM1;232/422/485 COM1:232
35
 COM2:485(optional) COM2:422/485
terminal:COM3(485)

CAN port none 1 none

4G none 1 none

WIFI none 1 none

Display
7"(L:W = 16:9)
specifications
Resolution 800×480

brightness 450cd/㎡

color 262,144colors

Contrast 400:1

Backlight life 50,000 hours

touchpad 4-wire high precision touchpad

RAM 128M

Power supply DC24 V (±15%) (DC12~24V)±15%

Power
5W 4W
consumption
CE
Complies with EN50022 and EN50024 standards
certification
FCC
omplies with FCC, Class A
Compatibility
Pressure test 1000V AC,1minute

Protection
IP65（front panel）
class
Working -20 ～ 55℃ （ no
0～55℃（no freezing）
temperature freezing）

Working
environment 5～95%RH（non-condensing）
humidity
shell plastic Engineering plasticABS+PC

Dimensions 205×145×40 mm 203×145×35 mm

Hole Size 192×138 mm

weight About 0.7kg

36
3.4.6 SK-102
network port 1 none 1 none 1 none 1

USB programming
1
interface
USB device port 1

COM1:232
COM port COM1/COM2:RS232,RS422,RS485 COM2:422/485
terminal:COM3(485)

CAN port 0 1 0

4G none 1 none none

WIFI none none 1 none

Display specifications 10.2"(L:W = 16:9)

Resolution 1024×600

brightness 500cd/㎡

color 262,144colors

Contrast 450 : 1

Backlight life 50,000 hours

touchpad 4-wire high precision touchpad

RAM 128M

Power supply DC24V(±15%) (DC12~24V)±15%

Power consumption 7W

CE certification Complies with EN50022 and EN50024 standards

FCC Compatibility omplies with FCC, Class A

Pressure test 1000V AC,1minute

Protection class IP65（front panel）

Working temperature 0～55℃(no freezing) -20～55℃（no freezing）

Working environment
5～95%RH（non-condensing）
humidity
shell plastic Engineering plasticABS+PC

275×211×44
Dimensions 274×180×40(mm) 273×211×39(mm) 273×211×44(mm)
(mm)

Hole Size 259×201(mm) 255×167(mm) 259×201(mm)

weight About 2.2 kg About 1.0 kg

37
3.4.7 SK-104
network port 1 none
USB programming interface 1
USB device port 1
COM port COM1/COM2: RS232, RS422, RS485
Display specifications 10.4" (L:W = 4:3)
Resolution 800×600
brightness 450cd/㎡
color 262,144 colors
Contrast 450 : 1
Backlight life 50,000 hours
touchpad 4-wire high precision touchpad
RAM 128M
Power supply DC24V (±15%)
Power consumption 8W
CE certification Complies with EN50022 and EN50024 standards
FCC Compatibility Complies with FCC, Class A
Pressure test 1000VAC, 1 minute
Protection class IP65 (front panel)
Working temperature 0～55℃ (no freezing)
Working environment humidity 5～95%RH (non-condensing)
shell plastic Engineering plastic ABS+PC
Dimensions 312×225×55mm
Hole Size 285×212mm
weight about 2.2 kg

3.4.8 SK-121
network port 1 none 1 none
USB programming interface 1
USB device port 1
COM port COM1/COM2:RS232,RS422,RS485
Display specifications 12.1" (L:W = 4:3)
38
Resolution 800×600 1024×768
brightness 450cd/㎡
color 262,144 colors
Contrast 450 : 1
Backlight life 50,000 hours
touchpad 4-wire high precision touchpad
RAM 128M
Power supply DC24V(±15%)
Power consumption 8 W.
CE certification Complies with EN50022 and EN50024 standards
FCC Compatibility Complies with FCC, Class A
Pressure test 1000V AC, 1 minute
Protection class IP65 (front panel)
Working temperature -20～65℃ (no freezing)
Working environment humidity 5～95%RH (non-condensing)
shell plastic Engineering plastic ABS+PC
Dimensions 340×256×54(mm)
Hole Size 330×246(mm)
weight about 1.8 kg

3.5 Wiring

Samkoon SK series touch screen requires DC 24V power supply. Figure 1-18 shows the connection of the
touch screen with PLC and PC:

39
 Figure 1-18 Connection diagram of SK series touch screen

USB cables for connection with PC are supplied along with the machine.

40
 4. Quick start of SKTOOL

This chapter introduces installation of SKTOOL configuration software, as well as basic functions and main
characteristics of the software. It also introduces in detail the composition of the software system and the
functions of each component, helping users to understand the overall structure framework of SKTOOL
configuration software. In addition, it introduces the hardware and software requirements of SKTOOL, and
the installation process and working environment of SKTOOL, helping users to learn use of this software and
create application projects.

Contents：

 What's SKTOOL

 System demand

 Set up SKTOOL Software

 Run SKTOOL

 Edit Interface and System Composition

 Basic Operations

4.1 What's SKTOOL

Created for the HMI of Samkoon SK series from Shenzhen Samkoon Technology Co., SKTOOL configuration

software is a development system with an integrated development environment and abundant, advanced

functions. Taking advantage of the Windows system, it shows its simplicity and good interface consistency.

The menu Layout close to that of Windows operating, it is facile to learn and apply, thus engineers can easily

develop their proper projects for the configuration used in the SKTOOL. It features a decrease of time to

develop automation projects and to upgrade, maintain the system, as well as a seamless integration with

third-party applications and productivity enhanced.

Functions and features of SKTOOL are summarized below:

41
1. Screen

Samkoon SK HMI is equipped with 2,6 million display colors, much more bright compared with products of

other manufacturers. Using SKTOOL, engineers can find it more convenient and efficient to design

configuration projects benefitting from bright colors and rich gallery. When downloaded to HMI, the

configuration displays exactly what PC screen shows without image distortion. Meanwhile the operation

interface of SKTOOL is clear and concise, consistent with the design of layout menu of Windows. Taking

advantages of major display configuration software and HMI configuration software, it is available to

configure a high-performance and high-quality engineering document.

2. Complete functions

SKTOOL provides complete functions, including basic drawing shapes, color rendering, text rendering, library

system, animation, bitmaps status, trend display, alarm control, etc.. SKTOOL is even equipped with new

multiple sets of formulas and historical data, controls effects of pressing and so on. All what is needed for

engineers to achieve an expected success is designing programs and configurations according to their own

demand project features.

3. Communication

SKTOOL supports PLC communication drivers of major manufacturers in the world, such as Samkoon, Siemens,

Mitsubishi, Omron, Fujitsu, Panasonic, Schneider, Emerson, etc., covering the very most of them. At the same

time we can customize certain PLC communication drivers. SK-121F，SK-102H，SK-070F，SK-070H from SK

series can simultaneously load two communication drivers.

4. Resource

SKTOOL provides abundant resources where Gallery contains three-dimensional indicator lights,

three-dimensional buttons, motors, three-dimensional tank, three-dimensional pipes, electronic, bar graphs,

etc., and lots of them come with graphic animation, so you can create a vive animation. It supports a custom

gallery and pictures inserted from Windows. SKTOOL also provides rich functions of controls, such as trends

and alarm controls, etc., to meet the needs of various configurations.

42
4.2 System demand

SKTOOL System demand

Content：

 Hardware demand

 Software demand

4.2.1 Software demand

SKTOOL configuration software can run on the following operating systems:

· Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0 or later;

· Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0 or later;

· Microsoft Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP, win7 or later.

SKTOOL will refuse to install if it does not match the above versions of operating systems.

Recommended systems:

Windows XP SP3 version; windows7 32; windows7

There is no difference between Chinese and English operating system.

4.2.2 Hardware demand

Minimum hardware requirements for SKTOOL are:

CPU: Minimum Pentium 3-800MHz;

43
Memory: The memory should be 128MB or above if it is Windows 9X operating system;

System memory 256MB or above if Windows NT operating system;

System memory 256MB or above if Windows 2000 or XP operating system;

Graphics: Windows-compatible system, containing more than 1MB of video memory, compatible with 1024 *

768 resolution, 256-color mode;

Hard: A minimum of 200MB of hard-disk space occupied by SKTOOL configuration software.

Computer with a USB interface;

Mouse with two buttons and keyboard.

SKTOOL can possibly fail to install or run if the configuration of computer is inferior to the above.

Recommended configuration:

CPU: Equivalent to Intel's Pentium 800 or above;

Memory: The memory should be 256MB or above if it is Windows 9X operating system;

System memory 512MB or above if Windows NT operating system;

System memory 512MB or above if Windows 2000 or XP operating system.

Graphics card: Windows-compatible system, containing more than 1MB of video memory, compatible with

1024 * 768 resolution and 65535 color mode.

Hard disk: 200MB or more hard disk space.

4.3 Set up Software

SKTOOL is an application software designed for Microsoft Windows 32-bit system. Before installing the

software, please make sure that the computer software and hardware meet the minimum requirements for

installation.

Execute the installation disk distributed with the product to install SKTOOL. Specific steps are as follows:

44
 Start Windows;

Insert the disc in the appropriate drive;

Contents of the disc are as shown in Figure 2-1, please verify them:

Figure 2-1 Disk content

Please contact us if anything is missing. Thank you for your support and we will serve you sincerely.

After inserting the disk it will automatically pop up SKTOOL setup window (if there is no pop-up window,
directly open the disc, execute the file setup_SK.exe.

After launching the installation, a language selection box pops up as follows. According to user’s needs to

select English or Simplified Chinese to install the configuration software. Now choose to install this "English"

as an example. Select "English", click "OK", and after a few seconds the splash screen will pop up.

In the dialog box, select “Next” to continue the installation or choose “Cancel” to exit the installation program,
as shown in Figure 2-3.

Figure 2-3 Installation Welcome Interface

In the License Agreement dialog box, please choose whether to accept the terms of the software, and then
click Next, as shown in Figure 2-4:

45
 Figure 2-4 License Agreement dialog box

In the Destination Folders dialog box, select the installation folder. The default folder is "C: \ Program File \
SKTOOL6.2\", click Change can select the installation path, then click Next

46
 Figure 2-5 Installation Path Interface

Click Next in Figure 2-5, a selection interface shows where to store the file, the default file or others; click
Next, as shown in Figure 2-6:

Figure 2-6 Installation File Interface

Whether to Create Desktop Shortcut Interface, click Next, as shown in Figure 2-7:

47
 Figure 2-7 Whether to Create Desktop Shortcut Interface

Installation confirmation interface shows three elements: the installation path, files for the installation and
whether to create a shortcut.

Figure 2-8 Installation Affirmation Interface

Installation Interface，Click Cancel to cancel the installation. As shown in Figure 2-9:

48
 Figure 2-9 Installation Interface

Having installed the software, it will install USB driver automatically. As shown in Figure 2-10:

Having installed the driver, it will display Installation Completed Interface; click Finish to end the installation
guide. As shown in Figure 2-11:

49
 Figure 2-11 Installation Completed Interface

After the installation, the SKTOOL6.2 icon will appear on the desktop. As shown in Figure 2-12:

Figure 2-12 desktop shortcut

If installation CD is unavailable, please download the corresponding download package on Samkoon official
website.

4.4 Uninstall Software

To uninstall SKTOOL configuration software, please follow these steps:

The first method:

Step one: Select the Windows "Start" - "Programs" - "SKTOOL", choose Uninstall SKTOOL option.
As Figure 2-13 shows:

50
 Figure 2-13 choose Uninstall SKTOOL option

Step Two: In the pop-up dialog box, left click "Yes" and wait for Windows system to automatically delete
SKTOOL software. When the removal is completed, left click "Finish" button, as shown in Figure 2 -14 and
Figure 2-15:

Figure 2-14 Confirm Uninstalling

51
 Figure 2-15 Uninstall Completed

The second method:

Step One: Select in the Windows "Start" - "Settings" - "Control Panel", go to the Control Panel interface and
then select the "Add / Remove Programs" dialog box, as shown in Figure 2-16

Figure 2-16 Add / Remove Programs

52
Step Two: Select SKTOOL in the left area of the Figure 2-16, click "Change / Remove" button and follow the
second and third step of the first method. Then the system will automatically delete SKTOOL configuration
software and its corresponding components.

4.5 Run SKTOOL

A shortcut will appear on the desktop after the installation of SKTOOL, as shown in Figure 2-17:

Figure 2-17 desktop shortcut

At the same time, program packages are added to the start menu of Windows, as shown in Figure 2-18

Figure 2-18 start menu program icon

53
Double click the shortcut on the desktop or the Start menu, click Run SKTOOL.exe SKTOOL configuration

software program group, and the interface is shown as Figure 2-19:

Figure 2-19 Software running interface

4.6 Edit Interface and System Composition

Simple and user-friendly, editing interface of SKTOOL is easy to operate. This chapter introduces
configuration screens and each function button of this software.

Contents：

 Editing interface of SKTOOL

 System composition of SKTOOL

4.6.1 Edit Interface

54
Created for the HMI of Samkoon SK series from Shenzhen Samkoon Technology Corporation Ltd. SKTOOL

configuration software is a development system with an integrated development environment and abundant,

advanced functions. Taking advantage of the Windows system, it shows its simplicity and good interface

consistency. The menu Layout close to that of Windows operating, it is facile to learn and apply, thus

engineers can easily develop their proper projects for the configuration used in the SKTOOL. Development

interface and functional areas are as shown in Figure 2-27:

Figure 2-27 Interface and areas of the software

 Title Bar: Display the name of SKTOOL version.

 Menu Bar: Show various command menus of SKTOOL that are all drop-down menu.

 Standard Toolbar: Shortcuts to commands button; Display file; open project; new project; restoration
and other function buttons.

 Toolbox: Basic configuration controls designed for engineers to configure; contain function controls and
basic controls.

 Picture area window: Window for engineering staff to configure, edit graphic object.

 Project Manager: Communication connections, parameter settings, picture management, alarm settings,
set formula and tree-form menu set by historical data collector.

 Information output window: Prompts concerning information input, output, error messages and other
tips as engineers conduct configuration editing and compiling.

55
 Standard Status Bar: The current state of configuration, including the mouse coordinate, the control
type, the control coordinate, the control size, etc..

4.6.1.1 menu bar

Editing menu bar of SKTOOL configuration software provides users with an extensive menu options, almost
covering all the engineering tools and editing commands needed. The menu bar includes File menu, Edit
menu, View menu, Draw menu, Object, Screen menu, Setting menu, Download menu, Help menu, Language
selection menu, and also a Right-click menu.

Figure 2-28 Menu bar

File menu

"File" menu supports operations of New project (N), Open Project (O), Close, Save (S), Save As and Quit (Q). If
a certain item shows gray, it indicates that the operation is invalid in the current environment. The method of
opening the file menu is to click "File (F)" on the top left corner of the software, then ejects a pull-down File
menu toolbar.

Figure 2-29 “File” menu

 New Project: shortcut key Ctrl + N; to create a blank project.

 Open Project: shortcut key Ctrl + O; to open a project file created, saved before and suffixed by .skm.

 Close: to close the current project file without exiting SKTOOL configuration software.

 Save: shortcut key Ctrl + S; to save the current configuration file having been modified, the name and
save path of the file are by default as before.

 Save As: to save the current configuration file; available to override the name and save path of the
project.

 Exit: to exit SKTOOL configuration software.

Edit menu
56
"Edit" menu consists of a set of commands used to edit texts, graphics and other content in the screen. There
are Undo, Restore, Cut (T), Copy (C), Multiple copy (D), Paste (P), Delete (D), Select All (A), Align, Layer, Group,
Mirror, Zoom, Grid, Property setting, Find Address, Address Table, Reverse Select, Macro search, Macro
Manager. If a command in the menu bar is gray, it mean in current operation, that command is invalid. To
executive these commands, you should first select the graphic object to be edited, and then choose the
corresponding command in "Edit" menu. But there are in "Edit" menu some commands that are group
commands. If so, a little triangle will show on the right of the command and each command, with a
drop-down menu, has a corresponding shortcut.

 Undo: shortcut key Ctrl + Z; to cancel the last operation command and your recent action.

 Restore: shortcut key Ctrl + Y, to restore the last operation command and your recent action.

 Cut: shortcut key Ctrl + X, to delete your selected graphical objects and copy them into the clipboard
buffer.

 Copy: shortcut key Ctrl + C; to copy the selected graphic object into the paste buffer.

 Multiple copy: to copy a quantity of selected graphical objects in horizontal and vertical directions, and
then the address can be in ascending order of 0-255 units.

 Paste: shortcut key Ctrl + V, to copy and paste buffer graphics objects into the current screen.

 Delete: Del, to remove selected graphical object from the screen.

Figure 2-30 “Edit” menu

 Select: shortcut key Ctrl + A; to select all objects in the current frame of the project.

 Align: to make selected objects (more than two) aligned according to the selected type alignment,
including Top, Bottom, Vertical Center, Left, Right, Horizontal Equal Interval, Vertical Equal Interval,
Make same width, Make same height, Make same width and height.
57
 Layer: to place the selected objects to a different picture level. You can choose Bring To Top, Bring
Forward, Send to Bottom or Send Backward.

 Group: to combine selected objects (more than two) into one control, or split This command can be
selected more than one object (two or more) are combined into a control, an object can also can split a
detachable object or split combined objects into the original object. When using Group, please be sure
not to assembly objects to touch, otherwise objects can’t be touchable after being downloaded to the
touch screen. Layer is recommended if it is necessary to overlay touchable objects.

When using Assemble key, do not assemble objects to be touched, or it can’t be touched after downloading
to the touch screen. Users may use Layer command to superpose touch objects.

 Mirror: to rotate the selected object in accordance with certain rules, horizontally or vertically.

 Zoom: to zoom the current screen in accordance with a certain proportion scale for a more fine control
operation; zoom options are Zoom In, Zoom Fit and Zoom Out.

 Grid: to place or cancel a grid with certain width in the current screen.

 Property settings: to open the Properties window of an object (when one single object is selected) and
that of a screen (when nothing is currently selected).

 Find Address: to find the address you are using.

 Address Table: to open or close the list of addresses being used. Address Table is a list of address used
by objects, easy to find and replace.

 Invert Selection: to select all objects not being chosen in the current screen and objects that are chosen
before are not included.

 Macro Search: to locate calls of the macro in the project; you can optionally specify to search or
manually enter the search.

 Macro Manager: Execute this command to see locations of all macros used; you can choose to display
macros of all the screens or those of a specific screen.

View menu

This menu allows developers to custom their operating interface according to their own habits: decide

whether certain operating window is shown in the current operating environment. The icon √ on the left of

the command means the display of the toolbox on the screen, otherwise it is hidden.

58
Draw menu

The menu is mainly used to draw graphics on the screen. SKTOOL provides straight line (L), Polyline (B), Curve
/ Arc (A), Free Lines, Rectangles (R), Round Rectangle, Ellipse (E), Polygon (Y), Arc, Text (T), Open Library (0),
Build Library (C), Table, Scale. It’s convenient for engineers to change the color, text, size and location of
picture elements created by the Tools menu.

Figure 2-31 “Draw” menu

 Line: Execute this command to draw a straight line in any direction within the current screen.

 Polyline: Execute this command to draw a polyline in any direction within a current picture.

 Curve / Arc: Execute this command to draw a line in the current screen, after finishing drawing by right
button, the radian of drawings can be adjusted as needed.

 Free line: Execute this command to draw a line in the current screen in any direction, lines are drawn
with the movement of the mouse.
59
 Rectangle: Execute this command to draw a rectangle of any size in the current screen.

 Rounded Rectangle: Execute this command to draw any rectangle with rounded corners in the current
screen.

 Ellipse: Execute this command to draw any size of ellipse in the current screen.

 Polygon: Execute this command to draw an arbitrary polygon in the current screen.

 Arc: Execute this command to draw any sector in the current screen.

 Text: Execute this command to create a transparent rectangle where you can enter any text inside.

 Open Library: Execute this command to open the picture library of the system.

 Build Library: Execute this command to convert the image control drawn by user into a file of library; it is
easy to operate next time.

 Table: Execute this command to create a table with required ranks in the current screen.

 Scale: Execute this command to draw a desired scale.

Object menu

"Object" menu consists of a set of touch keys and function keys, including Bit Switch, Word Switch, Screen
Button, Function Button, Multifunction key, Stepping Button, Single Button, Combo Box, Sliders, Numerical
Display, Numerical Input Display, ASCII Display, ASCII Entry, Bit Lamp, Multistate Switch, Multistate Lamp,
Message display, Time Display, Date Display, Weekday Display, Static Picture, Picture Display, GIF Display,
Dynamic Diagram, Dynamic circle, Dynamic Rectangle, Flowing block, Graphics Move, Animation, Bar Graph,
Meter, Arc chart, Trend Chart, XY Trend Chart, Historic trend, Data group, Historical data, Alarm Control,
Alarm Bar, Historical Alarm, Timer, Message Board, Recipe selector, Recipe data display, Keyboard and Qrcode.
'Object' menu corresponds to the third row of the toolbar.

 Bit Switch: Execute this command to create touch keys for performing bit manipulations to the
connected device, including Set ON, Set OFF, Dot and Invert.

 Word switch: Execute this command to set a touch key for performing word bit operation in the current
screen to the connected device, including Add, Subtract, Increasing, Decreasing, Set Constant, Enter
Value, Enter Password.

 More Button: Execute this command to reach the Screen Button, Function Button, Multifunction key,
Stepping Button, Single button, Combo Box and Sliders.

 Numerical Display: This command is used to draw on the current screen a numerical display frame
reflecting numerical value of certain monitored address.

 Numeric Input Display: Execute this command to draw on the current screen a numerical display frame
for data input and digital value display of certain monitored address.

 ASCII Display: Execute this command to draw on the current screen a numerical display frame for ASCII
code.

 ASCII Input Display: This command is used to draw on the current screen a frame of display and output
for the input of ASCII code.

60
 Bit Lamp: Execute this command to create on the current screen a picture monitoring the bit status of
one single connected device.

 Multistate Switch: Execute this command to create multi-state button monitoring numerical value
changes of single address of the connected device according to the change of status.

 Multistate Lamp: You can place a picture in the current screen monitoring the word status of multiple
consecutive device addresses.

Figure 2-32 “Object” menu

 Message Display: Execute this command to create a display control showing pre-configured message on
the current screen.

 Time Display: Execute this command to insert the time control on the screen to show the time.

 Date Display: Execute this command to insert the date control on the screen to display the date.

 Week Display: Execute this command to insert a week control on the current screen to display the week.

 Static Picture: Execute this command to insert a static image of the local hard disk on the current screen.

 Picture Display: This command is used to draw a picture display frame on the current screen for
displaying a plurality of pictures.

61
 GIF Display: Execute this command to draw a picture display frame on the current screen to display a
static or animated image suffixed by .GIF.

 Dynamic Diagram: Execute this command to open the windows of Dynamic Circle, Dynamic Rectangle,
Flowing block, Graphics Move and Animation.

 Bar Graph: Execute this command to insert a columnar control on the current screen to observe the
changes in the numerical value of monitored address according to the rise and fall or the right-left
traverse of the columnar picture.

 Meter: Execute this command to create an instrument on the current screen to monitor the changes of
numerical value of single address of connected device.

 Arc chart: Execute this command to insert a sector control on the current screen for reflecting the
numerical value of monitored address and the reflection area can be presented by Pie FG Color, Pie BG
Color or Bottom Color.

 Chart: Execute this command to open the window of Trend Chart, XY Trend Chart, historical trend and
Data group.

 Historical Data: Execute this command to create a display control on the current screen to show
messages saved by the historical data collector.

 Alarm: Execute this command to open windows of Alarm Control, Alarm Bar and History Alarm.

 Timer: Execute this command to insert a control on the current screen to trigger a particular function
according to time conditions.

 Message Board: Execute this command to insert on the current screen a control where users can write.

 Recipe Selector: Execute this command to insert on the current screen a recipe control that shows all
names of recipes if they exist.

 Recipe Data Display: Execute this command to insert a recipe data display control on the current screen,
which shows all the data of recipes if they are set up.

 Keyboard: Execute this command to insert a keyboard control on the current screen, which can be any
key in the keyboard when custom the keyboard.

 Qrcode: Execute this command to insert a Qrcode control on the screen for user-defined Qrcode; It
should be used in concert with an input control, otherwise the address is invalid and the Qrcode won’t
appear.

Screen menu

"Screen (P)" menu consists of commands applied to screens, including New Screen, Screen Properties (P) and
Delete Screen (D)

Figure 2-33 “Screen” menu

62
 New Screen: Execute this command to create a new screen in the current project.

 Screen Properties: Execute this command to open the properties of the current screen by which you can
set the name and background.

 Delete Screen: Execute this command to delete the current screen.

Please make sure the current screen is the one you want to delete and whether there are needed controls
before operating cause it cannot be undone.

Setting Menu

"Setting (s)" menu contains the following commands: Preference Settings (P), File Protection (M), Macro
Editor, Global Macro, Initialization Macro and Add Customize Keyboard.

Figure 2-34 “Setting” menu

 Preference Setting: Execute this command to open the preference setting window, in which you can
modify the HMI model, display mode, splash screen, screen saver time, flicker frequency, alarm sound,
touch sound, password and settings of initial lever.

 File Protection: Execute this command to open the password setting window of file protection through
which you can set a password to protect the file of the current project is set in the password window.

 Macro Editor: Execute this command to open the macro editor where you can add, modify, compile or
delete a macro.

 Global Macro: Execute this command to open a global macro setting screen, set or modify the global
macros.

 Initialization Macro: Execute this command to open the interface of initialization macros setting to set or
modify initialization macros.

 Add Customize keyboard: Execute this command to open a user-defined keyboard.

63
Please keep in mind the password since password is necessary to open the project configuration file after the

setting. And it is case-sensitive.

Download menu

Applied to compile and download the configuration project, “Download” menu contains eight commands,
which are Compile (C), Off-line Simulation (M), Online simulation, USB download (D), Upload, Pack/Unpack,
Extract project & save as and Extract Remote Simulation Engineering (A). Having connected PC to a touch
screen through USB cable, the configuration project can be downloaded via USB download to the touch
screen, but you have to compile it before downloading.

Figure 2-35 “Download” menu

 Compile: Execute this command to examine configuration projects created by users and prepare for
download operations.

 Off-line Simulation: Execution of this command can invoke the application program of SKTOOL picture
configuration and open the simulation interface. Users can simulate the configuration project running
currently on PC to observe the effect, in order to modify the screen. Please save it Off-line simulation
before you save the user first.

 Online Simulation: This command can be called SKTOOL screen configuration software application, open
the simulation panel, users can simulate engineering currently run on a PC to observe the effect, in
order to correct the picture. When online simulation, you can also use the PC's Ethernet or serial
communication device connected to data communications and communications test status. Please save
it before the online simulation.

 USB Download: Execution of this command can download engineering configuration compiled by
SKTOOL software to HMI through a USB cable equipped with the touch screen. Before downloading,
please compile and save the project.

 Upload: Execute this command to upload the historical data, configuration, recipes, and historical alarm
from the HMI to a PC through a USB cable equipped with the product.

64
 Pack/ Unpack: Execute this command to compress the project configuration into an XXX.skr file, or to
extract the compressed file to the project configuration file .skm.

 Extract Project & Save As: Execute this command to compile the current configuration project to a
binary file named u-disk-prj.bin. Saving it in the U disk, instead of USB cable downloading, can update it
automatically to the HMI.

Extract Remote Simulation Engineering

Option menu

Figure 2-36 “Option” menu

 Find Address: Execute this command to find the address you want and show the using status of the
address on Information Output Window.

 Address Table:Execute this command to look for all contols’ status on all windows or assigned
window.

 Script Table:Execute this command to check the using of the assign macro instruction,and show it on
information ouput window.

 Script Manager:Execute this command to look for all macro instructions’ status on all windows or
assigned window.

 Text batch modification:Execute this command to bitch modify assigned text.

Help menu

"Help" menu can call up the Help documentation and About SKTOOL: its version number and copyright
notice.

Figure 2-37 “Help” menu

65
The help file is shown in Figure 2-37:

Figure 2-38 Help file

Version number and copyright statement of SKTOOL are shown in Figure 2-38:

Figure 2-39 Version number statement

Language Selection menu

The menu can realize Chinese-English switch.

Select "Chinese", and the software is the version of simplified Chinese; or "English", then the English version.

Right click menu

Right click menu is set to facilitate user’s operations, which is consistent with most Windows user's operating
66
habits and styles. Lots of configuration functions can be found here: Attribute, Objects, Library, Cut, Copy,
Multiple copy, Paste, Delete, Select all, Align, Layer, Group, Zoom, Grid, Screen.

Figure 2-40 “Right click” menu

 Attribute: Execute this command to open the properties window of a control (one single object selected)
and the screen (no object selected).

 Object: Execute this command to open all of the object controls in the Object menu.

 Library: Execute this command to open the gallery or generate pictures.

 Cut: Shortcut Ctrl + X; this command can delete your selected graphical objects, and copy them into the
clipboard buffer.

 Copy: Shortcut Ctrl + C; execute this command to copy the graphic object of your choice into the paste
buffer.

 Multiple copy: Execute this command to copy a quantity of selected graphical objects in horizontal and
vertical directions, and then the address can be in ascending order of 0-255 units.

 Paste: shortcut key Ctrl + V, to copy and paste buffer graphics objects into the current screen.

 Delete: Del, execute this command to remove selected graphical object from the screen.

 Select: shortcut key Ctrl + A; execute this command to select all objects in the current frame of the
project.

 Align: Execute this command to make selected objects (more than two) aligned according to the
selected type alignment, including Top, Bottom, Vertical Center, Left, Right, Horizontal Equal Interval,
Vertical Equal Interval, Make same width, Make same height, Make same width and height.

67
 Layer: Execute this command to place the selected objects to a different picture level. You can choose
Bring To Top, Bring Forward, Send to Bottom or Send Backward.

 Group: to combine selected objects (more than two) into one control, or split This command can be
selected more than one object (two or more) are combined into a control, an object can also can split a
detachable object or split combined objects into the original object.

When using Group, please be sure not to assembly objects to touch, otherwise objects can’t be touchable
after being downloaded to the touch screen. Layer is recommended if it is necessary to overlay touchable
objects.

 Zoom: Execute this command to zoom the current screen in accordance with a certain proportion scale
for a more fine control operation; zoom options are Zoom In, Zoom Fit and Zoom Out.

 Grid: Execute this command to create or cancel a grid with certain width on the current screen.

 Screen: Used to create a new screen, open screen property window and delete a screen.

Please make sure the current screen is the one you want to delete and whether there are needed controls
before operating cause it cannot be undone.

4.6.1.2 Standard Toolbar

SKTOOL offers a series of shortcut tool buttons, some of which are tool command buttons while some belong
to editing commands. You can easily get to the needed commands here instead of seeking it in the menu bar
if familiar with these buttons. Each button has tooltips that will appear when the mouse is placed on the
button. SKTOOL provides a total of 35 tool buttons, which will turn gray if the If the operation is invalid in the
current environment.

Figure 2-40 Standard Toolbar

Each command in the toolbar correspond to that in the menu, and their functions are respectively:

68
 New Project: shortcut key Ctrl + N; to create a blank project.

Open Project: shortcut key Ctrl + O; execute this command to open a project file created, saved before

and suffixed by .skm.

New Screen: Execute this command to create a new screen in the current project.

Save: shortcut key Ctrl + S, used to save the current screen configuration that has been changed, with

the file name and directory being the same as the original.

Undo: shortcut key Ctrl + Z; to cancel the last operation command and your recent action.

Redo: shortcut key Ctrl + Y, to restore the last operation command and your recent action.

Cut: shortcut key Ctrl + X, to delete your selected graphical objects and copy them into the clipboard
buffer.

Copy: shortcut key Ctrl + C; to copy the selected graphic object into the paste buffer.

Paste: shortcut key Ctrl + V, to copy and paste buffer graphics objects into the current screen.

Delete: Del, to remove selected graphical object from the screen.

Group: Execute this command to combine several graphic objects you select into one object.

Ungroup: This command can decompose a combination of graphic objects you have selected into the

original graphic objects; it’s the inverse operation of Group.

Flip Horizontal: Execute this command to make a single graphic or multiple graphics pivot horizontally.

Flip Vertical: Execute this command to make a single graphic or multiple graphics pivot vertically.

Grid: Execute this command to create or cancel a grid with certain width on the current screen.

69
 Zoom in: Execute this command to magnify the current screen two times; to continue to enlarge,
please continue to execute the command.

Zoom fit: Execute this command to restore the current screen to the standard size.

Zoom out: Execute this command to shrink the current screen half the size; to continue zooming out,
proceed to execute the command.

Language: Execute this command to select the language you want.

Status drop-down box: If select a control with status, the drop-down box will show the
number of control status; if the number in the box changes, the status of the selected control will switch into
corresponding status.

Screen frames: Execute this command to jump to the page you want to view.

Property settings: Execute this command to get the properties of the selected key.

Locked: Execute the command to lock the key selected on the screen and it can not be moved after
locking.

Unlock: Execute this command to remove the locking of screen buttons.

Find/replace the button:click the button, and the user can find all the usage of the specific register and
can be replaced by the other.

Address Find: Execute this command to find out whether an address is occupied and the search results
are displayed in the "information output window".

Address display: Execute this command to browse the used address of all controls in certain screens
or all the screens.

Find macro: Execute this command to find whether a macro is used; the search result is displayed in
the "information output window".

Macro Manager: Execute this command to see the macro condition of all controls in certain screens or
all the screens.

70
 Click the button to modify the selected control, screen, and text in the window.

Rotate the command, select the control, and use it to rotate freely in the center of the control.

Use this command to open the tool buttons that are not displayed; when the mouse moves away, the
popup disappear.

Off-line simulation: Execute this command to run directly off-line simulation command.

Online simulation: Execute this command to run directly online simulation command.

Compile: Execute this command to check user’s own configuration engineering and get ready to
download.

Download: Execute this command to pop up the download dialog; after connecting the SK HMI to PC,
you can download the configuration project to the touch screen.

Upload: Execute this command to upload historical data, configuration, formulas and alarm history
from a running HMI to a PC via the equipped USB cable.

Layer: Level drop-down box, includes four operating controls: Bring to top, Send to bottom, Bring forward and
Send backward

 Bring To Top (F): Execute this command to shift the graphic object you selected to the top of the screen.
 Send To Bottom: Execute this command to shift the graphic object you selected to the bottom of the
screen.
 Bring Forward: Execute this command to shift the graphic object you selected forward one layer.
 Send Backward (B): Execute this command to shift the graphic object you selected backward one layer.

Size: Size drop-down box includes three operating controls: same width and height, same height, same width.
 Make same width: Use this command to make a group of selected patterning the same width as that
marked by a black point.
 Make same height: Use this command to make a group of selected patterning the same height as that

marked by a black point.

71
 Make same width and height: Use this command to make a group of selected patterning the same width
and height as that marked by a black point.

Alignment: Alignment drop-down box includes a total of eight operating controls: left-aligned, right-aligned,
Vertical Center, Horizontal Center, Top, Bottom, Horizontal Equal Interval and Vertical Equal Interval.

 Left: Shortcut key Ctrl + Left, execute this command to left justify the left edges of selected graphic
objects.
 Right: Shortcut key Ctrl + Right, execute this command to right justify the right edges of selected graphic
objects.
 Top: Shortcut key Ctrl + Up, execute this command to align upper boundaries of selected multiple
graphic objects top.
 Bottom: Shortcut key Ctrl + Down, execute this command to align lower boundaries of selected graphic
objects bottom.
 Horizontal Center: Execute this command to align selected graphics horizontal center.
 Vertical Center: Execute this command to align selected graphics vertical center.
 Horizontal Equal Interval: Execute this command to make two or more controls align horizontally equal
interval.
 Vertical equal interval: Execute this command to make two or more controls align vertically equal
interval.

4.6.1.3 Project Manager

SKTOOL Project Manager window is in the left of configuration software window, below the toolbar. You can
here set the parameters of the touch screen, including Multi-language Settings, Connection, Setting, Screen,
Window, Historical data collector, Alarm landing, Formula, Data transmission and Macro; Connection consists
of Connection 1 and Connection 2 settings which contains HMI parameter settings, HMI state, PLC control,
Clock, File encryption, HMI protection and Variable table.

72
 Figure2-41 Project Manager window

4.6.1.4 Toolbox

SKTOOL Toolbox provides a wealth of tool buttons, some of which are functional control buttons, and some
are basic controls. After being familiar with these buttons, designers can quickly find the commands they
need instead of searching in the menu bar. SKTOOL supports totally 47 function controls and 14 basic
controls.

73
 Figure 2-42 Toolbox functional control buttons

Figure 2-43 Toolbox basic control buttons

Toolbox individual operating controls and menu content corresponding to each other, each button functions
are:

Line: Execute this command to draw a straight line in any direction within the current screen.

Polyline: Execute this command to draw a polyline in any direction within a current picture.

74
 Curve / Arc: Execute this command to draw a line in the current screen, after finishing drawing by
right button, the radian of drawings can be adjusted as needed.

Free line: Execute this command to draw a line in the current screen in any direction, lines are drawn

with the movement of the mouse.

Circle/Ellipse: Execute this command to draw any size of circle or ellipse in the current screen.

Rectangle: Execute this command to draw a rectangle of any size in the current screen.

Rounded Rectangle: Execute this command to draw any rectangle with rounded corners in the current

screen.

Polygon: Execute this command to draw an arbitrary polygon in the current screen.

Arc: Execute this command to draw any sector in the current screen.

Text: Execute this command to create a text input on the screen.

Table: Execute this command to create a table with required ranks in the current screen.

Scale: Execute this command to draw a desired scale.

Open Library: Execute this command to open the picture library of the system.

Bit Switch: Execute this command to create touch keys for performing bit manipulations to the
connected device, including Set ON, Set OFF, Dot and Invert.

Word switch: Execute this command to set a touch key for performing word bit operation in the current
screen to the connected device, including Add, Subtract, Increasing, Decreasing, Set Constant, Enter Value,
Enter Password.

Screen Button: Execute this command to set the switching of screens, including opening screen, open
the previous screen, close and Open screen, Closes screen, Open previous screen and Close open screen.

Function Button: Execute this command to set a certain function control of the operating system,
including Turn off background light, Confirm alarms, Restart HMI, Set screen saver time, Write recipe to PLC,
Read recipe from PLC, Set the date and time, Clear alarm, Switch to previous recipe, Switch to later recipe,

75
Save current recipe, Screenshots, System parameters, User login, Cancel the user login, Touch sound ON / OFF,
Alarm sound ON / OFF, Clear all historical data, Clear alarm history, Unlock HMI protection, read& save recipe,
Spare function, Overload recipe, Switch language, Print screen to printer, Slave devices IP config, DIP switches
1 and 3 feature set.

Stepping button: Execute this command to create a stepping button control in the current screen to

realize the cyclic switching of execution states.

Single button: Execute this command to create a single button control in the current screen; click the
designated state area, then the state will switch accordingly.

Combo box: Execute this command to create a drop-down box button control in the current screen,
for viewing and selection. Once user selects an item, the corresponding value will be written into the control
address of character buffer.

Slider: Execute this command to create a slider analog switch control in the current screen; drag the
slider to change the value of corresponding character register addresses.

Numerical Display: This command is used to draw on the current screen a numerical display frame
reflecting numerical value of certain monitored address.

Numeric Input Display: Execute this command to draw on the current screen a numerical display frame

for data input and digital value display of certain monitored address.

ASCII Display: Execute this command to draw on the current screen a numerical display frame for ASCII
code.

ASCII Input Display: This command is used to draw on the current screen a frame of display and output
for the input of ASCII code.

Bit Lamp: Execute this command to create on the current screen a picture monitoring the bit status of
one single connected device.

Multistate Switch: Execute this command to create multi-state button monitoring numerical value
changes of single address of the connected device according to the change of status.

Multistate Lamp: Place a picture in the current screen to monitor the word status of multiple
consecutive device addresses.

Message Display: Execute this command to display corresponding message information according to
different monitoring address.

76
 Recipe Selector: Execute this command to insert on the current screen a recipe control that shows all
names of recipes and enter, monitor contents of RWIO.

Recipe Data Display: Execute this command to insert a recipe data display control on the current screen,
which shows all the data of recipes if they are set up.

Multi-function button: Execute this command to create a multi-function button in the current screen to
realize multiple functions through one key.

Keyboard: Execute this command to insert a keyboard control on the current screen, which can be any
key in the keyboard when custom the keyboard.

Time Display: Execute this command to insert the time control on the screen to show the time.

Date Display: Execute this command to insert the date control on the screen to display the date.

Week Display: Execute this command to insert a week control on the current screen to display the
week.

Static Picture: Execute this command to insert a static image of the local hard disk on the current
screen.

Picture Display: This command is used to draw a picture display frame on the current screen for
displaying a plurality of pictures.

GIF Display: Execute this command to draw a picture display frame on the current screen to display a

static or animated image suffixed by .GIF.

Dynamic circle: Execute this command to create a dynamic circle in the current screen whose size and
location transform according to the continuous address change of connection device.

Dynamic Rectangle: Execute this command to create a dynamic rectangle in the current screen whose
size and location transform according to the continuous address change of connection device.

Flow block, use this command to create a simulation control of flow state in the current screen.

Graph Move: Execute this command to create a graph display frame in the current screen whose
graphic state and location change according to the continuous address change of connection device.

Animation: Execute this command to create an animation control in the current screen to move the
control.

77
 Meter: Execute this command to create an instrument on the current screen to monitor the changes of
numerical value of single address of connected device.

Arc chart: Execute this command to insert a sector control on the current screen for reflecting the
numerical value of monitored address.

Pie chart: Execute this command to insert a sector control on the current screen for reflecting the
numerical value of monitored address

Bar Graph: Execute this command to insert a columnar control on the current screen to observe the
changes in the numerical value of monitored address according to the rise and fall or the right-left traverse of
the columnar picture.

Trend Chart: Execute this command to create a trend chart control in the current screen to monitor
the change trend of continuous address value of connection device.

XY Trend chart: Execute this command to create a XY trend chart control in the current screen to
monitor the change of two continuous address value of connection device.

Data group display： Execute this command to create a date group display control in the current screen

to display several groups of data in the trend chart.

Historical Trend Chart: Execute this command to create a historical trend chart control in the current
screen to display historical data in the trend chart.

Historical record display: Execute this command to create a historical record display control in the

current screen to display historical data collected.

Historical Alarm display: Execute this command to create a display control of historical alarm record in
the current screen to show historical alarm data.

Alarm display: Execute this command to create an alert box control in the current screen to display the
date, time and message of each alert.

Alarm Bar: Execute this command to create an alert bar in the current screen to scroll display alert
information.

Operation log: Execute this command to create an operation log display frame in the current screen to
display the time, user and contents of the operation.
78
 Timer: Execute this command to create a macro timer in the current screen to control the execution of
the macro.

Message Board: Execute this command to create a message board control in the current screen where
users can write.

QRcode: Execute this command to create a QR code control in the current screen to display character
or number with the help of input control.

Corner flow block: Execute this command to create a Corner flow block control in the current screen to
display the shape and flow speed.

Multi-Window: Execute this command to create a multi-window control in current screen to display the
assigned window.

:Scroll bar control to draw different types of scroll bars for table data browsing

:Pipeline control, and the control of a scroll bar

4.6.2 System Composition

SKTOOL is a configuration editing software of Samkoon HMI. SKTOOL allows engineers to edit the
configuration on the PC, and then download the final configuration and required communication driver to
communication and the required driver to the storage mechanism of the touch screen with a USB cable; HMIs
can be controlled and monitored after being connected to PLCs or other connection devices through
actuators and serial communication ports. Figure 2-44 shows SKTOOL system composition.

Figure 2-44 SKTOOL System Composition

79
4.7 Basic Operations
This chapter describes briefly the mouse usage, shortcut keys and some of the terminology of SKTOOL
software.

Contents：

 Mouse usage and shortcut keys

 SKTOOL's common terms

4.7.1 Mouse usage and shortcut keys

When use the mouse to create configuration screens on the configuration screen editor, the mouse is as
shown in Figure 2-45:

Figure 2-45 Sketch of mouse

The following is several common operations of mouse and their purposes:

◎ Left-click

Press the button on the left side, then release—this is referred to in the book [click], used in the selection
menu, to select the object, choose Tool buttons, edit configuration picture, confirm settings.

◎ Double left click

Press the button twice in rapid succession on the left side—this is referred to [Double] in this book, applied to
attribute setup for existing parts on the screen: screen and window attributes, touch screen connection
properties, set properties; to change settings of Historical data collector, formulas, alarms and other control
options.

◎ Right-click

Press the key on the right, then release —this is referred to in the book [right-click]. Right-click on a part can
open the right drop-down menu, or right-click in the space display the context menu. You can also quit the
editing state, restore the mouse state.

80
◎ Drag

Move the mouse while hold the button-- this is called in the book [drag], using the drag operation can select
multiple items to move parts, mobile pop-up edit windows.

Shapes of the mouse

While edit with SKTOOL configuration software, the shape of the mouse will changes with different
operations to distinguish different types of operation.

The following table 2-1 shows available operations under various shapes of the mouse when edit screens:

Select objects; click tool buttons

+ Paste

Draw graphs

Input text

Enlarge the objet vertically

Enlarge the objet horizontally

Enlarge the objet vertically and horizontally

Readjust

Enlarge the objet vertically and horizontally

Rotate the object

Table 2-1 Shapes of the mouse and their meanings

Shortcut keys

Table 2-2 below lists common shortcut keys. Designers can use these keys to quicken the configuration.

CTRL+C Copy

CTRL+V Paste

CTRL+X Cut

CTRL+F Jump picture

CTRL + drag Copy the selected objet and move it

CTRL + left click Select multiple objects

81
 Move the selected objet left and right, up and
←→↑↓
down

ESC Undo the operation

DEL Delete

Table 2-2 Shortcut keys

4.7.2 Common terms

Table 2-3 below displays some common terms in configuration editing.

Shortened from user’s application system.

Introducing the concept of project means to
make complex computer expertise easier for
Project
the general engineers. Files created in SKTOOL
configuration is suffixed by .skm; it can be
stored in any specified location.

Operating goals and operating environment,

Object collectively called Object, such as windows,
components, data, graphs and objects
Making a window or object operable by a
mouse click is referred to select object, the
Select the object
selected object (including windows) is also
known as the current object
Define, create and edit object in a window
Configuration environment and set its status feature
(attribute) parameter

Name, genre, sate, property and the usage are

Attribute
called collectively Attribute

A set of execution commands. For example,

the system menu "File" menu is used to
dealing with execution commands related to
Menu project documents. SKTOOL menus are all
pull-down menus that can also be divided into
multiple levels, each known as a
sub-sub-menu
Buttons with certain command operations,
Command Button part of which in the toolbar while part of in
the menu bar
Switch the object with bit status display to
Set ON
sate "ON"
Switch the object with bit status display to
Set OFF
sate "OFF"
A transition effect of object from the
Style
foreground to the background color
82
 Memory variables related to the current
Address
object
Communication devices connected to current
Connecting device
project
Control Set of particular functions
Table 2-3 common terms

83
 5. Basic steps of creating a new project

This chapter introduces basic steps of creating a new project.

Contents：

 Create new project

 Set parameters and add graphic object

 Download configuration engineering

 Upload configuration engineering

 Upload historical data record

 Pack/Unpack

5.1 Create new project

This operation is necessary when engineers need to create a new project. Select New Project in the File menu

or New Project button in the tool bar, then SKTOOL will pop up the "New Project dialog box" where you
can decide the name and storage path of the project. Select the corresponding HMI model; click OK to
complete creating a new project and enter into the dialog box of Communication port settings; click Cancel to
exit the dialog box.

1. New project dialog box

Project name:
Path: Storage path of new project file; the default is C: \
Model: Available models for projects:
SK-035FE(320*240 )
SK-035UE(320*240 )

84
 SK-043FE(480*272 )
SK-043FS(480*272 )
SK-043HE(480*272 )
SK-043HS(480*272 )
SK-043UE(480*272 )
SK-050FS(480*272 )
SK-050FE(480*272 )
SK-050HS(800*480 )
SK-050HE(800*480 )
SK-057FE(640*480 )
SK-070FS(800*480 )
SK-070FE(800*480 )
SK-070HS(800*480 )
SK-070HE(800*480 )
SK-070GS(800*480 )
SK-070GE(800*480 )
SK-070GG(800*480 )
SK-070GW(800*480 )
SK-070MS(800*480 )
SK-070ME(800*480 )
SK-070MG(800*480 )
SK-070MW(800*480 )
SK-102FS(800*480 )
SK-102FE(800*480 )
SK-102HS(1024*600)
SK-102HE(1024*600 )
SK-102CS(1024*600 )
SK-102CE(1024*600 )
SK-102CG(1024*600 )
SK-102CW(1024*600 )
SK-121FS(800*600 )
SK-121FE(800*600 )
SK-104FS(800*600 )
SK-104FE(800*600 )

The default model is SK-070FS(800*480), the screen resolution (800 * 480) in the bracket is not displayed in
the dialog box.

85
Display mode: Display direction of the touch screen used by the project. Available models include:
Horizontal: Configuration with the touch screen being horizontal.
Vertical: Configuration with the touch screen being vertical.
The default mode is Horizontal.

Figure 3-1 New project dialog box

The figure above is the New Project dialog box where engineers decide the Name, Path, Model and Display
Mode, then click Next to set communication port.

Specific model is determined by the HMI model that user has.

The name of the new project cannot contain the following characters: \ /: * "<> |?.
The location of the new project cannot contain the following characters: \ /: * "<> |?.

Communication Settings dialog box

Communication settings dialog box is used to set communication parameters of the communication port of
HMI. Only correct communication parameters can ensure normal communication between PLC and touch
screens. The specific communication parameters depend on the model of PLC to be connected.

86
Connection Name: The name of the communication port.
Device Service: Selection of PLC brand and CPU type.
Connection Interface: Select COM port or Ethernet port.
PLC Continuous Address Interval: Set PLC consecutive address space; the default value is recommended.

Figure 3-2 Communication setting dialog box

The figure above is the dialog box of communication port settings where engineers choose corresponding
device services according to types of connection devices. To use Ethernet connection, choose “Direct
Connection(Ethernet)” option in the “Connection Type”.

SK-070F，SK-070H，SK-102H，SK-121F, they all have two communication ports; it’s decided by the used port

when connected to one PLC. SK-035F，SK-043F，SK-043H，SK-050H only have one COM port; just set COM1

port.

Connection ID: Internal parameters cannot be changed!

When you configure the communication properties can also be set in the Project Manager connection, the
other parameters are set in the communication properties.

87
3. Screen Properties settings box

Click “Next” in the Communication settings dialog box to pop up a New Screen dialog box where you can set
the name and the background color of screens. The default name is a screen number; the default background
color is blue. When we create a new picture every time, SKTOOL configuration software will assign a screen
number to the new screen to indicate the screen order of the current project. Numbers start from 1, that is,
the serial number of the first frame 1. No. 5 is the fifth screen. To change the background color of the new
screen, just click the rectangle behind the Background Color to bring up the color selection frame. With more
than two hundred kinds of colors for users to select quickly, SKTOOL software provides the most extensive
selection of color. If you are dissatisfied still, you can click on the lower right of the color selection box to
customize color. In the Custom Colors dialog box, select the basic color first, then color in the middle of the
square area; drag the mouse to adjust the desired color area; you can also type in the right vertical rectangle
and drag the mouse to complete the desired color, at last click OK. You can also enter directly basic color
values.

Figure 3-3 New screen dialog box

88
 Figure 3-4 Color selection dialog box

Engineers can also choose own pictures as the screen background. Click the path icon to find the image path.

Figure 3-5 Set the path of picture

Click OK to complete the above steps, the system will immediately open the screen you just created.
Preparations for new construction are done. Then it’s time to edit own configuration project.

5.2 Set parameters and add graphic object

Parameter settings:

1. You can modify the parameter settings through Preference Setting in the drop-down menu Settings, or
double-click the HMI Parameter Settings in Setting, Project Manager. Then a pop-up dialog box is shown as
Figure 3-6 below:

89
 Figure 3-6 General parameter setting dialog box

 HMI Model: Change the HMI model through this option.

 Display mode: Adjust horizontal or vertical display screen.
 HMI Start Setting
 Splash screen: The start screen of HMI when powered on
 Screen Saver Time: Set screensaver time
 Flicker Frequency: Set the flicker frequency of objects or controls which can blink; you can change the
speed of flicker by inputting directly a value and clicking the spin button.
 Alarm sound: When the alarm occurs, the touch screen can remind users through sound; the right
drop-down menu contains two cases, with or without sound reminder.
 Touch sound: Options in the right drop-down menu can decide Sound reminder or No sound reminder.
 Screensavers screen: Select a screen among the existing screens as screensaver screen; just touch the
screen to return the former screen.
 If Load Screen: If choose this option, the HMI will display the selected loading screen after power-on for
a certain while, and then switch to the splash screen; thus users can give some tips or notes.

 Other settings
 Hide mouse cursor: Whether to display the mouse
 Floating-point settings:
[Standard]: High byte floating point ahead while the low one behind;
[Appoint]: users determine the order.
 Invalid touch: Select the "Use custom labeling", which means touchable controls cannot be touched,
then the picture marking the control chosen by user is untouchable.
 Display controls pressing effect: SKTOOL is newly added pressing effect display. When the pressing
effect is applied, rectangular pressing trace will appear if users touch the control. The pressing trace
color depends on user’s preference. Currently Bit switch, Word switch, Screen button, Function
button, Numeric input and ASCII input controls support this effect. The default is No effect.

Pressing effect of elliptical controls is still a rectangle.

90
 Figure 3-7

2、Set user password

Figure 3-8 Set user password in HMI parameter setting dialog box

This function has 8 sets of user password, each of which has eight levels of password for users to choose.

 The default user level: The current default user class is NULL.
 Allow uploading configuration: If select this option, you can upload the project from HMI to PC;
otherwise it cannot be uploaded.
 Enter the password when uploading: Whether uploading projects requires a password.
 Password when updating configuration through U disk: The password set up, the password is necessary
when you update the HMI configuration projects through U disk.
 Supreme authority password: This password can operate all controls limited by grades.
 Upload: Whether this password enables upload configuration projects from HMI to PC.
 Permissions: Whether this password can perform all limiting operations.

3.Settings of connection to the printer and downloading

Click "Settings of connection between HMI and printer" button, as shown in Figure 3-9:

91
 Figure3-9 Settings of connection between HMI and printer

This page contains parameter settings of connection between the printer and the HMI; users can select
corresponding parameters according to printer models.

Download settings:
 Download mode: Users need to select USB or Ethernet connection to download. If choose the Ethernet,
it’s necessary to set the IP address and port number (IP address and port number are those of the
HMI).
 Clear historical alarm records: Whether to clear the history alarm information before downloading.
 Clear historical data records: Whether to clear the history data information before downloading.
 Download Formula: Whether to download formulas in the current project to the HMI.

Image Downloading Options:

 Keep the original format: Selecting this option means retain the image format unchanged when
downloading.
 Convert to JPG format: Convert all images to JPG format before downloading them into HMI.
(Note: Due to the larger space occupied by BMP format images, it’s suggested to select this option.)

4.Storage location and alarm system, as shown below

92
 Figure 3-10 Saving position and system alarming setting dialog

 Storage location: Location for historical data, historical alarm and screen shots. Provide "Local (FLASH)",
"U disk" three options for users to choose according to their need. The default is Local (FLASH).
 HMI IP: Set touch screen network parameters
 Alarm system
Use the alarm system: Whether to use the system alarm. When an alarm occurs, the alarm system displays
the current alarm information at the top or bottom of each screen according to the options set by users.

Alarm background color, Text color, Font and Font size, these are attributes options of the alarm display
system. Users can set these options as needed.

Way of display: "Always display" refers to the alarm displayed all the time; "Cyclic display" means that alarm
display or disappear within a certain period to achieve the flicker effect.

Position of alarm bar: Choose the position where the alarm bar appears.

5.Other setting,as show below

93
 Figure 3-11 Screensaver unlock need password

 If checking out this section,user need to input this password when unlocking the screensaver.
 Start system time password protection: When you enable this option, you need to properly enter the
password set here when modifying the touch screen system time, allowing the user to modify the touch
screen system time

6. VNC Settings

 Start VNC: Enable VNC Settings

 VNC Port: Set the VNC port number
94
 VNC Password: Set the VNC connection password
The special type touch screen supports remote through the VNC connection touch screen operation, detailed

reference to the “VNC connection”

Change of the screen saver time is not valid until "Screensaver screen" is chosen; just touch the screen of
screensaver to return to the former screen.

5.3 Download configuration engineering

When complete the editing of configuration, you need to click the button on the toolbar or employ the

shortcut Ctrl + S, and then click or execute the Compile command in the Download menu to compile.
During the compilation, the information output window will show the situation in real time. It can’t complete
the compilation if error exists. As shown in Figure 3-11:

Figure 3-11 Prompt of compiling error

You can modify it according to the error hint in the information output window; or you can also double-click
the error, then SKTOOL will automatically find the wrong object as well as select it. So engineers can
double-click on the object to view its property settings, find the reason of the error and make appropriate
alterations. After click the Save button to compile and execute the command again. If there is no error, the
system will pop up a dialog box indicating successful compilation after a while. At last, click OK to finish it, as
shown in Figure 3-12:

Figure 3-12 Information output window

95
It’s necessary to compile before downloading while the step of conservation is required before compiling.
Otherwise it will fail to compile, as shown in Figure 3-11. After compilation, if you modify again, you need to
compile again.

Figure 3-13 Compiling reminder

Finally, execute the command USB in Download menu to download through USB cable; engineers can also
directly select the command Compile + Download in Download menu. The implementation of the operation
brings up the following pop-up dialog box in Figure 3-12:

Figure 3-14 Download dialog

Click to download; the middle progress bar shows the downloading progress. After the downloading, a
pop-up window shows the completion of USB download. Click OK to complete the downloading task, as
shown in Figure 3-15:

96
 Figure 3-15 Downloading completed

The next step is the connection to the PLC to see whether the configuration project runs correctly in HMI.

Ways of connection between HMI and PLC or PC are shown in “Connection” in Hardware handbook.

Do not cut off the power of HMI, PC or USB cable and avoid other operations during the transmission process;
otherwise it will be affected.

Please install the USB drivers before downloading; otherwise the PC will not be connected to HMI. Thus you
will not be able to complete the downloading task.

97
 Figure 3-16 USB driver prompt

The pop-up dialog box, as shown in Figure 3-16, means that the PC does not recognize the HMI. Now it is
necessary to check whether the USB driver has been installed: Connect the PC and power-on HMI, and then
search “Samkoon HMI Tech Corp USB drive” in the Windows "My Computer" - "Properties" - "Hardware" -
"Device Manager" - "Universal Serial Bus controllers". (you can try to pull out the USB cable to check if the
PC can recognize HMI):

Configuration downloading through Ethernet

 Set HMI network parameter settings

Open the dial switch 1 and 3 together; set the IP that can be set accordingly (here set it as
192.168.1.61), gateway, subnet and port. Fix the port to 12345.

 Compile the configuration

If select downloading configuration through Ethernet it is necessary to input IP address and port
number in the input box. IP is that of the downloading target HMI. The IP here is 192.168.1.61 as
above, and the port is fixed to 12345. Then click to restart and download, as shown in Figure 3-18:

98
 Figure 3-18 Configuration downloading through Ethernet

5.4 Upload configuration engineering

SKTOOL software supports uploading configuration program from the HMI to the hard disk. Connect HMI to
PC; select the option of "Upload project file" in the pop-up dialog box, and then the user interface of "Upload
Samdraw file" will appear.

99
 File Path: Click "Browse" to select the file in which you want to save the path.
 Project Name: Set the name of the project.
 Start uploading: Click Upload file to start.

After the success of the uploading, you can choose whether to open the project file.

It needs to extract the uploaded file before open it.

5.5 Upload historical data record

Run SKTOOL configuration software; click .

Selecting “Upload historical data record” means uploading it from HMI to the hard disk.

 File Path: Storage location; select "Browse" to choose your storage path.

 File name: Name of the uploaded file; the uploaded file cannot be opened directly, so a data conversion
tool is necessary. Refer to “Export historical data and alarm to U disk” in the Help appendix for specific
operation.

100
 Click "Upload File" to start uploading while the file is stored in the set location.

 SKTOOL newly add multiple set of historical data, so uploading historical data means, in addition to
uploading historical database file, and also saving each set of historical data in the database file as a .CSV
file. E.g., uploading a file called " temp ", then the according historical database file is named “temp”,
and that of CSV in group 0 is “temp_hisdata0.csv” while that of CSV in group 1 is “temp_hisdata1.csv”,
and so on.

Operation of uploading historical data record is similar to that of uploading formula and project file; the

function of converting files from Samdraw3.3 to SKTOOL is disabled.

5.6 Pack/Unpack

Select “Pack/Unpack” in the Download menu to open the dialog box.

 Zip the file: Zip the SK project file to generate a compressed file suffixed .sip. Used external images will
be also packaged into the compressed file. If users send the compressed file to another computer, the
images still exist after unzipping. However, if only send the configuration project file, you will lose
external images in other computers because the external images could not find the original image path.

 Save Path: Location to store the compressed file; after selecting the save path, Click "Compression", and
then close it when the progress bar reaches 100%.
101
 Unzip the file: Decompress a file-suffixed .skr into that of .skm which can be opened directly in SKTOOL.
 Zip file: Choose files to be extracted.

 Save Path: Location to store the decompressed file suffixed .skm; after selecting the save path, Click
"Zipping", and then close it when the progress bar reaches 100%.

102
 6. SKTOOL Configuration Guide

This chapter introduces in detail the configuration methods using SKTOOL software.

Contents：

 Screen Operations

 Graphics editing commands

 Graphics editing commands

 Basic controls

 Advanced controls

 New controls

 SKTOOL Control Instructions

6.1 Screen Operations

This chapter details screen operations of SKTOOL configuration.

Contents：

 Create a New Screen

 Modify Screen Property

 Delete Screen

 Delete Screen

 Automatic sorting

103
6.1.1 Create a New Screen

“New Screen” command is used to create a new screen in the current project. Steps of creating new screens
are as follows:

1. Select the “New Screen” command in the Screen menu or click the button command or right click

the Screen menu in the project manager, and then select “Add Screen”, as shown in Figure 4 -1 below:

Figure 4-1 New Screen

2. In the pop-up "New Screen" dialog box, set the name and background color of the new screen, then click

OK. The default name of the new screen is a screen number; the default background color is blue, as shown in

Figure 4-2:

Figure 4-2 Add screen dialog

104
Standard: Standard picture

Public: Public screen can be used many times, the control property can only be modified in this picture

Use public: Use a public picture that has been created, but cannot modify the properties of the control in its

public screen

The Background color, Foreground color and Pattern of new screen can be set.

Picture: Picture can be set as background of new screen.

6.1.2 Modify Screen Property

To modify the properties of the screen, including the name, background color, you can perform the following
operations:

Under the circumstances that no object or control is selected (you can click blank space in the current screen),
select the command on the toolbar or left click to select the screen in the project manager, and then
right click on it or you can right click in the screen while on object is selected in order to bring up the context
menu in which you can find "Property" command.

Figure 4-3 Screen Property settings

In the "New Screen" dialog box, set the name of the new screen, background color and public screen settings,

and then click OK. The default new screen name is the screen number.

105
 Default: set the background color, foreground color and style of the screen.

Photo: picture can be used as background.

Public picture settings

Standard screen: create a standard screen.

Set it to a public screen: Create a public screen in which the controls can be used on other screens,

but the properties of the controls can only be modified on that screen.

Use the Common Screen: Use the created Common Screen, but do not modify the properties of the

controls in the Common Screen.

6.1.3 Delete Screen

This command is used to delete the screen in the current project; methods are as follows:

Select " Delete Screen" in the Screen menu; or left-click to choose the screen to be delete in the project
manager, then right click to select “Delete” key; or right click in the blank space in the screen while on object
is selected in order to bring up the context menu in which you can find "Delete" command.

Figure 4-4 Delete screen

Click OK to complete the operation of deleting.

Once deleted, the screen cannot get back! Execute this command with caution.

106
6.1.4 Copy Screen

This command is to copy the screen in current project; methods are as follows:

Left-click on the screen to be copy in the project manager, then right click to bring up the context menu and
select "Copy", after that right click to bring up the context menu and select "Paste"(Figure 4-5).
It would create a new screen copying from the assigned one.

Figure 4-5 Copy and Paste Screen

6.1.5 Automatic sorting

“Automatic sorting” command is used to create a new screen in the current project. Steps of creating new
screens are as follows:

The automatic sort command is used to sort the picture number in the current picture. Methods are as

107
follows:

Select the project manager the picture option by clicking the left mouse button, then right-click menu select

"automatic sorting and automatic sorting will prompt the settings screen, select the automatic sorting

function, click OK, can carry out sorting operation on the current screen (from small to large order).

The specific process is shown in the following picture:

Click the left mouse button options, right-click select "automatic sorting."

Check the automatic sorting, click OK

6.2 Graphics editing commands

This chapter details SKTOOL graphical editing commands.

Contents：

 Group and Ungroup

 Layer

108
  Rotaty

 Align

6.2.1 Group and Ungroup

The combination command is a group command, which is to combine 2 or more graphics objects and controls

in the current screen into a graphic object, a whole, and 2. The contents of the combination can be graphics

drawn by engineering designers, or drawn by themselves, or can be system library graphics, or other controls,

such as alarm controls, trends, and so on. After the combination control, keep the property of the original

control object, which can be modified. The cancellation combination is to decompose the graph which is

combined with the combination command into several original combination elements, and cancel the

combination command is the reverse operation of the combination command.

Methods of Grouping:

First it needs to select multiple graphic objects, and then select the Group command in the Edit menu,
or that command button in the toolbar menu, or right click to bring up the context menu and select "Group"
item, before and after comparison picture is as Figure 4-6:

Figure 4-6before and after group command

Methods of ungrouping:

Select a combined graphic object from grouping, and then select the Ungroup command in the Edit
menu, or in the toolbar menu, or in the context menu; before and after comparison picture is as Figure 4-7:

109
 Figure 4-7before and after ungroup command

Select multiple objects through Ctrl key.

6.2.2 Layer

Layer Command is by group. It is used to adjust the display level of intersecting graphic objects. Each object
SKTOOL has a graphic level; the top of the graphic objects are always displayed on top of the lower graphic
objects, so you can use this command to adjust the hierarchy level. The default level of new graphic object is
higher than that of original. SKTOOL Layer consists a total of four commands: Bring To Top, Bring Forward,
Send to Bottom and Send Backward. To execute this command, you need first select one or more graphical
objects on the current screen, and then select the corresponding command in the Edit menu or toolbar
menu.

 Bring To Top

Execute this command to move the selected graphic object to the uppermost layer of all graphic objects, so
that the selected graphic object will overwrite the intersecting part.

First choose an object in several graphs, and then choose Bring To Top command in Edit menu, or command

button in the toolbar buttons, or call the right click menu and choose Bring To Top command in the Layer
option. See Figure 4-8 for a comparison before and after combination.

110
 Figure 4-8 Contrast before and after Bring To Top

 Send To Bottom

Execute this command to send the selected graphic object to the lowermost layer of all graphic objects, so
that the intersecting part of the selected object will be invisible.

First choose an object in several graphs, and then choose Send To Bottom command in Edit menu, or

command button in the toolbar buttons, or call the right click menu and choose Send To Bottom
command in the Layer option. See Figure 4-9 for a comparison before and after combination.

Figure 4-9 Contrast before and after Send To Bottom

 Bring Forward

Execute this command to bring the selected graphic object one level forward to the intersecting graphic
objects. You first need to select one object in multiple graphic objects, and then select "Bring forward" in the
Edit menu or the toolbar button, or right click to bring up the context menu containing “Bring forward” in the
series commands of Layer.

First choose an object in several graphs, and then choose Bring Forward command in Edit menu, or command

button in the toolbar buttons, or call the right click menu and choose Bring Forward command in the

111
Layer option. See Figure 4-10 for a comparison before and after combination.

Figure 4-10 Contrast before and after Bring Forward

 Send Backward

Execute this command to send the selected graphic object one level backward to the intersecting graphic
objects. You first need to select one object in multiple graphic objects, and then select " Send backward" in
the Edit menu or the toolbar button, or right click to bring up the context menu containing “Send backward”
in the series commands of Layer.

First choose an object in several graphs, and then choose Send Backward command in Edit menu, or

command button in the toolbar buttons, or call the right click menu and choose Send Backward command
in the Layer option. See Figure 4-9 for a comparison before and after combination.

Figure 4-11 Contrast before and after Send Forward

6.2.3 Rotaty

This command is by group. SKTOOL configuration editor software allows engineers to rotate one or more
graphical objects at any angle. Graphic objects that can be rotated to contain straight lines, circles, rectangles,
graphics system library, controls, a combination of graphics, and polygons.

 Flip Horizontal
112
“Flip horizontal” allows engineers to rotate the graphic object (may be a plurality of graphic objects) at 180°by
the axis of vertical center in the horizontal plane after selecting. First select one or more graphical objects,

then click “Flip Horizontal” in the Edit menu "Mirror" or click the Flip Horizontal button in the Tool bar .
When a single graphic object is selected, as shown in Figure 4-12:

Figure 4-12 Contrast before and after Flip Horizontal of single graph object

 Flip Vertical

“Flip Vertical” allow engineers to rotate the graphic object (may be a plurality of graphic objects) at 180°by
the axis of horizontal center in the vertical plane after selecting. First select one or more graphical objects,

then click “Flip Vertical” in the Edit menu "Mirror" or click the Flip Vertical button in the Tool bar .When a
single graphic object is selected, as shown in Figure 4-14:

Figure 4-14 Contrast before and after Flip Vertical of single graph object

 Rotating

Currently, only the following 12 controls are supported to support this function:

Time Display、Date Display、Week Display、Static Picture、GIF Display、Picture、Numentric Display、

Numerical Input、ASCII Display、ASCII Entry、MultiState Lamp、MultiState Switch

After rotation allows engineering design personnel selection controls, to object center as the dot,
memory 360 °.Select an object, click the "rotate" command in the edit menu, or click the rotate button

in the tools button

113
 Rotation process

6.2.4 Align

This command is by group, so is the Size. SKTOOL configuration software allows engineers to operate
alignment and size operation on multiple graphical objects, but only when multiple graphic objects are
selected. Users can hold down the key Ctrl to select the graphic objects to be aligned, or hold down the left
mouse button and drag to delineate them. Alignment operations include a large number of editing
commands: Left, Right, Vertical Center, Horizontal Center, Top, Bottom, Horizontal Equal Interval and Vertical
Equal Interval, Make same width, Make same height, Make same height and width, etc.

 Top
The command of Top Alignment allows engineering designers to top justify multiple graphic objects (no less
than two graphical objects) through clicking “Top” of the Alignment in the Edit menu or through the context
menu. These graphic objects will take the highest edge of graphic objects as a reference, and then make them
at the same level. Before and after comparison diagram of Top Alignment is shown in Figure 4-16:

Figure 4-16 Before and after comparison diagram of Top Alignment

 Bottom
The command of Bottom Alignment allows engineering designers to bottom justify multiple graphic objects
(no less than two graphical objects) through clicking “Bottom” of the Alignment in the Edit menu or through
the context menu. These graphic objects will take the lowest edge of graphic objects as a reference, and then
make them at the same level.

Before and after comparison diagram of Bottom Alignment is shown in Figure 4-17:

114
 Figure 4-17 Before and after comparison diagram of Bottom Alignment

 Vertical Center
The command of Vertical center allows engineering designers to make centers of graphical objects in the
same vertical line (no less than two graphical objects) through clicking “Vertical center” of the Alignment in
the Edit menu or through the context menu. This vertical line is the vertical centerline of the leftmost and
rightmost edges.

Before and after comparison diagram of Vertical Center Alignment is shown in Figure 4-18:

Figure 4-18 Before and after comparison diagram of Vertical Center Alignment

 Left
The command of Left Alignment allows engineering designers to left justify multiple graphic objects (no less
than two graphical objects) through clicking “left” of the Alignment in the Edit menu or through the context
menu. These graphic objects will take the leftmost edge of graphic objects as a reference, and then make the
left sides of each graphic object along the same vertical line.

Before and after comparison diagram of Left Alignment is shown in Figure 4-19:

Figure 4-19 Before and after comparison diagram of Left Alignment

 Right

115
The command of Right Alignment allows engineering designers to right justify multiple graphic objects (no
less than two graphical objects) through clicking “Right” of the Alignment in the Edit menu or through the
context menu. These graphic objects will take the rightmost edge of graphic objects as a reference, and then
make the right sides of each graphic object along the same vertical line.

Before and after comparison diagram of Right Alignment is shown in Figure 4-20:

Figure 4-20 Before and after comparison diagram of Right Alignment

 Make same width

This command allows engineering designers to make multiple graphic objects (no less than two graphical
objects) have the same width through clicking “Make same width” of the Size in the Edit menu or through the
context menu. These graphical objects will be reduced or enlarged by the upper left point while the height
remains unchanged, so that the width of each graphic object is in accordance with what has been selected
before (surrounded by black points while others by green points).

Before and after comparison diagram of Make same width is shown in Figure 4-21:

Figure 4-21 Before and after comparison diagram of Make same width

 Make same height

This command allows engineering designers to make multiple graphic objects (no less than two graphical
objects) have the same height through clicking “Make same height” of the Size in the Edit menu or through
the context menu. These graphical objects will be reduced or enlarged by the upper left point while the width
remains unchanged, so that the height of each graphic object is in accordance with what has been selected
before (surrounded by black points while others by green points).

Before and after comparison diagram of Make same height is shown in Figure 4-22:

116
 Figure 4-22 Before and after comparison diagram of Make same height

 Make same height and width

This command allows engineering designers to make multiple graphic objects (no less than two graphical
objects) have the same height and width through clicking “Make same height and width” of the Size in the
Edit menu or through the context menu. These graphical objects will be reduced or enlarged by the upper left
point, so that the height and width of each graphic object is in accordance with what has been selected
before (surrounded by black points while others by green points).

Before and after comparison diagram of Make same height and width is shown in Figure 4-23:

Figure 4-23 Before and after comparison diagram of Make same height and width

 Horizontal Equal Interval

This command allows engineering designers to make multiple graphic objects (no less than two graphical
objects) have the equal interval horizontally through clicking “Horizontal Equal Interval” of the Alignment in
the Edit menu or through the context menu.

 Vertical Equal Interval

This command allows engineering designers to make multiple graphic objects (no less than two graphical
objects) have the equal interval vertically through clicking “Vertical Equal Interval” of the Alignment in the
Edit menu or through the context menu.

117
Before executing commands of Make same width, same height, same width and height, please make sure
whether the selected objects have been rotated. The height and width of rotated object also rotate with
itself.

6.3 Draw Basic graphics

This chapter details operations of drawing basic graphics with SKTOOL.

Contents：

 Line

 Polyline

 Curve / Arc

 Free Line

 Rectangle

 Rounded Rectangle

 Circle/Ellipse

 Polygon

 Sector

 Text

 Table

 Scale

 Open Library

 Save to Library

 Regular polygon
118
 6.3.1 Line

Select the “Line” command in Draw menu or left-click the line button in the toolbar; move the mouse
in the screen editing window, and it will become a cross; click on the mouse in the view (i.e. screen), then a
line is added.

After the above steps, the transparency of the line, the line type, width, color, the arrow and shape of end will

be set by default while engineers can modify these properties in order to meet the needs of projects. Double

click over a straight line, or click on the Property button in the toolbar after selecting it. Line Property

dialog box will pop up, as shown in Figure 4-24:

Figure 4-24 Line Property dialog box

119
SKTOOL configuration software provides up to 6 straight line types, 30 kinds of line width, and 6 straight-line

end arrows, with the ability to adjust the properties using the pull-down and trimming buttons. To change the

length, direction, and position of the line, select the line first, then move the mouse to the end of the line;

after that hold the left button of the mouse, and drag the mouse to the right position to release the left

button.

6.3.2 Polyline

Select the Polyline command in the Draw menu or click the Polyline command button in the toolbar to
move the mouse to the Edit window. The mouse will change to a cross. That’s when you can draw a polyline
in the Edit window.

Move the mouse to a position where you want to draw the polyline. Click the left mouse button once, then a
small green dot appears in the screen editing window, which is an endpoint of the polyline.

Move the mouse to other positions in the screen, the system will automatically draw a straight line; move the
mouse to change the direction; left click once and the place where you click will appear a small green box.
Here the line from the first endpoint to the first small green rectangle will not move with the mouse. The
mouse can be moved to the next point to change the direction of the polyline, just click the left mouse button.
When you need to complete the drawing of the polyline. Lastly right click to complete drawing the polyline, as
shown in Figure 4-25:

Figure 4-25 Polyline Operation

After finishing the above steps, the transparency, line type, line width, line color, end arrow and end point
shape of the polyline will be set by default. The engineer can modify these attributes to meet the needs of
the project. Move the cursor to the polyline; double-click the left button, or first select the line, and then click

the toolbar property button , a dialog box same as that of Line Property will pop up.
120
You can adjust the properties of the polyline using the pull-down and fine-tune buttons. The SKTOOL
configuration software provides up to 6 straight line types, 30 kinds of line width, and 6 types of end arrow
for polylines. To change the length, direction and position, select the line first, and then move the mouse to
the polyline; hold down the left button of the mouse, after, drag the mouse to the appropriate location to
release the left button.

6.3.3 Curve / Arc

Select the Curve / Arc command in the Draw menu or click the Curve / Arc command button in the
toolbar menu; move the mouse to the Edit window, then the mouse cursor will change to a cross, by now you
can draw a curve / arc in the Edit Window.

Move the mouse to a position where you want to curve. Left click and a small green dot appears in the
window. This position is the start position of the curve / arc.

Move the mouse to other position in the screen, then the system will automatically draw a straight line; after
click the left mouse button and release.

At this time, the mouse cursor is still cross-shaped. Move the mouse to other position in the screen, which is
the end of the curve / arc. Hold down the left button does and move the mouse in the screen to draw the arc;
release the mouse and right click to end the operation. As shown in Figure 4-26:

Figure4-26 Curve Operation

As shown above, the starting point of the graph is a green dot, and the end point is a diamond dot, here the

initial curve / arc has been drawn. Move the mouse to the point and the cursor becomes the shape of ;
hold down the left mouse button, move the mouse to the appropriate location, and then release the mouse
to draw the required curve. You can also move the start or end point to the appropriate position. As shown in
Figure 4-27:

121
 Figure4-27 Curve Operation

After completing the above steps, the transparency, line type, line width, line color, end point and endpoint
shape of the curve / arc will be set by the system default. The engineer can modify these attributes to meet
the requirement of engineering. Move the mouse to the curve / arc; double-click the left button, or select the

curve / arc first, and then click the toolbar property button , a dialog box same as that of Line Property
will pop up.

You can adjust the curve / arc properties through the pull-down and trimming buttons. The SKTOOL
configuration software provides up to 15 line types, 10 kinds of line widths, and 6 straight-line end arrows for
curves / arcs.

6.3.4 Free Line

Select the Free Line command in the Draw menu or click the Free Line command button in the toolbar.
Move the mouse to the Edit window and the cursor will change to a cross shape so now you can draw a free
line in the Edit window.

Move the mouse to a position where you want to free line; click the left mouse button, and a small green dot
will appear in the editing window, which is the starting position of the free line.

Move the mouse to other positions in the screen, and then the system will automatically draw a free line
following the trajectory of the mouse movement; click the left mouse button or right button to complete
drawing the free line. As shown in Figure 4-28:

Figure4-28 Free Line Operation

122
After the above steps, the transparency, line type, line width, line color, end arrow and end point shape of the
free curve will be set by the system default. The engineer can modify these attributes to meet the needs of
the project: Move the cursor to the free curve, double-click the left button; or select the free curve first, and

then click the toolbar property button , a dialog box same as that of Line Property will pop up.

In this case, you can adjust the properties of the free curve through the pull-down and fine-tune buttons. The
SKTOOL configuration software provides up to 6 straight line types, 30 kinds of line width and 6 types of
straight-line end arrows for curves / arcs.

6.3.5 Rectangle

Select the Rectangle command in the Draw menu or click the Rectangle command button in the toolbar
button. Move the mouse to the Edit window and then the cursor will change to a cross; click on the screen to
add a rectangle.

To change the size of the rectangle, select the rectangle first, and then move the mouse to the eight square

green dots which appear in the rectangle. When the mouse cursor becomes or or , click and
hold down the left mouse button to drag the rectangle; release the left mouse button when it reaches the
appropriate location. By now a required rectangular box is drawn.

: Change the width of the rectangle

: Change the height of the rectangle

: Change the width and height of the rectangle

After the above steps, the transparency, line type, line width, line color and fill pattern of the rectangle will be
set by the system default. The engineer can modify these properties to meet the needs of the project. Move
the mouse to the rectangle, double click the left button; or select the rectangle first, and then click the

Property button in the toolbar. The properties of the rectangle will pop up, as shown in Figure 4-29:

123
 Figure 4-29 Rectangle properties dialog

You can adjust the properties of the rectangle through the pull-down and fine-tune buttons. SKTOOL
configuration software provides up to 15 types of borderline, 10 kinds of borderline width and 21 kinds of fill
patterns. As shown in Figure 4-30:

Figure 4-30 An example of a rectangle drawn

6.3.6 Rounded Rectangle

Choose the icon from Basic Graphs in the control bar, move the cursor to editing area, and the cursor
will become a cross.

Click the starting position where the graph will be placed, drag the cursor when pressing the mouse key. At
this moment the system will automatically draw an area along the track of the cursor. Then, click left or right
mouse key to complete drawing of rectangle.

To change the size of the rounded rectangle, select the rectangle first, and then move the mouse to the eight
124
square green dots which appear in the rectangle. When the mouse cursor becomes or or , click
and hold down the left mouse button to drag the rounded rectangle; release the left mouse button when it
reaches the appropriate location. By now a required rounded rectangular box is drawn.
: Change the width of the rounded rectangle
: Change the height of the rounded rectangle
: Change the width and height of the rounded rectangle

After the above steps, the transparency, line type, line width, line color and fill pattern of the rounded
rectangle will be set by the system default. The engineer can modify these properties to meet the needs of
the project. Move the mouse on it, double click the left button; or select the rounded rectangle first, and then

click the Property button in the toolbar. The properties of the rectangle will pop up, as shown in Figure
4-31

Figure 4-31 Rectangle properties dialog

Radius of X curve: Radian of the four corners in X direction.

Radius of Y curve: Radian of the four corners in Y direction.

6.3.7 Circle/Ellipse

Select the Circle/Ellipse command in the Draw menu or left-click the Circle/Ellipse command button in
the toolbar. Move the mouse to the screen editing window, and the mouse cursor will become a cross; click
the left mouse button on the screen to add a circle to the screen.

125
To change the size of an ellipse / circle, select the Circle/Ellipse first, then move the mouse to the 8 square

green dots that appear in the ellipse / circle. When the mouse cursor becomes or or , click and
hold down the left mouse button to an appropriate location; release the left button to complete drawing.

:Change the width of the ellipse / circle

:Change the height of the ellipse / circle

:Change the width and height of the ellipse / circle

After the above steps, the transparency, line type, line width, line color, and fill pattern of the ellipse / circle
will be set by default. The engineer can modify these attributes to meet the needs of the project. Move the
cursor to the ellipse / circle, double click the left button; or select the Circle/Ellipse first, and then click the

Property button in the toolbar, here a dialog box will pop up.

The SKTOOL configuration software provides up to 15 types of border line, 10 kinds of border line width and
21 of fill patterns for ellipse / circle. As shown in Figure 4-32:

Figure4-32 Circle/Ellipse

6.3.8 Polygon

Select the Polygon command in the Draw menu or click the Polygon command button in the toolbar.
Move the mouse to the editting window. The mouse will change to a cross, by now you can draw a polygon in
the screen.

Move the mouse to a position where you want to draw a polygon, left click (or hold down the left button),
then a small green dot will appear in the screen editing window, which is the start point of the polygon.

Move the mouse to another position on the screen. At this time, the system will draw a straight line
automatically. Move the mouse to other appropriate positions; each time you left click, a new side of polygon
is drawed; right click to complete drawing. As shown in Figure 4-33:

126
 Figure 4-33 Polygon Operation

To re-shape a polygon, click it first and it will appear several green dots (depending on the number of sides of
the polygon), indicating that the polygon has been selected; and then move the mouse cursor over one of
them, then it will become the shape ; left click and drag it to the position you prefer, so that you can
change the length and location of two lines connected by this turning point. Release the left button to
complete.

After the above steps, the transparency, line type, line width, line color and fill pattern of the polygon will be
set by the system default. The engineer can modify these attributes to meet the needs of the project. Move
the mouse over the polygon, double click the left mouse button; or select the polygon first, and then click the

Property button in the toolbar, and a dialog box same as that of the rectangle will pop up.

You can adjust the properties of polygon through the pull-down and fine-tuning buttons. SKTOOL
configuration software provides up to 15 types of border line, 10 kinds of border line width and 21 kinds of fill
patterns for the polygon.As shown in Figure 4-34:

Figure 4-34 Polygon

6.3.9 Sector

Select the Sector command in the Draw menu or left-click the Sector command button in the toolbar;
move the mouse to the screen editing window, and then it will become a cross, which means you can draw a
pie chart in the screen now. As shown in Figure 4-35:

127
 Figure 4-35 Sector Operation

Move the mouse to any point of the green dots in the middle of the rectangle, then the mouse will change to

the shape ; change the arc of the sector by moving th emouse.

6.3.10 Text

Select the Text command in the Draw menu or left-click the Text command button in the toolbar to
bring up the Static Text dialog box, as shown in Figure 4-36:

Figure 4-36 Static Text dialog box

 Input the text to be displayed in TEXT in the dialog box above.

128
 The size of the font to be displayed can be changed in the drop-down menu of Font Size. SKTOOL
configuration software provides the font size of 7-56 pound.
 Engineering designers can change the types of fonts to be displayed in the drop-down menu of Font.
SKTOOL configuration software provides almost all font styles.
 Language: For different languages, you can enter different text contents in the text box, different font
and font size are also available..
 In the dialog box, click the left button before the Bold and Italic box to change the fond.
 The configuration software provides kerning and line spacing that vary from 0-15 through the fine-tuning
button next to the kerning and line spacing
 SKTOOL configuration software also provides up to 16 kinds of underline form, and can change the
display position of text contents in the text box; you can also change the fill pattern and transparency.
Text renderings
 When the font property is modified, click OK to close the dialog box. Move the mouse to where you
want to place the text in the editing window; left click the left mouse button, and the system will draw a
rectangle automatically.
 To modify or re-input the text contents, double-click the text unit with the left mouse button, then
re-enter the contents through the keyboard. You can use the Enter to change line feed when using the
keyboard.
 To change the size of the text background box, select the text unit, and then move the mouse to its edge;

when the mouse becomes or or , click and hold down the left mouse button to pull the text
box to the appropriate location; after that release the left mouse button to complete the operation.

Change the width of the text unit background

Change the height of the text unit background

Change the width and height of the text unit

6.3.11 Table

Select the Table command in the Draw menu or the left click the command button in the toolbar, then it
will appear a pop-up table dialog box, as shown in Figure 4-39:

129
 Figure 4-39 table dialog box

In the above dialog box of the above diagram, SKTOOL configuration software provides choices of the
Background Color, Border, Grid and Grid lines. You can decide whether to display vertical or horizontal grid
lines in the Grid option, and the type and color of lines are changeable.

The table is just a graphic object, which means you cannot add text, data or other embedded objects to the
table. The table can only be displayed as a chassis image. To display text, data, and other objects on a table,
you can use Text and numeric display objects to overlay the table and set it to the top layer.

6.3.12 Scale

Select the Table command in the Draw menu or the left click mouse the command button in the toolbar,
then it will appear a pop-up scale dialog box, as shown in Figure 4-41:

130
 Figure 4-41 Scale Dialog Box

In the above dialog box, SKTOOL configuration software provides choices of Color, Axis and Text. The color
item allows to selecting the line color and text color. You can select whether to display the axes in the Axis
item and decide the number of the major scale and sub scale by means of the trimming button or inputting
directly. Decide whether to display text in the text item and change the maximum and minimum values of the
scale, as well as the size of the text and the decimal digits of the scale value.

When you have modified the scale property and click OK to close the dialog box, move the mouse to the
position where you want to display the scale. Click the left mouse button, and then the system will
automatically draw a scale unit. As shown in Figure 4-42:

131
 Figure 4-42 Scale effect diagram

After the above steps, a scale like first from left of the figure above. If you want to change it to the form of the
second left scale in the figure above, first choose the scale, move the mouse to one of the height sides, press

down the left key and drag the mouse when the mouse becomes , and have the mouse pass through the
other height side. To change the scale to the right forms in the figure above, perform Free Rotation for it.

6.3.13 Open Library

Select the Open Library command in the Draw menu or click the Open Library command button in the
toolbar to bring up the Library List dialog box, as shown in Figure 4-43:

Figure 4-43 Library List

The system library of SKTOOL configuration editing software provides a wealth of graphic objects for
132
engineering designers. SKTOOL version is even added a large number of buttons, indicators and other graphic
objects. Engineering designers can find a proper graphic object so as to save configuration design time.

Engineers only need to click on the category of the desired graphic object in the system library on the left.
Click the + sign to open the sub-category, and then select the desired graphic. Click to select the image, and
then click on the screen to add graphic object when the cursor become a cross.

Modify: After selecting the graphic you want to modify, click the "Modify" button at the bottom left of the
dialog box, as shown in Figure 4-44:

Figure 4-44 Library Modify Dialog Box

In the interface shown as Figure 4-44, select the graphic, and then execute the "Split" function on the tool bar
to split the control. Then you can choose one part to modify: settings of foreground color, background color,
pattern and others can be found on the right of the dialog box. After modification, execute the Group
command to the entire split graphics, and then click the "Save".

133
 Figure 4-45 dialog box is displayed

In the "Custom" list on the left of the dialog box, select the location where you want to save the modified
graphics (e.g. "Library 2") and click "Save". If you want to view the newly saved graphics, click the Open Lib

command button in the pop-up dialog box, then select the "Custom Library".

6.3.14 Extern Picture

In SKTOOL, pictures can be inserted into a number of controls; take the Static Picture as an example:

134
 Picture:
Library: Built-in gallery in the system, as shown below:

File: Consist of External File and System File. External pictures can be those in computer and system pictures

are available for downloading on the official website, which will be saved in the folder of Extern_Pic under the

installation directory.

135
When "System" is selected, the following dialog box will pop up:

These images are stored in the Extern_Pic folder under the installation directory, as shown below:

The Extern_Pic folder contains two folders: the share_picture folder and system_picture folder, corresponding
respectively to the shared picture and system picture in the Gallery image list, of which those in the
system_picture folder are system pictures that cannot be added or modified. While those in the share_picture
folder can, as shown in the following figure:

136
You can add other folders by yourself in the share_picture folder or change the name of an existing folder (for
example, Motor), meanwhile the name of share_picture folder cannot be changed. In addition, it is possible
to add or delete pictures of the Motor folder.

The compressed file of share_picture.rar is available for downloading on the official website; unzip it into PC
after downloading; follow the above method to add it into the share_picture folder, and then it is also
available in the Gallery image list.

6.3.15 Regular polygon

Select the straight line command in the drawing menu or the left mouse button to click the regular polygon

command button in the toolbox button to set the number of corners, transparency, line type, line

width, line color of the regular polygon. To meet the needs of the project. After setting, click the button to

determine the button, the screen appears cross mark, move to the appropriate position of the screen, click

the left, you can draw a regular polygon. You can click the right polygon control through the left mouse button,

right-click the "property" or click the toolbar button , set the property, modify the regular polygon.

137
 Figure 4-24 Line Property dialog box

The size of the control can be freely stretched by controlling the green dots around it.

6.4 SKTOOL Advanced controls

This chapter introduces the advanced controls.

Contents：

 GIF Display

 Trend Chart

 XY Trend Chart

138
  Dynamic Circle

 Dynamic Rectangle

 Alarm Display

 Alarm Bar

 Historical Alarm Display

 Graphics Move

 Meter

 Historical Data Display

 Message Display

 Flowing block

 Timers

 Multi-function keys

 Pie show

6.4.1 GIF Display

GIF display can be used to display images of GIF format, supporting 32 frames at most. Operation is as
follows:

Click the GIF icon on the toolbar to display the dialog box shown in Figure 4-48.

139
 Figure 4-48 GIF Display dialog box

After setting the properties, click "OK", then the mouse cursor will become a cross in the editing area; left
click to draw a rectangle and the control is added to the view area (i.e. the screen)

Select the "Advanced" page to display its properties.

Figure 4-49 GIF Display "Advanced" page

Controlled By bit: When "Controlled by Bit" is selected, if the "Active Status" selected is 1, the GIF picture will
be animated if and only if the value of "Control bit" is 1, otherwise it is a static display; when the selected
"Active Status" is 0, the GIF picture will be animated if and only if the value of "Control Bit" is 0, otherwise it
will be displayed statically.

140
The "Visibility" page can refer to the use of "Bit Button" control.

6.4.2 Trend Chart

Trend Chart Summary:

Dynamic, variable and continuous value displayed continuously.

Draw reference curves of multiple data. Take the time as the horizontal axis, the value as the vertical
coordinate axis, in order to accurately and intuitively judge the change tendency of a certain value during a
period of time.

Up to 8 polylines can be displayed (line graph).

Add properties of the trend graph:

1. Select the Trend Chart icon in the toolbar, and then the properties dialog box appears, as shown in
Figure 4-50

Figure 4-50 Trend Chart Common Dialog Box

141
 Background color: Change the background color of the trend chart. The effect cannot be visible until you
click OK.
 Data type: 7 kinds of data types are available for users.
 Read trigger bit: Only when the "Read trigger bit address" value is 1, the curve will move around.
 Curve number: Number of lines, up to 8.
 Automatic reset of Read trigger bit: Whe the read address detected is 1, then the address value is
assigned to 0.
 Number of data points per group: Number of data shown on the X-axis.
 Sampling time: The sampling frequency.
 Read Address: The value of the Read Address represents the value of each line on the Y-axis direction.
According to different data group numbers and data types, Read address can be read continuously
(16-bit data) or read at intervals (32-bit data).
 Variable data points: According to the address value of the dynamic set of "Number of data points per
group." When this option is selected, the address value default is the initial value of the Number of Data
Points per Group.
Detection
 Enabled: Indicate whether the detection line (reference line) is enabled.
 Color: The color of the detection line (reference line).
 Detection address: Write the value of the current detection line (reference line) to the detection address.
 Whether to use the control address: Set the dynamic minimum and maximum value of the Y-axis
according to the value of control address value. This address occupies five consecutive address shifts;
change the minimum and maximum value of the Y-axis scale referencing the X-axis and also whether to
restore the initial state.

Address
Control Register Address Control object
Offset
0 16 bits less than the minimum value
1 16 bits more than the minimum value
2 16 bits less than the maximum value
3 16 bits more than the maximum value
Whether to restore the initial state of the maximum and minimum values. The address
4
value of 1 indicates a dynamic change, otherwise the initial value is restored

The control address can only use the internal address, and the minimum and maximum value account for two

142
consecutive word address respectively.
E.g.:
When the 16-bit data type is selected and the number of data groups is 8, it is assumed that the user-input
address is LW3, and 8 groups of address values are continuously read out,
LW3: The value of line1
LW4: The value of line 2
LW5: The value of line 3
LW6: The value of line 4
LW7: The value of line 5
LW8: The value of line 6
LW9: The value of line 7
LW10: The value of line 8

Therefore, when the user selects 16-bit data and sets the number of N groups of data, the user can read out
the address values of the N groups in succession according to the address rules of different PLC models.

When the 32-bit data type is selected and the number of data groups is 5, it is assumed that the user-input
address is LW3. Then, 5 sets of address values are read out consecutively.
LW3: The value of line 1
LW5: The value of line 2
LW7: The value of pen 3
LW9: The value of line 4
LW11: The value of line 5

Therefore, when select 32-bit data and set the N-group data group number, user can read out the N group
address value by adding 2 to the address value (at interval) according to the address rules of different PLC
models.

 Direction:
 Left to right: The line moves from the left.
 Right to left: The line moves from the right.
 Background color: The color of the line
 Clear Trigger Bit: Clear the current status of all lines when the address value changes from 0 to 1 (rising
edge). The line remains the same when the address value changes from 1 to 0 (falling edge) or has no
change,.

The "Line" page of the Trend Chart is shown in Figure 4-51: This page allows user to set the maximum value,

143
minimum value, style and color of each pen.

Figure 4-51 Trend Chart Pen Dialog Box

The data type in the General page determines that of the maximum and minimum values here.

For example, if the maximum or minimum value is a floating-point number, user must first select 32-bit
floating-point number in the Data Type in the General page. Otherwise, an error will occur when user clicks
"OK".

3. The "XY Axis" page of the trend chart is shown in Figure 4-52:

144
 Figure 4-52 Trend Chart XY Axis Dialog Box

 X-axis
 Display scale: whether to display the X-axis scale.
 Show Y-axis grid: Whether to display Y-axis grid.
 Axis / Scale Color: Change the color of the X-axis / scale.
 Grid Color: Change the X-axis grid color.
 Main sub-scale: X-axis main scale.
 Sub-scale: X-axis times the number of times.
Display Scale Indicates whether the X-axis scale is displayed.

 Y-axis
 Display Scale: Whether to display the Y-axis scale.
 Show X-axis grid: Whether to display the X-axis grid.
 Axis / Scale Color: This option changes the color of the Y-axis / scale.
 Grid Color: This option changes the Y-axis grid color.
 Major scale division: Numbers of Y-axis major scale.
 Sub-scale division: Numbers of Y-axis sub-scale.
 Show Marks: Whether to display the Y-axis scale mark.
 Font Size: Change the font size of the Y-axis scale.
 Minimum: The minimum value of the Y-axis scale.
 Max: The maximum value of the Y-axis scale.
 Total: Display the maximum digital number of the data.
145
 Decimal Place: The maximum digital number that can be displayed after the decimal point.

The "Visibility" page can refer to that of "Bit Button" control.

6.4.3 XY Trend Chart

XY Trend Chart Overview:

Dynamic, variable and continuous value displayed continuously.

You can draw multiple data reference curve, and take two consecutive register address value as the horizontal
axis and vertical axis coordinates respectively, in order to observe the change rules accurately and intuitively.

Up to 8 polylines can be displayed (line graph).

Operations of adding XY Trends and modifying XY Trend Properties are similar to those of Trend Chart. Users

can refer to the "Trend Chart" page operation. Open the icon

Open the XY Trend Property dialog box; refer to the "Trend Chart" property settings. It should be noted that
each line in the Trend Chart represents the value of consecutive addresses starting from the write address,
and each in the XY Trend Chart represents the value of two consecutive addresses starting at the write
address.

XY Trend Chart Application:

Color: The color of the detection line (reference line).

Detection address: Write the value of the current detection line (reference line) to the detection address.

For example, if 16-bit data type is selected and the number of data groups is 4, assuming that the user-input
address is LW3, 8 sets of address values are continuously read,
LW3: Line1 Value of the X-axis
LW4: Line 1 Value of the Y-axis
LW5: Line 2 Value of the X-axis

146
LW6: Line 2 Value of the Y-axis
LW7: Line 3 Value of the X-axis
LW8: Line 3 Value of the Y-axis
LW9: Line 4 Value of the X-axis
LW10: Line 4 Value of the Y-axis

The addresses to be read are LW3-LW10, with 8 groups of addresses. Therefore, when select the 16-bit data
and sets N groups of data, you can read values of 2 * N groups of address consecutively according to address
rules of different PLC models.

When the 32-bit data type is selected and the number of data groups is 3, assuming that the user-input
address is LW3, then it needs to read address values of 12 data groups in succession.
LW3: Line 1 Value of the X-axis
LW5: Line 1 Value of the Y-axis
LW7: Line 2 Value of the X-axis
LW9: Line 2 Value of the Y-axis
LW11: Line 3 Value of the X-axis
LW13: Pen 3 Value of the Y-axis

The addresses to be read are LW3-LW14, with 12 sets of address. Therefore, when select 32-bit data and set N
groups of data, you can read address values of 2 * N data by plus 2 at interval according to address rules of
different PLC models.

6.4.4 Historical Trend Chart

 Historical Trend Chart Overview: This trend chart is used in conjunction with the“Historical Data
Collector” in the Project Manager. That is, it shows the value of the data in the "Historical Data
Collector".

 Overview of XY Trend chart:

Dynamic, continuous display of variable continuous value.

Display multiple data reference curves. Take the time as the X axis, the address nvalue as the Y axis, in
order to judge the change tendency of certain address value accurately and intuitively during a period of
time.

147
 Up to 8 polylines can be displayed (line graph).

 Add the trend chart and modify its properties:

1.Select the trend icon in the toolbar, the Historical Trend Property dialog box appears, as shown in
Figure 4-53:

Figure 4-53 Historical Trend General page dialog box

148
 Background color: Change the background color of the trend chart. Change the color cannot directly see
the color change, click "OK" to apply.
 Transparency: Change the transparency of the background color.
 Data Collection: The default is that from "Historical data collector " in Project Manager. SKTOOL adds
multiple sets of historical data, so developers who choose this option can choose which set of historical
data to use. As shown below:

 Number of curves: Number of line to be displayed; up to 8.

 Background Color: The color of the pen (or line) trace.
 Use control address: Whether to use control address. It is occupied by 28 address offset, used to control
the display of each line, maximum value, minimum value, the end time of control, control time period
(minutes), the maximum value when only the Y axis is displayed, the minimum value when only the Y
axis is displayed whether to display the Y axis and the restoration to the initial state.

Address offset Controlled object by control register address

0 Set the total number of lines displayed
1 Whether to display 1
2 Whether to display 2
3 Whether to display 3
4 Whether to display 4
5 Whether to display 5
6 Whether to display 6
7 Whether to display 7
8 Whether to display 8
9 Maximum value in Y axis
10
11 Minimum value in Y axis
12
149
 When set to 0, use the default maximum and minimum
13 value; when set to 1, set the upper and lower limits
14 Query start time
15
16
17
18
19
20 Query end time
21
22
23
24
25
When set to 1, enter the query, and return to the state 0
26 automatically
When set to 1, recover to new state and return to the
27 state 0 automatically

Whether to display the control address:

Detection
 Enabled: Indicate whether the detection line (reference line) is enabled.
 Color: The color of the detection line (reference line).
 Detection address: Write the corresponding value to of the current detection line (reference line) to the
detection address register.

2. The "Line" page of the historical trend graph is shown in Figure 4-54.

Figure 4-54 Pen tab of Historical trend

150
This page allows setting the maximum, minimum, pattern, and color of each line. The data source is the
“Historical Data Collector” in the Project Manager. Each line can correspond to a different data source.

3. The "XY Axis" page of the historical trend chart is shown in Figure 4-55.

Figure 4-55 XY Axis tab of Historical Trend

X-axis
 Display scale: whether to display the X-axis scale.
 Show Y-axis grid: Whether to display Y-axis grid.
 Axis / Scale Color: Change the color of the X-axis / scale.
 Grid Color: Change the X-axis grid color.
 Main sub-scale: X-axis main scale.
 Sub-scale: X-axis times the number of times.
 Display time: Set the time format and font size of time.
 Time Range: Set the time range displayed on the trend graph.

Y-axis
 Display Scale: Whether to display the Y-axis scale.
 Show X-axis grid: Whether to display the X-axis grid.
 Axis / Scale Color: This option changes the color of the Y-axis / scale.
 Grid Color: This option changes the Y-axis grid color.
 Major scale division: Numbers of Y-axis major scale.
 Sub-scale division: Numbers of Y-axis sub-scale.
 Show Marks: Whether to display the Y-axis scale mark.
 Font Size: Change the font size of the Y-axis scale.
 Minimum: The minimum value of the Y-axis scale.
 Max: The maximum value of the Y-axis scale.
 Total: Display the maximum digital number of the data.
 Decimal Place: The maximum digital number that can be displayed after the decimal point.
 Display the multi-axis: whether to display multiple axes.
151
The "Visibility" page can refer to that of "Bit Button" control.

6.4.5 Dynamic Circle

A dynamic circle is designed to move and change size following certain track by placing a graphic on the
screen. This movement and size change are determined by the value of the monitor address. Add the
dynamic graphic control and modify the dynamic graphic control properties:

Select the dynamic circle icon in the toolbar, as shown in Figure 4-56:

Figure 4-56 Dynamic circle dialog

Three sets of address values to be read by Dynamic circle represent the x-coordinate, y coordinates of the
circle center and the radius of the circle respectively. The way that these three groups of addresses are read
depends on the data type selected by the user.
 Control:
 Center: The circle moves according to the position of the center of the circle while the radius does not
change.
 Radius: Just the radius size changes and the position do not move.
 Center & Radius: Not only the radius changes with the value of monitor address representing the radius
of the circle, but also the center does with the value of monitor address representing the x, y
coordinates of the circle center.
152
 Transparency: Change the transparency of the background color of a dynamic circle.

 Solid:
When user does not select Solid, the circle is an empty circle, which means it has no background color.
Otherwise the circle is a solid circle; the background color option can change its background color.
 Border
When user does not select this option, the circle does not have change lines, and the color of the edge line
cannot be changed. Otherwise, the circle is a circle with an edge line; border color options can change the
color of the edge line.

Here's an example:
Select the data type "16-bit integer", and read out three sets of data consecutively to represent respectively
the x coordinate, y coordinate of the center and circle radius, according to address formats of different PLC
models. When the monitor address is LW1, it needs to read the address values of LW1, LW2 and LW3. The
meaning of the address is as follows:
The value of LW1 is the x-coordinate of the circle center.
The value of LW2 is the y-coordinate of the circle center.
The value of LW3 is the radius of the circle.

Regardless of whether selecting Center or Radius in the control option, HMI will still read three groups of
address, which represent the same meaning. For example, you select the radius in the control bar, and the
monitoring address is LW1, then still only value of LW3 can control the radius of the circle.

When select the data type "32-bit integer" and the monitor address is LW1, then it needs to read the address
values of LW1, LW2 and LW3. The meaning of the address is as follows:
The value of LW1 is the x-coordinate of the circle center.
The value of LW3 is the y-coordinate of the circle center.
The value of LW5 is the radius of the circle.

When select the data type "32-bit integer", according to the address format of different PLC models, you can
add 2 at interval to the monitor address to acquire three sets of data representing the x coordinate, y
coordinate of the circle center and the radius respectively.

153
The "Visibility" page can refer to that of "Bit Button" control.

6.4.6 Dynamic Rectangle

Functions of dynamic rectangle are similar to those of dynamic circle. They all reflect the dynamic state of
monitor address in real time by changing the position or size of the graph according to different values of
monitor address.

Select the dynamic rectangle icon in the toolbar to bring up the dialog box shown in Figure 4-57.

Figure 4-57 Dynamic rectangle dialog

The dynamic rectangle needs to read four sets of address values to represent the x-coordinate, y-coordinate,
the width and height of the rectangle respectively. The way to read these four groups of addresses depends
on the data type selected by the user.
 Line Width: Change the width of the line
 Type: Select the right angle, clipped angle or round angle.
 Note: Type is effectual only when the line width value is greater than 1.

Here's an example:
When select the data type "16-bit integer" and the monitor address is LW1, then it needs to read the four sets
of address values LW1, LW2, LW3, and LW4. Their meanings are as follows:
The value of LW1 is the x coordinate of the rectangular;
The value of LW2 is the y coordinate of the rectangular;
154
The value of LW3 is the width of the rectangle;
The value of LW4 is the height of the rectangle.

In the case of selecting a data type of "16-bit integer", the user can read four sets of data consecutively
according to the address specification format of the PLC model to represent the rectangle x coordinate,
rectangle y coordinate, and rectangle width and height, respectively.

When the user selects the data type as "32-bit integer" and the address LW1 is monitored, the address values
of LW1, LW3, LW5, and LW7 need to be read out.
The value of LW1 is the rectangular x coordinate;
The value of LW3 is the rectangular y coordinate;
The value of LW5 is the width of the rectangle;
The value of LW7 is the height of the rectangle;

When select the data type "32-bit integer", according to the address format of different PLC models, you can
add 2 at interval to the monitor address to acquire four sets of data representing the x coordinate, y
coordinate, the width and the height of the rectangle respectively.

Control:
 Position: The height and width of the rectangle does not change with the corresponding monitor address
value while the position of the rectangle changes with the monitor address value that represents the x
and y coordinates of the rectangle.
 Size: The height and width of the rectangle changes with the following four fixed points, but the position
of the rectangle does not change.
 Upper Left: The fixed point of the rectangle is in the upper left corner, and it extends in the direction of
the lower right corner.
 Upper right: The fixed point of the rectangle is in the upper right corner, and it extends in the direction of
the lower left corner.
 Lower Left: The fixed point of the rectangle is in the lower left corner, and it extends in the direction of
the upper right corner.
 Lower right: The fixed point of the rectangle in the lower right corner, and it extends in the direction to
the upper left corner.

Solid:
When user does not select Solid, the rectangle is an empty one, which means it has no background color.
Otherwise it is a solid rectangle; the background color option can change its background color.

155
Border:
When user does not select this option, the rectangle does not have change lines, and the color of the edge
line cannot be changed. Otherwise, it is a rectangle with an edge line; border color options can change the
color of the edge line.

Transparency: Change the transparency of the background color of the dynamic rectangle control.

The "Visibility" page can refer to that of "Bit Button" control.

6.4.7 Alarm Display

The alarm control can display the alarm information of the current equipment (digital alarm and analog
alarm). Before executing this control, it needs to configure the alarm settings. For ways to configure the alarm
settings please refer to "Alarm setting".

Alarm control can store real-time alarm information, and the number of alarms is determined when you
configure. SKTOOL supports digital alarm messages.

Add the alarm control:

Select the Alarm Control in the Tool menu or select the Alarm Control button in the Toolbar menu; a
dialog box shown in Figure 4-58 will pop up:

Figure 4-58 Alarm Display dialog

In the alarm display box, you can set the color and size of the display frame, color and type of the grid line,
the time, date and color of alarm title. In the Text box, you can also set font size, text color and number of
rows of alarm message. If the row is set to 5, then the alarm control can display 5 alarm messages, when
there is a new alarm occurs, the earlier one will be replaced.

Language: For different languages, font size, font, time, date and message content can be different while the
background color and text color are the same as the first language.

Select all alarm contents: When this option is selected, the alarm display control will display all the alarm
information of "Digital Alarm" and "Analog Alarm" in the Project Manager; otherwise, only the specified
alarm information selected by the user is displayed.

Set up and press OK, then left click to draw the alarm control on the screen, as shown in Figure 4-59:

156
 Figure 4-59 Alarm Display control

 The size of the alarm control is determined by the rows and the maximum character size of the alarm.
The mouse can resize it and the position of the alarm control can be adjusted.
 When the number of alarm content branches is bigger than that of rows, the alarm control will
automatically add one row, as well as a scroll bar to display the alarm information.
 The "Visibility" page can refer to that of "Bit Button" control.

6.4.8 Alarm Bar

The Alarm Bar is used to display the current alarm. It differs from the alarm control in that the dynamic alarm
bar displays the current alarm contents (digital alarm contents and analog alarm contents) in the form of text
scroll.

If there are three alarms, then the dynamic alarm bar will scroll display the first alarm, then the second, and
finally the third, and so on. The scroll direction is from right to left, but it is also possible to make it from left
to right; the speed, movement interval time and alarm sound are determined by the properties; please refer
to "Alarm display setting". Before using the dynamic alarm bar, you need to configure the alarm settings; refer
to "Alarm settings" please.

Add the alarm bar:

Select the Alarm Bar or the button in the Tool menu, as shown in Figure 4-60:

157
 Figure 4-60 Alarm Bar dialog

Select all alarm contents: When this option is selected, the alarm display control will display all the alarm
information of "Digital Alarm" and "Analog Alarm" in the Project Manager; otherwise, only the specified
alarm information selected by the user will be displayed.
 Language: For different languages, font size, font, time, date and message content can be different, and
the background color and text color are the same as the first language.
 Font: Change the font format of the alarm contents
 Font Size: Change the font size of the alarm content
 Text color: Change the font color of the alarm contents
 Speed: Movement step of the alarm contents.
 Direction: The moving direction of the alarm content ( Left or Right)
 Alarm Sort: The order of the alarm display.

 Application of shape, border color, background color, foreground color and pattern can be used with
reference to "Bit Button" control.
 When calling off-line simulation, the font size should be "16x16"; in other case, you can choose
otherwise.
 The "Visibility" page can refer to that of "Bit Button" control.

158
6.4.9 Historical Alarm Display

The main function of Historical Alarm is to display the previous alarm contents; the operation is the same
with that of Alarm display, which means you can refer to the application of the alarm display. Click the

Historical Alarm button on the toolbar to bring up the following dialog box:

Control address: Write 1 to the address register 0 in address offset (16-bit integer, same to 1 to 12); write the
start time to address register 1~ 6 in address offset, and write the end time to that of address register 7 ~ 12.
Then the historical alarm display will show the data content during the corresponding time. If you want to
display all the historical alarm information, write 0 to the 0 address register. Address Register 13 in Address
Offset is not useful for now.

This address occupies 12 consecutive address offset; the meaning of each is as follows:

Address offset Controlled object by control register address

159
 1 represents display the data between the start and end time; 0 means all data is
0 displayed.
1 Start time (Year)
2 Start Time (Month)
3 Start time (Day)
4 4Start Time (Hour)
5 Start Time (Min)
6 Start Time (Second)
7 End time (Year)
8 End Time (Month)
9 End Time (Day)
10 End Time (Hour)
11 End time (Minute)
12 End time (Second)

 Clear alarm date: Cancel the alarm date

 Clear alarm time: Clear the alarm time
 Clear alarm: The line used to remove the alarm is marked with this color
 Statistics alarms: Enable alarm count,which is showed after the alarm message.
 Cumulative time: Enable alarm cumulative time,which is showed after the alarm message.
 OK: Indicate the alarm with this color when it is generated

The basic operation can refer to "Alarm Display" control.

The "Visibility" page can refer to that of "Bit Button" control.

6.4.10 Graphic Move

With the Graphic Move control, a gallery graphic or graphic file can move in a specific direction on the screen,
and the associated variable value can trigger the movement of the variables. This control can produce an
animation effect on the screen.

Add the Graphic Move control and modify its properties:

Select the Graphic Move command button in the toolbar; set the properties in the dialog box that pops
up; and click OK, as shown in Figure 4-61:

160
 Figure 4-61 Graphic Move dialog

 Picture selection:
On the Pictures page, select a picture as a moving graphic that can also be customized.

 Monitor Address:
The monitor address for the change of graphic movement occupies three addresses, which correspond to the
change of the total status, the value of the X axis and the value of the Y axis. For example, assuming the
monitor address is LW1 in the internal memory and the data type is 16 Bit. (Then the value change of LW1,
LW2, LW3 can directly control the total number of state, X-axis movement and Y-axis movement); if data type
is 32 Bit, then the monitor address of Total Status is LW1, that of X coordinate is LW3 and that of Y coordinate
is LW5.

 Method: The following examples all take LW1 in internal storage address as the monitoring address, and
the data type is 16 Bit. As an example to illustrate each movement:

 Move horizontally along the X axis: The graph moves only horizontally, but not vertically; can not move
below the lower limit of X axis or above the upper limit of X axis. The total number of status is the value
of the monitor address LW1 and that of the LW2 represents the X coordinate.
 Move vertically along the Y axis: The graph moves only vertically, but not horizontally; can not move
below the lower limit of Y axis or above the upper limit of Y axis. The total number of status is the value
of the monitor address LW1 and that of the LW2 represents the Y coordinate.
 Move horizontally and vertically in the mean time: The graph can move in horizontal and vertical
direction at the same time; it cannot move below the lower limit of X-axis or above the upper limit of
161
 X-axis horizontally, or move below the lower limit of Y axis or above the upper limit of Y axis vertically.
The total number of status is the value of the monitor address LW1, that of the LW2 represents the X
coordinate and that of LW3 represents the coordinate.
 Move horizontally and proportionally along the X axis: The graph moves only horizontally, but not
vertically; can not move below the lower limit of X axis or above the upper limit of X axis. The total
number of status is the value of the monitor address LW1 and that of the LW2 represents the X
coordinate.
 Move vertically and proportionally along the Y axis: The graph moves only vertically, but not horizontally;
can not move below the lower limit of Y axis or above the upper limit of Y axis. The total number of
status is the value of the monitor address LW1 and that of the LW2 represents the X coordinate.
 Move anti-horizontally and proportionally along the X axis: The graph moves only horizontally, but not
vertically; can not move below the lower limit of X axis or above the upper limit of X axis. The total
number of status is the value of the monitor address LW1 and that of the LW2 represents the X
coordinate.
 Move anti-vertically and proportionally along the Y axis: The graph moves only vertically, but not
horizontally; can not move below the lower limit of Y axis or above the upper limit of Y axis. The total
number of status is the value of the monitor address LW1 and that of the LW2 represents the X
coordinate.

 As for "Text" and "Picture" pages, refer to those of the "Multi-state Indicator" control.
 The "Visibility" page can refer to that of "Bit Button" control.
 Changing the values of the last two monitor address can control the position of the graphic movement.
 The maximum coordinate of the X / Y-axis is the maximum value of the screen.

6.4.11 Meter

The Meter control can display the current value of associated variables through a pointer; generally the

control is a semicircle or circular, which can be a visual representation of the actual situation of the variable.

Add the Meter control and modify the properties:

1. Select the Meter control icon in the toolbar; then the dialog box shown in Figure 4-62 appears:

162
 Figure 4-62 Meter dialog

 Needle color: Change the color of the pointer

 Needle holder Color: Change the color of the needle holder
 Background color: Change the background color of the dial
 Pointer type: Fine Line, Thick Line, Diamond and Triangle
 Background transparency: Whether the control is transparent
 Direction: Select the clockwise or counterclockwise direction
 Data type: Choose different data types according to their needs
 Monitor address: Read the address value that is shown by the pointer on the dial plate.
 Maximum: Set the maximum value that cannot be exceeded by the monitor address value
 Minimum: Set the minimum value that the monitor address value cannot be lower than

2. Click the Scale tab to set the scale properties, as shown in Figure 4-63:

163
 Figure 4-63 Scale tab of Meter

On this page, you can set the color, number of major scale, number of sub-scale, and whether to display the
axis and whether to display the scale marks, etc.

3. In the screen editing area click to draw the control. The effect diagram of the Meter control is as follows:

Figure 4-64 Meter control

4. Select the Meter control graph, move the mouse on the 8 small green dots to modify its size; double-click

to re-modify the control properties.

Meter control has a fixed aspect ratio; if modify the size, its length and width enlarge or shrink in the
164
meantime.

The "Visibility" page can refer to that of "Bit Button" control.

6.4.12 Historical Data Display

In actual use, data generated from PLC or other connected equipment can update at any time, such as alarm.
When it comes to historical data, we can use the historical data collector in SKTOOL to observe the historical
data.

SKTOOL provides the function of historical data collector. Enter the Historical data collector dialog box in the
project manager. If it is a new project, right-click the "Historical data collector" to add one; then double-click
"Historical Data Collector 0" to enter the setting dialog box. For details, refer to properties of "History Data
Collector" in Chapter 6.

Click on the historical data display button on the toolbar, and the following dialog box will pop up:

Figure 4-65 Historical Data Display dialog

General:
 Foreground Color: Click the color inside the box to change the foreground color of the display.
 Border Color: Click the color inside the box to change the color of the display border.
165
 Title: Choose the font size, font style, background color, text color and whether to display the date and
time. Language settings can be referred to that of "Alarm Display".
 Data: Choose the font size, color, and the maximum line numbers to be displayed.

Control address:
Write 1 to the address register 0 in address offset (16-bit integer, same to 1 to 12); write the start time to
address register 1~ 6 in address offset; write the end time to that of address register 7 ~ 12; at last write 1 to
address register 13. Then the historical data display will show the data content during the corresponding time.
The address register 13 will automatically reset. If you want to display all the historical alarm information,
write 0 to the address register 0.
This address occupies 40 offset addresses consecutively. Meaning of each address is as follows:

Address offset Controlled object by control register address

1 represents display the data between the start and end time; 0 means all data is
0 displayed.
1 Start time (Year); one word
2 Start Time (Month); one word
3 Start time (Day); one word
4 Start Time (Hour); one word
5 Start Time (Min); one word
6 Start Time (Second); one word
7 End time (Year); one word
8 End Time (Month); one word
9 End Time (Day); one word
10 End Time (Hour); one word
11 End time (Minute); one word
12 End time (Second); one word
Value is from 0 to 1 and the value of address offset 0 is 1, then display the data during
13 particular period; reset automatically; one word
14 All the historical data information between the start time and end time; double word

Data:

166
Group number: SKTOOL provides multi-group historical data to choose.

Historical data display operation: When display historical data through control addresses, the configuration
process is as follows 4-65-1:

Figure 4-65-1

In this operation, input 1 to “Display all data”, 1 to “Inquire”, then the data collector will display all the
historical data during the start time and the end time period. As shown in Figure 4-65-2

167
 Figure 4-65-2

Input 1 to “Display all data”, set the start time as 2016-7-11 3: 30: 4 and the end time as 2016-7-11 14: 39: 4;
when the input value of “Inquire” is 1, then it only displays the data during this time.

The "Visibility" page can refer to that of "Bit Button" control.

6.4.13 Message Display

Message Display functions similarly to the multi-state indicator, except that the total states number of the

message display control increases, which is up to 128. This control icon on the toolbar is , click it to bring
up a dialog box as shown in Figure 4-66:

168
 Figure 4-66 Message Display General page

The Text page of Message Display is shown in Figure 4-67：

Figure 4-67 Text page of Message Display

The language, font, font size and color settings can refer to those of the multi-state indicator control.
 Cursors: This item has three options-- Not move, Left and Right.
 Not move: The current state of text is static.

169
 Left: Text in the current state moves to the left at the speed (assumed to be n) set by user by n pixel
value.
 Right: Text in the current state moves to the right at the speed (assumed to be n) set by user by n pixel
value.

As for Property settings, you can refer to the attributes of "Multi-state indicator" control.

6.4.14 Flow block

A Flow block is an animated graphic that simulates the liquid flow within a pipe. Whether to flow is
determined by the state of the trigger address. When the trigger address is 1, the Flow block is in flow state;

while when it is 0, the Flow block is in static state. User determines the flow speed. Click the button on
the toolbar, and then it appears a pop-up dialog box, as shown below:

Color: Set the color properties of the Flow block.

 Flow block foreground color: Click on the color button to set the Flow block foreground color;
 Flow block background color: Click on the color button to set the Flow block background color;
 Pipe foreground color: Click on the color button to set its foreground color;
 Pipe background color: Click on the color button to set the pipe background color;
 Border color: Click on the button to set the border color of the Flow block control;
170
 Pattern: Click to select the pattern of the Flow block control; the default setting is “Solid”.
 Trigger Address: Address that controls the stationary or moving of the Flow block; when the value of the
address is 1, then the block flows.
 Attribute: Set the properties of the Flow block, such as direction, flow speed.
 Display Mode: Select "Horizontal" to make the Flow block move horizontally; and select "Vertical” to
make it flow vertically.
 Direction: When the display mode is “Horizontal”, you can choose "Left" or "Right"; in another case, "Up"
or "Down".
 Change the flow direction to the opposite direction through the trigger address: when the "Trigger
address" value is equal to that of the "Effective status" set by user, the Flow direction is switched to the
opposite.

For example, If "Flow direction" is "Left”, this option is selected, "Trigger address" is LB2, and "Effective
Status" is set to 1, then when the value of LB2 is 1, the direction of the Flow block is switched to "Right",
while when the value of LB2 is 0, the direction is changed back to the original "Left".
 Blocks: The number of Flow units, ranging from 1 to 30;
 No Border: When this attribute is selected, the edges of the Flow block are hidden.
 Flow rate: Either fixed rate or dynamic rate
 Fixed Flow rate: High, Middle or Low.
 Dynamic Flow rate: The Flow rate is determined by the value of a word address, which should be
between 1 and 10. When the value is 0, the Flow block does not flow; When the value is 1, the Flow
block flows at the lowest rate; When the value is 10, the Flow block flows at the highest rate.

The "Visibility" page can refer to that of "Bit Button" control.

6.4.15 Timer

A timer is a control that uses a time condition to trigger a specific function. In the SKTOOL configuration

software, the timer is used as a control triggered by macro commands. Click on the toolbar or
double-click on an existing property timer will enter the timer settings page:

171
Control mode: Select the execution mode of macro instruction as always execute or address trigger.
1. "Always execute" is always executed according to the set frequency, and if always trigger is selected,
the selected macro command will always be executed according to the set frequency when the project
is running;
2. "Address trigger" means that when the value of the specified bit is 1, it will execute at the set
frequency, and when the value of the specified bit is 0, the macro command will not be executed.
Address: When the execution mode of "address trigger" is selected, the address input field will
appear, and the bit that controls the execution of this macro instruction will be input here. When
the value of this bit is 1, the macro instruction is executed.
Execution frequency: The frequency at which the selected macro is executed. The range is 0.1~
60S.
Execution times: The number of times the selected macro instruction is executed. When the
number of times is 0, the macro instruction will be executed all the time.
Function type: Select the type of function to be executed. The function controlled by timer in
HMITOOL configuration software is macro instruction.
Name: The name of the macro to be executed. The timer cannot be set when there is no macro
command.
Use the timer variable to enable the timer function. The timer variable combination contains the following six
variables:

timer variable variable type narrative

Input bit (IN) bit variable timer master switch
Timing Bit (TI) bit variable Set ON when timing starts
Output bit (Q) bit variable Set to ON when the setting is complete
Preset Time (PT) word variable word Set timer time value
Elapsed time (ET) word variable word Displays the current elapsed time of the timer
reset bit (R) bit variable Reset the current timer elapsed time (ET) to zero

set up

Select the function button timer on the toolbox, select the timer in the function selection, this will pop up the
timer setting, the default mode is the delay switch (ON), the default time unit is 0.1 seconds, the interface is
as follows:
172
You can see the property setting address options at the bottom right, input bit, export bit, timing bit, preset
time, enable elapsed time, and press the OK button after setting each property correctly, you can add a new
one to the current configuration screen. The "Timer" component, as shown in the following figure:

The following is an introduction to the functions of each mode:

1. Delay switch (ON)

Input bit (IN): Input bit (IN): the main switch of the timer;
Timing bit (TI): Set ON when timing starts.
Output bit (Q): Set to ON after the timing is over.
Preset Time (PT): Set the timer time value.
Elapsed time (ET): Displays the current elapsed time of the timer.

173
As shown in FIG:
1) When the input bit IN is set to ON, the timing bit TI is turned on, the elapsed time ET starts to count, and
the output bit Q remains OFF.
2) When the counted time ET is equal to the preset time PT, the counted bit TI is turned off, and the output
bit Q is turned on at the same time.
3) When the input bit IN is set to OFF, the output bit Q is turned off, and the elapsed time ET returns to zero.
4) When the input bit IN is set to ON, the timing bit TI is turned on, the elapsed time ET starts to count, and
the output bit Q remains OFF.
5) When the input bit IN is set to OFF before the counted time ET reaches the value of the preset time PT, the
counted time TI will be turned off and the counted time ET will return to zero.

2. Delay switch (OFF)

Input bit (IN): The main switch of the timer.

Timing bit (TI): Set ON when timing starts.
Output bit (Q): Set to ON after the timing is over.
Preset Time (PT): Set the timer time value.
Elapsed time (ET): Displays the current elapsed time of the timer.

As shown in FIG:

1) When the input bit IN is set to ON, the timing bit TI remains OFF, the output bit Q is turned on, and the
elapsed time ET returns to zero.

2) When the input bit IN is set to OFF, the timing bit TI is turned on, the output bit Q remains ON, and the
counted time ET starts to count.

3) When the elapsed time ET is equal to the preset time PT, the output bit Q and the timing bit TI are turned
off.

4) When the input bit IN is set to ON, the timing bit TI remains OFF, the output bit Q is turned on, and the
elapsed time returns to zero.

5) When the input bit IN is set to OFF, the timing bit TI is turned on, the output bit Q remains ON, and the
counted time ET starts to count.

6) When the input bit IN is set to ON before the counted time ET reaches the value of the preset time PT, the

174
counted bit TI is turned off, while the output bit Q remains ON, and the counted time ET returns to zero.

3.Pulse start switch

Input bit (IN): Main switch of the timer.

Timing bit (TI): Set ON when timing starts.
Output bit (Q): Set to ON after the timing is over.
Preset Time (PT): Set the timer time value.
Elapsed time (ET): Displays the current elapsed time of the timer.

As shown in FIG:

1) When the input bit IN is set to ON, the timing bit TI and the output bit Q are turned on at the same time,
and the counted time ET starts to count.

2) When the elapsed time ET is equal to the preset time PT, the output bit Q and the timer bit TI are turned
off at the same time (because the input bit IN has been set to OFF while counting, the elapsed time ET will be
automatically reset to zero).

3) When the input bit IN is set to ON, the timing bit TI and the output bit Q are turned on at the same time,
and the counted time ET starts to count.

4) When the counted time ET is equal to the preset time PT, the output bit Q and the timing bit TI are turned
off at the same time.

4.Cumulative delay switch (ON)

Input bit (IN): Main switch of the timer.

Timing bit (TI): Set ON when timing starts.
Output bit (Q): Set to ON after the timing is over.
Preset Time (PT): Set the timer time value.
Elapsed time (ET): Displays the current elapsed time of the timer.
Reset bit (R): resets the current timer elapsed time (ET) to zero.
As shown in FIG:

As shown in FIG:
175
1) When the input bit IN is set to ON, the timing bit TI is turned on, the counted time ET starts to count, and
the output bit Q remains OFF.

2) When the input bit IN is set to OFF, if the counted time ET does not reach the preset time PT, the counted
bit TI is turned off, and the output bit Q remains OFF. The elapsed time ET maintains the current state value.

3) When the input bit IN is set to ON again, the timing bit TI is turned on, and the elapsed time ET starts to
count again from the state value just kept.

4) When the elapsed time ET is equal to the preset time PT, the timer bit TI is turned off, and the output bit Q
is turned on at the same time.

5) The input bit IN is set to OFF, and the output bit Q is also turned off. (At this time, set the reset bit ON to
reset the elapsed time ET to zero, and then set it to OFF.)

5.Cumulative delay switch (OFF)

Input bit (IN): Main switch of the timer.

Timing bit (TI): Set ON when timing starts.
Output bit (Q): Set to ON after the timing is over.
Preset Time (PT): Set the timer time value.
Elapsed time (ET): Displays the current elapsed time of the timer.
Reset bit (R): resets the current timer elapsed time (ET) to zero.

As shown in FIG:

1) When the input bit IN is set to ON, the timing bit TI remains OFF, and the output bit Q is turned on at the
same time.

2) When the input bit IN is set to OFF, the timing bit TI is turned on, while the output bit Q remains ON. The
elapsed time ET starts counting.

3) When the input bit IN is set to ON again, the timing bit TI and the output bit Q remain ON, and the
counting time ET is suspended.

4) When the input bit IN is set to OFF again, the elapsed time ET starts to count again from the state value
just held.

5) When the elapsed time ET is equal to the preset time PT, the timing bit TI and the output bit Q are turned
off at the same time. (At this time, set the reset bit ON to reset the elapsed time ET to zero, and then set it to
OFF.)

The size of the timer control cannot be changed, and the position can be set. When the project is running, the
176
timer control is not displayed on the HMI.

6.4.16 Multi-function Button

Multi-function button allows realizing the function of multi-step custom operation through one single control.

It can simplify user operation. Click on the toolbar or double-click the existing multi-function button to
enter the property page.

 General:

1. Button Appearance: shape, color, style, and other settings.

2. Available functions
Several functions are listed for user to select.
 Set Coil: Set the input address.
 Reset Coil: Reset the input address.
 Coil Alternation: Invert the input address value; if the address value is 0, then it becomes 1; if 1, it
becomes 0;
 Coil Jog: When touched, the input address will be set; reset after releasing;
 Screen Jump: Jump to the selected screen. Modify it to choose the screen to jump to.

177
 Set data: Write the set value to the set address. You can select the type of data to be written, as well as

the address and the data.

 User input: Enter a value and write it to the set address. You can select the data type to be written

and set the address to be written. When this command is executed, it will appear the data input

interface where you can perform the above operation.

Select an available function and click Add to add the function to the list of selected features.

When "User Input" and "Coil Jog" are selected, only the User Input will be executed while the coil jog will not.

3.Added functions

178
When you select an available function, the function is listed here. Double click it or click "Modify" to set or
modify. Click "Delete" to delete this function.

Clicking the multifunction button while the configuration is running means performing all of the selected
functions.

4. Macro

Select "Execute Macro" to see the list of macros. Choose a macro, and click the multi-function button to
execute it when the project runs.

Label, Advanced and Visibility settings: Refer to those of the Bit Button.
Refer to “Bit Switch” for hot keys of Advanced.

6.4.17 Pie Chart

A pie chart is used to show the proportion of a certain part, simply and clearly. Click on the toolbar or
double-click the existing Pie Chart button to enter the Property page.

 Total: Quantity of components. Up to 12 pieces of data can be chosen.

 Data type: what type of data is selected for each type.
 Control Address: The written address is the first needed data address. The following address is the
continuous one of the first. For example, the total quantity is 3, the data type is a 16-bit positive integer,
and the control address is LW5, then the address of data 1 is LW5, that of data 2 is LW6, and that of data
3 is LW7.

179
If the data type is 32-bit and the control address is LW5, then the address of data 1 is LW5, that of data 2 is
LW7, and that of data 3 is LW9.
 Color: Set the color of each data.

6.5 SKTOOL Basic controls

This chapter mainly introduces the use of basic controls of SKTOOL.

Contents：

 Bit Button

 Word Button

 Bit Lamp

 Screen Button

 Function Button

 Multi-state Indicator Lamp

 Multi-state Button

 Numeric Display

 Numeric Input

 ASCII Display

 ASCII Input

 Bar Chart

 Time Display

 Date Display

180
  Week Display

 Static Picture

 Picture Display

6.5.1 Bit Button

Bit button is used to operate and display the ON/OFF status or 1/0 status of the bit address of the device
connected with the touch screen. Bit button is the most fundamental and frequently used control.
Steps to set a Bit button:

1. Click the Bit Button icon on the toolbar to bring up a dialog box, which is for setting the properties of
Bit Button, as shown in Figure 4-68:

Figure 4-68 Bit Button dialog box

2. The dialog box includes four items, that is, General, Mark, Advanced and Visibility.
Shape: Click the Shape button to select a shape for the control graph, as shown in Figure 4-69

181
 Figure 4-69 Shape pop-up dialog

 Border Color: When having chosen a shape with border, click this button to select a different color for
the border.
 Foreground Color: When it needs to change the foreground color, click this button to choose a different
foreground color on the drop-down color selection box. (Foreground color works only if the transition
style is selected).
 Background Color: When it needs to change the background color, click the button to select on the
drop-down color selection box.
 Pattern: Click the drop-down box, which contains a total of 21 kinds of patterns as shown in Figure 4-70:

182
 Figure 4-70 Change shape and pattern value

 Set: If Set function is chosen, after the downloading to HMI, the value of the write-in address may be set
to 1 by clicking the bit button. In other words, the write-in address of the device connected will be set to
ON status, and the status of 1/ON will be displayed.
 Reset: If Reset function is chosen, after downloading to HMI, the value of the write-in address may be
set to 0 by clicking the bit button. In other words, the write-in address of the device connected will be
set to OFF status, and the status of 0/OFF will be displayed.
 Inching: If Inching function is chosen, either “pressing down being 1” or “pressing down being 0” may be
chosen. When “pressing down being 1” is chosen, after downloading to HMI, the value of the write-in
address of the device connected is set to 1/ON when the bit button is pressed down, and the status of
1/ON will be displayed; meanwhile, the value of the write-in address of the device connected is set to
0/OFF when the bit button is released, and the status of 0/OFF will be displayed. When “pressing down
being 0” is chosen, after download to HMI, the value of the write-in address of the device connected is
set to 0/OFF when the bit button is pressed down, and the status of 0/OFF will be displayed; Meanwhile,
the value of the write-in address of the device connected is set to 1/ON when the bit button is released,
and the status of 1/ON will be displayed.
 Alternate: When Alternate function is chosen, after the downloading to HMI, if the current status of the
bit button is 0/OFF, the value of the write-in address will be set to 1/ON when the bit button is touched,
and the status of 1/ON will be displayed; If the current status of the bit button is 1/ON, the value of the
write-in address will be set to 0/OFF when the bit button is touched, and the status of 0/OFF will be
displayed. The status changes with the times of touching.
183
 Write Address: Click the Keyboard button icon after "Write Address" to enter the address. SKTOOL
software will distribute corresponding address symbols according to different connected devices. For
example, in FX-2N series of MITSUBISHI (Mitsubishi) PLC, X represents the address of input coil; Y
represents that of the output coil; M that of the intermediate relay; C that of the counter (switch status
display); T that of the timer (switch Status display); D that of the data register; C * that of the counter
(count value); T * represents that of the timer (count value). Another example is the series of SIEMENS
(Siemens) S7-200: I represents the input address; Q on behalf of the output address; M on behalf of the
intermediate relay address; V on behalf of the data register address. As shown in Figure 4-71:

Figure 4-71 Input address

So that engineers can write the current status of this bit button to the address using a different address
symbol for PLC or other connected devices. The value of the write address or display address is 0 / OFF when
the bit button is in the 0 / OFF state; and the value of the write or display address is 1 / ON when the control
is in the state of 1 / ON.
 Monitor: Select "Monitor" to display the "Monitor Address”, indicating that the "bit button" can be used
to monitor the value change of "Monitor Address". The value of the Monitor address is 0 / OFF when the
bit button is in the 0 / OFF state; and the value of the Monitor address is 1 / ON when the control is in
the state of 1 / ON. When "Monitor Address" is chosen, the monitor address and write address can be
different. For example, when it selects the Set function, touching this control makes set the write
address to 1 / ON; but if the monitor address is at 0 / OFF at this time, the bit button will still display 0 /

184
 OFF state. Generally, users choose "Monitor address identical to Write address" in order to reflect or
display directly the state value you write.
 Macro: Chosen "Use Macro", then it will display a list of macros. User can select a macro to execute
when press the bit button. Only compiled macros are displayed in the drop-down list.

When Monitor isn’t chosen, the button switch state will not change even if the control is touched.

Mark
When select the Mark tab, the property of Status 0 Text is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-72:

Figure 4-72 Bit Button Label page

The page also has four items, "Status 0 Text", "Status 1 Text", "Status 0 Picture" and "Status 1 Picture".

 Status 0 Text, Status 1 Text: Used to change the font, font size, margin, font color, and position of the
state 0 or state 1 text. SKTOOL also provides the copying function, enabling copy one’s attributes to
another’s, which is convenient and timesaving.

185
 All Texts use the first language: This option is used when it comes to multiple languages ("Language" in
the Project Manager). When the total number of languages is greater than 1, you can select this option
to make sure that the contents of this control will not switch with the languages.
 Language: This option is used when it comes to multiple languages. Input contents with a different
language for multiple languages.(In the Function button, select the 'Switch language' option and which
one to switch to; then in the simulation or on the HMI screen, all the controls with text will be presented
by the selected language). For different languages, the text content, font and font size can be different,
but the color, kerning and position are the same
 Font: Choose the type of text for the text; different languages can choose different fonts.
 Font Size: Choose the font size for the text content; different languages can choose different font sizes..
 Color, Margin, Position: Set the color, Margin, and alignment of the text selected current. When it has
more than one language, these options are the same to that of the language 1, and they are invalid in
the language setting of others.
 Status 0 Picture, Status 1 Picture: You can add different formats of picture for different states according
to various "Picture source". When a picture is chosen, it will be automatically added to the "General"
page. If “Fit to Object Size” is selected, the selected image will be the same size as the control.
 Fit to Object Size: If “Fit to Object Size” is selected, the selected image will be the same size as the
control; and the Margin and Position options are hidden.
 If you import a picture from an external file, the "Transparency" option appears to make a specified
color transparent

When “Flicker” is chosen, the flashing screen is on the ON / OFF status. The default flashing frequency is 1s. If
you want to change the frequency, you can double-click the "Project Manager" in the "HMI parameter
settings". Select the "Flashing frequency" to change it.

Select the "Advanced" page to display the "Advanced" properties, as shown in Figure 4-73

186
 Figure 4-73 Bit Button Advanced page

 Controlled by Bit: "Controlled by Bit" having been chosen, when the "Valid Status" selected is 1, the "Bit
Button" can be effectively touched if and only if the value of the "Control Bit" is 1. When the selected
"Valid Status" is 0, the "Bit Button" can only be effective if and only if the value of the "Control Bit" is set
to 0. Otherwise, the "Bit Button" cannot function no matter how.
 Controlled by User Level: User can select multiple options as needed. After setting, in the simulation or
on the HMI screen, the current user is checked whether this user lever has the permission.

For example, if option 2 and 3 are chosen in the Effective Level Controlled in the Advanced Page of the control,

and the User Password Setting in the Touch Screen Parameter Setting is as shown in Figure 4-74：

187
 Figure 4-74 User Password Setting in the touch screen parameter setting

If Default User Level is NULL, this control is not touchable, and in this case you can use Change User Level in
Function buttons to change the default level. For example, if the password entered by the user is 6666,
corresponding to User Level 6, but the user chooses only option 1, not matching option 2 or 3, so the system
will prompt that the password is incorrect; When the password entered by the user is 2222 or 3333, as both
users have option 2, matching option 2 or 3, the password is valid and this control will be changed to a
touchable control. If the Default User Level is user 2 to 3, then both user levels have option 2 to match the
touching conditions, and then this control is touchable in simulation or initialized screen; If the Default User
Level is user 6, then this user level does not have an option to match the touching conditions, and then this
control is not touchable in simulation or initialized screen. The default setting is as shown in figure below:

If select “change the user level is insufficient”, when the user level is not matched, a login interface will pop
up so that user can select a matching level and log in again, as shown below:
188
In SKTOOL software, only bit button, drop-down box, ASCII input, function button, ASCII keyboard input,
multi-function button, multi-state button, formula selection, screen button, radio button, step button, word
button, slider and numeric input controls have this function, and as for their application, it can refer to that of
bit button.
 Minimum press time: How many seconds it needs to react after the press in the simulation or on the
HMI screen.
 Notification: In the case of that the control can be touched in the simulation or on the HMI screen, click
on the control, and enter a value with the pop-up input keyboard; then the state value will be written to
the set "Notification Bit" address (1 or 0).
 Notification Register: In the case of that the control can be touched in the simulation or on HMI screen,
click on the control, and input a value through the pop-up input keyboard, then the value will be written
to the set "notification register address" ( i.e. the value input by user).
 Hotkey: When this function is selected, you can enter a number or character to achieve the same effect
as that of pressing, For example, if input 1, click the numeric keypad 1in the simulation or on HMI screen,
or through an external keyboard, it functions similarly.

The default user level is NULL, which is the lowest level. Engineering designers can change the it by selecting
the "Change User Level" function in the function button and entering the corresponding password.

Effective touch means actual effect generates when the control is touched, such as the success of the set,
reset, inching, alternation. Another example is the numeric input. When user touches the numeric input
button, the keyboard will pop up. Meanwhile the numeric input button will not generate a notification effect,
since this operation is not written to the address. If you press ESC to exit the keyboard will not produce notice.
189
It is valid only when you enter a numeric value between the maximum and minimum values on the keyboard
and press the ENTER key, then a notification will arise.

Select the "Show" page to display the "Show" property, which is used to set whether the control is displayed
or hidden. As shown in Figure 4-75

Figure 4-75 Bit Button Visibility page

 Controlled by bit: When this option is checked, if the Effective State is 1, then the Bit Button can be
displayed on the touch screen when and only when the value of the Control Bit is 1; If the Effective State
is 0, then the Bit Button can be displayed on the touch screen when and only when the value of the
Control Bit is 0.
 Controlled by User Level: When User Level Controlled is chosen, the conditions will be the same as those
in the User Level Controlled option in Advanced page, and only when such conditions are met the Bit
Button can be displayed on the touch screen.
 Word control : Set the judgment condition, and when the register address data satisfies the setting
condition, the control displays, otherwise the control is hidden

If neither of these two options is checked, the control will be always displayed on the touch screen.

190
6.5.2 Word Button

Word Button can support operations of Constant, Enter Value, Increasing, Decreasing, Enter Password, Add
and Subtract to the data register address of connected device.
To add a word button:

 Select the Word Button icon on the toolbar, then he following dialog box is displayed, as shown in

Figure 4-76:

Figure 4-76 Word Button dialog box

The shape, border color, foreground color, background color and pattern can be set with reference to "Bit
Button" control.

Function:
 Set constant: You can choose different data types, SKTOOL software provides a variety of data types:
16/32-bit positive integer, 16/32-bit integer, 16/32-bit BCD positive integer and 32-bit floating point
number. Setting a constant is to write the constant value you set to the write address. For example, if

191
 the write address is LW1 and the constant is set to 10, the value of LW1 is set to 10 every time the
button is touched, regardless of its current value.
 Enter value: You can select a different data type; input a value between the maximum and minimum

with a keyboard poping up after the word button being touched. As shown in Figure 4-77:

Figure 4-77

 Increasing: When the Delay parameter is 0, its function is the same as that of the Add. If the Delay
parameter is not 0, the value of the write address increases by a constant value and is written to the
register.

 Decreasing: When "Delay parameter" is 0, this function is the same as that of “Subtract". If "Delay
parameter" is not 0, after a certain time, the value written to the address decreases by the constant
value and is written to the register.

 Enter Password: Same as the "Enter Value" except that the "Enter Password" function has no option of
decimal digits.

 Add: After choosing the data type, writing the address, constant and maximum value, every time you
touch the "word button" control, the set value corresponding to the register value will plus the constant
value based on the original value. Each time the button is touched, the value written to the address is
incremented by a constant; however the value written to the address cannot exceed the maximum
value you set. For example, the write address is LW1, the constant is 5, and the maximum value is 65535.
Each time you click the Word Button control, the value of LW1 is added to the original value by 5, but
the maximum value of LW1 cannot exceed 65535.

 Subtract: After choosing the data type, writing the address, constant and minimum value, every time
you touch the "word button" control, the set value corresponding to the register value will minus the
constant value based on the original value. Each time the button is touched, the value written to the
address is decremented by a constant; however the value written to the address cannot be less than the
maximum value you set. For example, the write address is LW1, the constant is 5, and the minimum
value is 0. Each time you click the Word Button control, the value of LW1 is subtracted from the original
value by 5, but the value of LW1 cannot be less than 0.

192
 Total number of digits: Number of data including that of decimal points.

 Decimal digits: When the data type is not "32-bit floating point" and there are decimal digits, then the
maximum value of the input value should be reduced to 10 nth power. For example: When the selected
data type is "32-bit positive integer", and the number of digits is 3, so the user can only enter the value
of 0-99999.999.

 Macro: When "Use Macro" is chosen, the macro list is displayed. The user can select a macro to execute
when the word button is pressed. Only compiled macros are displayed in the drop-down list.

The "Mark" tab of the "Word Button" is similar to that of the "Bit Button" control. Except that the Word
button has no Status Text 1 neither Status Picture 1 because the Word Button has only one state.

If select the 32-bit data type for Word button, the address will occupy the length of two words. For example,

write V10 to SIEMENS (Siemens) PLC data register, then the occupied data register address includes V10 and

V11. If user still employs other control to monitor V11 value, it will fail to work. Pay attention to the

application of 32-bit data type in case of error.

The Advanced and Visibility pages of the Word Button are the same as that of the Bit Button control. You can

refer to the Bit Button control and refer to Bit Switch for the use of hotkey.

6.5.3 Bit Lamp

The Bit Lamp can be used to monitor the ON / OFF status of bit contact of the connected device and to
display it on the HMI scree.

As shown in Figure 4-78 below:

Figure 4-78

Set up a Bit Lamp:

193
1. Select the Bit Lamp button icon on the toolbar: The dialog box shown in Figure 4-79 will pop up:

Figure 4-79 Bit Lamp dialog box

 Data Type: The drop-down box has three options, namely: Bit, Word Bit and Double-word Bit. If select
"Bit", the Monitor (read) address is Double-word Bit means a double word address.

 Bit Number: When the chosen data type is "Word Bit" or "Double-word Bit", the value of the monitor
address (status of ON/OFF) is determined by the bit number value. It is from 0 to 15 for Word Bit and 0
to 31 for Double-word Bit.

For example, when "Word Bit" is selected, the monitor address is LW1 with a value of 23, if the bit number is

3, the state of this address value is 0 because the binary number of 23 is 10111 whose 3rd number from right

to left is 0.

Note: Refer to Bit Button control for Shape, Border color, Foreground color, Background color and Pattern.

2. In the "General" Property dialog box of the bit lamp, choose an address to be monitored by this indicator.
Through the settings in “Mark”, you can set contents and pictures to be displayed and also choose whether to
blink.

194
Note: The "Mark" page of the "Bit Lamp" is the same as that of the "Bit Button" which you can refer to.

3. To reset the properties of this indicator, double-click it to reset it in the property dialog box.

Note: The Visibility page of the Bit Lamp is the same as that of the Bit Button control that you can refer to.

After the properties set up, click "OK" to add the control in the view area (i.e., the screen)

6.5.4 Screen button

Screen button is designed for screen switching, changing the user level, pop-up window and other operations.
After being set, it can make a screen/ window jump to a certain screen / window while you can also decide
whether to change the user level at the same time.

 Click the icon button on the toolbar to bring up the dialog box , as shown in Figure 4-80.

195
 Figure 4-80 Screen Button Dialog Box

Shape, border color, foreground color, background color and pattern settings can be used with reference to
"Bit Button".

Function modules:

 Open Screen: It allows users to jump to the selected screen by clicking the button. This function can be
employed on a screen or in a window.
 Open Previous Screen: It allows users to jump to the previous screen of this page by clicking the button.
This function can only be used in the screen page.
 Close Open Screen: This function can only be used in the window page. It allows closing the current
window and opening another window or screening.
 Close Screen: This function can only be used in the window page. This function allows closing the current
window page.

Switch user level:

 Logout: Restore the current user level to the default user level
 Specified User Level: Change the current user level to the specified user level
Open function:
 Press: When the user presses the mouse, it executes the screen switching function.
 Release: When the user releases the mouse, it executes the screen switching function.

196
Login required if level is insufficient:

If the user has selected the " Controlled by User Level" option on the "Advanced" page of the "Screen Button"
dialog box, and has changed the "Effective Lowest Level", then the screen control is only valid if the current
user level is higher than or equal to the user- If the current user level is less than the effective minimum level
set by the user, the password input box will pop up when the user touches the screen control on the touch
screen, as shown in Figure 4-81:

Figure 4-81 Password input keyboard

This screen can only be opened when the password entered by the user is higher than that set by the user,
and the current user level is decided by the level password just entered by the user.

Macros:

"Open macros" displays a list of macros. The user can select one to execute when press the button. Only
compiled macros can be displayed in the drop-down list.

The "Label" page of the Screen Button is similar to that of the "Bit Button" control. Because the Screen Button
has only one state, its Label page only has Status 1 Text and Status 1 Picture. Apart from that, the functions
are the same.

The "Advanced" and "Visibility" pages of the "Screen Buttons" are the same as those of the "Bit Button"
control, which can be used with reference to the Bit Button.

197
After setting all the properties, click "OK" and the mouse cursor will turn into a cross. Left click in the view
area to add the control to the screen.

6.5.5 Function Button

Function Button is an essential control in HMI; with the Function button you can achieve a variety of functions

easily and quickly. Click to open the property dialog box of Function Button, as shown in Figure 4-82:

Figure 4-82 Function Button dialog box

Note: Refer to Bit Button control for Shape, Border color, Foreground color, Background color and Pattern.

1. Turn off Background light

Choose the function of Turn off the background light. Then click the button on the screen to turn off it while
HMI will still works properly. To turn on the backlight, simply touch anywhere on the touch screen.

2. Confirm Alarm
Choose the function of Confirm the alarm. Then you can confirm the selected alarm by clicking the button

3. Restart
198
If the function button is set to System Restart, then the touch screen will be restarted by touching this button.

4. Set screen saver timeout

If the function button is set to Set Screen Saver Timeout, then a window will pop up for setting of screen
saver timeout after touching this button.

5. Write recipe to the PLC

Choose this function to transmit recipe to the PLC. Click this button on the touch screen to transmit the recipe
saved in the current HMI to the PLC or corresponding continuous data register of other connected devices.
(The address is the write address set by engineers when set up a recipe with the software.)

6. Read recipe from the PLC

Choose this function to read recipe from the PLC. Click this button on the touch screen to read the recipe data
from the PLC or corresponding continuous data register of other connected devices. (The address is the write
address set by engineers when set up a recipe with the software.)

7. Set the date and time

Choose this function to set the time and date; click the button on the touch screen to set the inner time and
date.

8. Clear Alarm
Choose this function to clear the alarm; click the button on the touch screen to clear the selected and
confirmed alarm.

9. Previous recipe
Choose this function of the Previous Recipe to open the previous recipe of the current one after clicking this
button. If the current recipe is the first one or the total number of recipe is 1, this operation does not change
recipe parameters.

10. The latter recipe

Choose this function of the Latter Recipe to open the latter recipe of the current one after clicking this button.
If the current recipe is the last one or the total number of recipe is 1, this operation does not change recipe
parameters.

11. Save the current recipe

Choose this function for saving the current recipe by clicking the button on the touch screen to save the
recipe data from corresponding continuous data register of the PLC or other connected device, which is set

199
when engineers set up the recipe with the software.

12. Screenshots
Set the function button function as Screenshot; click this button to intercept the current screen as a picture
saved in the user-specified location. The address of Picture name can be input using ASCII Input, the Picture
name cannot consist of ：#￥%&*-+<> etc. And the length of the name must be 20 or shorter than 20.

13. System parameters

Set the system parameter of the function button. Click it on HMI to open the system parameter setting screen
where you can modify settings, such as system time, screen saver time, background light contrast and so on.

14. Log on
Choose the function of Log on, then when user clicks this button, a login interface will pop up. After choosing
the User Name, a keyboard will pop up with which user inputs a password to achieve an access permission.

15. Cancel user login

Choose the function of cancel a user's login; click this button on the touch screen to log out and cancel the
current user's privilege so that the user's level becomes the lowest.

16. Alarm Sound (ON / OFF)

Choose the function of Alarm Sound ON / OFF to make a sound when it occurs an alarm. You can set the
function button to enable or disable this function. If the current state is on, the alarm sound will be shielded
after user clicking this button, and vice versa

17. Touch sound (ON / OFF)

Set the function button to Touch Sound Switch, then the touch sound may be turned on/off by touching this
button. If there is touch sound at present, the touch sound will be turned off after touching this button, and
vice versa.

18. Clear all historical data

The history data stored in HMI will be cleared.

19. Clear the historical alarm

The history alarm saved in HMI is cleared.

20. HMI protection unlock

Enter the password to deactivate the HMI protection.

200
21. Recipe Read & Save
Read and save the recipe.

22. Alternate function

Only as back-up function, it does not perform any operation.

23. Reload recipe

Reload the recipe data in flash to the corresponding RWI address.

24. Switch languages

Switch text contents of all the controls to that of another specified language

25. Print Screen via a serial printer

Print the set screen through a serial printer. Connection setting of the printer driver is under the "HMI
Parameter settings" -> "Printer and Download settings", in the left frame of the software interface.

26.Slave devices IP config

This function requires the "Extended Mode" that can be set in the "Communication Port Property". The
application of Ethernet communications for multi-machine needs to add a station number and the register
address controlling the station number in front of the corresponding control. When the project in HMI is
running, click on the function control, and the station number set by user will be shown in the " IP config
"dialog box; then set the corresponding IP parameters of station number to achieve multi-machine Ethernet
communication.

27. Function set of DIP switch 1 and 3

Functions of DIP switch 1 and 3 on the hardware when they are in ON state, mainly consisting of IP setting,
system time setting and backlight parameters. After the setting, click OK to restart.

28. HMI delay solution lock

When HMI protects the -> advanced -> delay function, the button is needed to hit the button at the touch
screen, and the delay function will take effect

29. Touch calibration

Recalibrate current touch screen coordinates

Use Macro: Selecting "Use macro" will bring up a list of macros and users can choose one to execute when

201
the function is executed. Only compiled macros are displayed in the drop-down list.

Note: After jumping to the system screen, the system will close the current project; when return from the
system screen, it will restart the project, and enter the start screen of project settings.

Note: The "Mark" page of Function button is similar to that of the "Bit Button" control which you can refer to.
Except that the Mark page of Function button has no Status Text 1 neither Status Picture 1 because it has only
one state.
Note: The Advanced and Visibility pages of the Function Button are the same as that of the Bit Button control.
You can refer to the Bit Button control and refer to Bit Switch for the use of hotkey.

Note: Operations of Previous recipe, later recipe, save recipe, read & save recipe are only valid to the current
recipe group. If you still want to operate, set the LW61141 group then.

Note: Clear history data means all historical data groups are cleared.

After setting all the properties, click "OK" to add the control button to the view area (i.e., the screen)

6.5.6 Multi-state Button

Functions between Multi-state button and Multi-state indicator lamp are basically the same, while the only
difference is that multi-state button supports value input, rather than simple function of indicating. Specific
operation is as follows:

Click the button icon on the toolbar to display the dialog box shown in Figure 4-87.

202
 Figure 4-87 Multi-state button dialog box

 State: User can change the state value, as well as the border color, foreground color, background color
and pattern of the control in different states
 State type: (assuming the input value is n)
 Value: The value written is a number from zero to the total number of states.
 Register bit: the value written is nth power of 2.

E.g:
Select “Value” for State Type, “Keyboard Input” for Mode and LW3 for Write Address and select the option of
"Monitor Address Identical to Write Address”, the total number of states 8. After that, click OK to add the
control to the screen, then save the project.

In the simulation or screen, click on the control, and then an input keyboard pops up where user can enter a
state value. Assuming that the input value is 3, then the value written to the register LW3 is the 3rd power of
2, which shows the text in the state 3 (the text in state 3 of this control in the Text page). Conversely, when
the value entered for the LW3 address is 8, the control displays the text content of the state 3. When the
value of the LW3 address input is 5, the control does not display any status.

 Customize Status Value: When select this option, a "Define Status Value..." button appears, as shown in
Figure 4-88:

203
 Figure 4-88 Multi-state button select Customize Status Value

Click "Define status value..." button, it will pop up a "Customize status value" dialog interface, as shown in
Figure 4-89:

Figure 4-89 Define status value dialog box

In this dialog box, the "S #" column is the current status column. After selecting a row, the corresponding

204
value to “S#” in that row indicates the current status value; double-click to enter the value in the current
state.

For example, Select “Customize status value” for State Type, “Keyboard Input” for Mode, and LW3 for Write
Address and select the option of "Monitor Address Identical to Write Address”, the total number of states is 8.
After that, click OK to add the control to the screen, then save the project. In the simulation or screen, click
on the control, and then an input keyboard pops up where user can enter a state value. Assuming that the
input value is 1, then the value written to the register LW3 is 22, which shows the text in the state 1 (the text
in state 1 of this control in the Text page). Conversely, when the value entered for the LW3 address is 33, the
control displays the text content of the state 2. When the value of the LW3 address input is 2, the control
does not display any status.

 Mode: Provide six function options: "Keyboard Input", "Output constant", "Increase", “Decrease",
"Loopback increase " and "Loopback decrease ".
 Keyboard input: Three options in the "State Type" can be selected. In the simulation or screen, when
click the control, it will pop up a keyboard for user to enter the value, as shown in Figure 4-90:

Figure 4-90 Keyboard

 Output constant: Only the "Value" option can be selected among the three function options in the
"State Type". After selecting this option, a “constant” box will show for constant setting. In the
simulation or screen, if click on the control, the value written is the set constant value
 Increase: Only the "Value" option can be selected among the three function options in the "State Type".
In the simulation or screen, when click on the control, each click means the number of state plus 1; it
stops increasing in case of beyond the total number of state.

205
 Decrease: Only the "Value" option can be selected among the three function options in the "State Type".
In the simulation or screen, when click on the control, each click means the number of state minus 1; it
stops decreasing in case of beyond the total number of state.
 Loopback increase: Only the "Value" option can be selected among the three function options in the
"State Type". In the simulation or screen, when click on the control, each click means the number of
state plus 1; it returns to state 0 if beyond the total number of state.
 Loopback decrease: Only the "Value" option can be selected among the three function options in the
"State Type". In the simulation or screen, when click the control, each click means the number of state
minus 1, it will return to the maximum state in case of beyond the total number of state.

 Data Type: The data type of the write address and monitor (read) address
 Monitor address: Read address whose value is to read the state value and reflect the current state on
the control.
 Total number of states: the maximum number of states
 Use Macro: If this option is selected, when click on the control in the simulation or screen, the macro
selected by the user is executed in this case.

Note: Shape, border color, foreground color, background color and pattern can be used with reference to "Bit
button" control.
Note: Refer to "Multi-state indicator lamp" control for "Text" and "Picture" pages.
Note: The "Advanced" and "Appearance" pages are referred to the "Bit Button" control. Specific hot keys can
be used to refer to the bit switch.

After setting the properties, click "OK" to add the control in the view area (that is, the screen)

6.5.7 Multi-state Indicator Lamp

The Multi-state indicator lamp control is mainly used to display different states according to the value of the
monitor address. Up to 32 states can be displayed.

Click the Multi-state indicator button on the toolbar to bring up the dialog box as shown in Figure 4-83.

206
 Figure 4-83 Multi-state Indicator Lamp dialog box

1. General:
 State: User can change the status value in order to modify the border color, foreground color,
background color and pattern of the control in different states
 State Type: (Assuming the user input value is n)
 Value: the written value is from zero to the number of total states minus 1.
 Register Bit: The written value is the n power of 2.
E.g.:
The monitor (read) address is LW3, then the total state number is 8. After, click OK to add the control to
the screen; then add a numerical input control on the screen; set the write address and monitor address
to LW3; finally save the project.

In the simulation or on the screen, user clicks on the numeric input control, and input a preferred state
value through the input keyboard. If the input value is 2, the value of the monitoring (reading) address is
1, the control shows the text in the state of 1 (the text content in state 1 of the control in the Text page);
correspondingly, when the value entered for the LW3 address is 8, the control will display the text
content of state 3. If a value of 3 is input to the LW3 address, the multi-state indicator does not switch to
any state.

 Customize status value: When user selects this option, a "Defined status value" button appears.
Click it to bring up "Customize status value" dialog interface, as shown in Figure 4-84:

207
 Figure 4-84 User-defined state value dialog box

In this dialog box, the "S #" column is the current status column, that is, the selected value in it indicates the
current status value; double- click a Value to enter the value in the current state that you want to write.

For example: The monitor (read) address is LW3, then the total state number is 8. After, click OK to add the
control to the screen; then add a numerical input control on the screen; set the write address and monitor
address to LW3; finally save the project.

In the simulation or on the screen, user clicks on the numeric input control, and input a preferred state value
through the input keyboard. If the input value is 1, the value of the monitoring (reading) address is 1, the
control shows the text in the state of 1 (the text content in state 1 of the control in the Text page);
correspondingly, when the value entered for the LW3 address is 33, the control will display the text content of
state 2. If a value of 2 is input to the LW3 address, the multi-state indicator does not switch to any state.

208
 Data Type: The data type of the write address and monitor (read) address
 Monitor address: The read address, which is a status value to be read, and then reflects the current state
selected by user in the control.
 Total states: Users can set the total number of states according to individual need, which can be up to 32
states, that is from state 0 to state 31.

For example, selecting a data type of 16-bit positive integer, a total number of states of 32, when the data
value stored in the monitor address is 0, the Multi-state indicator shows the text and the corresponding
picture of the state 0; if the data value is 5, the Multi-state indicator will show the text and the corresponding
picture of the state 5;. When the value is 60, the Multi-state indicator will still display the message of the
State 31, because the total number of states up to 32 states.

Note: Shape, Border color, Foreground color, Background color and Pattern can be used with reference to that
of "Bit Button" control.
Note: When "Multi-state indicator lamp” selects the 32-bit data type, the stored address occupies 2 words.
For example, when write data to the SIEMENS PLC's data register, and the address written is V10 , then the
occupied data register address includes V10 and V11; if users also use other controls to monitor the value of
V11, an error will appear. Users should pay attention to the use of 32-bit data types in case ofNote data and
address errors.
Note : The data category must be consistent with the data to be indicated.

2. Text:
Click the "Text" tab of the Multi-State Indicator Property box to display the text property settings screen as
shown in Figure 4-85 below:

209
 Figure 4-85 Multi-state indicator text page

All languages use the first language text: This option is employed when dealing with multiple languages, that
is, in the "Language" in the Project Manager, the total number of languages selected is greater than 1; in this
case, the control text does not change with the switch of language.

 Language: This option is used when dealing with multiple languages. Select a different language, you can
enter different text contents in different states, in order to achieve the multi-language. (In the function
button, select the 'Switch language' option, and the language to switch to; in the simulation or screen,
click this button, and then all the screen with text control will switch to that with text content of the
specified language). For different languages, text content, font and font size can be different, but the
color, kerning and position are the same.
 Font: You can choose the type of text for the input text; different states can choose different fonts, and
different languages can choose different fonts.
 Font Size: You can choose the font size for the input text content; different states can choose different
font sizes; different languages can also choose different font sizes.
 Color, Kerning, Position: Set the color, kerning, and alignment of the selected text. When you choose a
language other than Language 1 in the Text page when the total number of languages selected in the
Project Manager is greater than 1, the three functions: color, kerning and position are invalid because
they are the same as the language 1.

3. Picture:
Click the Picture tab of the Multi-State Indicator Property box to display the attribute settings as shown in
Figure 4-86.

210
 Figure 4-86 Multi-state indicator lamp picture page

This page is mainly employed to load pictures for different states. Picture of each state is empty by default
while it can be changed according to personal need.
 Steps are as follows: Select the item in the list box whose picture needs to be changed, then choose the
right picture either in system library or through save path on Windows. So when click on different status,
corresponding pictures will be loaded below. In addition, user can also decide whether to fit to Object: if
not, the margin and position of the control can also be modified, so as to beautify it.
 Fit to Object: When this is selected, the size of the graphic is the same as that of the controls on the
General page while the Margin and Position options are hidden, otherwise they appear.

If import a picture from an external file, the "Transparent" option will display for use. This function is meant
to make a specified color transparent

Note: Refer to "Bit button" control for Visibility page.

After setting all the properties, click "OK" and then add the control in the screen area

6.5.8 Numerical Display

Numeric display control is a commonly used control displaying values in data register stored in PLC or other
211
connected devices, such as speed, current, pressure and so on.

Select the display icon in the toolbar, and then the system will bring up a dialog box. As shown in Figure
4-91:

Figure 4-91 Numeric Display dialog box

In this dialog box, you can set the value saved in data register of PLC or other connected devices, such as the
display digits, the decimal place, and font size, color, alignment and adjustment of text control.
 Data type: Users can choose different data categories according to the value of the register address to be
monitored.
 Display Type: Users can choose different display categories according to project needs.
 Monitor address: Read address. The control is applied to display the data; the monitor address is the
data register address carrying data to be displayed in PLC or other connected devices.
 Decimal Place: Display the number of decimal places for the data.
 Font: Choose a general font or digital font.
 Font size: Choose the size of the displayed font as needed.
 Alignment: The default is Center.
 Left: The numerical value displayed is in the left part of the display area.
 Center: The numerical value displayed is at the center of the display area.
 Right: The numerical value displayed is in the right part of the display area.
 Justification: The default is zero-suppression.

212
 Zero-suppression: Zero in front of the significant figure is hidden. If the value of the monitor address is
00123, a 16-bit positive integer, then the value displayed in the display box is 123.
 Zero Header: Display the leading zero of the effective number of bits. If the value of the monitor address
is 00123, a 16-bit positive integer, then the value displayed in the display box is 00123.
 Space Header: Display the space instead of 0 in front of the significant digit. If the value of the monitor
address is 00123, a 16-bit positive integer, then the value displayed in the display box is 123.
 Text Color: The font color of the data displayed;

Note: Shape, border color, foreground color, background color and style can be used with reference to "Bit
button" control.
Note: Double-click the data display box to reset the contents and properties of the data display. When the
control functions in the HMI, an on-screen keyboard will pop up, giving an access to the data input for user.
Note: The number of decimal place affects the data display. When the selected data type is 16/32-bit positive
integer, 16/32-bit integer, and then the displayed value is acquired by offsetting the decimal point of return
value by the set number of digits. If the value 212 is returned and the number of decimal places is 2, then
2.12 is displayed. If the selected data type is a 32-bit floating-point number, the value has no offset; but only
the fractional decimal places are displayed. If the value 2.123 is returned and the scale is set to 2, only 2.12 is
displayed.
Note: Total number of bits means the sum of the length of the integer part and the fraction part. If the integer
length of the displayed value is greater than that of the integer part, the length of the displayed integer will
be that of the actual value. For example, for the value 2123, the length of value is 2, and number of decimal
place is 1, then it will display 212.3.

The Advanced page of Numeric display contains powerful functions, including Scaling and Range Display, as
shown in Figure 4-92:

213
 Figure 4-92 Numeric Display Advanced page

 Scaling: When this option is selected, the data displayed by the numeric display control is: Monitor (Read)
Address Value × Gain + Offset
 Display Range: When this option is selected, user can set the lower and higher limit values as well as the
low and high-level background color according to the needs. The address value monitored (read) by the
control will be represented by different color patterns in the user-set lower and higher limit values.
 Variable range: the values of "Lower Limit" and "Higher Limit" are dynamically changed, depending on
the address entered by the user
 Lower limit: Set the lower limit of the display. When the number displayed is lower than this limit, the
background color will be the color set in Low Level Background Color.
 Higher limit: Set the higher limit of the display. When the number displayed is higher than this limit, the
background color will be the color set in High Level Background Color.

For example, when you set the background color and text color in the General page and select the Range
display color as shown in Figure 4-93:

214
 Figure 4-93 Range Display Property Settings

When the value of the monitored address changes, the text and background of the numeric display change
accordingly, as shown in Figure 4-94:

Figure 4-94 An example of numeric display

Note: Refer to the use of "Bit button" control for the Visibility page.
Note: When the 32-bit data type is selected, the stored address occupies 2 words. For example, when write
data to the SIEMENS PLC's data register, and the address written is V10 , then the occupied data register
address includes V10 and V11; if users also use other controls to monitor the value of V11, an error will
appear. Users should pay attention to the use of 32-bit data types in case of Note data and address errors.
215
After the setting, click "OK" to add the control to the view area (that is, the screen)

6.5.9 Numerical Input

Numeric input is the most commonly used control, almost essential for all of the process control processes. It
can input, display and store the value in the data register of the PLC or other connected devices, such as
speed, current, pressure and so on.

Functions of Numeric input and numerical display are basically the same, and the only difference is that the
numerical input can enter values to the data register of PLC or other connected devices, but not just display
the value.

Specific operations to create a numeric input touch key are as follows:

Select the Numerical input icon in the toolbar, and a dialog box appears. As shown in Figure 4-95.

Figure 4-95 Numeric Input dialog box

Note: Shape, border color, foreground color, background color and pattern can be set with reference to "Bit

216
button" control.
Note: Refer to the "Numerical Display" control for "Alignment", "Justification”, "Decimal Place" and "Total
Digits".
Note: Double-click the data display box to reset the contents and properties of the data display. When the
control functions in the HMI, an on-screen keyboard will pop up, giving an access to the data input for user, as
shown in Figure 4-96.

Figure 4-96 Number input keyboard

Note: When the 32-bit data type is selected, the stored address occupies 2 words. For example, when write
data to the SIEMENS PLC's data register, and the address written is V10 , then the occupied data register
address includes V10 and V11; if users also use other controls to monitor the value of V11, an error will
appear. Users should pay attention to the use of 32-bit data types in case ofNote data and address errors.
Note: The number of decimal place affects the data display. When the selected data type is 16/32-bit positive
integer, 16/32-bit integer, and then the displayed value is acquired by offsetting the decimal point of return
value by the set number of digits. If the value 212 is returned and the number of decimal places is 2, then
2.12 is displayed. If the selected data type is a 32-bit floating-point number, the value has no offset; but only
the fractional decimal places are displayed. If the value 2.123 is returned and the scale is set to 2, only 2.12 is
displayed.
Note: Total number of bits means the sum of the length of the integer part and the fraction part. If the integer
length of the displayed value is greater than that of the integer part, the length of the displayed integer will
be that of the actual value. For example, for the value 2123, the length of value is 2, and number of decimal
place is 1, then it will display 212.3.

217
 Password input: "Password input" means the password input function, and the characters entered by
the user are displayed in the form of "*" in the process of inputting and displaying.
 Use Macro: Select the option of "Use Macro" to display the list of macros. User can select a macro to
execute when the numeric input button is pressed. Only compiled macros are displayed in the
drop-down list.
 Total digit: The total number, the sum of the integer part and the sum of the decimal parts. Controls the
size of display and input values. The total number of decimal places is 4, and the decimal number is 1.
The maximum decimal value is 999.9, which is the maximum value of the input and display of the
control. The input exceeds the value, indicating errors; the display exceeds this value, ignores the
redundant bits, and displays the number of settings only. Such as: total number of 4, decimal 1, the
actual value of 12345, the control display effect of 234.5.

“Advanced” page: This page is mainly used to set the gain, offset and range check of input data (to check
whether the input value is beyond the set range); In addition, the advanced page also has "Touch availability "
and "Notification" options, which have the same functionality as that of the "Bit Button" control which users
can refer to.

Click the "Advanced" tab, as shown in Figure 4-97:

Figure 4-97 Numeric Input Advanced page

 Controlled by Bit: If select this option, the control is not available until under specific conditions. When
the "Valid Status" selected is 1, the "Bit Button" can be effectively touched if and only if the value of the
"Control Bit" is 1. When the selected "Valid Status" is 0, the "Bit Button" can only be effective if and only
if the value of the "Control Bit" is set to 0. Otherwise, the "Bit Button" cannot function no matter how.

218
 Controlled by User Level: User can select multiple options as needed. After setting, in the simulation or
on the HMI screen, the current user is checked whether this user lever has the Visibility.
 Use Hot Keys: Refer to the Bit button.
 Show value: If select this option, the user data input, it will display the control value in the input
keyboard when user inputs values, for example, the display value is 389, click on the Numerical input
control, then the input area will show 389, otherwise the input area is empty, as shown below:

For example, if option 2 and 3 are chosen in the Effective Level Controlled in the Advanced Page of the control,

and the User Password Setting in the Touch Screen Parameter Setting is as shown in Figure 4-98：

Figure 4-98 User Password Setting in the touch screen parameter setting

219
If Default User Level is NULL, this control is not touchable, and in this case you can use Change User Level in
Function buttons to change the default level. For example, if the password entered by the user is 6666,
corresponding to User Level 6, but the user chooses only option 1, not matching option 2 or 3, so the system
will prompt that the password is incorrect; When the password entered by the user is 2222 or 3333, as both
users have option 2, matching option 2 or 3, the password is valid and this control will be changed to a
touchable control. If the Default User Level is user 2 to 3, then both user levels have option 2 to match the
touching conditions, and then this control is touchable in simulation or initialized screen; If the Default User
Level is user 3, then this user level does not have an option to match the touching conditions, and then this
control is not touchable in simulation or initialized screen. The default setting is as shown in figure below:

If select “change the user level is insufficient”, when the user level is not matched, a login interface will pop
up so that user can select a matching level and log in again, as shown below:

 Notification: In the case that the control can be touched, in the simulation or screen, click on the control
to input a value through a pop-up input keyboard; then it will write the set state value (1 or 0) to the
"Notice bit" address.
 Scaling: When this option is selected, the value written to the address = (the value entered by user
through the pop-up keyboard - offset) / Gain; the displayed value (ie, the value of the monitor address)
= the value of the monitor address × gain + offset

220
 Display Range: When this option is selected, user can set the lower and higher limit values as well as the
low and high-level background color according to the needs. The address value monitored (read) by the
control will be represented by different color patterns in the user-set lower and higher limit values.
 Variable range: the values of "Lower Limit" and "Higher Limit" are dynamically changed, depending on
the address entered by the user
 Lower limit: Set the lower limit of the display. When the number displayed is lower than this limit, the
background color will be the color set in Low Level Background Color.
 Higher limit: Set the higher limit of the display. When the number displayed is higher than this limit, the
background color will be the color set in High Level Background Color.
 Range check: Check whether the input value is beyond the set maximum or minimum value.

After the settings, click "OK" to add the control to the view area (that is, the screen)

 When General page is set as shown below, the number is displayed in binary while we input number in
decimal. When Display Type is other type, the input type is the same as the Display Type.

 After setting of the properties, click OK button, and then the mouse shape will become a cross. Now you
can draw a rectangle in the screen by clicking the mouse and thus add this control into the screen.

6.5.10 ASCII Display

ASCII Display is used to displaying ASCII in device.

221
Click the ASCII display button icon , then a dialog box pops up as shown in Figure 4-99:

Figure 4-99 ASCII Display dialog box

In this dialog box, you can set the monitor address of the connected device to be displayed, choose the font
size of the display text and other properties.

 Monitor Address: The data stored in this address can be displayed on real-time basis, or data can be
input to this address.
 Total: The maximum number of characters that can be displayed.
 Font Size: The font size of the character to be displayed
 Exchange high and low bytes of input: The high byte in the value input by user will be exchanged with
the low byte, and then the data after such exchange will be stored into the monitored word address.
 Password: When this is selected, the control does not show specific characters but displays an asterisk
(*)
 Use UNICODE: The monitor address value is displayed in Unicode encoding

Alignment:
 Left: The character displayed is in the left part of the display area.
 Center: The character displayed is at the center of the display area.
 Right: The character displayed is in the right part of the display area.

222
Note: Refer to Bit Button control for Shape, Border color, Foreground color, Background color and Pattern.
Note: If set the transparence property of this control, the setting of background color is invalid.
Note: Refer to the use of "Bit button" control for the Visibility.

6.5.11 ASCII Input

Click the ASCII Input button icon , then a dialog box pops up as shown in Figure 4-100:

Figure 4-100 ASCII Input dialog box

 Write address: Input ASCII text into the address.

 Monitor: The address value to be read and displayed by this control.
 Monitor address identical to write address: The monitor address is the same as the write address.
 Monitor address: The address to be read
 Total: The maximum number of characters that can be displayed.
 Font Size: The font size of the character to be displayed
 Exchange high and low bytes of input: The high byte in the value input by user will be exchanged with
the low byte, and then the data after such exchange will be stored into the monitored word address.
223
 Password: When this is selected, the control does not show specific characters but displays an asterisk
(*)
 Use UNICODE: The monitor address value is displayed in Unicode encoding

Alignment:
 Left: The character displayed is in the left part of the display area.
 Center: The character displayed is at the center of the display area.
 Right: The character displayed is in the right part of the display area.
 Use Macro: Select the option of "Use Macro" to display a list of macros. User can select one to execute
when the button is pressed. Only compiled macros are displayed in the drop-down list.

Note: For example, when the 32-bit data type is selected, the stored address occupies 2 words. For example,
when writting data to the SIEMENS PLC's data register, and the address written is V10 , then the occupied
data register address includes V10 and V11; if users also use other controls to monitor the value of V11, an
error will appear. Users should pay attention to the use of 32-bit data types in case of Note data and address
errors.
Note: Other functions in General page are the same with those of SCII Display which you can refer to.
Note: Refer to Bit Button for the application of “Advanced” and “Visibility” page.

6.5.12 Bar Graph

Graph, also called bar graph, is mainly used to present the real-time change in the numerical values in the
form of bars, so that user may view such change more visually. Graph may present the change in the
numerical values of data registers of PLC or other devices connected, and also the real-time change in all
analog quantities in process flows. See the figure below.

Figure 4-101 bar graph

Operations of adding a histogram (bar) and modifying the properties are as follows:
224
1. Select the Bar Chart icon in the toolbar or the Tools menu. Then it appears a dialog box shown in Figure
4-102.

2. Set the properties of the bar graph in the Property dialog box, and then click OK:
 Background color: The background color of the bar chart
 Border Color: Set the border color of the bar. In Figure 4-102, the setting of border color is invalid; user
can select the "shape" in another bar; the change is visible.
 Transparent: Set the background of the bar to be transparent
 Direction: The direction of the histogram scroll, there are four directions: Upward, Downward, Leftward
and Rightward.
 Upward: When the value of the monitor address increases, the columnar surface rolls from bottom to
top
 Downward: When the value of the monitor address increases, the column rolls from top to bottom
 Leftward: When the value of the monitoring address increases, the columnar surface rolls from right to
left
 Rightward: When the value of the monitor address is increased, the columnar surface rolls from left to
right
 Data type: The data type of the read address value, ie word address or double word address.
 Monitor address: The data register address that can be displayed in the bar, ie, the read address
 Maximum: The maximum value of the Monitor (read) address. When the value of the monitor (read)
address is greater than it, the bar is full and no longer changes with the value of the monitor address
 Minimum: The minimum value of the Monitor (read) address. When the value of the monitor (read)
address is less than this value, the bar is empty and no longer changes with the value of the monitor
address
 Variable range: The maximum and minimum values are dynamically changed, depending on the address
entered by the user; the data type of the address is the same as the set "Data type”
 Bipolar bar: It can be displayed on both sides according to the value of the data register.
 Midpoint: The midpoint of the bipolar bar.

225
 Figure 4-102 Bar chart dialog box

For example, assuming the maximum value is 100, the minimum is 10, and the scroll mode is upward, when
the bipolar bar is selected, input 70 to the "Midpoint" value. Then the value incremented of the monitor
address from 0 is shown in Figure 4-103.

Figure 4-103 bipolar bar graph

3. Modify the bar chart: Click on the histogram, then it will appear eight small green dots that you can drag
with the mouse to modify its size.

“Range” page:
This page is mainly used to display the value of the monitor address in the specified range to show a different
foreground color and background color. The properties are shown in Figure 4-104:

226
 Figure 4-104 Bar Graph Range page

 Display Range: When this option is selected, user can set the lower and higher limit values as well as the
low and high-level background color according to the needs. The address value monitored (read) by the
control will be represented by different color patterns in the user-set lower and higher limit values.
 Variable range: the values of "Lower Limit" and "Higher Limit" are dynamically changed, depending on
the address entered by the user
 Lower limit: Set the lower limit of the display. When the number displayed is lower than this limit, the
background color will be the color set in Low Level Background Color.
 Higher limit: Set the higher limit of the display. When the number displayed is higher than this limit, the
background color will be the color set in High Level Background Color.

After the settings, click "OK" to add the control to the view area (the screen)

Note: If the value of the monitor address is between the maximum and the minimum, the foreground and
background color is identical to the settings in “General” page.
Note: Refer to “Bit button” for the application of “Visibility”.

227
6.5.13 Time Display

The control of Time Display is mainly used to display the system time. Click on the control icon , then it
will appear a dialog box as shown in Figure 4-105.

Figure 4-105 Time Display dialog box

Note: Refer to Bit Button control for Shape, Border color, Foreground color, Background color and Pattern.

 Format: Fours modes of time display for users to choose.

HH:MM Hour: Minute
HH:MM:SS Hour: Minute: Second
HH-MM-SS Hour- Minute-Second
HH-MM Hour- Minute

 Font: Font type of text

 Font Size: Decide the font size of time display
 Color: Decide the text color of time display
 Alignment: Decide the position of time display, left, center or right.

After the settings, click "OK" to add the control to the view area (the screen)

228
6.5.14 Date Display

The control of Date Display is mainly used to display the system date. Click in the button icon in the
toolbar, then it will appear a dialog box as shown in Figure 4-106:

Figure 4-106 Date Display dialog box

 Format: There are nine modes of date display for user’s choice.
YYYY-MM-DD
MM-DD-YYYY
DD-MM-YYYY
YYYY/MM/DD
MM/DD/YYYY
DD/MM/YYYY
YYYY.MM.DD
MM.DD.YYYY
DD.MM.YYYY

 Font: Font type of text

 Font Size: Decide the font size of time display
 Color: Decide the text color of time display
 Alignment: Decide the position of time display, left, center or right.

After the settings, click "OK" to add the control to the view area (the screen)

229
Note: Refer to Bit Button control for Shape, Border color, Foreground color, Background color and Pattern.

6.5.15 Week Display

The control of Week Display is mainly used to display the system week. Click on the button icon in the
toolbar, then a dialog box will appear as shown in Figure 4-107:

Figure 4-107 Week Display dialog box

State: Change a different status value to set the border color, foreground color, background color and pattern
of different states.

Note: Refer to Bit Button control for Shape, Border color, Foreground color, Background color and Pattern.

Click on the "Text" tab where you can modify the text display, such as the text content, text size, text color,
kerning, line spacing, flicker and position. "Text" page interface is shown in Figure 4-108:

230
 Apply the first language text to all languages: When it comes to multiple languages (in the "Language" in
the Project Manager, the total number of languages selected is greater than 1), and if this option is
selected, the display contents do not change with the language switch.
 Language: This option is used when dealing with multiple languages. Select a different language, you can
enter different text contents in different states, in order to achieve the multi-language. (In the function
button, select the 'Switch language' option, and the language to switch to; in the simulation or screen,
click this button, and then all the screen with text control will switch to that with text content of the
specified language). For different languages, text content, font and font size can be different, but the
color, kerning and position are the same.
 Font: Choose the font type for the input text; different states can have different fonts, and different
languages can also have too.
 Font Size: Choose the font size for the input text content; different states can choose different font sizes,
and different languages can also too.
 Color, Kerning, Position: Set the color, kerning, and alignment of the text in the current selection. When
you select a language other than Language 1 and the total number of languages selected in the Project
Manager is greater than 1, the applications of color, kerning and position are invalid because the values
of the three function options are the same as those of the language 1

Note: To modify the contents of the text, first select the item to be modified in the list box, and then enter the
text below the editting box.

After the settings, click "OK" to add the control to the view area (the screen)
231
6.5.16 Static Picture

The control of Static picture is mainly used to show a picture that can be in various formats from the file or
from the library. With the picture loaded, it can be applied as a screen background to beautify the project
interface.

1. Click on the static picture icon on the toolbar to pop up a dialog box as shown in Figure 4-109:

Figure 4-109 Static picture dialog box

2. After selecting a picture, click OK, and then the mouse cursor will become cross-shaped; left click on
anywhere on the screen to add the picture control.
3. The size of the inserted picture can be modified through the mouse. SKTOOL configuration software
supports various image formats: JPG, BMP, PNG, WMF, EMF, GIF.

6.5.17 Picture Display

Picture Display is an extension of the Static picture control, because the Static picture can only display one
picture while Picture display can display up to 32 pictures. Picture display may have different definitions
according to different status categories selected by user.

Steps are as follows:

Click the icon of the Picture display on the toolbar. The dialog box shown in Figure 4-110 pops up:

232
 Figure 4-110 Picture Display dialog box

 Bit: When Bit is selected, the total number of states is only two, state 0 and 1. Monitor address can only
be a bit address. The control displays the corresponding picture based on the state 0 or 1 of the monitor
address.
 Value: When the Value option is selected, the total number of states can be up to 2048, and different
pictures are displayed according to the value of the monitor address. When the value of the monitor
address is 0, the picture under the state 0 is displayed, and so on.
 Auto-switching: When the auto-switching option is selected, the total number of states can be up to
2048, and the control does not need to change pictures according to the value of the monitor address, as
long as user sets the total number of states; then set the automatic transformation frequency. If it runs
in the HMI, the control will switch pictures automatically within the range.

Note: The "Picture" page of the Picture Display is similar to that of the "Multi-state Indicator Lamp" control
that you can refer to.
Note: Refer to the "Bit button" control for the application of “Visibility”.

After the settings, click "OK" to add the control to the view area (the screen).

233
 6.6 SKTOOL New controls

SKTOOL New controls

This chapter introduces the new controls.

Contents：

 Arc Chart

 Stepping Button

 Radio Button

 Radio Button

 Slider

 Animation

 Message Board

 Data Group Display

 Keyboard

 Formula Selector

 Formula Display

 Qrcode

 Operation Log

 CornEr Flow Block

234
  Multi Window

 Scroll Bar

 Pipelinet

 Dial

6.6.1 Arc Chart

The control of Arc Chart (also called Pie chart) functions similarly to the Meter, which is applied to read and
reflect the value of monitor address. In this control, the reaction area can be shown by the "Pie foreground

color", "Pie background color" and "Pattern". The control icon on the toolbar is ; click on it to pop up
a dialog box as shown in Figure 4-111:

Figure 4-111 Arc Chart General Page

The Scale page dialog box, as shown in Figure 4-112:

235
 Figure 4-112 Fascicle Scale page

Refer to the scale page of “Meter” for the settings of scale.

Refer to “Numerical display” for the parameter settings of “Advanced”.

6.6.2 Stepping Button

This command is applied to create a stepping button control in the current screen to realize the cyclic

switching of execution states. Click the button icon to pop up a dialog box as shown in Figure 4-113:

Figure 4-113 Stepping Button dialog box

State sequence: Direction of the text on the control.For example, if the total number of states is 3, then texts
236
of State 0, State 1 and State 2 are 0, 1, 2 respectively.

 Left to Right: The control is placed horizontally, ie the text is oriented from left to right: 0, 1, 2
 Right to Left: The control is placed horizontally, ie the text is oriented in a right-to-left orientation: 2, 1, 0
 Up to Down: The control is placed vertically; the text direction is in accordance with the direction from
top to bottom: 0, 1, 2
 Down to Up: The control is placed vertically; the text direction is in accordance with the direction from
bottom to top: 2, 1, 0

State Type: Refer to that of the "Multi-state Indicator Lamp".

Current state: Set the background color and text color of the text in the current state.

Refer to “Multi-state Indicator Lamp” for the parameter settings of pages of Text, Picture.
Refer to Bit button for the application of “Advanced” page and hotkeys.

E. g, assuming that the state type is "Value", the write address is LW1, the total number of states is 3, and
the text of state 0, state 1 and state 2 are 0, 1 and 2 respectively; after downloading the project to HMI, keep
on clicking on the control, whose state will be converted constantly between 0-2, and the corresponding
value will be written to LW1.

6.6.3 Radio Button

This command is applied to create a radio button control in the current screen to switch to a certain state

selected by user. Click the button icon to pop up a dialog box as shown in Figure 4-114:

Figure 4-114 Radio Button dialog box

237
State sequence: Direction of the text on the control

For example, if the total number of states is 3, then texts of State 0, State 1 and State 2 are 0, 1, 2
respectively.

 Left to Right: The control is placed horizontally, ie the text is oriented from left to right: 0, 1, 2
 Right to Left: The control is placed horizontally, ie the text is oriented in a right-to-left orientation: 2, 1, 0
 Up to Down: The control is placed vertically; the text direction is in accordance with the direction from
top to bottom: 0, 1, 2
 Down to Up: The control is placed vertically; the text direction is in accordance with the direction from
bottom to top: 2, 1, 0

State Type: Refer to that of the "Multi-state Indicator Lamp".

Current state: Set the background color and text color of the text in the current state.

Refer to “Multi-state Indicator Lamp” for the parameter settings of pages of Text, Picture.

Refer to Bit button for the applications of “Advanced” and “Visibility”.

6.6.4 Combo Box

The Combo Box allows you to display a list of items that can be viewed and selected by user. Once an item has
been selected, the corresponding value is written to the control address of the character register.

The control icon on the toolbar is ; click on it to pop up the dialog box as shown in Figure 4-115:

238
 Figure 4-115 Combo box General page dialog box

 Total Number of States: Set the number of states for this object. Each item represents a status and is
displayed on the list. The value of this item can be written to [Control Address].
 Background Color: Select the background color of the selected object
 Text Color: Select the text color of the selected object
 Control Address: Write address
 Use macro: Execute the selected macro if they are touchable.

Status Set: Click "Status Set" page; the following figure is shown (Figure 4-116):

Figure 4-116 Combo box Status Set page dialog box

239
 Language: Use a consistent "font" and "font size" for all states while different "fonts" and "font sizes" for
different languages.

 Value: Set a value for each item, but it needs to be subject to the following two specifications:
a. [Read]: If the system detects any change in the contents of [Control Address], the object will compare
the content with its value and select the first matching item. If no item matches, it will jump to the error
s9tate and triggers the error notification bit (if set).
b. [Write]: When an item is selected, the system will write the value to [Control Address].

 Label: User can set text content for each item. The item menu will show texts of all the items on the list
for user to view and select.

 Error notification
a. For example, when [Number of status] is set to 8, state 8 is the error status. Similarly, if it is 11, the state 11
is the error state.
b. When an error occurs, the combo menu will display the text of the error status.

When an error occurs, the system sets a specific bit to ON / OFF (written to [Error notification address]).
Notification of this bit register can be used to trigger an operation to correct the error.

Refer to "Bit Button" for the application of "Advanced" and "Visibility".

6.6.5 Slider

Slide analog switch: drag the sliding block to change the value contents of the corresponding character
register address.

Select the icon in the toolbar and the attribute dialog box of "Slider" will appear, as shown in Figure
4-117:

240
 Figure 4-117 Slide dialog box

 Scale position: Select the position of scale.

 Scale direction: Select the alignment direction of scale.
 Write address: when the slider is dragged, the set value can be real-time written and displayed.
 Dynamic range: Control the slider with the word address. When the dynamic range check box is not
ticked, the maximum / minimum values can be controlled by data type, and the user can also change it
freely. At the moment, the movement value of the slider is actually the value here; when the dynamic
range check box is ticked, the maximum / minimum values are received in the form of word address,
and the maximum / minimum values are controlled through address.

Refer to “Meter” for the settings of the Scale page.

Refer to “Bit button” for the application of “Advanced” and “Visibility”.

6.6.6 Animation

Animation: You can define the movement of component in advance, and control its position in the trajectory
through data of two registers, one controls the state and the other controls the position.

This control icon on the toolbar is: , after finishing drawing mobile points (Note: up to 64 points) in the
screen area), right-click to complete the draw of moving points.

Double-click the control to bring up the pop-up dialog box shown in Figure 4-118:

241
 Figure 4-118 Animation General Page dialog box

Total status: Set the number of element states

Location:
Register: When "Register" is selected, the status and position of the element is controlled by the register data.
Read Address: If the status and position are determined by the data in the register, the read address of
the element status and position must be set correctly. The format of the read address is shown in the table
below.
Data Type Control address Control address for
for Status Position
16-Bit Address Address + 1
32-Bit Address Address + 2

For example, if the register is [LW100] and the data format is "16-bit positive integer", [LW100] stores the
state of the element, and [LW101] stores the display its position. As shown in Figure 4-119, for example,
[LW100] = 2, [LW101] = 1, so the element displays state 2 and appears in position 1.

242
 Figure 4-119

 Clock: If choose "Clock" option, the component will automatically change the status and display position.
The item of "Automatic position control" is used to set the status and change mode of position.
 Speed: The speed of position change; the unit is 0.1 second. For example, 10 means the element is
shifted by one position every one second.
 Back: Assume the element has four positions -- position 0, position 1, position 2 and position 3. If this
option is not selected, the element will move to the initial position (position 0) when it moves to the last
position (position 3), and then repeat the original position change mode.

Position 0-> position 1-> position 2-> position 3-> position 0-> position 1-> position 2...

If this option is selected, the element will move to the initial position (position 0) when it is moved to the last
position, and the original position change mode will be repeated. The sequence of movement position is as
follows:
Position 0-> position 1-> position 2-> position 3-> position 2-> position 1-> position 0...

Status transition: The way of state change

You can choose Position-Based or Time-Based. Selecting "Position-based" indicates that the status changes
with the change of position.

If the "Time-Based" is selected, the position and status will be changed according to the points on the screen.

243
 Figure 4-120 Auto control position

Profile page:

Vector Diagram Size:

 Width: Width of the graphical control in the General page.
 Height: Height of the graphical control in the General page.
244
 Orbit: Adjust the position of different track points by selecting them.

Refer to “Multi-state Indicator Lamp” for settings of "Text" and "Picture" page.
Refer to “Bit button” for the application of “Visibility” page.

6.6.7 Message Board

Message Board: A control that user can write on. The control icon on the toolbar is: . Click on this button
to pop up the dialog box shown in Figure 4-121.

Figure 4-121 Message Board General Page dialog box

 Line color: The color of the text written on the control

 Line width: The width of the line describing the font

 Operating mode:
Operating Mode Address: This address is a word address and is valid only when the address is equal to 0 or 1.
An address value equal to 0 indicates a writing operation; an address value equal to 1 indicates an erasing
operation.

The address is a word address occupying 3 consecutive addresses: the first address controls the operating
mode, 0 for writing operations, 1 for erasing operations; the second address controls the line width; and the
third address controls the RGB color of the brush.

 Clear Screen
Clear screen address: when the address value is equal to that set by the clear screen status (0 or 1), it will
erase automatically all the contents written on the control

Refer to “Bit button” for the application of “Visibility” page.

245
6.6.8 Data Group Display

Data Group Display: A data group (or block) refers to data in a group of consecutive addresses, such as LW12,
LW13, LW14, LW15 and so on. The data group display element can simultaneously display the contents of a
plurality of data groups. For example, the data groups from LW12 to LW15 and fro RWI12 to RWI15 can be
simultaneously shown so that user can observe and compare the data in each register. It is also available to
draw reference curves for multiple data sets. Take the number of points as the horizontal axis, address value
of each data as the vertical axis so as to judge the change trend of a value accurately and intuitively during a
period of time. Up to 8 polylines (line graph) can be displayed.

The control icon on the toolbar is: ; click on the button, and then a dialog box pops up as shown in
Figure 4-122:

Figure 4-122 Data Group Display General dialog box

 Background color: Choose the background color of the trend graph.

 Data type: 7 data types are available for users.
 Read trigger bit: Only when the "Read trigger bit address" value is 1, the curve will move around.
 Automatic Reset: When the value of "Read Trigger Bit Address" is 1, the address will be set to 0
automatically after releasing the mouse button.
 Channel number: The number of data sets, and also the number of lines.

246
 Current Channel: Select a different channel to set the address for [Control Address] of different
channels.

 Control Address: Read Address. There are different control addresses for different channels.
This address can be set with diverse initial address according to different channel number; l the length of the
address = Len * Display points (when the data type is 16-digit, len = 1; when the data type is 32, len = 2 ).

For example, if the initial address of channel 1 is LW1, the data type is 32-bit integer, and the display points is
4, the address occupied by channel 1 is LW1 LW3 LW5 LW7;

 Display points: Quantity of control addresses to read for each channel.

 Detection
 Enabled: Whether the detection line (reference line) is enabled.
 Color: The color of the detection line (reference line).
 Detection address: Write the current corresponding value of the detection line to the detection address
register.

 For example
16-Bit, 4 Channel number, 10 Display points, LW1 for Channel 1 [Control Address]; LW100 for Channel 2
[Control Address]; LW200 for Channel 3[Control Address]; RWI1 for Channel 4 [Control Address]. Then:
Line 1: LW1 to LW10
Line 2: LW100 to LW109
Line 3: LW200 to LW209
Line 4: RWI1 to RWI10

If 32-bit data type, other settings remain unchanged:

Line 1: LW1 to LW20
Line 2: LW100 to LW119
Line 3: LW200 to LW219
Line 4: RWI1 to RWI20

Therefore, when select 32-bit data type and set N-group data, then the N group address value can be read by
plus 2 (interval) according to address rules of the different PLC models.
 Background color: The color of the line movement area.

247
 Clear Trigger Bit: Clears the current status of all lines when the Clear trigger bit address has a value
change of 0 to 1 (rising edge); otherwise it remains no change when the value falls from 1 to 0 (falling
edge) or has no change.
 Data Point marker: Each line is composed of points
 Draw line markers: Each line is composed of lines.

Refer to “Bit button” for the application of “Visibility” page.

6.6.9 Keyboard

1. Keyboard: This control is employed to customize the keyboard, composed of each button on the keyboard.
The icon of the control on the toolbar is: ; Click on the button, then a dialog box shown in Figure 4-123
will pop up.

Figure 4-123 Keyboard General Page dialog box

 State: Click "Before" and "After" buttons to set the border color, foreground color, background color and
pattern in different states.
 ENTER: Function button, whose role is to realize the input
 BACKSPACE: Function button, which is used for backspace deletion
 CLEAR: Function button applied to clear all the contents that have been input
 ESC: Function button to cancel the currently ejected keyboard, without entering anything
 ASCII: The value entered by the keyboard

Refer to “Bit button” for the application of “Visibility” page.

2. Way to add a user-defined keyboard

248
Start up the guide to add keyboard by means of the Add User-defined Keyboard in the Setting menu. Using
this guide, user may quickly add a user-defined keyboard that has been built in the program, as shown in the
figure below:

Figure 4-124 Page 1 of user-defined keyboard guide

Click Next, and an interface will pop up for keyboard type choosing. You may choose the type of the keyboard
to be added in this interface, as shown in the figure below:

Figure 4-125 Page 2 of user-defined keyboard guide

After selecting the keyboard type you want to add, click Next to load the pre-defined keyboard. There are
249
nine predefined keyboards available for loading. The user can add the required keyboard as needed. The
maximum added keyboard number could be 32, as shown in Figure 4-126

Figure 4-126 Page 3 of user-defined keyboard guide

Click OK to add the selected keyboard to the project.

6.6.10 Recipe Selector

The function of the Recipe selector is to list all recipe names in the case of recipe creation. Selecting the
specified recipe name in the list causes the recipe number to be written to recipe number register RWI0.
Correspondingly, if the value of the recipe number register RWI0 is changed, the recipe selector will also

point to the specified recipe name accordingly. The control icon on the toolbar is: ; click the icon to pop
up the dialog box shown below:

250
 Figure 4-127 Recipe Selector dialog box

 Display style

Set the display style of the recipe selector

List: The recipe selector will be displayed in the form of a list.
Dropdown box: The recipe selector will be displayed in the form of dropdown box.

 Font, Font size, Text color, and Background color are settings for list box properties and text content
properties
 Rows: This option is only available when "List" is selected for the display style.

SKTOOL adds a new function of multiple sets of recipe; developers can choose which recipe to display while
use this control, as shown below:

251
 Figure 4-128 Select the Recipe displayed

6.6.11 Recipe Display

The function of recipe display is to list the data of all recipes if any recipe has been established. The icon of

this control in the tool bar is . Click this icon, and then the following dialog box will pop up:

252
 Figure 4-129 Recipe Display General page

General page consists of settings of text contents and list properties.

Data Item page, as shown below

Figure 4-130 Recipe Display Data page

253
 Language: Choose a different language to list recipe names in different languages.
 Name: List of all recipe names
 Display: Whether to display the recipe according to user’s need.
 ALL：Select all sections in Display.

SKTOOL adds the function of multiple groups of recipe; developers can choose which recipe to display while
use this control, as shown below:

Figure 4-131 Recipe Display select recipe displayed

6.6.12 Qrcode

Select the control icon on the toolbar and set its properties in the dialog box shown below:

254
 Figure 4-132 Qrcode dialog box

 Monitor Address: Address to monitor through Qrcode

 Length: The maximum length of the character that can be displayed

6.6.13 Operation Log

Select the control icon on the toolbar and set its properties in the dialog box shown below:

Figure 4-133 Operation Log General dialog box

255
 Background color: Set the background color of display control
 Border color: Set the border color of display control
 Language: Set the text content on the title bar when select multi-language
 Font size: Font size of title bar
 Background color: Background color of title bar
 Text color: Font color of title bar
 Time: Text to display in the Time column of title bar
 User: Text to display in the User column of title bar
 Operation content: Text to display in the content column of title bar
 Font size: Font size of record text
 Text color: Text color of record text
 Rows: The maximum number of rows the control can display

To enable the HMI operation record, it needs to set the value of LW60600 equal to 1 and the variable table is
not empty;
The operation log can only record the variable operation in the variable table.

6.6.14 Corner Flow Block

The function of corner flow block is similar to the flow block.The difference is coner flow block increased

corner drawing function,and it is more flexible than flow block.

Click icon on the Toolbox,move mouse cursor to the Picture area window,it will get a tracking

cross.Click the tracking cross on the starting position of corner flow bock,and then move the mouse,there is

a line between starting position and tracking cross,click the cross on the ending position of corner flow

block,you can get first block. The ending position is also the next block’s starting position,the rotation angle is

90°.So you can get multi segment flow blocks.Right click can quit drawing.The demonstration effect as

256
shown figure 4-134.

Figure4-134 corner flow block

After drawing complete,double click the block or right click choose attribute,it will pop up a corner flow block

dialog,as shown figure 4-135.

Figure4-135corner flow block dialog

Color: Set the color properties of the Flow block.

 Flow block foreground color: Click on the color button to set the Flow block foreground color;

257
 Flow block background color: Click on the color button to set the Flow block background color;
 Pipe foreground color: Click on the color button to set its foreground color;
 Pipe background color: Click on the color button to set the pipe background color;
 Border color: Click on the button to set the border color of the Flow block control;
 Pattern: Click to select the pattern of the Flow block control; the default setting is “Solid”.
 Trigger Address: Address that controls the stationary or moving of the Flow block; when the value of the
address is 1, then the block flows.
 Attribute: Set the properties of the Flow block, such as direction, flow speed.
 Display Mode: Select "Horizontal" to make the Flow block move horizontally; and select "Vertical” to
make it flow vertically.
 Direction: When the display mode is “Horizontal”, you can choose "Left" or "Right"; in another case, "Up"
or "Down".
 Change the flow direction to the opposite direction through the trigger address: when the "Trigger
address" value is equal to that of the "Effective status" set by user, the Flow direction is switched to the
opposite.

For example, If "Flow direction" is "Left”, this option is selected, "Trigger address" is LB2, and "Effective
Status" is set to 1, then when the value of LB2 is 1, the direction of the Flow block is switched to "Right",
while when the value of LB2 is 0, the direction is changed back to the original "Left".
 Blocks: The number of Flow units, ranging from 1 to 30;
 No Border: When this attribute is selected, the edges of the Flow block are hidden.
 Flow rate: Either fixed rate or dynamic rate
 Fixed Flow rate: High, Middle or Low.
 Dynamic Flow rate: The Flow rate is determined by the value of a word address, which should be
between 1 and 10. When the value is 0, the Flow block does not flow; When the value is 1, the Flow
block flows at the lowest rate; When the value is 10, the Flow block flows at the highest rate.

The "Visibility" page can refer to that of "Bit Button" control.

6.6.15 Multi Window

Multi-window provide a rectangle area to show assigned window.

258
 Click icon on the Toolbox,it will pop up a multi-window dialog,as shown figure 4-136.

Figure 4-136 Multi-window dialog

 Data Type：the Type of data that control the showed window.include of bool and word.

“bool”：opening the assigned window on the rectangle area are judged by suit the condition.

“Word”：Choose the control address,and check “Bind with window”or “Not bind with window”,as figure

4-138 shown.

 Address：the value of address controls the window opening；

259
 Figure 4-138multi-window dialog

“Bind with window”:The value of address is the ID of assigned window.

“Not Bind with window": Check a function,when fit the condition of function,open the assigned

window.The functions is as shown follow。

Figure 4-139

Refer to “Bit button” for the application of “Visibility” page.

After setting parameter of multi-window,click”ok”,drag mouse on Picture area window,and create a

260
rectangle area.The area would display the multi-window,as shown figure 4-140.

Figure 4-140

When creating a new window,”Top window” is defaulted,as shown follow.It means that you can not operate

other screen or window when this window pop up. So you should add a screen button on the window to

close it.

Figure 4-141 window property

261
6.6.16 Path display

The function of the control is to draw the corresponding graphic elements point, line, arc, circle, etc.

The relevant addresses used by this control are all internal registers LB or LW addresses

Path display general dialog box

 Foreground color, border color, background color, Visibilitiy style reference "bit button"
 Path definition area: path correlation element definition area, data specific meaning reference chapter
finally "path definition zone address description"
 The drawing trigger bit: the address data of the bit address starts drawing, the address data is off
 Remove the trigger bit: the address data is cleared for on
 Select function: select the current drawing graph to display the relevant information
 By bitability: whether to enable the selection function, the default address is off, and the selected
function is enabled. The bits address data is on. close the selected function
 Select report data type: select report data store type as needed
 study report receiving area: set report receiving area for choosing store address, specific meaning
refer to the last of this chapter "report receiving area for choosing address"
 Search radius (pixel) : sets the search radius
 Cursor color: sets the cursor color

 notice：

 signal：

262
 Position: enable the function of selecting points, select a point in the current drawing graph,
this option will be triggered, and set the notification bit as the specified state. The notification
bit shall be manually reset to normally monitor the status of subsequent notification of
selecting points

Pulse: enable the function of selecting points, select a point in the current drawing graph, this
option will be triggered, and set the notification bit to ON, and the notification bit will be
automatically reset

Notification bit: sets the order and the address to be notified when the pulse function is
triggered

Path definition area address description：

Path definition area: specify the drawing parameter address of the path display in the following format. Take
the address LW0 address as an example. The data meaning is as follows

Word number instructions

LW0
The number of path elements in the path
LW1~LW8 Information about the first path element in
the definition
LW9~LW16 Information about the second path element
in the definition
...
...
LW（8n-7）~LW（8n）
The NTH path element in the definition

Index of related elements: point, line, arc, circle, thickness, color

point：

Word Mnemonics Describe

LW1 type The point code is 0

LW2 color color

LW3 x X coordinate of point

LW4 y Y coordinate of point

LW5~LW8 (keep) Now is zero

line：

263
Word Mnemonics Describe
LW1 type The code for the line is 1

LW2 color color

LW3 X1 Starting point x coordinate

LW4 Y1 Starting point Y coordinate

LW5 X2 End point X coordinate

LW6 Y2 End point Y coordinate

style Style type:

0: Don't show
1: The solid line
LW7 2: Dotted line
3: Point, line
4: Virtual - point line
5: Virtual dot dot line
6 Or on the: The solid line
LW8 (keep) Now the 0

The circular arc（Draws counterclockwise from the start point to the end point）：

Word Mnemonics Describe

0 type The arc code is 2
1 color color
2 X Center X coordinates
3 Y Center Y coordinate
4 X1 Starting point X coordinate
5 Y1 Starting point Y coordinate
6 X2 End point X coordinate
7 Y2 End point Y coordinate

round：

Word Mnemonics Describe

0 type The circle code is 3
1 color color
2 X Center X coordinates
3 Y Center Y coordinate
4 r Circle radius
5~7 (keep) Now is zero

：
The thickness of the（Affects subsequent elements until the next thickness appears）

Word Mnemonics Describe

0 type Thickness code 8

264
1 (keep) Now is zero
2 The thickness of the Thickness of stroke.Unit: pixel
3~7 (keep) Now is zero

The usual color value is：

color The numerical（Hexadecimal data）

black 0x0000
blue 0x0010
green 0x0400
cyan 0x0410
red 0x8000
magenta 0x8010
brown 0x8400
gray 0xc618
Dark grey 0x8410
Light blue 0x001f
Light green 0x07e0
Pale blue 0x07ff
pink 0xf800
Pale magenta 0xf81f
yellow Oxffe0
white 0xffff

Address description of the reception area of the selected report

Word number instructions

0 Select the X coordinate of the point

1 Select the Y coordinate of the point

2 Click the element, where the sequence number of the selected point

value describe

Dot: a dot
0 Line: the starting point of a line
3
Circle: the center of a circle
Arc: the starting point of an arc

1 Line: the end point of a line

Arc: the point at which an arc ends

265
6.6.17 Scroll bar

The scroll bar is a control that is used to see the data of the table class control, which is convenient for users

to browse the table data quickly. Only the following controls are supported only: alarm display, historical

alarm display, formula data display, historical data display, operating log display

The control is used for the associated controls to display too much data, unable to display the complete

situation once, and can be used to display the remaining part of the data

The control is on the toolbar ，Click the icon to pop up the dialog box below：

Scroll bar dialog box

The control function is described in detail below (the control is mainly divided into two categories:

scroll buttons and scroll bars)

Scroll bar: control table data refresh in a scroll bar

266
 Background color: setting control background color

Symbol color: set the control symbol color

Direction: set the scroll bar control to control the direction of the table data

Level: control table horizontal data display

Vertical data display control table

The associated object number, the current page exists in any of the controls mentioned in the previous

section, can be associated with the corresponding control to achieve the effect of the control. If the current

page does not have any of these controls, the error message will be prompted. "the associated object cannot

be empty. The object number is the data in the upper left corner number of the control.

Take the historical data display as an example, which is the effect of the scroll bar control

There are 75 data in the current historical data display, and the historical data display and the scroll bar are all

at the bottom

Move the scroll bar to the middle position, and the data display is shown as shown below：

267
 Scroll button: button mode control table data refresh

Border color: set the border color of the control

Background color: setting control background color

Symbol color: set the color of the symbol in the control

direction

Level: control table level data display

Vertical: control table vertical mode data display

Associated object number: reference to the previous description

Function key

The button interval, the spacing between the buttons

To the end/to the end: the mobile table data is at the start or end, as with the following two buttons,

when the data is already in the starting or end location, and the click button will pop-up the dialog box

prompt operation is invalid

268
 Page/page/page/left page/right: move a page of pages each time

Top/down or left/right: move a data in the corresponding direction each time

Pause: if the current table data is in a changing state, clicking this button can stop the table data

changes and again click back to the original state. If the current direction of the table is fixed, it will not

change, click the button prompt, and the function is invalidTake the historical data display as an example, and

the image below is the effect of the scroll button control

The current historical data display has 71 data

If you click the stop button during the program runtime ， Stop the table refresh and pop up the

following dialog

Click the stop button again ，Refresh the table and pop up the following dialog

When you click the button ，The historical data display data is changed as shown below, and the data

jumps to the beginning. Again, if you click on the tail button ，Data jump to the end

269
When you click the next page button ，The historical data display is changed in the following diagram,

the current historical data display, a page of up to 5 Numbers, and the historical data display displays the next

5 Numbers when the next page button is clicked. Again, click on the front page button ， Show the

number of five Numbers

When you click on the button ，The historical data display is shown in the following diagram, showing

the number of 1 in the top, and the same thing, when you click on the button ，The bottom shows a

number of data

270
6.6.18 Pipeline

The function of the control is to set the line diameter according to the set location of the specified control

Pipeline general dialog

Style: set line display style, style has the following several effects, display effect reference "style"

Gradual layer: setting up the line of the pipeline to display the effect, the layer has the following

results, the display effect is refer to the "gradual layer"

Diameter: the diameter of the pipeline is set, which is used to change the diameter of the

pipeline“diameter”.

Thickness: the thickness of the pipeline is set, and the thickness of the pipe is added on the basis of

the diameter of the pipeline. The effect is referenced "thickness"

Edge: the color of the pipeline thickness is set, which is the color of the pipeline edge when the

pipeline thickness is 0

Pipe wall/content: set the line main display color

Wall/content color variable

271
 See color: when the pipe wall/content color variable function is enabled, the line displays the color, the

color content is selected from the pipe wall/content, tube wall/content color # 2, tube wall/content color # 3,

which is only shown in the configuration software, and the position control of the color controlled word is

displayed in the actual operation

Tube wall/content color # 2, tube wall/content color # 3: set the different colors of the line

Scintillation control: control the line flashing

Flow control：

Control word: word, double word

Flow effect: (note that only after the pipe page is set to enable the flow effect of the pipe, the following

types can be applied to the pipes that enable the flow effect).

Preset type: setting pipe flow effect

Default color: set the flow color of the pipe

The preset length ratio is (7) : the length ratio of the pipe is set

All use the preset type, color, and length: choose to apply a type to all the pipes that enable the flow effect of

the pipe page

Control word：

The user enables the control of the tube wall/content color variable and the effect control of the effect of

the effect control, which is different from the different display effect of a control control of the selected register.

Take lw0 as an example

register No. 0 No. 1 No. 2 No.3 No. 4 No. 5 No. 6 No. 7

272
LW0 Set the Set the Line Pipelin retentio retentio retentio retentio

（ The tube wall tube wall flashing e flow n n n n

color color The current

correspondin
Tube Tube two are on
g bit is on
wall/conten wall/conten or offColor
on）
t color #3 t color #3 is the color

of the tube

wall/conten

t set

The current

two are

only set up

one time,

the line

color is

inThe

pipeline

content is

switched

between

the pipeline

content #

Pipe setting interface：

273
 Pipe setting interface

X1，Y1，X2，Y2：

The coordinate point of the pipe, the left coordinate (x1,y1), the right coordinate (x2, y2).

The user can modify the tube coordinate, need to be careful, the transverse tube can only modify the x coordinate,

the longitudinal tube can only modify the y coordinate, the Angle coordinate cannot be modified, but can modify

the Angle coordinate style type。

Flow effect: the user can set up each pipe to display different kinds of flow effect, display color, length ratio,

etc.

If the user USES the same type of display effect, you can only enable the flow effect here, using all the preset

functions in the general interface, and can be applied to the current control for all the pipes that start the flow

effect.

The display interface is the same as his control, which can refer to the "bit switch" display page.

style：

style 1

274
style2

style3

style 4

style 5

275
Gradual layer：

Pure color

Three-dimensional

style1

Three-dimensional

style 2

276
Three-dimensional

style 3

diameter：

diameter10

diameter 20

diameter 30
277
thickness：

thickness 0

thickness 1

thickness 4

thickness 8
278
6.6.19 Dial

This control expands the functions of the meter control, mainly adding more dial styles, and can set the alarm
range.

General page for dials

 Dial styles: suppport custom styles and preset styles. preset styles are like these:

Custom styles: we can customize the angle of the dial like this:

Note: There is a range limitation. The starting angle is between [-360, 360] and the ending angle is

between [starting angle, min(starting angle +360, 360)],

where min represents the minimum of the two.

 Unlike the meters, the dials can set dial pictures:

279
 There are two ways to set dial picture after selecting "Use Picture", one is to select the system

picture:

select a picture and click to set it on the dial. The other is to select the external picture:

users can select pictures in the specified directory.

Fit to the dial size : mainly used in conjunction with the dial style, the

selected picture will be cropped to the dial size when checked.

 Pointer styles

280
 support four styles，

we can custom the length, width and color of pointer.

 Center

Check to display the center of the dial(equivalent to the base of the meter), adjust the size of the

center by "Radius". We can also adjust the color of the center by "Color".

 Data type: Choose different data types according to their needs.

 Monitor address: Read the address value that is shown by the pointer on the dial plate.

 Maximum: Set the maximum value that cannot be exceeded by the monitor address value，check

this to set a dynamic value.

 Minimum: Set the minimum value that the monitor address value cannot be lower than，check this

to set a dynamic value.

2.Click the "Ticks" page to set the tick properties as shown:

281
 "Ticks" page

On this page, users can set the color of the ticks, the number of main scales, the number of sub scales,

whether to display the axis and whether to display

the scale tags and other options.

 Scale

Check "Show Ticks" will draw a scale line on the edge of the dial, and check "Show Axis" will display

the dial circumference. Set the number of scale lines

282
 displayed on the dial by "Main Scale Num"/"Sub Scale Num", and modify the length of the scale

lines by "Main Scale Len"/"Sub Scale Len".

If you choose "Outside", the scale and the scale tags will be drawn outside the scale axis, otherwise,

they will be drawn inside the axis.

Check "Tag" to display the scale value. Set the scale range by "Min" and "Max", and set the scale

display style by "Font" and "Font Size". The tags support

decimals, which can be achieved by setting "Decimal".

Modify the display direction of the scale by setting "Direction".

 Segment setting: check "segments" the dial will be divided into three segments according to the

scale, and displayed in different colors.

Click "Segment Settings" to enter the "Segment Settings" page:

283
Users can set up to 5 segments at most. Modify the fan width by "Fan Thickness" and modify the

position by "Fan Radius".

Double-click the end scale

to modify the range of each

segment.

Click the color to set the color of each segment.

284
3. In the screen editing area click to draw the control. The effect diagram of the dial control is as follows:

Dial control

4. Select the dial control graph, move the mouse on the 8 small green dots to modify its size; double-click to
re-modify the control properties.

Dial control has a fixed aspect ratio; if modify the size, its length and width enlarge or shrink in the meantime.
The "Visibility" page can refer to that of "Bit Button" control.

6.7 SKTOOL Control Instructions

SKTOOL configuration software provides full-featured basic controls. Users can double-click or right-click the

285
control in the view area to set the properties. The position and size of controls can be modified manually in
the status bar below or directly drag the mouse.

Address input of controls: It is available to input an address directly through a keyboard when it needs to
operate on the PLC address. The address name is case-insensitive.

Status combo box: In the toolbar, there is a combo box where to display and change the state of bit button,
bit indicator, multi-state button, multi-state indicator, graphics move, message display and picture display.

When a control of the above type is selected, its current state is displayed in the status combo box that users
can pull down to change the current state.

Address Search: Query the use of an address and list the information of control occupying this address;
double-click the information item to select the control.

Enter the address and select "Find", then the information output window will list the search results:

Choose the search result and double-click to select the control occupying the address currently.

Address Display: Click the "Address Display" to show the list of addresses used by the configuration project;
double-click a message, then it will pop up the property page of control using this address so as to set the
property settings easily and quickly.

286
In the Display Mode, you can specify the selected address information or display all the screens.

Overlay of control: You can execute multiple controls by one operation through stacking controls. SKTOOL
supports stacking up to 32 controls. When multiple controls are overlaid and touched, the corresponding
operations are performed in the order in which they are superimposed, as shown in Figure below:

Superimposing the control 1, 2 and 3, after the touch, execute in turn the command 1, 2 and 3.

If there is a screen switch button in the overlaid control, it will switch the screen when it comes to the turn of
this command. The superimposed button commands that are after the screen button will not be executed.
Similarly, if there is a pop-up input keyboard, it will pop up a keyboard while without executing the after
commands.

287
 7. Script

Script is an advanced control method for touch screen, which provides more strong functions for touch
screen. Through programming for script command, the touch screen is given the same functions as logic
and arithmetic operation with PLC. Using the macro flexibly is capable to achieve many strong functions
that are unavailable for conventional components and to perfect the human-computer interface more.

SKTOOL provides new full scripts that are different from the script language mode of other
human-computer interfaces, and these scripts are compatible with standard C Language (ANSI C89). As
there are many literatures about C Language and this information are available easily, this chapter will not
introduce syntax and basic knowledge in details to review the relevant basis of different macros but
emphasize the establishment and usage of macros by instances.

This chapter will explain basic C Language briefly, relevant usage of script instruct
on and considerations.

Contents：

 Introduction to C language

 C language programming preliminary

 scripts function introduction

288
7.1 Introduction to C language

 Data type of C language

 Initial value of variable and type conversion

 One-dimensional array

 Basic operator and expression

 Section summary

7.1.1 Data type of C language

1. Integer

Integer includes integer constant and integer variable. The integral constant is the integer constant. In C
language, there are three kinds of integer constant: octal, hexadecimal and decimal.

2.Integer constant

1. Octal integer constant

The octal integer constant must begin with 0. That is to say, 0 is the prefix of octal integer constant.
Its value is 0-7.Octal constant is usually unsigned. The followings are the legal octal:

015 (decimal:13) 0101 (decimal:65) 0177777 (decimal:65535)

The followings are the illegal octal:

256 (without prefix 0) 03A2 (contained non-octal codes) -0127(with negative sign)

2. Hexadecimal integer constant

The hexadecimal integer constant is prefixed with 0X or ox. Its value is 0-9, A-F or a-f.

289
 The followings are the legal hexadecimal:

0X2A (decimal:42) 0XA0 (decimal:160)0XFFFF (decimal: 65535)

The followings are the illegal hexadecimal:

5A (without prefix 0X) 0X3H (contained non-hexadecimal codes)

3. Decimal integer constant

The octal integer constant has no prefix. Its value is 0-9.

The followings are the legal decimal: 237 -568 65535 1627

The followings are the illegal decimal:

023 (prefix 0 is forbidden) 23D (contained non-decimal codes)

In the program, these notations are distinguished by prefix. Therefore, do not mistake the prefix in writing
to avoid incorrect result.

3. When the suffix of integer constant is on the 16-bit computer, its basic integer is 16-bit. Therefore, the
indicated figure value is limited. The decimal unsigned constant is within 0 ～ 65535, and the signed

range is -32768 ～+32767.The unsigned octal number is ranged within 0 ～ 0177777. The unsigned

hexadecimal number is within 0X0～0XFFFF or 0x0～0xFFFF.If the figure is beyond the above range, it

must indicate with long integer. The long integer is suffixed with "L" or "l".

For example:

Decimal long integer constant 158L (decimal: 158) 358000L (decimal: -358000)

Octal long integer constant 012L (decimal: 10) 077L (decimal: 63) 0200000L (decimal: 65536)

Hexadecimal long integer constant 0X15L (decimal: 21) 0XA5L (decimal: 165) 0X10000L
(decimal: 65536).

There is no difference between long int 158L and basic int constant 158. As 158L is the long integer, C
compiling system will assign 4-bit space for storage. As 158 is the long integer, C compiling system will assign
2-bit space for storage. Therefore, pay attention to operation and output format to avoid mistakes. The
unsigned number can be indicated with suffix. The unsigned number of integer constant is suffixed with
"U" or "u". For example: 358u,0x38Au, 235Lu are the unsigned number. Use prefix and suffix together to

290
indicate different figures. For example, 0XA5Lu indicates the hexadecimal unsigned long int A5 and the
corresponding decimal is 165.

3. Integer variable

The integer variable can be classified as following:

1. Int

Its type specifier is int, which occupies 2 bytes in the memory. Its value is always basic integer.

2. Short int

Its type specifier is short int or short'C110F1. The occupied bytes and value range is same to basic int.

3.Long int

Its type specifier is long int or long, which occupies 4 bytes in the memory. Its value is always long integer.

4. Unsigned int

Its type specifier is unsigned.

The unsigned int can be integrated with the above three types:

(1) The type specifier of unsigned int is unsigned int or unsigned.

(2) The type specifier of unsigned short int is unsigned short.

(3) The type specifier of unsigned long int is unsigned long.

All unsigned int occupies the same memory bytes with the signed int. As the sign bit is omitted, it can not
indicate the negative number. The following table lists the assigned memory bytes and number range of
various integers in ARM.

Type Number Range Assigned Bytes

Specifier
Int -2147483648~2147483647 ■■■■
Short int -2147483648~2147483647 ■■■■
Signed -2147483648~2147483647 ■■■■
int
Unsigne 0~4294967295 ■■■■
d int
Long int -922337203685477808~92233720368547780 ■■■■■■■
7 ■
Unsigne 0~18446744073709551615 ■■■■■■■
d long ■

291
 4. Integer variable declaration

The general form of variable declaration: type specifier, variable name identifier, …. Take examples as
following:

int a,b,c; (a,b,c is integer variable)

long x,y; (x,y is long integer variable)

unsigned p,q; (p,q is unsigned integer variable)

Announcements in writing variables should be paid attention as following:

1. Several same type of variables can be allowed to indicate after the same type specifier. Space the
variable names with comma. There must be a space at least between the type specifier and variable
name.

2. The last variable name must be ended with ";".

4. The variable declaration must be in front of variable usage. It is always at the head of
function body.
[Practice] //1int a,b;
short int c;
short d=100;
a=d-20;
b=a+d;
c=a+b+d;
d=d-a+c-b.

5. Float constant

Real constant is also called float constant. Real constant is also called float constant. In the C language,
the float is indicated with decimal only. It has two forms as following: Decimal form and exponential
form

1.Decimal form
292
It is composed with figure 0-9 and decimal point. For example: 0.0,.25,5.789,0.13,5.0,300.,-267.8230 are the
legal float number.

5. Exponential form

It is composed of decimal digit, exponent symbol "e" or "E" and exponent (be integer only, symbol is possible).
The basic form is an E n (a is decimal, n is decimal integer) and the value is a*10,n. For example, 2.1E5 (equal
to 2.1*10,5), 3.7E-2 (equal to 3.7*10,)-2*) 0.5E7 (equal to 0.5*10,7), -2.8E-2 (equal to -2.8*10,)-2*). The
following are the illegal float number: 345 (without decimal point) E7 (without figure before exponent
symbol) -5 (without exponent symbol) 53.-E3 (negative sign is incorrect) 2.7E (without exponent)

The standard floating number in C language has suffix. The figure with suffix "f" or "F" is the floating number.
For example, 356f and 356 is equivalent.

6. Float variable

The float variable includes single and double. Their type specifiers are float and double. In the Turbo C,

the single occupies four bytes (32-bit) memory, and it is ranged between 3.4E-38～3.4E+38, which provides

seven effective figures only. The double occupies 8 bytes (64-bit) memory, and the value is ranged

between 1.7E-308 ～ 1.7E+308, which provides sixteen effective figures.

The form and written rules for float variable declaration is same with that of integer.

For example: float x,y; (x,y is single float)

double a,b,c; (a,b,c is double float)

The float constant is not classified into single and double. All float constants are processed as double.

a ■■■■
b ■■■■■■■■
a<---33333.33333
b<---33333.333333333;
[Practice]//floatint a=32;
float b;
Double d;
b=1234568;
d=b*100；
d=d+a；
d=d+58.123456；

7. Character

Characters include character constant and character variable.

Character constant

293
Character constant is a character within single quote. For example, 'a'. 'b', '=', '+', , '?' are the legal character
constants. In the C language, the character constants are always characterized as following:

1. Character constant must be included in single quote rather than double quotes or other brackets.

2. Character constant must be single character rather than character string.

3. Character may be any character in the character set. However, the figure cannot be involved in
numerical operation after been defined as character. For example, '5' and 5 is different. '5' is
character constant that are not involved in operation.

8. Character variable

The character variable value is character constant, i.e. single character. Its type specifier is char. The
form and written rules of character variable declaration is same with that of integer variable.

For example:

char a,b;As each character variable is assigned to a byte memory, one character is saved only. The
character value is kept in the memory unit with ASCII code. For example, the decimal ASCII code for x is
120, and the decimal ASCII code for y is 121. Give 'x' and 'y' to character variable a and b: a='x', b='y'.
Actually, it is to store 120 and 121 BC in a and b unit:

a0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
b0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

Therefore, they can be regarded as integer. C language allows to give character value to integer variable and
give integer to character variable as well. It can output character variable as integer and output integer as
character. The integer is 2-byte, and character is single byte. When the integer is processed as character, the
low eight bytes are involved only.
[Practice]//charint a=49;
char b;
char d;
b=a+10;
d=a+b;
[Practice] //char c1,c2;
c1='a';c2='b';
c1=c1-32;c2=c2-32;

294
 9. Character string constant

Character string constant is a character string included in double quotes. For example: "CHINA". "C
program", "$12.5", they are legal character string constants. The character string
constant is different from character constant. Their differences are described as following:

1. Character constant is included in single quotes while character string constant is included
in double quotes.

2. Character constant is single character only while character string constant contains one or
several characters.

3. A character can be given to a character variable, but a character string constant can not. In the C
language, there is no corresponding character string variable.

4. The character constant occupies one byte in the memory. The bytes of character string constant
are equal to the bytes of character string plus 1. Save character "\0" (ASCII code:0) in the increased
byte. This is the ending symbol of character string. For example, the byte of "C program" in memory
is C program\0. Although the character constant 'a' and character string constant ''a'' has one
character both, their memory occupation is different.

'a' occupies one byte in the memory, which is indicated as a

''a'' occupies two bytes in the memory, which is indicated as a\0 symbol constant.

10. Symbol constant

In the C language, a constant can be expressed with an identifier, which is called symbol constant. It must be
defined before usage. Its general form is:

#define symbol constant

Wherein, #define is a preprocessor directive, which is called macro definition directive. It is used to define the
identifier to the constant value. Upon definition, all of this identifier in the future program will be replaced by
the constant value. Usually, the identifier of symbol constant is expressed with capital letter and the variable
identifier is expressed with lowercase letter for distraction.

#define PI
3.14159 void
main(){
295
 float s,r;
r=5;
s=PI*r*r
;
printf("s=%f\n",s);

It is defined by macro definition directive. P1 is defined to be 3.14159, and s,r is defined to be float.
5->r PI*r*r->s

Display program result float s,r. wherein, r=5, s=PI*r*r. This program is defined by macro definition
directive before main function. P1 is 3.14159, which substitutes for P1 in the program. s=PI*r*r is equivalent
to s=3.14159*r*r. Pay attention: symbol constant is not variable. Its value can not be changed in the overall
action scope. That is to say, assignment statement is forbidden to re-assign in the program.

7.1.2 Initial value of variable and type conversion

1. Initial value assignment for variable

In the program, it is usually to assign initial value for the variable. There are many methods for initial
value assignment in the language program, which are called initialization. In the variable declaration,
the general form of initial value assignment is:

Type specifier variable 1 = 1, variable 2 = 2, ……; for example:

int a=b=c=5;

float x=3.2,y=3f,z=0.75;

char ch1='K',ch2='P';

Note: no continuous assignment is forbidden in the declaration, for instance a=b=c=5 is illegal.

2. Type conversion of variable

The variable type is convertible. There are two methods for conversion. One is automatic conversion,

296
 the other is forced conversion.

Automatic conversion

When the different types of data are involved in hybrid operation, the automatic conversion is
completed by compilation system. The auto conversion should conform to the following rules:

1. If the data types involved in operation are different, first convert them into one type, then make
operation.

2. Conversion is made as the data length so as to ensure the high precision. For example, when
int and long is in operation, convert int into long, then make operation.

3. All float operations are double. Even the expression contains float only, it must be converted to double
for operation.

4. Char and short must be converted into int for operation.

5. In the assignment operation, when the data types on both sides of assignment sign are different,
the right data type will be converted to the left type. If the right data is longer than left one, it will
loss a part of data. In this case, the precision will be reduces. The lost data will be rounded off.

3. Forced type conversion

The forced type conversion is achieved by type conversion operation. Its general form is (type specifier)
(expression). It is used to convert the operation results into the specified type of type specifier by force.
Take an example of (float) a. convert a to float (int)(x+y), convert the result of x+y into integer. In
forced conversion, there are some points to be noted:

1. Type specifier and expression must be included in the bracket (the single variable may not be
bracketed). If (int)(x+y) is written to be (int)x+y, it means to convert x into int and plus y.

2. Either forced conversion or auto conversion is just the temporary conversion of data length for
convenience of the operation. It will not change the variable type in the data declaration.

297
7.1.3 One-dimensional array

In the program design, the array organizes several variables with same category in ordered form for
convenience. The set containing data elements with the same category in order is called array. In C
language, the array belongs to construction data. One array can be split into several array elements. These
array elements are either basic data or construction data. Therefore, the array can be classified into
numerical array, character array, pointer array, structure array according to the category of array element.

This section will introduce the numerical array and character array, others will be described in the
successive sections. If the array type declaration uses array in C language, it must be made type
declaration first. The general form of array declaration is: type specifier array name [constant
expression]. Wherein, type specifier refers to any basic data or construction data. Array name refers to
the array identifier defined by users. The constant expression in square bracket indicates the quantity of
data elements, which is also called array length.

For example:

int a[10]; int array a contains 10 elements.

float b[10],c[20]; float array b contains 10 elements; float array c contains 20 elements.
char ch[20]; character array ch contains 20 elements.

For the array type declaration, there are several points as following:

1. The array type actually refers to the value type of array element. For the same array, the data type
of all elements is the same.

2. The writing rules for array name should conform to that

of identifier.

3. The array name should not be same with other variable name. For example: void main ()
{

int a;

float a[10];

……

} is incorrect

4. The constant expression in the square bracket refers to the element quantity. For example, a [5]
298
 indicates that array a contains 5 elements. However, its subscript is started from 0. Therefore, the five
elements are a[0],a[1],a[2],a[3],a[4].

5. The square bracket can not include the element quantity of variables but symbol constant or
constant expression is available. For instance:
#define F
void main ()

int a[3+2],b[7+FD];

……

} is legal. However, the following expression form is incorrect.

void main()
{

int n=5;

int a[n];

……

6. It is allowed that the same type declaration can describe several arrays and several variables.

For example: int a,b,c,d,k1[10],k2[20];

1. Representation of array element

Array elements are the basic unit of array. It is also a variable, which is identified with array name and a
subscript. The subscript indicates the sequence number of element in the array. The general form of array
element is: array name [subscript]. Wherein, subscript is integer constant or integer expression only. If it has
decimal, this value will be integer automatically by C programming. For example, a[5],a[i+j],a[i++] are the
legal array elements. Array element is usually called subscript variable. The subscript variable could not be
used unless array is defined. In C language, the subscript variable is used one by one rather than the whole
array.

The general form of initialization assignment is: static type specifier array name [constant
expression]=[value……]. Wherein, static refers to the static storage type. It is specified that only static
storage array and external storage array can be initialized assignment (the relevant static storage and
external storage concepts will be introduced in Chapter 5) in C language. The data in { } are the initial
value of each element, and the elements are spaced with comma such as static int

299
a[10]={ 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 }, which is equivalent to a[0]=0;a[1]=1...a[9]=9;

2. There are several provisions for initial assignment of array in C language:

1. It is allowed to assign initial value for partial elements. When the elements in { } is less than element
quantity, the initial value is assigned for the front only. For example: static int a[10]={0,1,2,3,4}, it indicates

that the initial value will be assigned for the first 5 elements a[0] ～ a[4], and the last 5 elements will be

assigned 0 automatically.

2. Assign initial value for element one by one, and the overall assignment for array is unavailable. For
example, if assigning 1 for 10 elements, it can write to be static int a[10]={1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1} rather than
static int a[10]=1.

3. If the initial value assignment is unavailable for all arrays with initialization, all elements will be 0.

3. If assigning all elements, the array element quantity may not be given in the array declaration. For
example: static int a[5]={1,2,3,4,5} can be written as static int a[]={1,2,3,4,5}. The dynamic assignment can
be made during program execution. In this case, it can use do statement and scanf function to assign the
array elements one by one.

3. Character array

The array for storing characters is called character array. The form of type declaration for character array is
same to that of numerical array as previous introduction. For example: char c[10]. As the character and
integer is similar, it can be defined as int c[10], but each array element occupies 2 bytes in memory. The
character array may be two-dimensional array. For instance, char c[5][10] is a two-dimensional
character array. The character array is allowed to made initialization assignment in type
declaration. Take static char c[10]={`c`,` `,`p`,`r`,o`,g`,r`,`a`,`m`} as an example. After assignment, the
element value is c[0]c[1]c[2]c[3]c[4]c [5]c[6]c[7]c[8]c[9] for array C. Wherein, c[9] is not assigned and
assigned to 0 by system automatically. When assigning initial value for all elements, the length declaration
can be omitted such as static char c[]={`c`,` `,`p`,`r`,`o`,`g`,`r`,`a`,`m`}, in which the length of C array is set
to 9.

C language allows for initialization assignment for array in character string. For
example, static char c[]={'c', ' ','p','r','o','g','r','a','m'} can be written to static char c[]={"C program"}
or static char c[]="C program" without {}. The assignment in character string occupies one more byte than
assignment one by one. It is used to store the ending sign of character string '\0'. The actual storage of array
300
c in memory is C program\0. Wherein, `\0' is added by C programming system automatically. As '\0' sign is
adopted, the array length is not normally defined in initialization assignment of character string but
processed by system automatically. If in the mode of character string, the input and output of character
array becomes simple and convenient. Except the initial value assignment with character string, it can input
and output the character string of one character array with printf function and scanf function at one time
not requiring input/output each character with do statement one by one.

7.1.4 Basic operator and expression

Category, priority and associativity of operator

There are many operators and expressions in C language, which is seldom in the high-level language. It is
the rich operator and expression that complete the C language. This is one of main features of C
language.

The operators of C language have different priorities. In addition, they have individual associativity. In the
expression, the data for operation should not only conform to the priority of operators but also subjected
to the associativity so as to confirm the operation direction from left to right or from right to left. This
associativity is unavailable for other high-level language, which increases the complexity of C language.

Operator Category

The operators of C language can be classified as following:

1. Arithmetic operator

It is used for different data operations, including addition (+), subtraction (-), multiplication (*) and
division(/) (or modular arithmetic, %), increment (++) and decrement (--).

2. Relational operator

It is used for comparison operation, including greater than (>), less than (<), equal to (==), be equal or
greater than (>=), be equal or less than (<=) and unequal to (! =).

3. Logical operator

It is used for logical operation, including And (&&), Or (||) and Not (!).

4. Bit operation operator

The data for operation is taken as binary bit, including bit and (&), bit or (|), bit not (~), bit or (^), left
shift (<<) and right shift (>>).

5. Assignment operator

It is used for assignment operation, including simple assignment (=), composite arithmetic assignment
301
 (+=,-=,*=, /=, %=)
and composite bit operation assignment (&=,|=, ^=,>>=,<<=).

6. Conditional operator

This is a ternary operator for conditional evaluation (?:).

7. Comma operator

It is used for combining several expressions to one expression (, ).

8. Pointer operator

It is used for two operations as content-of (*) and address-of (&).

9. Size-of operator

It is used for size-of operation of data.

7.1.5 Section summary

1. C data type

Basic type, construction type, pointer type and

void type

2. Classification and characteristics of basic type

Type Specifier Byte Number Range

char 1 C character set

int 4 -214783648～214783647

short int 4 -214783648～214783647

long int 8 -922337203685477808～922337203685477807

unsigned 4 0～4294967295

unsigned long 8 0～1844744073709551615

float 4 3/4E-38～3/4E+38

double 8 1/7E-308～1/7E+308

3. Constant suffix

302
L or l for long int

U or u for unsigned

F or f for float

4. Constant type

Int, long int, unsigned, float, char, char string, symbol constant, and escape character

5. Data type conversion

Auto conversion

The system realizes auto conversion for the hybrid operation of different types of data, which converts
from small byte data to big byte data. For the mutual assignment of different data, the system also
converts automatically, which converts the right data type into left one.

Forced conversion

It is converted by forced conversion operator.

6. Priority and associativity of operator

Generally speaking, the unary operator has higher priority and the assignment operator has lower
priority. The arithmetic operator has higher priority, and the relational and logical has lower priority.
Most operators have left associativity, unary operator, ternary operator and assignment.

7. Expression

Expression is the formula composed with connection constant, variable and function of operator. Each
expression has one value and type. The evaluation of expression is made according to the sequence
specified by priority and associativity of operator.

8. Array

1. Array is the commonest data structure in program design. The array contains numerical array (int
array, float array), character array and pointer array, structure array to be described later.

2. Array may be one-dimensional, two-dimensional or

multi-dimensional.

3. The type declaration of array consists of type specifier, array name and array length (elements
quantity of array). The array element is also called subscript variable. The array type refers to the
value type of subscript variable.

4. Make array assignment with three methods: initialization assignment, dynamic assignment by
inputting function and assignment statement. The numerical array can not be overall assigned, input
or output with assignment statement but assigned for array element one by one with do statement.

303
7.2 C language programming preliminary

 Statement of C program

 Branch structure program

 switch statement

 Loop structure program

 for statement

 break statement

 continue statement

 Section summary

7.2.1 Statement of C program

The execution part of C program is constituted by statements, and the program function is also realized
by execution statement. C statement is classified into five categories:

1. Expression statement

2. Control statement

3. Compound statement
4. Null statement

304
 1. Expression statement

Expression statement consists of expression and semicolon. Its general form is expression;. Execution of
expression statement is to compute the expression value. For example, x=y+z; assignment statement
y+z; operate statement with addition, but the result is not kept. It has no actual significance i++.
Increment 1 statement, i value increases 1.

2. Control statement

Control statement is to control the program process so as to realize various structures of program.

It is composed of special statement delimiter. There are nine control statements in C language, which can
be classified into three kinds:

(1) Conditional judgment statement

if statement, switch statement

(2) Looping execution statement

do while statement, while statement, for statement

(3) Go to statement

break statement, go to statement, continue statement, return statement

3. Null statement

The statement with semicolon only is called null statement. Null statement executes nothing. In the
program, null statement can be the null loop body. Take an example of while (getchar()!='\n'). For this
statement, if the character input from keyboard is not Enter, it requires re-input. Here, the loop body is
null statement.

4. Assignment statement

Assignment statement consists of assignment expression and semicolon. Its general form is variable =
expression. Its functions and features are same to that of assignment expression. It is one of the most
popular statements in the program. There are some points to be noted in the usage of assignment
statement:

1. As the expression on the right of assignment sign "=" can be an assignment expression,

305
 the following form Variable=(variable=expression); is established, then the nestification is
formed. Its expanded expression is Variable=Variable=…=Expression;

For
example:

a=b=c=d=e=5; according to the right associativity of assignment operator, it is equivalent

to: e=5 actually;

d=e ;
c=d;
b=c;
a=b
;

2. Pay attention to the difference between assigning initial value and statement for variable in the
variable declaration.Assigning initial value to variable is a part of variable declaration. The variable
with initial value assignment should be spaced with comma to other similar variable, but the
assignment statement must be ended with semicolon.

3. In the variable declaration, it is forbidden to assign initial value for several variables successively.
For example, the following declaration is incorrect. Int a=b=c=5 must be written to int a=5,b=5,c=5.
However, the assignment statement must be assigned continuously.

4. Note the difference between assignment expression and assignment statement. Assignment
expression is a kind of expression, which can be used in any allowable place. But the assignment
statement can not.The following statement is legal: if((x=y+5)>0) z=x; the function of statement:
if expression x=y+5 is greater than 0, then z=0.

The following statement is illegal: if((x=y+5;)>0) z=x; as x=y+5; is a statement, it can not be used in
expression.

7.2.2 Branch structure program

Relational operator and expression

In the program, it usually compares the size of two data so as to confirm the next process. The operator
for comparing data size is called the relational operator. There are such relational operators in C

306
 language as following:

< less than

<= less than or equal to

> greater than

>= greater than or equal to

== equal to

!= unequal to

The relational operator is binary operator, which is left associative. Its priority is lower than that of
arithmetic operator and higher than that of assignment operator. In the six relational operators, <,<=,>,>=
has the same priority, which is higher than == and !=. While == and != has the same priority.

Relational expression

The general form of relational expression is Expression Relational operator Expression.For example,
a+b>c-d,x>3/2,'a'+1<c,-i-5*j==k+1 are legal relational expression. As the expression is relational expression
concurrently, the nestification may occur such as a>(b>c),a!=(c==d) etc. The value of relational expression is
"true" and "false", which is expressed with "1" and "0".

1.Logical operator and expression

In C language, the logical operators include AND operator &&, OR operator || and NOT operator !. AND
operator && and OR operator || are binary operators with left associativity. NOT operator ! is unary
operator with right associativity. The priority relation between logical operator and other operators can be
expressed as following:

The following can be derived depending on the priority of operator:

a>b && c>d is equivalent to (a>b) && (c>d)

!b==c||d<a is equivalent to ((!b)==c)||(d<a)

a+b>c && x+y<b is equivalent to ((a+b)>c) && ((x+y)<b)

Evaluation of logical operation

The evaluation of logical operation may be true or false expressed with 1 and 0 individually. Its evaluation
rules are as following:

1. When the two values of AND operation && are true, the results are true; otherwise they are false. For
example, 5>0&& 4>2. As 5>0 is true and 4>2 is true, the corresponding result is true.

2. When one of two values involved in OR operation || is true, the result is true. When two values are false,

307
the result is false. Take an example of 5>0||5>8. As 5>0 is true, the corresponding result is true.

3. When the NOT operation! involved in operation is true, the result is false; when the involved operation
is false, the result is true.

For example, the result of !(5>0) is false.

In the logical operation value of C programming, it represents “true” with “1” and represents “false” with “0”.
Vice versa, when judging a value is true or false, 0 represents false and the non-zero data represents true.
For example, as 5 and 3 are non zero, the value of 5&&3 is “true” (i.e. 1).

Another example: the value of 5||0 is “true” (i.e. 1).

The general form of logical expression is Expression – Logical operator – Expression. Wherein, the
expression can be logical expression as well, which forms nestification? Take the (a&&b) &&c as an instance.
The above expression can be written to a&&b&&c according to the left associativity of logical operator. The
value of logical expression is the final value of various logical operation, which represents “true” and “false”
with “1” and “0” respectively.

2. if statement

The branch structure can be constituted with if statement. It makes judgment according to the given
conditions so as to confirm what branch program period is to be executed. If statement of C language has
three basic forms.

1. The first form is: basic form. if (expression) statement

It’s semanteme: if the expression value is true, the following statement will be executed, otherwise not.

2. The second form is if-else. if(expression)

statement 1; else statement 2;
Semanteme: if the expression value is true, it will execute statement 1; otherwise statement 2.
Input two integers, and output the bigger one. Judge a and b size with if-else statement. If a is bigger, it
outputs a;

otherwise b.

3. The third form is if-else-if form.

In the first two forms, if statement is normally used for two branches. When there are several branches for
selection, if-else-if statement is adopted. Its basic form is:

if(expression 1)

statement 1;

else if(expression 2)

statement 2;

else if(expression 3)
308
statement 3;

else if(expression m)

statement m; else statement n;

Semanteme: judge the expression value in sequence. When a value is true, it executes the corresponding
statement. Then it executes program out of if statement. If all expressions are false, it will execute
statement n. Then continue to execute the subsequent program.

There are some points to be noted in if statement:

(1) In the three forms of if statement, the one behind if is expression. This expression is usually the
logical expression or relational expression. But it may be other expressions such as assignment
expression even a variable. For example, if(a=5) statement and if(b) statement are allowable. As
long as the expression value is not 0, it is true. If the expression value in if(a=5)…; expression is
always not 0, the subsequent statement will be executed. This kind of situation may not take place
in the program, but the syntax is legal.

Another example, program segment: if(a=b)

printf("%d",a)

; else

printf("a=0");

Semanteme of the statement: assign b to a. if it is not 0, this value is output; otherwise it outputs
“a=0” character string. This kind of application usually occurs in the program.

(2) In if statement, the conditional judgment expression must be included in bracket, and ended with
semicolon.

(3) In the three forms of if statement, all statements should be single statement. If a group
(several) statements are required execution with conditions, this group of statements must be
bracketed with {} to form a compound statement. Pay attention that no semicolon is allowed
behind }.

For example:

if(a>b){

a++;

b++;

309
 }

else{ a=0;

b=10;

4. Conditional operator and conditional expression

If the single assignment statement is executed only in the conditional statement, it is usually realized
by conditional expression, which not only simplifies the process but also improves the operation
efficiency.

Conditional operator ? and : is a ternary operator, which means three values are involved in operation.
The general form of conditional expression composed by conditional operators is:

Expression 1 ? Expression 2: Expression 3

Its evaluation rule: if the expression 1 is true, its value of expression 2 will be the value of conditional
expression; otherwise, the value of expression 2 will be the value of whole conditional expression.
Conditional expression is normally applied in assignment statement. For example:

if(a>b) max=a;

else max=b;

max=(a>b)?a:b; is expressed with conditional expression. Its semanteme is: if a>b is true, assign a to
max; otherwise assign b to max.

In the application of conditional expression, there are some points to be noted as following:

1. The operation priority of conditional operator is lower than that of relational operator and
arithmetic operator but higher than assignment operator. Therefore, max=(a>b)?a:b can be
removed the bracket to be max=a>b?a:b.

2. Conditional operator ? and : is a pair of operator, which can not be separated in application.

3. The associative direction of conditional operator is from right to left.

7.2.3 switch statement

C language provides another switch statement for selection of multiple branches. Its general form is:

switch(expression){
case constant expression 1: statement 1;

case constant expression 2: statement 2;

310
…

case constant expression n: statement n;

default: statement n+1;

Semanteme: calculate the expression value, and compare with the subsequent constant expression value
one by one. When the expression value is equal to a constant expression value, the subsequent
statement is executed. Then judgment is not made. Continue the statement behind all case. If the
expression value is different from the constant expression behind case, it will execute the statement behind
default.

There are several points to be noted in switch

statement:

1. All constant expression values behind case must be different, otherwise there
will be mistake.

2.Several statements are allowed behind case, and they can not be
bracketed with {}.

3. The sequence of case and default clauses may be changed and will not affect the
program execution.

4. Default clause may be

omitted

7.2.4 Loop structure program

The loop structure is an important structure of program. When the given condition is satisfied, one
program segment is executed repeatedly until the condition is unsatisfied. The given condition is called
loop condition, and the program segment executed repeatedly is called loop body. C language provides
many loop statements, which may compose different loop structures.

1.While statement

The general form of while

statement: While (expression)

311
 statement;

wherein, the expression is loop condition, and the statement is loop body.

Semanteme of while statement: compute the expression value. When the value is true (not 0), the loop
body statement is executed.

There are some points to be noted in while statement:

1. The expression of while statement is usually the relational expression or logical expression. As long
as the expression value is true (not 0), it can continue loop.

2. If the loop body contains one or more statements, it must be bracketed with {} to form the compound
statement.

3. Note the loop conditions to avoid endless loop.

2. Do-while statement

General form of do-while statement:

do
statement;

while
(expression);

Wherein, the statement is loop body, and the expression is the

loop condition. Semanteme of do-while statement:

First execute the loop body statement for one time, then judge the expression value. If the value is true
(not 0), the loop is continuous; otherwise the loop ends.

The difference between do-while statement and while statement is that do-while executes first and
judges late. Therefore, do-while will execute the loop body for one time at least. But while statement
judges first and executes late. If the condition is unsatisfied, the loop body statement is not executed
for one time.

while statement and do-while statement is usually

mutual re-write.

In this example, the loop condition is rewritten to be –n. Otherwise, one more loop

will be executed. There are some points to be noted in do-while statement:

1. In the if statement and while statement, no semicolon is added behind the expression; while
the expression of do-while statement must be ended with semicolon.

2. do-while statement may be composed to the nested loop and nested with while
statement mutually.
312
 3. The loop body between do and while is made up of several statements, and bracketed with {} to
form a compound statement.

5. When converting do-while and while statement mutually, pay attention to modify the loop
control conditions.

7.2.5 for statement

For statement is a kind of loop statement with stronger function and wider application provided by C
language. Its general form is:

For (Expression 1;Expression 2;Expression 3)

statement;

Expression1: it is usually to assign initial value to loop variable, and it is assignment expression. It also
allows to assign initial value to loop variable except for statement. In this case, the expression may be
omitted.

Expression 2: it is usually the loop condition, and it is relational expression or

logical expression. Expression 3: it is usually for modifying the value of loop

variable, and it is assignment statement.

These three expressions may be comma expression. That is to say, each expression can be composed with
several expressions. Three expressions are options and can be omitted.

The “statement” in general form is loop body statement. Semanteme of for statement is:

1. First, calculate the value of expression 1.

2. Then, compute the value of expression 2. If the value is true (not 0), loop body is executed once more;
otherwise exit the loop.

3. Calculate the value of expression 3 and return to execute step 2 again. During the for process,
expression 1 is calculated for one time, and expression 2 and 3 may repeat for several times. The loop
body may be executed for many times or not executed.

There are several points to be noted in for statement:

313
 1. Each expression in for statement can be omitted, but the semicolon must exist.
For example:

<1>for(expression; expression) expression is omitted

<2>for(expression; expression;)expression is omitted

<3>for(;expression; expression) all expression is omitted

2. When the loop variable has assigned initial value, Expression 1 may be omitted as shown in Example 3.27.
If Expression 2 or 3 is omitted, the endless loop may be caused. In this case, the loop should be ended in loop
body.

3. The loop body may be void statement.

#include"

stdio.h" void

main(){

int n=0;

printf("input a

string:\n");

for(;getchar()!='\n';n+

+); printf("%d",n);

In this example, the expression 1 in for statement is omitted, and the expression 3 is not for modifying
loop variable but for inputting the characters counting. Thus, the counting that should be completed
in loop body has completed in the expression. Therefore, the loop body is void statement. Pay
attention, the semicolon behind void statement is essential. If this semicolon is missed, the following
printf statement will be executed as loop body. On the other hand, if the loop body is not void
statement, it is forbidden to add semicolon behind the bracket of expression. In this case, the loop body
will be regarded as void statement and not executed repeatedly. All of these are the common mistakes
in programming, which must be attached great importance.

7.2.6 break statement

314
Break statement is used in switch statement or loop statement only. It is for exiting switch statement or
local loop and directing to the subsequent program. As the transferring direction of break statement is
specific, the statement marks are not required. The general form of break statement is break. As shown in
the above example, the break statement is used in switch statement and for statement for skip. Break
statement provides several exits for loop statement, which makes programming more flexible and
convenient in some circumstances.

7.2.7 continue statement

Continue statement is used in loop

body only. Its general form is continue;

Semanteme: finish this loop and not execute the other statement behind continue statement in the loop
body any more, turn to judge and execute the next loop condition. Pay attention: this statement only ends
the loop on this layer and will not exit the loop.

7.2.8 Section summary

1. From the execution process, the program is basically classified into three basic structures:
sequence structure, branch structure and loop structure.

2. The most basic unit in program execution is statement. There are five kinds of
statements in C language:

(1) Expression statement any expression and semicolon forms the expression statement. The
general expression statement is assignment statement.

(2) Function call statement the function call and semicolon constitutes the function call
statement.

(3) Control statement it is used for control program process, and composed of special statement

315
 delimiter and required expression. It mainly includes conditional judgment execution statement,
loop execution statement, go to statement etc.

(4) Compound statement it is composed by several statements included in {}. Compound

statement is regarded as single statement. It can be used in any place allowing statement such as
loop body.

(5) Void statement it is composed by semicolon only without actual function.

3. Relational expression and logical expression are two important expressions, which are mainly used
for judgment of conditional execution and loop execution.

4. C language provides many forms of conditional statement to form the

branch structure.

(1) if statement is mainly for one-way selection.

(2) if-else statement is mainly for two-way selection.

(3) if-else-if statement and switch statement are for multiway

selection.

These forms of conditional statement are normally mutual

substituted.

5. C language provides three loop

statements.

（ 1 ） For statement is mainly used to assign initial value for loop variable, step increment and loop

structure of loop times.

（2）The loop times and control condition can be confirmed during loop process, and the confirmed

loop may use while

or do-while statement.

（ 3 ） Three loop statements can be nested mutually to form the nested loop. The loops may be in

parallel but not crossed.

（4）Branch statement can transfer the process out of loop body, but it can not transfer process from

outside to loop body.

316
 （5）Avoid endless loop in the loop program. That is to say, the loop variable must be

ensured to be modified during operation. Change the loop condition to be false

gradually, thus finish the loop.

6. Statement summary in C language

Name General Form

Simple statement

Expressi

on statement; Void statement;

Conditional statement if(expression)statement;

if(expression)statement 1; else statement 2;

if(expression 1)statement 1; else if(expression 2)

statement 2…else statement n; switch statement switch(expression){ case constant

statement: statement…default: statement; } loop statement while statement

while(expression)statement;

for statement for(expression 1; expression 2; expression 3)

statement; break statement break;

continue statement continue;

return statement return(expression);

7.3 Script function introduction

 How to start the macro function for programming

317
  Function introduction of each function button of macro command editor

 How to create a new macro

 Macro Encryption/Decryption

 How to insert library functions in a program

 How to use internal memory in macros

7.3.1 Use script function to program

This section will introduce the basic functions of script and describe the relevant control

functions and application method briefly.

There are ways to access script :

Method 1: select “Setting (S) -> Macro" from the menu as shown in Figure 5-1 (script menu), and

pop up interface as shown in Figure 5-1(script editor).

Figure 5-1 (Script

Menu)

318
Method 2: click shortcut button “script ” as shown in
Figure 5-2 (script button), and pop up interface as shown
in Figure 5-3 (Script Editor).

Figure 5-2 (Script Button)

7.3.2 Function button introduction in script editor

The functional controls are arranged in script editor window as shown in Figure 5-3 (Script Editor).

Figure 5-3 (Script Editor)

<1> Script List:

1. New: new create a script

319
 2. Import: import an existence script.

3. Success: the scripts have been successful completed

4. Fail: the scripts have been failed completed

5. Not complited: the scripts have not been completed

6. Not save: the scripts have been saved

7. Delete: ‘left click’ chooses the script,then ‘right click’ pop out ‘Deletes
script’,click the delete

<2> Script Edit window: Edit and compile script on this window。“ID”:The number of the

current edit script，“Script”:Modify the name of the current edit script.

：Script Edit Menu：there are ten

button totally，as fllows：

Undo：cancel the last operation.

Redo：redo the next operation.

Cut：cut the choosed script.

Paste：paste script.

320
 copy：copy script.

Save：save script.

Export：Pop the file save dialog，modify the root and name，save the script as a

*.csv file.

Compile：Compile the current script source code, and check the syntax error.

Pack/Show the setting and output window.

Help：Show the help file.

:Setting the macro instructions automatically sort by id

<3>Setting and output window ： the window sets variable and outputs compiled

information.

“Variable Setting” Page:click the “new”grid in this page， it will pop out the”New script

variables”dialog, as shown in figure5.6.The variable associated with the register.

321
 Figure5-5 New script variables

“Compile information output”Page:The window outputs the information of compilation

and connection state of program. Users may make debugging and modification according

to the information prompt.

Figure5-6 Compile information output

<4>Function List ： User can choose the system function,and insert it on the script edit

window.

7.3.3 Macro Encryption/Decryption

The configuration software provides macro instruction encryption/decryption function, which

enables users to protect their own private special functions. Even if others have configuration
programs, they still cannot view the contents of macro instruction functions without the macro
instruction password.
This chapter introduces the steps to use this function.
Keywords:macro instruction encryption steps,macro instruction function decryption steps, macro
instruction function password modification steps,precautions

322
Macro instruction function encryption steps
Select the macro to be encrypted, right-click to select the "Encrypt" function, and set the password
according to the prompts

323
Macro instruction function decryption steps
Select the macro to be decrypted, right-click to select the "Decrypt" function, and enter the
password set during the encryption process according to the prompts

324
Steps for modifying password in macro function
Select the macro command that needs to change the password, right-click to select the "change
password" function, enter the old password according to the prompt, and set the new password

Precautions

When the encrypted macro function is exported, the corresponding password will not be exported.
When the macro is imported to other projects, it needs to be encrypted again.

325
7.3.4 New create script

Click button and create a new script on the “Not save” list as shown in Figure 5-4 (Script
Compiler)

Figure 5-4 (Script Compiler)

Instructions:

Instruction 1: convention introduction of program compilation

Create the source program of C language conforming to ANSI C standard

in the edition window.

Instruction 2: information output window

The window outputs the information of compilation and connection state of

program. Users may make debugging and modification according to the

information prompt.

Instruction 3: variable setting

Variable name: input the variable name required in the program.

326
 Data type: select the corresponding data class of variable name so as to distribute the

corresponding memory size.

Bytes: set the occupied memory of corresponding variable automatically depending on

the data class.

Read/write: set the read-write property of variable in the memory cell of touch screen.

Address: the defined physical memory address of variable in the touch screen.

Variable setting instruction: when the external requires interaction with touch screen such as data
exchange and data acquisition, it provides the interface to change the behavior characteristics of
touch screen dynamically.

Special tips: the variables required in the program should be put in the variable definition part

(the variable definition starts from code).

7.3.5 Use internal storage area in script

SKTOOL configuration software provides the operation interface for HMI internal storage area.

Users can make direct operations for the internal storage area in the script. Detailed methods

have two kinds:

1. Access storage area with keywords

LocalBit: reference of internal storage area LB; LocalWord: reference of internal storage area

327
 LW; RWIWord: reference of internal storage area RWI.The keyword can be used directly in
macro. For example:

if(LocalBit[5])
{
Local
Wor
d[1]=
0;
}
else
{
Local
Wor
d[1]=
1;
}

2. Establish a linkage between variable and internal storage area by setting of variable.

Detailed usage refers to script instance.

7.4 String handling functions

Function name function

StringCat Joint two character strings

Compare the values of two character

StringCompare
strings; case sensitive
Compare the values of two character
StringCompareNoCase
strings; case insensitive

StringCopy String copy

Return to the position of the first

StringFind
occurrence of target string in the

328
 source string; if there is no found in
the source string, return to -1.
Return to the position of the first
character in the source string that
StringFindOneOf matches any character in target string;
if there is no found in the source
string, return to -1.
Retrieve a substring of the source
StringIncluding string that contains characters in the
set string.
Insert a string into a specific position
StringInsert
within the destination string content.

StringLength Obtain the length of a string.

Retrieve some characters sequence

StringMid from the specified offset of the source
string.

StringSplit Split out the string.

Convert the characters of a string to

StringToLower
lowercase.
Convert the characters of a string to
StringToUpper
uppercase.
Split the source2 out from source1 to
StringTrim
form a new one with the rest.
Split out any character of source2 in
StringTrimLeft
source1; Return the result to the dest.

1、StringCat

[Description]
Append source string to destination string.
[Usage]
result=StringCat(dest[start],source);
[Example]
char a[8]="abcd";
char *b="efg";
char *c;

c=StringCat(a,b); // c="abcdefg"，it is better if a is a character array.

329
2、StringCompare

[Description]
Do a case-sensitive comparison of two strings.
[Usage]
result = StringCompare(source1,source2);
[Example]
int result;
char *a="abcd";
char *b="efg";

result = StringCompare(a,b); //result=-1(if a>b, result=1;if a=b, result=0; if a<b then result=-1)。

3、StringCompareNoCase //

[Description]
Do a case-insensitive comparison of two strings.
[Usage]
result = StringCompareNoCase(source1,source2)
[Example]
int result;
char *a="abcd";
char *b="EFG";
result=StringCompare(a,b);//result=1;
result=StringCompareNoCase(a,b);//result=-1;

4、StringCopy

[Description]
Copy ons string to another.
[Usage]
result = StringCopy(dest,source);
[Example]
char a[4]="abcd";
char* b="efg";
char* c;
c=StringCopy(a,b);//c="abcdefg"; it is better if a is a character array.

5、StringFind

[Description]
Return the position of the first occurrence of target string in the source string.
[Usage]
index=StringFind(source1,source2);
[Example]
char a[8]="ab1c123d";
char* b="123";

330
 char* c="ef";
int index;
index=StringFind(a,b); //index=4;
index=StringFind(a,c); //index=-1;

6、StringFindOneOf

[Description]
Return the position of the first character in the source string that matches any character in
target string.
[Usage]
index=StringFindOneOf(source1,source2);
[Example]
char a[8]="ab1c123d";
cahr* b="1b";
in index;
index=StringFindOneOf(a,b); //index=2;

7、StringIncluding

[Description]
Retrieve a substring of the source string that contains characters in the set string.
[Usage]
StringIncluding(source1,source2,dest);
[Example]
char a[8]="aB1Eree";
char* b="aBe";
char dest[8];
StringIncluding(a,b,dest);//dest="aBee"; it is better if dest is a character array.

8、StringInsert

[Description]
Insert a string in a specific within the destination string content. Notice it that the destination
string has sufficient buffer.
[Usage]
StringInsert(pos,source,dest);
[Example]
char a[8] = "aB1e";
char *b ="kdr";
int pos=2;
StringInsert(pos,b,a); //a="aBkdr1e".

9、StringLength

[Description]
Obtain the length of a string.
[Usage]

331
 result = StringLength(source);
[Example]
char a[8]="ABerer";
int length;
length = StringLength(a); //length=6;

10、StringMid

[Description]
Retrieve some characters sequence from the specified offset of the source string and store it
in the destination buffer.
[Usage]
StringMid(source,count,dest);
[Example]
char a[8]="aB1e";
char b[3];
StringMid(a,2,b); //b="B1" it is better if b is a character array and it has enough memory to
save the fetched character.

11、StringSplit

[Description]
Split out the string.
[Usage]
StringSplit(dest1,dest2,source,pos);
[Example]
char a[8]="aB1edge";
char b[5];
char c[5];
StringSplit(b,c,a,3); // it is better if b and c are character arrays.

12、StringToLower

[Description]
Convert the characters of a string to lowercase.
[Usage]
StringToLower(source,dest); // it is better if dest is a character array.
[Example]
char a[8]="ABeRe";
char b[8];
StringToLower(a,b);//b="abere".

13、StringToUpper

[Description]
Convert the characters of a string to uppercase.Notice if there is sufficient buffer.
[Usage]
StringToUpper(source,dest);

332
 [Example]
char a[8]="ab1ere";
char b[8]; // it is better if b is a character array.

StringToUpper(a,b); //b="AB1ERE"；

14、StringTrim

[Description]
split the source2 out from source1,return the result to dest.
[Usage]
StringTrim(source1.source2,dest);
[Example]
char a[12]="a1erd1esw";
char *b="1e";
char c[10];
StringTrim(a,b,c) //c="ardsw" . It is better if c is a character array.

15、StringTrimLeft

[Description]
split out any character of source2 in source1,Return the result to the dest.
[Usage]
StringTrimLeft(source1,source2,dest);
[Example]
char a[8]="aB1edge";
char* b="be";
char c[8];
StringTrimLeft(a,b,c);//c="aB1dg", It is better if c is a character array.

7.5 Data operation function

Function name function

GETBIT Get bit value.

Retrieve the high byte from the low word of a

HIByte
specified value.

333
HIWord Retrieve the high word from the specified value.

Set specific bit to be inversed (ON->OFF,

INVBIT
OFF->ON).

LOByte Retrieve the low byte from the specified value.

LOWord Retrieve the low word from the specified value.

Swap the low byte and high byte of the specified

SWAPB
value.

Swap the low word and high word of the specified

SWAPW
value.

SETBIT Set specific bit to be ON or OFF.

1、GETBIT

[Description]
Get bit value.
[Usage]

result = GETBIT(source, bit_pos )；

[Example]

short source = 0x5, bit_pos = 0 ,result；

result = GETBIT(source,bit_pos)；// result == 1

2、HIByte

[Description]
Retrieve the high byte from the low word of a specified value.
[Usage]

result=HIByte(source)；

[Example]

short source = 0x1234,result；

result=HIByte(source)；// result = 0x12

3、 HIWord

334
 [Description]
Retrieve the high word from the specified value.
[Usage]

result=HIWord(source)；

[Example]

int source = 0x45232568,result；

result=HIWord(source)；// result = 0x4523

4、INVBIT

[Description]
Set specific bit to be inversed (ON->OFF, OFF->ON).
[Usage]

result = INVBIT(source, bit_pos )；

[Example]

short source = 0x6, bit_pos =1 ,result；

result=INVBIT(source, bit_pos)；// result = 4

5、LOByte

[Description]
Retrieve the low byte from the specified value.
[Usage]

result=LOByte(source)；

[Example]

short source = 0x1234,result；

result= LOByte(source)；// result = 0x34

6、 LOWord

[Description]
Retrieve the low word from the specified value.
[Usage]

result=LOWord(source)；

[Example]

int source = 0x12345678,result；

335
 result=LOWord(source)；// result == 0x5678

7、SWAPB

[Description]
Swap the low byte and high byte of the specified value.
[Usage]

result=SWAPB(source)；

[Example]

short source = 0x1234,result；

result=SWAPB(source)；// result = 0x3412

8、SWAPW

[Description]
Swap the low word and high word of the specified value.
[Usage]

result=SWAPW(source)；

[Example]

int source = 0x12345678, ；

int result；

result=SWAPW(source)；// result = 0x56781234

9、SETBIT

[Description]
Set specific bit to be ON or OFF.
[Usage]

result = SETBIT(source,bit_pos,1)；

[Example]

short source = 0x4；

short bit_pos = 1, result；

result = SETBIT(source,bit_pos,1)；// result = 0x6

336
7.6 Data switch function

Function name function

ASCII2DEC Convert a string to a decimal value.

ASCII2FLOAT Convert a string to a floating value.

ASCII2HEX Convert a string to a hexadecimal value.

BCD2BIN Convert a BCD value to a BIN value.

BIN2BCD Convert a binary value to a BCD value.

DEC2ASCII Convert a decimal value to a string.

FLOAT2ASCII Convert a floating value to a string.

HEX2ASCII Convert a hexadecimal value to a string.

1、ASCII2DEC

[Description]
Convert a string to a decimal value.
[Usage]

result=ASCII2DEC(source , sizeof(source))；

[Example]

char source[4] = {'2', '3', '4', '5'}；

short result；

result=ASCII2DEC(source , 4)；// result=2345

337
2、ASCII2FLOAT

[Description]
Convert a string to a floating value.
[Usage]

result=ASCII2FLOAT(source,sizeof(source))；

[Example]

char source[4] = {'5', '.', '7', '8'}；

float result；

result=ASCII2FLOAT(source,4)；// result = 5.78

3、ASCII2HEX

[Description]
Convert a string to a hexadecimal value.
[Usage]

result=ASCII2HEX(source,sizeof(source))；

[Example]

char source[5] = {'1','6','3','4'}；

short result；

result=ASCII2HEX(source,4)；// result = 0x1634

4、BCD2BIN

[Description]
Convert a BCD value to a BIN value.
[Usage]

result=BCD2BIN(source)；

[Example]

short source = 0x2648；

short result；

result=BCD2BIN(source)； // result = 2648

5、BIN2BCD

338
 [Description]
Convert a binary value to a BCD value.
[Usage]

result=BIN2BCD(source)；

[Example]

short source = 1234；

short result；

result=BIN2BCD(source)；// result = 0x1234

6、DEC2ASCII

[Description]
Convert a decimal value to a string.
[Usage]

result= DEC2ASCII(source,sizeof(source))；

[Example]

short source = 5678；

char *result；

result= DEC2ASCII(source,4)；

// result[0] == '5', result[1] == '6', result[2] == '7', result[3] == '8’

7、FLOAT2ASCII

[Description]
Convert a floating value to a string.
[Usage]
result=FLOAT2ASCII(source);
[Example]
float source = 56.8;
char result[4];
result=FLOAT2ASCII(source);
//result[0] = '5',result[1] = '6',result[2] = '.',result[3] = '8'

8、HEX2ASCII

[Description]
Convert a hexadecimal value to a string.
[Usage]

HEX2ASCII(source, result[start])；

339
 [Example]

short source = 0x5678；

char *result；

result = HEX2ASCII(source)；

//result[0] = '5', result[1] = '6', result[2] = '7', result[3] = '8'

7.7 Math arithmetic functio

Function name function

ACOS The result is equal to the arcosine of the source.

ADDSUM Use addition to calculate checksum.

ASIN The result is equal to the arcsine of the source.

ATAN The result is equal to the arctangent of the source.

COT The result is equal to the cotangent of the source.

COS The result is equal to the cosine of the source.

CRC Get 16-bit CRC.

CSC The result is equal to the cosecant of the source.

LOG Calculate the natural logarithm of a number.

LOG10 Calculate the base-10 logarithm of a number.

340
POW Calculates x raised to the power of y.

Produces a pseudorandom number

RAND
(range:0~65535)

SEC The result is equal to the secant of the source.

SIN The result is equal to the sine of the source.

SQRT The result is equal to the square of the source.

TAN The result is equal to the tangent of the source.

XORSUM Use XOR to calculate checksum.

1、ACOS

[Description]
The result is equal to the arcosine of the source.
[Usage]
result = ACOS(source);
[Example]
float source=0.5;
float result;
result=ACOS(source);

2、ADDSUM

[Description]
Use addition to calculate checksum.
[Usage]
checksum=ADDSUM(data, sizeof(data));
[Example]
char data[5] = {0x1, 0x2, 0x3, 0x4, 0x20};
int checksum;
checksum=ADDSUM(data, 5); // checksum=0x2a;

3、ASIN

[Description]
The result is equal to the arcsine of the source.
[Usage]
result = ASIN(source);

341
 [Example]
float source=0.5;
float result;
result=ASIN(source);

4、ATAN

[Description]
The result is equal to the arctangent of the source.
[Usage]
result = ATAN(source);
[Example]
float source=1;
float result;
result=ATAN(source);

5、COT

[Description]
The result is equal to the cotangent of the source.
[Usage]
result = COT(source);
[Example]

float source=45(度);

float result;
result=COT(source); //result = 1

6、COS

[Description]
The result is equal to the cosine of the source.
[Usage]
result = COS(source);
[Example]

float source=60(度);

float result;
result=COS(source); //result = 0.5

7、CRC

[Description]
Get 16-bit CRC.
[Usage]

bit_CRC=CRC(source,sizeof(source))；

[Example]

342
 char source[5] = {0x1, 0x2, 0x3, 0x4, 0x5}；

short bit_CRC；

bit_CRC=CRC(source,5)；

8、CSC

[Description]
The result is equal to the cosecant of the source.
[Usage]
result = CSC(source);
[Example]

float source=30(度);

float result;
result=CSC(source); //result = 2

9、LOG

[Description]
Calculate the natural logarithm of a number.
[Usage]
result = LOG(source);
[Example]
float source =100,result;
result = LOG(source); //result =4.61

10、LOG10

[Description]
Calculate the base-10 logarithm of a number.
[Usage]
result = lOG10(source)
[Example]
float source=100,result;
result = LOG10(source); //result = 2.00

11、POW

[Description]
Calculates x raised to the power of y.
[Usage]
result = POW(x,y); note:x must be constant
[Example]
float result,y;
y=0.5;

343
 result=POW(25,y); //result = 5

12、RAND

[Description]
Produces a pseudorandom number (range:0~65535)
[Usage]
Random= RAND()
[Example]
unsigned short random;
random =RAND(); //random = 363

13、SEC

[Description]
The result is equal to the secant of the source.
[Usage]
result = SEC(source);
[Example]

float source=60(度);

float result;
result=SEC(source); //result = 2

14、SIN

[Description]
The result is equal to the sine of the source.
[Usage]
result = SIN(source);
[Example]

float source=30(度);

float result;
result=SIN(source); //result = 0.5

15、SQRT

[Description]
The result is equal to the square of the source.
[Usage]
result = SQRT(source);
[Example]
float source=16;
float result;
result=SQRT(source); //result = 4

16、TAN

344
 [Description]
The result is equal to the tangent of the source.
[Usage]
result = TAN(source);
[Example]

float source=45(度);

float result;
result=TAN(source); //result = 1

17、XORSUM

[Description]
Use XOR to calculate checksum.
[Usage]
checksum = XORSUM(source, sizeof(source));
[Example]
char source[5] = {0x1, 0x20, 0x3, 0x48, 0x5};
short checksum;
checksum = XORSUM(source, 5); // checksum =0x6f;

7.8 Communication function

Function name function

CLEARBUFFER Clear buffer of communication port.

DELAY Set a delayed time

FillLW_8 Give 8-bit dates to LW register

FillLW_16 Give 16-bit dates to LW register.

FillLW_32 Give 32-bit dates to LW register.

345
FillLW_Float Give float dates to LW register.

GETCHARS Get data from communication port.

GETBUFFERLENGTH Get buffer length from communication port.

PUTCHARS Send data to communication port.

InitEthernet TCP/IP client mode initial connect.

readEthernet TCP/IP client mode read receive data.

writeEthernet TCP/IP client mode write send data.

CountsEthernet TCP/IP client mode counts in receive buffer;

TCP/IP client mode delete all data in receive

ClearEthernet
buffer.

1、CLEARBUFFER

[Description]
Clear buffer of communication port.

PortID--串口 ID,COM1=0, COM2=1。

操作成功返回 1, 失败返回 0。

[Usage]
int CLEARBUFFER(PortID);
[Example]
int Clearresult,PortID;
PortID=0;
Clearresult= CLEARBUFFER(PortID);

2、DELAY

[Description]

Set a delayed time；

[Usage]
void DELAY(int dwMilliseconds);

346
 [Example]
int dwMilliseconds=1000;

DELAY(dwMilliseconds);//延迟 1s.

3、FillLW_8

[Description]
Give 8-bit dates to LW register;
[Usage]
FillLW_8(&LocalWord[i],a,NULL,count);
FillLW_8(&LocalWord[i],NULL,a,count);
[Example-1]
char a[6]=”arsdw”;

FillLW_8(&LocalWord[6],a,NULL,5);//LW6='a',LW7='r',LW8='s',LW9='d'LW10='w'。

[Example-2]
char a[6]={1,2,-1,3,4};

FillLW_8(&LocalWord[6],NULL,a,5);//LW6=1,LW7=2,LW8=-1,LW9=3,LW10=4。

4、FillLW_16

[Description]
Give 16-bit dates to LW register.
[Usage]
FillLW_16(&LocalWord[i],a,NULL,count);
FillLW_16(&LocalWord[i],NULL,a,count);
[Example]
short a[6]={12,1,2,-3,4};
unsigned short b[6]={12,5,4,7,8};

FillLW_16(&LocalWord[0],b,NULL,5);//LW0=12,LW1=5,LW2=4,LW3=7,LW4=8。

FillLW_16(&LocalWord[6],NULL,a,5);//LW6=12,LW7=1,LW8=2,LW9=-3,LW10=4。

5、FillLW_32

[Description]
Give 32-bit dates to LW register.
[Usage]
FillLW_32(&LocalWord[i],a,NULL,count);
FillLW_32(&LocalWord[i],NULl,a,count);
[Example]
int a[6]={12,1,2,-3,4};
unsigned int b[4]={0x123465,0x541245,0x4444444};

FillLW_32(&LocalWord[0],b,NULL,3);//LW0=1193061,LW2=5509701,LW4=71582788。

347
 FillLW_32(&LocalWord[6],NULL,a,5);//LW6=12,LW8=1,LW10=2,LW12=-3,LW14=4。

6、FillLW_Float

[Description]
Give float dates to LW register.
[Usage]
FillLW_Float(&LocalWord[i],source,count)
[Example]
float a[3]={1.2,3.6,4.5};

FillLW_Float(&LocalWord[8],a,3);//LW8=1.2,LW10=3.6,LW12=4.5。

7、GETCHARS

[Description]
Get data from communication port.
[Usage]

GETCHARS(PortID, Data)；

[Example]

char Data[20]；

int Length,PortID,Result；

Length=5；

PortID=0；

Result=GETCHARS(PortID,Data)；

8、GETBUFFERLENGTH

[Description]
Get buffer length from communication port.
[Usage]
int GETBUFFERLENGTH(PortID);
[Example]
int bufferlen,PortID;
PortID=0;
bufferlen=GETBUFFERLENGTH(PortID).

9、PUTCHARS

[Description]
Send data to communication port.

348
 [Usage]

PUTCHARS(PortID, Data, Length)；

[Example]

char Data[5] = {0x02, 0x30, 0x31, 0x4d, 0x5e}；

int Length,PortID；

Length=5；

PortID=0；

PUTCHARS(PortID, Data, Length)；

10、InitEthernet

[Description]
TCP/IP client mode initial connect.
IPAdd--server IP address;
networkPort--connect port number;
Success return 1, fail return 0.
[Usage]
int InitEthernet(char *IPAdd, int networkPort);
[Example]

char *IPAdd=“192.168.1.100”；

int networkPort=5；

int result；

result= InitEthernet(IPAdd, networkPort) ；

11、readEthernet

[Description]
TCP/IP client mode read receive data.
cBuffer--data buffer;
Success return receive counts, fail return -1.
[Usage]
int readEthernet(char *cBuffer);
[Example]
char cBuffer[]={22,33};
int result;
result=readEthernet(cBuffer);

349
12、writeEthernet

[Description]
TCP/IP client mode write send data.
cBuffer--data need to send;
iSize--counts need to send;
Success return 1, fail return 0.
[Usage]
int writeEthernet(char *cBuffer,int isize);
[Example]
char cBuffer[]={22,33};
int isize=8;
int result;
result=writeEthernet(cBuffer,isize);

13、CountsEthernet

[Description]
TCP/IP client mode counts in receive buffer;
Success return counts in receive buffer, fail return 0
[Usage]
int CountsEthernet();
[Example]
int result;
result= CountsEthernet();

14、ClearEthernet

[Description]
TCP/IP client mode delete all data in receive buffer.
Success return 1, fail return 0.
[Usage]
int ClearEthernet();
[Example]
int result;
result= ClearEthernet();

350
7.9 CAN communication function

Function name Function

onCanxStart Enable CAN communication

onCanxstop Close CAN communication

setBitrate Set CAN communication rate

addFillter Set the ID filter

reciveData Receive CAN data

sendData Send CAN data

1、onCanxStart

[Description]
Enable CAN communication
Normal return value =0, error return value <0
[Usage]
int onCanxStart(PortID);
[Example]
int PortID , Result;

PortID = 0; //0：COM0 1：COM1

Result = 0;
Result = onCanxStart (PortID);

2、onCanxstop

[Description]
Close CAN communication
Normal returns 0, error returns non-0

351
 [Usage]
int onCanxstop (PortID);
[Example]
int PortID , Result;

PortID = 0; //0：COM0 1：COM1

Result = 0;
Result = onCanxstop (PortID);

3、setBitrate

[Description]
Set CAN communication rate
Normal returns 0, error returns non-0
[Usage]
int setBitrate (Bitrate,PortID);
[Example]
int PortID, Bitrate, Result;

PortID = 0; //0：COM0 1：COM1

Bitrate = 5*1000; // Set the baud rate 5K set range 5K 10K 20K maximum to 1M
Result = 0;
Result = setBitrate ( Bitrate, PortID )// COM0 sets the communication rate to 5000

4、addFillter

[Description]
Set the ID filter
Normal returns 0, error returns non-0
[Usage]
int addFillter ( CanID, CanMask, PortID );
[Example]
Int PortID, Result, CanID, CanMask;

PortID = 0; //0：COM0 1：COM1

Result = 0;
CanID = 0x11; // Set the filter start ID number
CanMask = 0x11; // Set the filter end ID number, and start and end can be the same
Result = addFillter ( CanID, CanMask, PortID ); // Set to receive only data with CAN ID
0x11 normally returns 0 error returns non-0 value

352
 0000 1100 1111 0000 0000 0100 0000 0001 0x0CF00400
0001 1000 1111 1110 1110 1110 0000 0000 0x18FEEE00
0001 1000 1111 1110 1111 0010 0000 0000 0x18FEF200
MASK 1110 1011 1111 0001 0000 0001 1111 1110 0x1BF101FE
addfillter(0x0CF00400, 0x1BF101FE, canport);

5、reciveData

[Description]
Receive CAN data
Normal return received data length, error return data length <0
[Usage]
int reciveData ( data, Len, PortID, &CanId )
[Example]
int PortID, Result, Len;
unsigned int CanId;
unsigned char data[128]; // Receive data buffer

PortID = 0; //0：COM0 1：COM1

Len = 128; // Receive buffer length

Result = reciveData ( ( unsigned char * ) data, Len, PortID, &CanId );

6、sendData

[Description]
Send CAN data
Normal returns 0, error returns non-0
[Usage]
int sendData ( data, Len, PortID, CanId, CanType )
[Example]
int PortID, Result, Len, CanType, CanId, i;
unsigned char data[128];

PortID = 0; //0：COM0 1：COM1

Result = 0;
Len = 8;
CanId = 0x22;
CanType = 0; // Frame type: standard frame: 0 extended frame:0x80000000
for ( i = 0; i < Len; ++i )
{
data[i] = i;
}
Result = sendData ( ( unsigned char * ) data, Len, PortID, CanId, CanType );// Standard
frame, COM0 sends data data, length 127,CAN ID 0x22

353
 8. Simulation

This chapter mainly introduces usage and steps for offline simulation and online simulation.

“Run SKTOOL as Administrator” is necessary to execute functions of Offline simulation and Online
simulation.

8.1 Offline Simulation

You can check the correctness of the configuration project with the off-line simulation provided by

SKTOOL before transferring it to the HMI and connecting the HMI to connected devices.

Operation process:

Save the current project, select the offline menu to execute the simulation command, then it

appear a pop-up offline simulation window where you can control the project to realize part of

HMI functions by clicking the mouse instead of touching the HMI, as shown in Figure 6-1:

Figure 6-1 Diagram of SK-070FS offline simulation

354
In the simulation window, right click to bring up the following menu:

 Exit: Close the offline simulation window; press the keyboard ESC can also exit the offline

simulation.

 About: About the dialog box.

You can close offline simulation through taskbar “Right Key”-“Close”.

Offline simulation example

As shown in Figure 6-2, the edited configuration project can be off-line simulated so as to check

and find errors in engineering configuration screens, such as whether the monitor address is

correct and so on. Just in case.

Figure 6-2 Example of SK-070FS offline simulation

Steps to execute offline simulation:

Install SKTOOL Software first;

Run SKTOOL as Administrator.

355
Note: In the offline simulation, only these functions of Function button are available: “Previous

formula", "Next formula", "Save current formula", "Change User’s Level", "Logoff" and "Touch

Sound ON / OFF ". The Historical Alarm, Historical Data Display, Historical Trend Graph, Timer, and

Macro on the Toolbar cannot be simulated.

The other controls are the same operation. After setting properties of each control, click "Save"

and then select Offline simulation, as shown in Figure 6-3:

Figure 6-3Offline simulation

8.2 Online Simulation

Online simulation allows communicating between PC and PLC or other related devices without SK
HMI. It is employed to debug the configuration project and conduct testing work when the HMI
fails through simulating its operation status. Refer to offline simulation for configuration editing.

Online simulation requires the connection to PLC, so it needs to ensure that the cable connecting
PLC and PC functions properly. The online simulation runs in 30 minutes, after that, it will quit
automatically.

356
Note: It is the download cable that is needed for common PLC, but not that connecting PLC to HMI.
Please contact technical support staff in case of communication failure.

357
 9. System Settings

This chapter introduces setting functions of SKTOOL system. It is necessary to set them up in
order to ensure normal running of HMI, including that of PLC.

Contents：

 Communication Port Property

 Setting

 Screen

 Window

 Historical Data Collector

 Alarm settings

 Formula

 Data Transmission

 Global Macro

 Init Macro

9.1 Communication Port Property

Communication port property is applied to set the communication parameters between HMI and

connected devices. HMIs like SK-121F，SK-104F，SK-102H，SK-102C，SK-070G，SK-070M，SK-070F，

SK-070H are equipped with two communication ports, COM1 and COM2, supporting simultaneous
communication with two different PLCs; and parameters of each port must be set. HMIs like

SK-050H，SK-043U，SK-043F，SK-043H, SK-035U，SK-035F have one communication port, COM1,

and it communicate only with one connected device.

Double click "Link" and " Link 1", as shown in Figure 7-1:

358
 Figure 7-1 COM1 COM port property dialog box

In the "Link" page, various brands and models of PLC are available. In addition, the "Link name" and
"PLC consecutive address interval"

Click the Parameter tab of the dialog box, as shown in Figure 7-2:

Figure 7-2 COM1 Communication port parameter setting

Parameter settings:

359
Equipment services: manufacturer, PLC brand and CPU model.
Port: RS232 / 485/ 422
Baud rate: 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200 / 187.5k
Check: Odd / Even / None
Data bits: 7/8
Stop bits: 1/2
Model: PLC model

HMI station number: Set the station number of the HMI

Communication time: HMI sends data to the PLC and receives the data from PLC, and it cannot
send data again until after the set communication time.
Overtime time 1 and Overtime time 2: Calculate first the value of Timeout 1 divided by that of
Timeout 2, as shown in the figure above: the timeout period is 200ms. There is a situation called
timeout if the HMI has not received the data 200ms after sending data.
Number of retries: The number of times that the data is retransmitted after a timeout
Address mode: ① Standard mode: One serial port connects one PLC; ② Extended mode: One
serial port connects multiple PLCs of the same type
PLC Continuous Address Interval: The maximum number of words that PLC can read at one time

9.2 Setting

Let’s come to some settings of HMI. It is also important for project configuration. We can change

HMI system settings in a narrative way to achieve the expected effect of users.

Contents:

 Language

 HMI parameter settings

 HMI State

 PLC Control

 Clock

360
  File Encryption

 HMI Protection

 Variable Table

 Text Library

 Address Library

9.2.1 Language

Language: This function realize multiple languages; it is necessary to preserve languages employed
in configuration in character library of PC.
Double click the Language option or right click to open the dialog box of Language Setting.

361
Language total: Set total number of the system language, at most fifty languages. Article 50 the
biggest
Language Name: Set a name for each language.
Example:
1. As shown above, set the total number of languages to 3, and the language name is by default;
create a new text input control, such as Screen button, select Language 1 in the language
drop-down box, enter in the text box “lang1”, and then set the parameters of font size and color,
etc.; select Language 2 in the language drop-down box, then enter “lang2”; select Language 3 in
the language drop-down box, then enter in the text box "lang3", as shown below:

2. Click "OK" after the settings, and then left click on the screen to add this Screen control button

when the mouse cursor shows a cross shape; adjust its size. It should note that "Function" options

below “General” page of each button are the same: "Switch language"; while options of

"Language" are different: Language1, Language2 and Language3, respectively.

362
3. Save the project after the settings, as shown below:

3. Simulate (or download to HMI)

363
All controls with text will be presented in the according language when click Function button 1, 2 or
3.
As shown below:

The figure above shows the state after clicking Function button 1 to switch the language to Set
Chinese

The figure above shows the state after clicking Function button 2 to switch the language to Set
English.

364
The figure above shows the state after clicking Function button 3 to switch the language to Set
Japanese.

To achieve the multi-language function in the entire project, it is necessary to input different texts
for each control or object with text (same operation with the first point). This enables the entire
project to be switched to the specified language when execute the command of "Switch Language".

9.2.2 HMI parameter settings

HMI model can be assigned when create a project or be modified during the configuration through
HMI parameter settings in the Project Manager.
Double click “HMI Parameter Setting: in the Project Manager, then a dialog box pops up, as shown
in Figure 7-3:

Parameter Setting:
1. You can modify the parameter settings through Preference Setting in the drop-down menu
Settings, or double-click the HMI Parameter Settings in Setting, Project Manager. Then a
pop-up dialog box is shown as Figure 7-3 below:

365
 Figure7-3 HMI Parameter Setting dialog box

HMI Model: Change model of HMI

Model instruction:
E.g.: SK-070FS
SK: Samkoon SK series
070: Display size of HMI
F: F Type; there is also H type; different types have different resolution.
S: Standard type; also E for Economy HMI

Display mode: Adjust horizontal or vertical display screen.

HMI Start Setting
Splash screen: The start screen of HMI when powered on
Screen Saver Time: Set screensaver time
Flicker Frequency: Set the flicker frequency of objects or controls which can blink; you can
change the speed of flicker by inputting directly a value and clicking the spin button.
Alarm sound: When the alarm occurs, the touch screen can remind users through sound; the
right drop-down menu contains two cases, with or without sound reminder.
Touch sound: Options in the right drop-down menu can decide Sound reminder or No sound
reminder.
Screensavers screen: Select a screen among the existing screens as screensaver screen; just
touch the screen to return the former screen.
If Load Screen: If choose this option, the HMI will display the selected loading screen after
power-on for a certain while, and then switch to the splash screen; thus users can give some tips
or notes.
Screen flicker in case of alarm: switch background colors between that of Alarm control or Alarm
Bar and screen background color; flicker frequency is in accordance with the above. This function

366
 doesn’t work when the background is a picture or the background pattern is transparent.

 Other settings

 Hide mouse cursor: Whether to display the mouse

 Floating-point settings:

 [Standard]: High byte floating point ahead while the low one behind;

 [Appoint]: users determine the order.

 Invalid touch: Select the "Use custom labeling", which means touchable controls cannot
be touched, then the picture marking the control chosen by user is untouchable.
 Operation Mode: Choose one mode between traditional touch operation and USB mouse
operation.
 Display controls pressing effect: SKTOOL is newly added pressing effect display. When
the pressing effect is applied, rectangular pressing trace will appear if users touch the
control. The pressing trace color depends on user’s preference. Currently Bit switch,
Word switch, Screen button, Function button, Numeric input and ASCII input controls
support this effect. The default is No effect.

Note: Pressing effect of elliptical controls is still a rectangle.

2、Set user password:

367
 Figure 7-4 Set User Password

 This function supports 8 sets of user password, each of which has eight levels of password for

users to choose.

 The default user level: The current default user class is NULL.

 Allow uploading configuration: If select this option, you can upload the project from HMI to

PC; otherwise it cannot be uploaded.

 Enter the password when uploading: Whether uploading projects requires a password.

 Password when updating configuration through U disk: The password set up, the password is

necessary when you update the HMI configuration projects through U disk.

 Supreme authority password: This password can operate all controls limited by grades.

 Upload: Whether this password enables upload configuration projects from HMI to PC.

 Permissions: Whether this password can perform all limiting operations.

3、Settings of connection to the printer and downloading

Click "Settings of connection between HMI and printer" button, as shown in Figure 7-5:

Figure 7-5 parameter settings of connection between the printer and the HMI

This page contains parameter settings of connection between the printer and the HMI; users can
select corresponding parameters according to printer models.
Download settings:
Download mode: Users need to select USB or Ethernet connection to download. If choose the

368
 Ethernet, it’s necessary to set the IP address and port number (IP address and port number are
those of the HMI).
Clear historical alarm records: Whether to clear the history alarm information before
downloading.
Clear historical data records: Whether to clear the history data information before downloading.
Download Formula: Whether to download formulas in the current project to the HMI.

Image Downloading Options:

Keep the original format: Selecting this option means retain the image format unchanged when
downloading.
Convert to JPG format: Convert all images to JPG format before downloading them into HMI.
(Note: Due to the larger space occupied by BMP format images, it’s suggested to select this
option.)

4. Storage location and alarm system, as shown below

Figure 7-6 Storage location and Alarm system

 Storage location: Location for historical data, historical alarm and screen shots. Provide "Local

(FLASH)", "U disk" three options for users to choose according to their need. The default is

Local (FLASH).

 Alarm system

369
 Use the alarm system: Whether to use the system alarm. When an alarm occurs, the alarm

system displays the current alarm information at the top or bottom of each screen according

to the options set by users.

 Alarm background color, Text color, Font and Font size, these are attributes options of the

alarm display system. Users can set these options as needed.

 Way of display: "Always display" refers to the alarm displayed all the time; "Cyclic display"

means that alarm display or disappear within a certain period to achieve the flicker effect.

 Position of alarm bar: Choose the position where the alarm bar appears.

5. Other, as shown below

Figure 7-6 Screensaver unlock password

Use the Screensaver unlock password,when unlocking screensaver,need to input the correct
password as the edit.

6. VNC

370
 VNC port and password

The special type supports remote connection touch screen, and then after the first option is
enabled, the user can log in to the touch screen to monitor the current touchscreen group state.

Note: Change of the screen saver time is not valid until "Screensaver screen" is chosen; just touch
the screen of screensaver to return to the former screen.

9.2.3 HMI State

HMI state setting is employed to write the current HMI state information to the data register of
PLC.

Double click the "HMI State" item in the Project Manager, a dialog box will pop up as shown in
Figure 7-7:

371
 Figure 7-7 HMI Status Setting

 Current screen NO: Write the serial number of the current HMI screen to the PLC.

 Current formula NO: When the serial number of the current formula to the PLC.

 Current user level: Write the current user level to the PLC.

 Current language: Write the serial number of the currently applied language to the PLC

Click "OK" HMI to complete the settings.

9.2.4 PLC Control

PLC control means realizing operations of screen switching, change user level, change formula and

write formula through PLC. Double click "PLC Control" in the "Project Manager", the dialog box

shown in Figure 7-8 will pop up:

372
 Figure 7-8 PLC control dialog box

 Change formula: HMI changes the formula according to its address value.

 Write formula: HMI controls the write of the formula based on its address value.

 Current user level: HMI controls the current user level according to this address value.

 Screen switch through Word address: Control screen switch through the word address. HMI

switches the screen according to this word address value; if the address value is n, it jumps to

the nth screen.

 Screen switch through Bit address: Double click the "New" line; a pop-up dialog box will

appear as shown in Figure 7-9:

New bit control panel:

373
 New word control screen

Screen: PLC word control can only jump between pictures

374
 Windows: PLC word control can only jump between windows

Screen / window: PLC character control jumps between picture and window

Note: When switch screens through PLC, the value read for the first time does not affect the screen

switching. It functions only when the value of PLC register is different from the first read value.

9.2.5 Clock

Clock setting includes three functions: downloading system time to HMI, writing time to PLC and
synchronization with PLC.

Double click “Clock” in the Project Manager to open the attribute setting box of Clock.

375
Figure 7-11 Clock Setting dialog box

376
Download system clock to HMI: Whether to download the system clock information to HMI.
 Write time/date to PLC:

 The Data type and Length are default values.

 Time: Year-Month-Day-Hour-Minute-Second-Week. Refer to LW 60000~LW 60006 in

Register Address for detailed information. It cannot modify the Week in the system

time.
Write address: The system time information will be written into this PLC address.
 Startup Method:
Timing: Write the system time information into the specified PLC address periodically at
specified time internal.
Trigger: The system time information will be written into the specified PLC address when
the trigger address is 1.
Auto Reset: Reset automatically the trigger address to 0 when it is 1.

Synchronization with PLC time:

The Data type and Length are default values.
Time: Year-Month-Day-Hour-Minute-Second-Week. Refer to LW 60000~LW 60006
in Register Address for detailed information. It cannot modify the Week in the
system time.
 Read address: The information in the PLC address will be read.

 Startup Method:
Timing: Write the system time information into the specified PLC address periodically at
specified time internal.
Trigger: The system time information will be synchronized with the PLC when the trigger
address is 1.
Auto Reset: Reset automatically the trigger address to 0 when it is 1.

9.2.6 File Encryption

Whether a password is necessary to open the project file.

Double click the "File Encryption" option in the “Project Manager", as shown in Figure 7-12 pop-up
dialog box:

377
 Figure 7-12 File Encryption dialog box

Select the "Use password to protect file" in the above dialog box; enter in the Password and
Confirm Password; click "OK" to complete.

In this case, if user reopens the project, a password input box will be displayed as shown in Figure
7-13:

Figure 7-13 Password input box

Users need to input secret to open project.

9.2.7 HMI Protection

HMI protection is mainly employed to set a certain period of time during which HMI can functions

378
normally. If the time is beyond the set period, HMI will jump to a specify screen where a password

is necessary to re-use the HMI.

Double click the "HMI protection" option in the "Project Manager" to pop up dialog box shown in

Figure 7-14:

Figure 7-14 HMI Protection dialog box

Example to illustrate the application of this function:

➢Select "Password to unlock": A password is required to enter the HMI protection the next time.

➢Select "Release all level pass":If input this password when unlocking HMI protect,it would

release all the HMI protect level.

➢Select "HMI Protect":automatically go to “Protect setting”page,as shown follow:

379
 Figure 7-15 HMI Protection Setting

Set the "Total level password" to 3; select the 1 button icon, choose 2009-04-01 and 12-00-00 in

the Time Limit column under the "Parameter settings"; decide the screen 1 as the "Prompt Screen";

Set "Password to unlock" to 1111. Then the level 1 protection is set up.

As in the above case, set the time limits and passwords for level 2 and level 3.

 removes all ranks

After enabling this feature and setting the password, the password set at this location can remove

all levels of the HMI protection setting

 startup password protection

After enabling this function and setting the password, you need to input this password to turn on

HMI protection the next time to view HMI protection information

 enable password protection

Enabling this feature will enable HMI protection.The specific information is set in the protection

Settings.

 protection Settings

Total password level: up to 15 levels of HMI protection for different periods of time as

required

Current password level: the following parameters are set for the current password level

380
 Parameter Settings:

Term of use: HMI protection expiry date

Deadline prompt screen: prompt screen when HMI protection expires

Unprotect password: the password that is unprotected by HMI when it expires

Advanced Settings:

View the remaining days: see the remaining days that are now up to the HMI protection

set lifetime

In advance:

Set the distance between the remaining set days of HMI protection service life and the

HMI protection service life

Delay:

After setting the HMI protection service life to set the number of days, the interval

specified time prompts the specified screen

Advance and delay priorities

Advance selection, delayed selection, effective in advance

No selection in advance, delay selection, delay effective

Advance selection, delay selection, function button HMI protection delay unlock is not

used, it is effective in advance

Advance selection, delay selection, function button HMI protection delay unlock, delay

effective

 illustrates the function of the method of use:

Suppose the total number of password levels we set in this dialog is 3;After that, select 0 in

"current password level". In "parameter setting", select the date of use in the "usage period"

column. Suppose to select 2009/04/01 here.Enter the usage time in the next column, assuming the

option is 12:00:00;Select the screen when the deadline arrives in the "deadline prompt screen"

option, assuming that it is screen 1;Enter the password needed to unprotect the password when

"unprotect password", assuming 1111.Level 1 HMI protection setup completed.

again, at the level of the "current password" selected 1, inside the "parameter setting", in the

"service life" column choose to use date, suppose in the choose the 2009-04-05;Enter the usage

381
time in the next column, and suppose to select 12-00-00;Select the screen when the deadline

arrives in the "deadline prompt screen" option, assuming that it is screen 2;Enter the password

needed to unprotect the password when "unprotect password". Suppose it is 2222.Level 2 HMI

protection setup completed.

again, at the level of the "current password" selected 2, inside the "parameter setting", the

"service life" column choose to use date, suppose in the choose the 2009-04-10;Enter the usage

time in the next column, and suppose to select 12-00-00;Select the screen of time limit prompt

screen in the option of "deadline prompt screen", and suppose it is picture 3.Enter the secret

required to unlock the password protection when "unprotect password", assuming 3333.Level 3

HMI protection setup completed.

3 HMI protection Settings after click "ok" button.

Suppose today's date is 2009-04-01, the time is 08-00-00, because the use period of level 1 HMI

protection set before this time is 12-00-00 of 2009-04-01. Since the deadline has not arrived, this

HMI can still be used normally.Suppose after 4 hours, the time is 12-00-00 of 2009-04-01. At this

time, HMI will automatically jump to the screen set by the user for this period.The user wants to

continue to use the HMI, to HMI to can operate on other images, the user can in the picture

(picture 1) add a function button and select "remove HMI lock" function in the button, when the

level 1 HMI protection using the time to use, click the function button, and input the password in

the pop-up box input level 1 password protection solution, in this input 1111 can remove password

protection.

When level 1 HMI password is unblocked, HMI can be used normally.Hypothesis for a period

of time, the time is 12 2009-04-05-00-00, because now it's time to set the level 2 HMI protection,

so the HMI automatically adjust to the HMI set protection screen (picture 2), by the same token,

the user need to use the function button and select the "cancel the HMI lock" function button

function, input level 2 password protection (2222), HMI can normal use.

Because we set level 3 HMI protection here, similarly, when the time is 12-00-00 of 2009-04-10, the

user needs to use the function button and select the "unlocking HMI" function in the function

button. Enter the level 3 unlocking protection password (3333), and HMI can be used normally.

HMI protection fails when all level 3 passwords are unblocked.HMI can be used normally.

The above examples illustrate the use of HMI protection function. For setting different

382
password levels, the operation is similar. Users can refer to the above.

9.2.8 Variable Table

Define a tag with an address. When the tag is employed, it corresponds to the corresponding
address. To configure the variable settings, double click the "variable table" option in the "Project
Manager", then a dialog box will pop up as shown in Figure 7-15:

Figure 7-15 Variable Table Setting Dialog Box

 New: Add a new tag; the maximum total number is 1000

 Delete: Delete the selected tag.
 Modify: Modify the selected tag or double click the selected tag.
 Delete all: Delete all variable tags.
 Import：pop up a open file dialog,import variable table file.
 Export :pop up a save as dialog,Export current variable table.

383
Figure 7-16 Create a screen switch through bit control dialog box

 Variable name: Set the name of the newly created variable.

 Address Type: Select the data type of the address.
 Address: Select the address of the connection.

9.2.9 The operation setting

Configuration operation Settings：

 choice model
regional choice: when the mouse choose regional section contains selected area can be
selected to the control
controls selection: when the mouse choose region completely completely contains
selected control can be selected to the control
 paste mode
mouse click paste: copy control, click paste the user to choose paste placed control
same position paste: copy control, click paste, paste controls in place to be copied

384
 controls peripheral location
 extract U disk file type
6.Version 0: generate version 6.0 U disk file
is higher than version 6.0: generate higher than version 6.0 U disk file

9.2.10 Text Library

The text library control is used to set up a common text library for users to reduce the user's
repeatable text data input.

This is a simple introduction to the control usage method.

1. Building text library data

Set up the data of the text library control and set the number of states

385
 Double-click the corresponding input area in the corresponding language to complete the data
input
2. Use the text library in the control
Take a switch example, check the text library, and choose the corresponding text after selecting the
corresponding language

386
2. Set different data for using the same variable in the text library

When the control of the text library has a variety of states, it can be automatically switched to the
corresponding text library data depending on the state of the state, or the switch to the position
switch, when the text library data is automatically switched to state 1

state 0：

387
 state 1：

9.2.11 Address Library

The address library control, the user is an alias for the register, and the user can access the variable
that needs to be read in two ways of using the address tag and the register address.

The use of the address library is described below

Set the address library tag

Double-click the "address library" option to pop up the following dialog

388
 Click the new button to pop up the following dialog
Description:Add the description information to the current added address library tag to
facilitate users to view the current variable information and USES
Command: the custom address tag is the equivalent of setting an alias for the register,
which can be used in the direct space to select the variable alias to achieve the use of the
register
Address type: set the data type of the variable alias, and there are only two options
Address: set the register address associated with the address tag
Address number: users can add address tags in bulk, and the current address tag function
only supports the operation of a single variable, without an array of address tags

Set up a lw0 address tag number in the figure below, and the following diagram is shown as shown
in the following diagram

389
 Use the address library tag
The lw0 address tag, defined in the figure above, is used as an example to describe the usage of the
address

Select the select address input control, select the address tag library, select the label that you need
to use, and see the address in the address of the site label in the address, click the address library,
and the user can view all the address tags that the current user defines.

The following diagram is shown following the completion

390
In the image, a numeric input control is placed, the address lw0, as shown below

Download to the touch screen or use in the online analog function monitor operation effect, this is
an example of the online simulation, and the input data 40,lw0 registers in the number changes,
and the input in the lw0 is also changed

391
Address tag function, convenient for users to define a special address label for the commonly used
register, use the change address label in the configuration program, reduce the user's cumbersome
address input, and make it easier and faster to complete the writing operation of the configuration

9.3 Screen

Create a new screen as shown in Figure 7-17:

Figure 7-17 Right-click screen options

392
 Right click the "Screen" in the Project Manager, and then select "Add Screen" to create a new
one. In the pop-up dialog box, set the properties such as "Screen Name"; click "OK".
 Two ways to open other screens: double click the screen name in the "Project Manager"; right
click the screen name and select "Open" in the pop-up menu.
 Delete: Delete the screen by right clicking the screen name and selecting "Delete" in the
pop-up menu.
 Property: Right click the screen name, and select "Property" in the pop-up menu; or, the
select "Screen Properties" in the menu bar.

 Copy: Right click the screen name, and select "Copy" in the pop-up menu to copy; set the new

screen name and click OK to complete.

9.4 Window

Way to add a new window is similar to that to create a new screen. Refer to screen operations for
the open, delete, copy or properties of window. The Properties dialog box of the window is shown
in Figure 7-18.

Open a window in screen, and a window will display in the screen.

Figure 7-18 Window Properties dialog box

393
 Height, Width: Set the height and width of the window respectively.

 Display in Middle: When the window pops up, it is displayed in the center of the HMI.

 Display in: Set the X-coordinate and Y-coordinate point on which to display the window. The

origin of coordinates is the top left corner of the HMI screen.

 Title: Enter the title name that will pop up as a title bar with the window.

 Close Button: Whether the window has a close button.

 Top window：Whether lock other screen and window when this window opening.

 Background Color: Set the background color of the window.

 Standard:Not as a public window ,and not use public window.

 Public: show the window’s all objects on the windows that select “use public”.

 Use Public:The window can show the “Public”window’s all objects and controls.

9.5 Historical Data Collector

The Historical Data Collector functions in conjunction with the Historical Data Display on the

toolbar. The former is mainly applied for parameter settings while the later is mainly to display the

historical data.

Create a historical data collector by right clicking "Historical Data Collector" and select "New

Historical Data Collector" in the pop-up menu.

Note: SKTOOL newly supports multiple sets of historical data; up to four historical data collectors

can be built.

Note that you cannot create more than four sets; otherwise an error dialog box will pop up as

follows:

394
Double click "Historical Data Collector 0" in "Project Manager" to open a dialog box as shown in

Figure 7-19:

Figure 7-19 Historical Data Collector dialog box

 Name: Set the name displayed in the Project Manager.

 Sampling length: Number of data to be read each time from the memory.

 Total number of samples: Times of extracting data.

Note: The memory required = (20 + total bytes of data types occupied by all data items) * total

number of samples.

"20" refers to the bytes occupied by time and date;

“Total bytes of data types occupied by all data items” refers to the sum of the data types selected

for each item on the Data Items page.

For example, as shown in Figure 7-20:

395
a, if the data type of each item is "16-bit positive integer", then "total bytes of data types occupied

by all data items " = 2 +2 +2 +2 +2; that "all data items (20 + 10) * 2, which is equal to 60; the bytes

number of "16-bit data " is 2 while "32-bit data occupies 4 bytes.

b. If the data type selected for "LH1" and "LH3" is "32-bit positive integer" (when the data type

selected for "LH1" and "LH3" is "32-bit positive integer", the address of the "Data item" displays as

LH0, LH1, LH3, LH5, LH6), then "the total number of bytes occupied by all data items" = 2 + 4 + 4 + 2

+ 2= 14; then the required memory = (20 + 14) * 2= 68.

Read Address: Start address to read data (Refer to Data Item for detailed information)

Sampling method:

• Timing: Read data at set interval.

• Trigger: Read data when the value of the trigger address is 1.

• Clock: Start reading data at a user-set time interval.

Full sampling disposal manner: Disposal when the data sampling reaches the maximum total

number.

Stop sampling: Stop data sampling in case of full sampling; if this option is not selected, the new

read data will replace the oldest one.

Notify: Inform an address whose value is 1 when the sampling number reaches the maximum.

Click the "Data Item" tab, set the page properties, as shown in Figure 7-20:

396
 Figure 7-20 Data Item of Historical Data Collector

If multi-language is selected, it is necessary to set names for each language when adding new data

items; otherwise it cannot add new items.

In SKTOOL, the address of each group of historical data can be set discrete, according to the actual

situation of LW register, for example: S1 is LW1, S2 is LW89, S3 is LW8905.

Click on any item in the list box to set the properties.

An example in detail:

Set the read address to LW1 on the General page, the register address is set consecutively and the

sampling length is 5; click the Data Item tab and add 5 columns of data (LH0-LH4) in the list. Select

each to set the properties such as name, address, data type, total digits decimal places and

whether to scale.

Assuming that the names, data type and scaling of LH0-LH4 are set as shown in Figure 7-20; other

attributes are default values:

LH0-16 bit Positive integer, Scaling, with a gain of 3 and an offset of 2

397
LH1-32 bit positive integer, Scaling, with a gain of 2 and an offset of 1

LH2-16-bit integer, Scaling is not selected

LH3-32-bit integers, Scaling is not selected

LH4-Floating point, Scaling, with a gain of 4 and an offset of 5

After the settings, since the sample length is 5 (set in General page), it reads out 5 address values

consecutively starting with "Read Address". Addresses are read according to the data type of each

item.

If select 16-bit data, the extracted address is continuous. If 32-bit data is selected, the fetched

addresses are separated. If the scaling function is selected, the final read value is equal to the value

of read address multiplied by the gain plus the offset.

Set up each data type and whether to scale; the addresses to be read are as follows:

LH0-LW1 (16-bit data, read address + 1) Final value of LH0 = Address value of LW1 × 3 + 2

LH1-LW2 (32-bit data, read address +2) Final value of LH1 = Address value of LW2 × 2 + 1

LH2-LW4 (16-bit data, read address +1) Final value of LH2 = Address value of LW4

LH3-LW5 (32-bit data, read address +2) Final value of LH3 = Address value of LW5

LH4-LW7 (32-bit data, read address +2) Final value of LH4 = Address value of LW7 × 4 + 5

After settings, click "OK". Click "Historical data display" icon on the toolbar; set the row number to

5 in the pop-up dialog box, the other attribute values are by default.

Click "OK" to generate a table automatically in the screen, as shown in Figure 7-21:

398
 Figure 7-21 Data Table of Historical Data Display

Application of the above table:

• Date: The date on which the address value is read

• Time: The time when to read the address value

• "LH0": Display the value of the LW1 at a certain time.

• "LH1": Display the value of the LW2 at a certain time.

• "LH2": Display the value of the LW4 at a certain time.

• "LH3": Display the value of the LW5 address at a certain time.

• "LH4": Display the value of the LW7 address at a certain time.

For example, the read address is LW1, the user-defined data sampling length is 3, the total number

of samples is 10, the sampling method is Trigger, the time interval is 1 second, and the data type of

each data is the default;

1). The option of Stop Sampling is not selected:

The LW1, LW2, LW3 address values are read every 1 second. Since the total number of samples is

10, 10 sets of data are read out at the tenth second. Because the "Stop sampling" option is not

selected, the process continues. A fixed memory area depending on the sampling length, total

number of samplings and data type is allocated to store the read data, so when the number of data

groups has reached the "total number of samplings," the latest read data will replace the first one.

2). The option of Stop Sampling option is selected:

The only difference is that it stops sampling when achieve the total number of samplings.

399
Employ “Historical Trends”or “Historical Data Display”to read the values more intuitively.

9.6 Alarm settings

SKTOOL alarm settings consist of digital alarm login and analog alarm login. Users can view the
alarm type and the occurrence time through Alarm control or Alarm Bar after setting up the alarm
login.

Contents：

 Digital Alarm Login

 Analog Alarm Login

 Alarm Display Controls

 Discrete alarm login

9.6.1 Digital Alarm Login

Alarm Setting is employed to display alarm information, only with which the alarm control and

alarm bar run normally (in fact, the alarm control and alarm bar displays the alarm message of

"digital alarm login" and "analog alarm login").

Right click the "Alarm landing" in the Project Manager and select "New digital alarm", as shown in

Figure 7-22:

400
 Figure 7-22 Select alarm log

Double click the "digital alarm login" option to open the digital alarm settings dialog box, as shown

in Figure 7-23:

Figure 7-23 Select continuous digit

401
Steps to build a digital alarm log are as follows:

 Enter the read address first; it is assumed here that the internal address LB1 is set.

 In the "Size" column, select the total number of alarms, i.e. the total number of bit addresses,

which is continuous. It is assumed here that the set value is six.

 Set the bit alarm “Scanning time", that is, the scanning frequency.

 Click an item in the list box, and then move the mouse to the right of the "Message" module;

input text information in the “Text” edit box serving as the alarm content. Here assume that

the alarm messages are as shown in Figure 7-23.

 If "Use" is selected, the alarm information will be displayed in "Alarm Control" or "Alarm Bar".

Otherwise the alarm message will not appear even if the corresponding address is 1. If the

address value of this item is 0, the alarm information does not show.

 OFF Alarm: When this option is selected, the alarm will be generated when the corresponding

address value is 0 (OFF value). Otherwise, an alarm will be generated when the address value

is 1 (ON value). By default, an alarm occurs when the address value is 1 (ON).

 U export: export alarm settings information

 U import: import alarm settings information

Here is an example: Suppose the choice of type is "Continuous bit".

 If the value of LB1 address is 0, the alarm information will not be displayed in "Alarm Control"

and "Alarm Bar", regardless of whether the "Use" option is selected or not.

 If the value of the LB1 address is 1 and the "Use" option is not selected, the alarm information

is not displayed in the "Alarm Control" and "Alarm Bar".

 If the value of LB1 is 1 and the "Use" option is selected, the alarm information will be

displayed in "Alarm Control" and "Alarm Bar".

Click "OK" to complete digital alarm settings. Users can add 6 bit buttons with the function of

Alternation whose address is LB1-LB6; place controls of "Alarm" and “Alarm Bar" on the screen;

then execute offline simulation to check whether it displays alarm information.

The following is an example of offline simulation as shown in Figure 7-24:

402
 Figure 7-24 Offline simulation example of digit alarm

When "Continuous Bit of Word" is selected as the Type, as shown in Figure 7-25 below:

Figure 7-25 Select Continuous Bit of Word

If the “Use” of a certain bit number is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of this

bit value is 1.

403
Note: When copying the contents of alarm messages from other documents to the alarm text of

digital alarm log and analog alarm log, please make sure that there is no line break (invisible) in the

message. It is recommended to input the message manually rather than copy and paste, in case of

display error of alarm message.

If "Word value" is selected for the type, as shown in Figure 7-26 below:

Figure 7-26 The "Word Value" digital alarm dialog box

When a value of the address is selected, the alarm is generated when the value of the address is

equal to the value selected in the list.

Place an Alarm control with 7 lines as the example in Figure 7-24 and a Dynamic alarm bar whose

attributes are set as shown in Figure 7- 27:

404
 Figure 7-27 Dynamic Alarm Bar Properties dialog box

Add lastly six bit buttons whose write address is LB1-LB6 with the "Alternation", “Monitor” and

“Monitor Address identical to Write Address” functions set for each. After the settings, click the

"Save" button on the toolbar to save the project, execute the "Offline" command in the

"Download" item in the menu bar, and then click the bit buttons LB1, LB2, LB4 and LB6. In this case,

the Alarm control and Dynamic Alarm Bar will display the alarm information of LB1, LB2, LB4, and

LB6 in the "Digital Alarm" When click them again, "Alarm Control" and "Dynamic Alarm Bar" will

display nothing since their values are 0 because of the alternation function.

Note: Different alarm information is available for corresponding language through the function of

switching language.

Note: Number of digital alarm is up to 10 for SK series HMI.

405
9.6.2 Analog Alarm Login

Open the analog alarm settings dialog box, as shown in Figure 7-28:

It has two types: Numerical value and Numerical comparison.

The numerical comparison alarm is as shown below:

Figure 7-28 Analog Alarm Login dialog box

If user needs to use the analog alarm, steps are as follows:

 First input the address in the "Read Address" column to alarm. It is assumed here that the
internal address LW1 is set.
 Select the total number of alarms in the "Size" option, which means the total number of
addresses; data type decides the way to read address. Each address value is set firstly as the
16-bit data type and it is continuous. But the data type can be changed. As shown in Figure
7-28, the LW1 address chooses a 32-bit positive integer while LW3 and LW4 values are 16-bit
positive integers. Therefore, when 32-bit data is selected for an address, the later address
value to be read is added by 2 on the basis of the former address value; and if the 16-bit data
type is selected, the later address value to be read is the former value plus 1.
 Users can set the "Scanning time" of the alarm, which means the scanning frequency.
 Click each item to input a value in the “Limit” box on the right; then enter the text information
(alarm content) in the “Text" box. Here assume that the message is as shown in Figure 7-28:
each address value can be classified into one of four ranges-- Low, Low Low, High, High High.

As shown in Figure 7-29:

406
 Figure 7-29 Diagram of the four address values for the LW1 address

 Low Low: When the value of this item is less than the limit of this setting and the "Use" option
is selected, the alarm information of this item will be displayed in "Alarm Control" or
"Dynamic Alarm Bar";
 Low: When the value of this item is no less than the “Low Low” limit while less than the “Low”
limit and the "Use" option is selected, the alarm information of this item will be displayed in
"Alarm Control" or "Dynamic Alarm Bar";
 High: When the value of this item is greater than the “High” limit while no greater than the
“High High” limit and the "Use" option is selected, the alarm information of this item will be
displayed in "Alarm Control" or "Dynamic Alarm Bar".
 High High: When the value of this item is greater than the limit of this setting and the "Use"
option is selected, the alarm information of this item is displayed in "Alarm Control" or
"Dynamic Alarm Bar".
 U export: export alarm settings information
 U import: import alarm settings information

Refer to “Digital Alarm Login” for the application of “Use”.

Numerical value alarm means an alarm occurs when the value reaches the set limit value.

The settings are as follows: Alarm is triggered when the alarm value reaches 1, 12, 30 and 40.

407
Note: Number of analog alarm is up to 10 for SK series HMI.

9.6.3 Discrete alarm login

In the expansion of the alarm login options, double-click the "new discrete alarm login" option, you
can open the discrete alarm settings dialog box

New: a new alarm content, data categories can be freely selected

408
 Delete: delete an alarm content
Delete all: delete all alerts
Export: set up a good alarm content
Import: import and set up the alarm content
New alarm setting screen:

Data categories: according to the need to choose the appropriate data categories to
determine the alarm conditions
Address: set the address that needs to be monitored and alarm
The number of consecutive: according to the need to set whether the need for
continuous N address monitoring
Alarm information: the alarm information displayed when the address value is set to
alarm condition
Alarm condition: set the alarm condition of the address value, and the alarm
condition is shown below:

L bit ON alarm: when the data category is bool, the address is ON trigger alarm

L bit OFF alarm: when the data category is bool, the address is OFF trigger alarm

L fixed value alarm: when the address value is set value, the alarm is triggered

409
 L range alarm: when the address value is within the set range to trigger alarm

L out of range alarm: when the address value is not within the set range, the alarm is triggered

Alarm color: set the address value to trigger the alarm is the color of the alarm information

Analog alarm number: at present, SK series HMI can only set up 2 analog alarm

9.6.4 Alarm Display Controls

It can add alarm display control after the settings: Alarm Display, Alarm Bar and Historical Alarm

Display.

Select in the toolbar menu to set the alarm bar display parameters in the dialog box, as

shown in Figure 7-30:

410
 Figure 7-30 Alarm Bar dialog box

 Speed: the movement speed of the alarm information;

 Direction: The alarm bar moves from right to left or left to right;

 Alarm sort: The display order of alarms by chronological order or by traverse chronological

order.

Select the alarm control in the toolbar menu to set the alarm display text and parameters in the

dialog box, as shown in Figure 7-31:

411
 Figure 7-31 Alarm Display dialog box

Select the historical alarm display control in the toolbar menu to set the display content and

parameters in the dialog box, as shown below:

Historical Alarm Display dialog box

412
9.7 Recipe

In the field of manufacturing, recipe is used to describe the proportions of materials used to
produce a product, and is a set of parameter settings of variables used during production. For
example, a basic recipe is necessary for bread making, and this recipe may list the weights or
proportions of all materials used to make bread, such as water, flour, sugar, egg, oil, and so on. In
addition, it may also list some optional materials such as fruit, nut, chocolate, and so on. These
optional materials may be added to the basic recipe to make bread of different flavors. Take iron
works for another example. A recipe in an iron works may be a set of machine parameters. For
batch processing machines, a recipe may be used to describe different steps of the batch
processing.

A machine may make both bread and cakes, including bread of different flavors and cakes of
various forms. Here, we call the material proportions of bread as a recipe, and call the different
material proportions of different flavors of bread as a file. Obviously, recipe records are contained
in recipe files.

SKTOOL provides the function of recipe configuration that is available in the Recipe of the menu
bar or in the Project Manager, you can enter the recipe configuration dialog box, add a new set of
recipe functions. As shown in Figure 7-32:

Figure 7-32 Continuous recipe Property Settings Dialog Box

 Name: Name of the current recipe file.

 Description: Description: Name description of the current recipe file;

413
 Recipe length: Set the length and quantity of the recording address to be read by the current
recipe. Addresses of recipe record form are arranged in sequence automatically by the system,
and cannot be changed. The maximum length of recipe is 4096.
 Total Number: Number of recipes, up to 512;
 The current recipe group editable in HMI:Enable Edit the recipe in HMI.

Figure 7-33 Discrete recipe Property Settings Dialog Box

 Grouo name: Name of the current recipe file.

 Recipe description:Description: Name description of the current recipe file;
 Write recipe completion flag:after current recipe is wrote to PLC,the value of bit address set
1;
 The current recipe group editable in HMI:Enable Edit the recipe in HMI.

Note: Recipe length * Bytes occupied by data type * Total number <= 512KB

 Data Type: Data type of the data register;

 Write recipe to PLC: Set related data register address of recipe and PLC;
 Read recipe from PLC: Set related data register address of recipe and PLC;
 Recipe memory: The memory address range of the recipe in the HMI that is automatically
generated and cannot be changed;
 Current recipe: The recipe memory address in the HMI and the data register of PLC is
automatically generated by order and cannot be changed;

414
 Recipe Number Register: the recipe is arranged automatically by the order of serial number,
and it cannot be changed; it corresponds the order of recipe name in the data item.

The continuous recipe data item, as shown in Figure 7-33:

Figure 7-34 Continuous Recipe Data Item Page

 Name: The name of the current recipe;

 Data: Write and display each address value of the current recipe;
 Copy Recipe Data: Copy the data from the source recipe to the destination recipe. Click OK to
save the current one and click Cancel to exit the dialog box. Once the recipe configuration has
been completed, the interface can be designed to operate the recipe in the HMI.

Application example of Recipe:

1. Create a recipe configuration as described above. The effect is shown in Figure 7-34:

415
 Figure 7-35 Function of continuous recipe data copy

This recipe has a total of 4 sub-recipes, each containing 16 items. The storage addresses are from
RWI: 1 to RWI: 16 in the memory of HMI.

2. After the recipe configuration, display the recipe on the screen，modify it or directly download it
to the PLC. So we will use the following essential functional controls.

 Recipe display: Click numeric display / input (refer to "Numerical display / input")
Select the internal memory address RWI: 0 to create a numerical display and input control on
the screen. The input and display value is the recipe serial number. The value 0 of RWI0
means recipe serial number 1; the value 1 means recipe number 2 , etc.

 Click the function button : Refer to the "Function button" for operation.

Buttons can be created to write recipe to PLC, read recipe from PLC, save recipe, select the
previous recipe and the later one through the function button with relevant function setting.

Application of multiple recipes: SKTOOL provides new function of multi-group recipe, but it
supports only ten groups, otherwise a limit message will be prompted as shown in 7-34-2

416
 Figure 7-35-1

Figure 7-35-2

The LW61141 is employed to enter the recipe group. The original RWI0 is also used to input the
recipe number. Therefore, it needs to set values of LW61141 and RWI0 at the same time when
select one. For example: Enter recipe group 0 to LW61141, serial number 2 for RWI0; it means
selecting the recipe data of Recipe 2 in recipe group 0.

3. According to the above operation, a screen can be created as shown in Figure 7-35:

Assume that all monitor address to be written is D0, the length of the recipe is 16 and the total

number is 4.

Figure 7-36 Effect of the Recipe

It is easily available to modify, preserve, read and write recipe through the function buttons and
numerical display / input settings. But it should pay attention to the following points:
 Recipe list should be established before use of Recipe functions.
 When writing recipe parameters into the recipe list, pay attention to the data type. 16-bit
datum occupies only one word, and 32-bit datum occupies two words. Consistent data type
should be chosen. Particularly, pay special attention to use of 32-bit data address. As 32-bit
datum occupies two words, prevent address overlapping when entering write-in address and
monitored address.

417
 Address RWI0 is for fixed use, and can be used to change recipe number only. If value of RWI0
is 0, it indicates the first recipe number, and so on.

 Recipe parameter addresses are continuous.

The discrete recipe data item, as shown in Figure 7-33:

Figure7-41 Discrete recipe data item page

 Recipe total : Number of recipes, up to 128;

 Language: Users can set different languages’ Element name and recipe name.
 Recipe name:Modify current recipe name,such as “recipe1”,”recipe2”.
 New:Pop up a “recipe element”dialog,create a element,as shown follow figure.

Figure7-42 Discrete recipe new element box

 Delete:delete current recipe element.

 Deleter All:Delete all element in this recipe.
 Alter:Pop up the current element’s Recipe element box,modify the information.
 Export:Pop up a save as dialog,save the recipe as a *.csv file by assign root and name.

418
 Import::Pop up a open dialog,choose a *.csv file as current recipe.

9.8 Data Transmission

Used to transmit data between PLC and HMI or between PLC and PLC. Click "Data Transmission" in

the Project Manager to show the current data transmission list.

Figure 7-36

The transmission list lists details of all the current transmission items. Users can create, delete and

modify them. SKTOOL configuration software supports up to 512 data transmission items.

To create a new one or modify an existing transmission item, it needs to enter the Property Setting

page:

419
 Figure 7-37

1. Attribute

Timing / Trigger: Select the trigger mode for data transfer.

Timing: Perform data transfer at the set interval.

Triggering: The transmission signal is controlled by specified address. Execute this command

when the address value is 1.

Automatic reset: When the value of address trigger is 1, set it automatically to 0.

Address Type: Select the address type to transfer data: Bit / Word / Double Word.

Word / Bit: Input the length of the data to be transferred. The length range is 1~ 64.

2. Address

Source Address: The source address of the transmitted data, which must be of the same type

as the type of address set in the "Property".

Destination Address: The destination address of the transmitted data, which must be of the

same type as the type of address set in the "Property".

420
Destination address and Source address cannot be on the same PLC.

9.9 Global Script

Set a script that has been successfully compiled into a global script, meaning executing this script
when the configuration starts running, and it will be executed during the run time without being
limited by screens. A maximum of 64 global scripts can be added, and they are executed in the set
order.

Click "Global Script " on the menu "Settings", as shown in the dialog box:

Click the list item to list all the script names that have been compiled successfully, and then decide
whether the script is controlled by bit and the execution frequency. The selected script is executed
as a global script during configuration run time.

421
9.10 Init Script

Set a script that has been successfully compiled into an Init script, meaning executing this script
only one time without being limited by screens. A maximum of 64 init scripts can be added, and
they are executed in the set order.

Click "Init Script " on the menu "Setting", as shown in the dialog box:

Click the list item to list all the script names that have been compiled successfully. The selected
script is executed as a init macro during configuration run time.

9.11 Trigger_Script

Set a script that has been successfully compiled into an trigger script, executing this script when the
assigned condition is triggered. The trigger condition include screen/window skip,and address
value change.

422
Click "Trigger Script" on the menu "Setting", as shown in the dialog box:

Figure7-45 Trigger Script dialog

Click the “New” button to pop up a new dialog. Then select a script is executed as a trigger
script when the condition occur.

The trigger mode include address triggered and screen triggered.

Address Trigger:Set a Bit Address,select a trigger mode,include of
OFF->ON,ON->OFF,OFF<->ON,Immediate execute when the status is ON.
Screen Trigger:Set a screen Name as trigger condition,select a trigger mode,include of Open Screen
and Close Screen.

423
 Figure7-46 new trigger script

You can use “Alter”and “Delete”button to operate the scripts,finally create a trigger script list.

424
 Figure7-47 trigger script list

9.12 Data forwarding

Function of Data Forwarding:

1、Data Forwarding apply to transfer data between devices connected to two ports of HMI.

Example：

Select Modbus RTU Slave protocol for Port 1; Take HMI as slave station; master station Device
1 read the address of LW0 in HMI.
Select Modbus RTU Master protocol for Port 2; HMI reads the address of 4x11 of Slave station
2.

425
9.13 Schedule Table

User can project some events according to the setting of schedule table.For example,a factory
starts machines at 8:00 am,and closes machines at 18:00pm on weekday.

Click “Schedule Table”on “Standard List” ， it will pop up a schedule table dialog,as shown

follow.

Figure 7-49 Schedule table dialog

426
Click”New”button,pop up a new dialog,as shown follow.The General page is first display.

Figure 7-50 New schedule table dialog

 Description：
Input text here in order to convenient for users to understand this schedule table’s
function.
 Execute the start/end action when open the power：
If the power（HMI）open time is after the start time，Execute the start/end action.
 Target address：
Input the target address type and address，the value of address will be wrote when the
start/end time occurs.
 Write operation：
Type include “Constant”and”Address”.Below “Constant” type corresponds to Value
that be wrote to target address.Below “Address”type corresponds to a address edit,the value
of address will be wrote to target address value when start/end time occurs.
 Use the end operate：
If this section is selection，the value of write operation will be wrote in target address when
end time occurs.

After setting General,Click”Time limit”page, as shown follow.

427
 Figure 7-51 Time limit page

 constant：Check the Start/Finish time，when the tomes occur，it will operate the relevant

write-in。

 Address：Using a piece of address to control the schedule table’s start and end time,as

shown follow。

Figure 7-52 Setting address control

428
For example ,the address set to LW0，LW0~LW10 are used to schedule address.

LW0:Control address，when LW0 == 1，the schedule time is loaded on HMI.Schedule element

starts work.After Loaded on,LW0 was reset to 0；

LW1:Schedule state，when schedule time is loaded(LW0==0),LW1 would be set to 1。

LW2:Action mode ， when LW2 is set to 1, if current time is after the start time,operate the

write action。If LW2 is 0,when current time equals the start/end time,it will operate start/end

operation.

LW3:the value indicates the day of start time，it’s value equal to 2^(number of week),LW3 =

(0,1,4,8,16,32,64)

LW4~LW6:the start time’s hours,minute,seconds.

LW7:the value indicates the day of finished time，it’s value equal to 2^(number of week),LW3

= (0,1,4,8,16,32,64)

LW8~LW10:the finished time’s hours,minute,seconds.

Analogous，when LWn is set to control address，LWn~LWn+10 are used to schedule address，

just like above。

Tips:If checked Address,Don’t foget to set the control address to 1 in order to loadthe

schedule after set the start/finished time.Otherwise,the schedule wouldn’t work.

Fobid page,as shown follow：

429
 Figure 7-53 Forbid page

If check “use forbid”,when the bit address suit the condition(0 or 1),schedule can

work.

After setting new dialog parameter,click “ok”,create a element of schedule

table,as shown follow.

Figure 7-50 Created schedule table

430
 10. Reserved Registers of SKTOOL System

SKTOOL reserves some registers for special use, and users must refer to the related instructions
when using these registers, including LB (Local Memory Bit); LW (Local Memory Register) and RWI
(Formula Index).

For example:

LB: LB0-LB65535 and LB50000-LB51999 belong to the area of power failure protection;

LW: LW0-LW65535 and LW50000-LW51993 belong to the area of power failure protection. And

LW51994~LW51999 are used by interior, not external;

RWI: RWI0~RWI65535.

Contents：

 LB

 LW

 RWI

10.1 LB

read and write

address instruction Notes
properties
These bits can be initialized
60000-60099 Initial setting ON R/W
to ON at system startup

431
 Triggering this bit can write
the data in the current RWI
60100 Recipe download R/W
to the device, and reset it
after completion
Triggering this bit can read
the recipe from the device to
60101 recipe upload R/W
the RWI register area, reset
after completion
Triggering this bit can write
the recipe from RWI to
60102 Recipe save R/W
FLASH, reset after
completion
When the recipe is being
Recipe Download written to the device, this bit
60103 R
Instructions is ON, and it is OFF after
downloading
When the recipe is reading
Recipe upload
60104 the device, this bit is ON, and R
instructions
it is OFF after downloading
Triggering this bit restarts the
60105 Restart the HMI R
system
Control this bit to ON to turn
60106 Backlight Control off the LCD backlight, OFF to R/W
turn on the LCD backlight
When ON, the
communication is normal or
COM1
there is no communication,
60107 communication R
and when OFF, the
status
communication fails
abnormally.
When ON, the
COM2 communication is normal or
60108 communication there is no communication, R
status and when OFF, the
communication fails

432
 abnormally.
When ON, the communication is
COM3 normal or there is no
60186 communication communication, and when OFF, R
status the communication fails
abnormally.

COM1 Triggering this bit can write

communication the modified communication
60109 parameter parameters into the FLASH R/W
modification storage area, and turns OFF
storage after completion
COM2 Triggering this bit can write
communication the modified communication
60110 parameter parameters into the FLASH R/W
modification storage area, and turns OFF
storage after completion
Triggering this bit can write the
COM3
modified communication
communication
60187 parameters into the FLASH R
parameter
storage area, and turns OFF after
modification storage
completion

Triggering this bit can write

Confirmation and
the modified system
modification of
60111 parameters into the FLASH R/W
system
storage area, and turns OFF
parameters
after completion
When ON, the exception
Communication window is allowed to pop up,
60112 exception and when OFF, the exception R/W
window window is prohibited from
popping up.
When ON, the mouse cursor
mouse cursor appears, and when OFF, the
60113 R/W
control cursor is disabled (only when
using touch)

433
 When ON, there is a USB
USB connection device connected, and when
60114 R
status OFF, no USB device is
connected.
Whether there is a sound
60116 touch sound when touched or clicked with R/W
the mouse
Is there a sound when an
60117 alarm sound R/W
alarm occurs?
Clear the The number of historical
60118 historical alarm alarm records is cleared R/W
record (automatic reset)
The number of operation
Operation record
60119 records is cleared (automatic R/W
clear
reset)
Clear historical Historical data record reset
60120 R/W
data records (automatic reset)
Reload the recipe data of the
current recipe serial number,
60121 Overload recipe R/W
this bit is ON, and it is OFF
after reloading
When ON, save historical
Save history alarm records to flash, and
60123 R/W
alarms automatically OFF after
saving
When ON, save historical
save historical data to flash, and
60124 R/W
data automatically OFF after
saving
Send historical Send historical alarm files to
60127 alarm files to U U disk, automatically OFF R/W
disk after sending
Send historical Send historical data files to U
60128 data files to U disk, automatically OFF after R/W
disk sending

434
 Send the project file to the U
Send current
60129 disk, and automatically turn R/W
project to U disk
off after sending
The current user When ON, cancels user login
60133 is logged in and and automatically resets R/W
out after completion
There is a
When a real-time alarm
60141 real-time alarm R
occurs, this bit is ON
happening
The system is in a When in the screen saver
60142 R
screen saver state state, this bit is ON
When ON, send the
Copy the
operation record file to the U
60143 operation record R/W
disk, and automatically OFF
to the U disk
after sending
When ON, send the recipe
Copy all recipes file to the U disk, and
60145 W
to U disk automatically OFF after
sending
USB two-digit
60147 barcode scanner When ON, triggers R/W
scan end mark
When ON, trigger; auto
reset. The file name of
Import historical historical data imported by
60148 data from U disk this function must be R/W
trigger bit hisdata+group number.csv,
otherwise this function will
be invalid.
Export the
specified ID
When ON, trigger;
60150 recipe to the R/W
automatically reset
trigger bit of the
U disk
60152 Import the When ON, trigger; R/W

435
 specified ID automatically reset
recipe from the U
disk to the HMI
trigger bit
Clear the
When ON, trigger;
60154 specified ID R/W
automatically reset
recipe trigger bit
Override Recipe When ON, trigger;
60155 R/W
Trigger Bit automatically reset
Recipe read and When ON, trigger;
60156 R/W
save trigger bits automatically reset
Export recipes to
When ON, trigger;
60163 USB stick by R/W
automatically reset
group
Ethernet ON: Normal communication
60165 communication OFF: Communication R
identification abnormal
When ON, trigger; automatic
reset, scan the .csv files in
the root directory and
60167 Scan U disk files subdirectories of the U disk, R/W
and display them in a pop-up
window for import and
export of recipe files
When ON, trigger;
Export historical
automatically reset,
60168 data to U disk in R/W
LW60408 sets the export
groups
history data group number
ON: Automatic mode OFF:
Manual mode (default
Station number option)
60169 disable mode Automatic station number R/W
selection disabling and unlocking:
When the touch screen uses
the extended mode to

436
 communicate with multiple
devices, a device fails and
cannot communicate, the
application program
automatically disables the
station number
communication, and there is
an automatic reconnection
mechanism inside, when the
device can communicate
normally , automatically
unblock, restore
communication
Controls whether When ON, the VNC function
60173 the VNC function is enabled; when OFF, the R/W
is enabled VNC function is disabled
When ON, SIM card insertion
Check if a SIM
60176 is detected; when OFF, SIM R
card is inserted
card insertion is not detected
Update HMI SN Triggered when ON, update
60177 R/W
code information HMI SN code information
When using the standard
mode to connect an Ethernet
device, dynamically modify
TCP the IP, port number, station
communication number and other
60178 parameter parameters of the connected R/W
modification device, and the setting will
enable flag bit take effect. For
details, please refer to the
63186~63191 address
description of LW .
Dynamic Set dynamic password key,
password key set to take effect,
60179 R/W
modification automatically reset, key
enable flag setting address: LW63147

437
 Data type: ASCII Length: 6
LW63153 (ASCII input
control, length 32), after the
Recipe name formula name is entered, this
60180 R/W
change trigger bit address will take effect and
automatically reset after
completion
Set whether the dynamic
Dynamic
password function is enabled
60181 password enable R/W
0; disable dynamic password
flag
1: enable dynamic password
Set the dynamic password
expiration time, year, month,
day, hour: LW63141 ~ 63146
Data type: 16-bit integer,
setting the date set after the
completion LB60182, set to
Dynamic take effect automatically
password reset
60182 R/W
expiration time Note: Password protection
setting flag process does not allow
dynamic updating firmware
or dial Code 1.3 to modify
the system time, the
firmware can be updated
after entering the super
password
Q series touch screen by
default, the data in the
Data in the
power-off hold area will be
power-off hold
automatically stored for 1
area is
60183 minute. By setting this R/W
immediately
address, the data in the
stored as the
power-off hold area will be
trigger bit
stored immediately and
automatically reset.

438
10.2 LW

read and write

address instruction Notes
properties
In the extended
mode, the
communication of
the specified station
number is disabled.
Corresponding
station number
0~255, each address
corresponds to 16
station numbers,
COM1: 59010~59025
59010 means station
59010~59057 COM2: 59026~59041 R/W
number 0~15, and
Ethernet: 59042~59057
so on
The X-th bit is 1,
allowing the
communication with
the X station
number, and when it
is 0, the
communication with
the X station number
is closed.
The extended mode
disables the COM1: 59058~59073
59058~59105 communication COM2: 59074~59089 R
identification of the Ethernet: 59090~59105
specified station

439
 number
Corresponding
station number
0~255, each address
corresponds to 16
station numbers,
59058 means station
number 0~15, and
so on
The Xth bit is 1, the
communication of
this station number
is disabled, and if it
is 0, the
communication of
this station number
is normal.
Bcd code, valid value
60000 local time seconds R/W
range 0-59
Bcd code, valid value
60001 local time R/W
range 0-59
Bcd code, valid value
60002 local time R/W
range 0-23
Bcd code, valid value
60003 local time day R/W
range 1-31
Bcd code, valid value
60004 local time month R/W
range 1-12
Bcd code, valid value
60005 local time year R/W
range 0-9999
Bcd code, valid value
60006 local time week R
range 1-7
The time the system has
60007 system runtime R
been running, hours
System elapsed time,
60008 system running time R
minutes

440
 System runtime in System elapsed time,
60009 R
seconds seconds
Current screen The serial number of the
60010 R
window number current screen
Corresponding language
60012 current language R
serial number
When the custom
Numerical input
keyboard pops up, the
60013 allowable upper limit R
upper limit of the allowed
value
input is displayed in ASCII
When the custom
Numerical input
keyboard pops up, the
60023 allowable lower limit R
lower limit of the allowed
value
input is displayed in ASCII
The input data content
The input data displayed on the
60033 content displayed on keyboard, the characters R
the keyboard input from the keyboard,
ASCII display
The current system current user serial
60065 R
login user number
Display the current user's
Current system login
60066 password, 16 characters, R
user password
ASCII display
Display the current user
The current system
60074 name, 32 characters, R
login user name
ASCII display
Whether user 1 is 0 - not enabled, 1 -
60090 R
enabled enabled
Whether user 2 is 0 - not enabled, 1 -
60091 R
enabled enabled
Whether user 3 is 0 - not enabled, 1 -
60092 R
enabled enabled
60093 Whether user 4 is 0 - not enabled, 1 - R

441
 enabled enabled
Whether user 5 is 0 - not enabled, 1 -
60094 R
enabled enabled
Whether user 6 is 0 - not enabled, 1 -
60095 R
enabled enabled
Whether user 7 is 0 - not enabled, 1 -
60096 R
enabled enabled
Whether user 8 is 0 - not enabled, 1 -
60097 R
enabled enabled
32 characters, ASCII
60098 User 1 first name R
display
32 characters, ASCII
60114 User 2 first name R
display
32 characters, ASCII
60130 User 3 name R
display
32 characters, ASCII
60146 User 4 first name R
display
32 characters, ASCII
60162 User 5 name R
display
32 characters, ASCII
60178 User 6 name R
display
32 characters, ASCII
60194 User 7 first name R
display
32 characters, ASCII
60210 User 8 first name R
display
16 characters, ASCII
60226 User 1 password R
display
16 characters, ASCII
60234 User 2 password R
display
16 characters, ASCII
60242 User 3 password R
display
16 characters, ASCII
60250 User 4 password R
display

442
 16 characters, ASCII
60258 User 5 password R
display
16 characters, ASCII
60266 User 6 password R
display
16 characters, ASCII
60274 User 7 password R
display
16 characters, ASCII
60282 User 8 password R
display
Display the screen saver
time specified during
60290 screen saver time R/W
configuration, the setting
range is 0~60
The blinking period of the
Indicator flashing indicator light control,
60291 R/W
cycle the minimum value is 0.1,
the unit is s
The position of the X The position of the X
60292 R
when touched coordinate when touched
Y's position when The position of the Y
60293 R
touched coordinate when touched
The position of the X The position of the X
60294 when the touch coordinate when the R
leaves touch leaves
The position of Y The position of the Y
60295 when the touch coordinate when the R
leaves touch leaves
60296 touch state 1-touch, 0-release R
Communication
60297 Checkout of COM1 parameters, calibration, R/W
0-NONE, 1-EVEN, 2-ODD
Communication
parameters, baud rate,
60298 Baud rate of COM1 R/W
0-1200, 1-2400, 2-4800,
3-9600, 4-19200,

443
 5-38400, 6-57600,
7-115200
Communication
60299 stop bit of COM1 parameters, stop bits, R/W
0-1stops, 1-2stops
Communication
60300 Data length of COM1 parameters, data length, R/W
0-7bits, 1-8bits
HMI address of Communication
60301 R/W
COM1 parameters, HMI address
PLC address of Communication
60302 R/W
COM1 parameters, PLC address
The length of the
COM1 PLC maximum continuous
60303 consecutive address address that can be read R/W
interval in a single
communication
COM1 Communication delay
60304 R/W
communication time time
The number of times the
system resends when the
60305 COM1 retries R/W
communication is
abnormal
Address mode,
60306 COM1 address mode 0-standard mode, R
1-extended mode
COM1
Set the communication
60307 communication R/W
timeout time, in ms
timeout time
COM1
The current waiting time
60308 communication R/W
of communication, in ms
current wait time
60309 COM1 HMI location 0-local 1-remote R/W
60312 Checksum of COM2 Communication R/W

444
 parameters, calibration,
0-NONE, 1-EVEN, 2-ODD
Communication
parameters, baud rate,
0-1200, 1-2400, 2-4800,
60313 Baud rate of COM2 R/W
3-9600, 4-19200,
5-38400, 6-57600,
7-115200
Communication
60314 stop bit of COM2 parameters, stop bits, R/W
0-1stops, 1-2stops
Communication
60315 Data length of COM2 parameters, data length, R/W
0-7bits, 1-8bits
HMI address of Communication
60316 R/W
COM2 parameters, HMI address
PLC address of Communication
60317 R/W
COM2 parameters, PLC address
The length of the
COM2 PLC maximum continuous
60318 continuous address address that can be read R/W
interval in a single
communication
COM2 Communication delay
60319 R/W
communication time time
The number of times the
system resends when the
60320 COM2 retries R/W
communication is
abnormal
Address mode,
60321 COM2 address mode 0-standard mode, R
1-extended mode
COM2
Set the communication
60322 communication R/W
timeout time, in ms
timeout time

445
 COM2
The current waiting time
60323 communication R/W
of communication, in ms
current wait time
60324 COM2 HMI location 0-local, 1-remote R/W
Communication parameters,
61270 Checksum of COM3 calibration, 0-NONE, 1-EVEN, R/W
2-ODD

Communication parameters,
baud rate, 0-1200, 1-2400,
61271 Baud rate of COM3 R/W
2-4800, 3-9600, 4-19200,
5-38400, 6-57600, 7-115200

Communication parameters,
61272 stop bit of COM3 R/W
stop bits, 0-1stops, 1-2stops

Communication parameters,
61273 Data length of COM3 data length, 0-7bits, R/W
1-8bits/td>

Communication parameters,
61274 HMI address of COM3 R/W
HMI address

Communication parameters,
61275 PLC address of COM3 R/W
PLC address

The length of the maximum

COM3 PLC continuous continuous address that can
61276 R/W
address interval be read in a single
communication

COM3 communication
61277 Communication delay time R/W
time

The number of times the

61278 COM3 retries system resends when the R/W
communication is abnormal

Address mode, 0-standard

61279 COM3 address mode R/W
mode, 1-extended mode

COM3 communication Set the communication

61280 R/W
timeout time timeout time, in ms

61281 COM3 communication The current waiting time of R/W

446
 current wait time communication, in ms

61282 COM3 HMI location 0-local, 1-remote R

The total number of

Number of historical historical alarms that
60327 R/double word
alarms occurred that were
recorded
The total number of
Number of historical
60329 historical data records R/double word
records
recorded
1-Chinese keyboard,
keyboard language
60333 0-English keyboard, for R/W
switch
standard keyboard
CPU runtime usage of the
60334 CPU usage R
current system
The current The current brightness
60335 brightness value of value of the backlight R/W
the backlight (140~450)
Current project Current project file
60337 R
creation time year creation time year
Current project Current project file
60338 R
creation time month creation time month
Current project
The current project file
60339 creation date and R
creation date and time
time
current user
60340 set current language W
language
When equal to 1,
copy the historical
alarms of the
60359 R/W
specified serial
number range to the
U disk
When equal to 1,
60361 R/W
copy the historical

447
 alarms of the
specified time range
to the U disk
Export historical
60363 alarm start sequence R/W
number
Export historical
60365 alarm end sequence R/W
number
The length is 6
Export history alarm characters, which are the
60367 R/W
start time year, month, day, hour,
minute and second.
The length is 6
Export historical characters, which are the
60373 R/W
alarm end time year, month, day, hour,
minute and second.
File name when
60379 exporting historical 22 characters long R/W
alarms to U disk
The current group
number control Specify the current group
60408 R/W
address of the number of historical data
historical data
When equal to 1,
copy the historical
60409 data of the specified R/W
serial number range
to the U disk
When equal to 1,
copy the historical
60411 data of the specified R/W
time range to the U
disk
60413 Export historical data R/W

448
 start sequence
number
Export historical data
60415 end sequence R/W
number
The length is 6
Export historical data characters, which are the
60417 R/W
start time year, month, day, hour,
minute and second.
The length is 6
End time of
characters, which are the
60423 exporting historical R/W
year, month, day, hour,
data
minute and second.
File name when
60429 exporting historical 24 characters long R/W
data to U disk
Modify User 1 16 characters long, ASCII
60441 R/W
Password Cache display
When it is 1, the
password of user 1 will be
changed to the password
Enable to modify the
60449 of the cache area, and it R/W
password of user 1
will be reset
automatically after
setting.
Modify User 2 16 characters long, ASCII
60451 R/W
Password Cache display
When it is 1, the
password of user 2 will be
changed to the password
Enable to modify the
60459 of the cache area, and it R/W
password of user 2
will be reset
automatically after
setting.
60461 Modify User 3 16 characters long, ASCII R/W

449
 Password Cache display
When it is 1, the
password of user 3 will be
changed to the password
Enable to modify the
60469 of the cache area, and it R/W
password of user 3
will be reset
automatically after
setting.
Modify User 4 16 characters long, ASCII
60471 R/W
Password Cache display
When it is 1, the
password of user 4 will be
changed to the password
Enable to modify the
60479 of the cache area, and it R/W
password of user 4
will be reset
automatically after
setting.
Modify User 5 16 characters long, ASCII
60481 R/W
Password Cache display
When it is 1, the
password of user 5 will be
changed to the password
Enable to modify the
60489 of the cache area, and it R/W
password of user 5
will be reset
automatically after
setting.
Modify User 6 16 characters long, ASCII
60491 R/W
Password Cache display
When it is 1, the
password of user 6 will be
changed to the password
Enable to modify the
60499 of the cache area, and it R/W
password of user 6
will be reset
automatically after
setting.

450
 Modify user 7 16 characters long, ASCII
60501 R/W
password cache display
When it is 1, the
password of user 7 will be
changed to the password
Enable to modify the
60509 of the cache area, and it R/W
password of user 7
will be reset
automatically after
setting.
Modify User 8 16 characters long, ASCII
60511 R/W
Password Cache display
When it is 1, the
password of user 8 will be
changed to the password
Enable to modify the
60519 of the cache area, and it R/W
password of user 8
will be reset
automatically after
setting.
60520 HMI model 40 characters R
bootloader version
60540 40 characters R
number
60560 OS version number 40 characters R
software version
60580 40 characters R
number
When it is 1, the
Operation record
60600 operation record is R/W
enable
allowed to be recorded
Number of operation Display the number of
60601 R
records current operation records
When it is 1, enable
Screen capture screen capture and reset
60602 R/W
enabled automatically after
setting
60603 Screenshot storage 0-U disk R/W

451
 location
Enable HMI When 1, use HMI
60604 R/W
protection protection
Set the total number of
Set the total number
password levels for HMI
60605 of password levels R/W
protection, up to 15
for HMI protection
passwords can be set
60606-60628 is the year,
month, day, hour, minute,
second and expiration
prompt screen of the
level 1 password and the
unlock password (the
password length is 16
characters)
60629-60651 is the year,
month, day, hour, minute,
second and expiration
prompt screen of the
level 2 password, and the
Setting the lifetime unlock password
60606-60835 of the HMI (password length is 16 R/W
protection characters)
60652-60674 are the
year, month, day, hour,
minute, second, and
expiration prompt
screens for level 3
passwords, as well as the
unlock password
(password length is 16
characters)
60675-60697 is the year,
month, day, hour, minute,
second and expiration
prompt screen of the

452
4-level password and the
unlock password
(password length is 16
characters)
60698-60720 is the year,
month, day, hour, minute,
second and expiration
prompt screen of the
5-level password and the
unlock password (the
password length is 16
characters)
60721-60743 are the
year, month, day, hour,
minute, second and
expiration prompt screen
of the 6-level password
and the unlock password
(password length is 16
characters)
60744-60766 is the year,
month, day, hour, minute,
second and expiration
prompt screen of the
7-level password and the
unlock password (the
password length is 16
characters)
60767-60789 is the year,
month, day, hour, minute,
second and expiration
prompt screen of the
8-level password and the
unlock password (the
password length is 16
characters)
60790-60812 is the year,

453
 month, day, hour, minute,
second and expiration
prompt screen of the
9-level password and the
unlock password
(password length is 16
characters)
60813-60835 is the year,
month, day, hour, minute,
second and expiration
prompt screen of the
10-level password and
the unlock password (the
password length is 16
characters)
63000-63022 is the year,
month, day, hour, minute,
second and expiration
prompt screen of the
11-level password and
the unlock password (the
password length is 16
characters)
63023-63045 is the year,
Setting the lifetime month, day, hour, minute,
63000-63114 of the HMI second and expiration
protection prompt screen of the
12-level password and
the unlock password
(password length is 16
characters)
63046-63068 is the year,
month, day, hour, minute,
second and expiration
prompt screen of the
13-level password and

454
 the unlock password
(password length is 16
characters)
63069-63091 is the year,
month, day, hour, minute,
second and expiration
prompt screen of the
14-level password and
the unlock password (the
password length is 16
characters)
63092-63114 are the
year, month, day, hour,
minute, second and
expiration prompt
screens for the 15-level
password and the unlock
password (password
length is 16 characters)
63115~63131 The highest
level password
modification address
The highest level (password length is 16
63115~63130 password to modify characters), after the R/W
the input address input is completed, enter
1 in LW63131 to make
the currently set
password effective
63115~63130 After the
highest level password
Highest level
input is completed, enter
63131 password enable R/W
1 in this address to make
address
the highest level
password effective
When it is 1, the HMI
60836 Enable store to HMI R/W
protection setting is

455
 stored in the HMI, and
the setting is
automatically reset.
Reset the HMI protection
Initialize HMI to the initial state.
60837 W
protection state Unlocked users need to
unlock again
Default is 0, USB
keyboard input or USB
USB input function mouse operation
60997 R/W
assignment. When it is 1, it is used for
scanning gun scanning
input
USB two-digit
barcode scanning
60998 end symbol R/W
definition 0-ENTER,
1-TAB+ENTER
USB two-digit
60999 barcode scan code R/W
length
Two-digit barcode
61000 -
scanning code R/W
61127
storage and use
Use of printer
61128 R/W
parameters
Import recipe source
61138 R/W
recipe ID number
Import recipe
61139 destination recipe ID R/W
number
-1 when the initial value
Clear recipe ID
61140 is displayed using a 16-bit R/W
number
integer; otherwise, 65535
61141 Switch the current R/W

456
 recipe group number
when the HMI is
running
Specify the group
number when
61143 importing and R/W
exporting the
formula U disk
ASCII display control, the
total number of
HMI SN code
61216~61247 characters is up to 64, R
information
display HMI SN code
information
Display the signal quality
Signal Quality of the HMI network
61250 R
Information connection in the current
environment
1: wifi, 2: China Mobile,
Type of network
61251 3: China Unicom, 4: China R
connection
Telecom, 5: unknown
ASCII display control, the
total number of
IoT Card ICCID characters is up to 20,
61259~61269 R
Information and the ICCID
information of the IoT
card is displayed
ASCII display control,
unicode encoding, length
62020-62039 Current recipe name 20, R
Display the current recipe
name
Set the user level that
User login level needs to be logged in,
62040 R/W
selection here corresponds to the
user level checked in the

457
 "touch screen parameter
setting" ?? "user
password setting" option
Correctly enter 62040 to
set the corresponding
password of the user
level. The highest
authority password can
User login password
62041~62056 unlock the current user R/W
input address
level of all levels (the
password length is 16
characters), and
complete the user login
operation.
Check the delay option in
HMI protection settings,
HMI delay times
62057 you can modify the R/W
limit register
number of delays here,
the default value is 1
Year, month, day, hour,
minute, second:
LW63141~63146 Data
Dynamic Password
type: 16-bit integer, set
63141~63146 Expiration Time R/W
LB60182 after setting the
Settings
date, the setting will take
effect and reset
automatically
Modify the dynamic
password key, set
address: LW63147 Data
Dynamic password
63147~63152 type: ASCII Length: 6, set R/W
key setting address
LB60179 to take effect
after setting, and reset
automatically
Formula Name ASCII input control,
63153~63184 W
Modification length 32, modified

458
 LB60180 take effect
IP, port number, station
number After the setting
is completed, set
LB60178 to take effect
The IP address of the
Ethernet device in the
standard mode, data
IP address of the type: 16-bit integer
63186~63189 R/W
Ethernet device IP, port number, station
number After the setting
is completed, set
LB60178 to take effect
The station number of
the Ethernet device in
standard mode, data
Station number of type: 16-bit integer
63190 R/W
the Ethernet device IP, port number, and
station number are set to
take effect after setting
LB60178
The port number of the
Ethernet device in
standard mode, data
Port number of the type: 16-bit integer
63191 R/W
Ethernet device IP, port number, station
number After the setting
is completed, set
LB60178 to take effect

10.3 RWI

459
address instruction Notes
Recipe number Displays the recipe specified by the recipe
RWI0
register number
Recipe memory Specifying the recipe number can display the
RWI1
address data corresponding to the recipe in RWI

460
 11. Connection among multiple screens and
machines

This chapter introduces multipoint connection of Samkoon HMI series touch screen that is “one

machine with multiple screens” connection, “one screen with multiple machines” connection, and

the very useful function penetration connection.

Contents
 “One machine with multiple screens” connection
 “One screen with multiple machines” connection
 Penetration connection
 Modbus TCP/IP

11.1 “One machine with multiple screens” connection

Samkoon HMI series touch screen allows “one machine with multiple screens” connection for PLC

via MODBUS protocol. All touch screens are connected one by one, and the first screen is

connected with PLC. All touch screens may be set as Slave Station, and PLC set as Master Station.

Double click “COM1 connection” on the project manager, and then a communication port

attribute-setting box will pop up. In Equipment Service item of General option in this box, choose

Modbus RTU, and choose Modbus RTU Slave on the right; alternatively, set the first touch screen

connected with the PLC as the Master Station, and set the PLC and other screens as the Slave

Station. In this case, when setting the communication port attributes of the first screen, choose

Modbus RTU in Equipment Service item of General option, choose Modbus RTU Master on the

right, change the mode to Extended Mode in the Parameter option, and allocate addresses of

touch screens. Thus, the touch screens set as Slave Station may communicate with PLC through the

first touch screen. In both of these two arrangements, only Master Station can communicate with

461
Slave Station, and no communication among Slave Stations can be achieved.

When the PLC is set as Master Station and all touch screens are set as Slave Station:

1. The communication port of the PLC connected is RS232; connection methods and system

settings are as shown in Figure 8-1, 8-2 and 8-3：

Figure 8-1 Sketch map of “One machine with multiple machines” when PLC(RS232) is Master

station

Figure 8-2 Choose MODBUS protocol, and set it as Slave Station

462
 Figure 8-3 Allocation station address of HMI

2. The communication port of the PLC connected is RS485, connection method is as shown in

Figure 8-4:

Figure 8-4 Sketch map of “One machine with multiple machines” when PLC(RS485) is Master

station

When the communication port of PLC is RS485, as all touch screens are Slave Station, the system

settings are the same as those when the communication port is RS232. Refer to Figure 8-2 and

Figure 8-3.

463
When all HMI series screens are set as Slave Station, up to 255 screens may be connected. However,

if many touch screens are connected, the response will be slow.

When the first touch screen is set as Master Station, and the PLC and all other screens are set as

Slave Station:

1.The communication port of the PLC connected is RS232; connection methods and system settings

are as shown in Figure 8-5, 8-6 and 8-7：

Figure 8-5 Sketch map of “One machine with multiple machines” when PLC (RS232) is Slave

station

464
 Figure 8-6 Choose MODBUS protocol for the first screen and set it as Master Station

Figure 8-7 Extended are required when the first touch screen is set as Master Station

System setting of the touch screens set as slave station is similar as those shown in Figure 8-2 and

465
Figure 8-3.

Note: As RS232 cannot support multi-drop connection, when the PLC in the “one machine with

multiple screens” connection does not support RS485 port, a communication adapter is required to

convert RS485 signal to RS232 signal.

Note: When HMI series touch screen is set as master station in the “one machine with multiple

screens” connection, multiple protocols must be set for the address mode of the touch screen used

as master station.

When set Modbus as Master station, it can add up to 255 Slave stations in principle; however, the

more slave stations are set, the slower communication speed will be.

11.2 “One screen with multiple machines” connection

HMI series allows not only “one machine with multiple screens” connection but also “one screen

with multiple machines” connection for PLC via MODBUS protocol. In “one screen with multiple

machines” connection, one touch screen may be used to directly operate the register address of

several PLCs connected with it, so long as the PLCs support MODBUS protocol. At the time of

system setting, choose Modbus RTU in Equipment Service item of General option and choose

Modbus RTU Master on the right, so that the touch screen is set as Master Station and all PLCs are

set as Slave Screens. Then, the touch screen may operate the register address of the PLCs. The

register names of the PLCs correspond to the register names in MODBUS protocol.

466
Figure 8-8 “One screen with multiple machines” connection

Figure 8-9 Set the touch screen as Master Station

467
 Figure 8-10 Extended Mode are required when the touch screen is set as Master Station

After above setting, the PLC addresses in the communication port attributes become ineffective.

When user clicks a control to input address, an address input box as shown in Figure 8-11 will pop

up. There is a dropdown menu on the right of the register name, and the protocol chosen from the

dropdown menu is the Slave Station address of the PLC.

Figure 8-11 Address input box

468
Instruction of extended mode stations enabling communication to control address：

The address correspondence relation occupied by the control station number is 16 words

corresponding to a serial port, that is, the maximum number of control enabling stations is 256,

with LW59000 as the base address

COM1 corresponds to 59010~59025, LW59010 to station number 0~15, LW59011 to station

number 16~31, and so on

COM2 corresponds to: 59026~59041, LW59026 corresponds to station number 0~15, LW59027

corresponds to station number 16~31, and so on

Ethernet correspondence: 59026~59041, LW59026 corresponds to station number 0~15, LW59027

corresponds to station number 16~31, and so on

The default is all on when HMI is open, you can use macro controlling every bit to start or stop

connect station number.

Note: As RS232 cannot support multi-drop connection, when the PLC in the “one screen with

multiple machines” connection does not support RS485 port, a communication adapter is required

to convert RS485 signal to RS232 signal.

11.3 Penetration connection

HMI touch screen allows a special connection manner, in which a remote HMI can monitor or
control PLC or other devices via the serial port of another HMI connected with the PLC or device. In
this case, there are two or more control terminals to operate the device connected. Penetration
connection is a very useful function of HMI.

Before use penetration connection, the following terms should be understood:

 Local HMI: The HMI connected with the PLC or other device.

469
 Remote HMI: The HMI connected with the local machine that controls the devices connected
through penetration.
To realize penetration connection, the local HMI must have two serial ports. The sketch map of
penetration connection is shown in Figure 8-12 and Figure 8-13:

Penetration connection involving two screens:

Figure 8-12 Sketch map of penetration connection involving two screens

Penetration connection involving multiple screens:

Figure 8-13 Sketch map of penetration connection involving multiple screens

Local HMI: Software setting:

Double click the connection established, and then a communication port attribute-setting box will
pop up. Choose COM1 for connection port. Taking MITSUBISHI penetration for example, the COM1
of the local HMI is connected with MITSUBISHI FX2N PLC. The communication parameters set in
Communication Parameter should be consistent with the PLC or other devices connected. See
Figure 8-14 and Figure 8-15:

470
 Figure 8-14 General page of local HMI communication port attribute setting

Figure 8-15: COM1 setting page of local HMI communication port attribute setting

Create a new connection, choose COM2 for the connection port, add no protocol in Connection,
set attributes as follows, and set the same serial port attributes as serial port 1. The recommended
parameters are 9600, 8, None, 1. Choose Connect Slave Screen Port for penetration attribute, and
set the number of screens according to actual condition. See Figure 8-16 and Figure 8-17.

471
 Figure 8-16 General page of local HMI communication port attribute setting

Figure 8-17 Parameter setting page of local HMI communication port attribute setting

Choose default values for other parameters. At this moment, the parameter setting for local HMI is
completed.

472
Remote HMI: Software setting:
Double click the connection established, and then a communication port attribute-setting box will
pop up. Choose COM1 for connection port, choose Remote for HMI Site, and set the same
communication parameters as those in the COM2 parameter setting page of local HMI
communication port attribute setting (as shown in Figure 6 above), as shown in Figure 8-18 and
Figure 8-19.

Figure 8-18 General page of remote HMI communication port attribute setting

Figure 8-19 Parameter setting page of remote HMI communication port attribute setting

473
Choose default values for other parameters. At this moment, the parameter setting for remote HMI
is completed.

Note: The above settings are software setting for penetration involving two screens.
Note: In penetration connection involving multiple screens, COM setting in remote HMI is the same
as COM setting in local HMI.
Note: As all communication data are exchanged with PLC through COM1 of local HMI, the
communication rate will be low in the case of penetration connection involving multiple screens.

11.4 Modbus TCP/IP

It is available to execute remote communication and control to HMI through the MODBUS TCP.

Settings when set HMI as Master station:

Double click “Connection 1” after creating a project, as shown below:

The "Communication Port Properties" dialog box is displayed (shown below).

474
Click "Parameter" in the pop-up "Port Properties" dialog box, enter the following dialog box to set
the IP address and the port number (IP address and port are those of monitoring device). Choose
standard address mode; Click "OK" to complete the settings.

If select "Extended Mode" for Address Mode, settings of IP address and port number here are
invalid, while they can be set via the function button "Slave devices IP config" in the configuration.

During the configuration runtime, click the button to pop up the window for inputting the station

475
number; input the station number, and then enter into the interface for setting the slave IP and
port number, as shown in the following figure:

After the above settings, download the project into HMI; connect the master and slave station
directly or through a router in order to perform operations of monitoring and control.

Settings of slave station:

1. Set the IP
First, use DIAL switches 1, 3 to set the IP address of HMI; in the pop-up IP setting interface, enter
the IP address. In this example, set the IP address of slave station to 192.168.1.31. 2.

2. Establish connections

After creating the project, double click "Connection 1" in the following picture, as shown below:

476
The "Communication Port Properties" dialog box is displayed (shown below).

In the dialog box shown above, execute the following settings:

* Connection Port: "Ethernet" (as shown).

* HMI Site: Select "Local" (as shown).

* Connection Service: Select "Modbus" - "Modbus Slave TCP / IP" (as shown).

Click "Parameter" in the pop-up "Port Properties" dialog box, enter the following dialog box to set
the IP address (IP address of the slave station) and the port number. Click "OK" to complete the
settings.

477
Download the project into HMI; connect the master and slave station directly or through a router in
order to perform operations of monitoring and control.

Address is the internal address when HMI is set as slave station.

478
 12. Device driver

This chapter details connected devices compatible with the SK series HMI of Shenzhen Samkoon
Technology Co., Ltd.

It is important for the configuration to set I / O of device driver. SK series HMI can communicate
with PLC, MCU, inverter and other industrial equipment, including the vast majority of PLCs:
SAMKOON, MITSUBISHI, OMRON, SIEMENS, ALLEN-BRADLEY Rockwell, MATSUSHITA, DELTA, FATEK,
etc. Or it can also monitor and control certain industrial control equipment via specific protocol,
such as MODBUS RTU / ASCII, HOSTLINK and some other custom protocols.

I / O driver of each PLC or device is made into a file, so it only needs to select the corresponding
PLC or device when creating a configuration project without the necessity for engineers to perform
other complex programming operation. SKTOOL is the configuration software of SK series HMI,
which can realize functions of all kinds of registers or relays of most PLCs or devices through simple
and convenient configuration operations. There are three operation modes: read only, write only,
read and write, meeting various requirements of industrial control.

To facilitate connections to different devices, Shenzhen Samkoon Technology Co., Ltd launches the
service of developing device-driven according to the needs of users, simply with need of an
appropriate protocol document of corresponding communication device. Users can contact
Shenzhen Samkoon Technology Co., Ltd. via the contact information provided at the end of this
manual.
PLCs supported by SK Series HMI:

Manufacturer Communication Connection

(Brand) Model Protocol Mode

User-defined Direct connection

Samkoon FGs series protocol (Serial port)

Advantech Proprietary Direct connection

Distributed I/O ADAM-4017，ADAM-4060 protocol of (Serial port)

479
 Advantech

Direct connection

AIBUS AI series AIBUS protocol (Serial port)

Direct connection

Allen-Bradley MicroLogix series DF1 protocol (Serial port)

Proprietary Direct connection

Altec Electronics AL series protocol of Altec (Serial port)

Direct connection

Can_communication Can Can (Serial port)

Proprietary Direct connection

Delta Corporation DVP series protocol of Delta (Serial port)

Proprietary

Emerson Network protocol of Direct connection

Power EC series Emerson (Serial port)

Fatek Automation Proprietary Direct connection

Corporation FB series protocol of Fatek (Serial port)

Fuji Electric Proprietary Direct connection

Corporation NB series protocol of Fuji (Serial port)

Proprietary Direct connection

GE Corporation GE SNP-X/CCM protocol of GE (Serial port)

Proprietary

Haiwell Technology protocol of Direct connection

Corporation E/S/H series Corporation (Serial port)

Proprietary Direct connection

Hitachi Industrial E/EH series protocol of Hitachi (Serial port)

Proprietary Direct connection

HollySys Group LM series protocol of HollySys (Serial port)

Proprietary Direct connection

IDEC Corporation FC4A/FC5A series protocol of IDEC (Serial port)

480
Inovance Proprietary

Technology protocol of Direct connection

Corporation H1u/H2u series Inovance (Serial port)

Proprietary

JiaChuang protocol of Direct connection

Technology JiaChuang JiaChuang (Serial port)

KDN Automation Proprietary Direct connection

Corporation K3 series protocol of KDN (Serial port)

Proprietary

Keyence KV-1000/700 KV-L20(R), protocol of Direct connection

Corporation KV-10/16/24/40 KV-P16 Keyence (Serial port)

Proprietary Direct connection

Koyo Electronics SN series protocol of KoYo (Serial port)

Proprietary Direct connection

Kstar Technology Kstar Equipment protocol of Kstar (Serial port)

Proprietary Direct connection

Letrun Technology LC series protocol of Letrun (Serial port)

LG Industrial Proprietary Direct connection

Systems Master-K series protocol of LG (Serial port)

Proprietary

protocol of Direct connection

Matsushita FP series Matsushita (Serial port)

Proprietary

Melsec-FX/FX2N/FX3U/FX3G， protocol of Direct connection

Mitsubishi Melsec-Q_C24N series Mitsubishi (Serial port)

Direct connection

RTU/ASCII Equipment，RTU (Serial

Modbus TCP/IP Equipment Modbus Protocol port/Ethernet)

Modicon NEZA/TWIDO/M218 series Modbus Protocol Direct connection

481
Corporation (Serial port)

Proprietary

Nanda Auto protocol of Nanda Direct connection

Technology NA-200/NA-400 series Auto (Serial port)

Proprietary Direct connection

Omron C/CPM series，CS/CJ series protocol of Omron (Serial port)

Proprietary Direct connection

SEARI VP series protocol of SEARI (Serial port)

Proprietary

protocol of Direct connection

Shimaden MR13 Shimaden (Serial port)

S7-200(PPI)，S7-300(MPI), Proprietary Direct connection

Siemens S7-1200 protocol of Siemens (Serial port)

Proprietary Direct connection

TaiAn Technology TP03 series protocol of TaiAn (Serial port)

Proprietary Direct connection

TaiLing Electric DX series protocol of TaiLing (Serial port)

Proprietary

Techwayson protocol of Direct connection

Technology V series Techwayson (Serial port)

Vigor Electric Proprietary Direct connection

Corporation V/VH/VB/M series protocol of Vigor (Serial port)

Proprietary Direct connection

Xinje Electronic XC/XCM series protocol of XinJe (Serial port)

Proprietary

Yokogawa Electric protocol of Direct connection

Corporation FA-M3 series Yokogawa (Serial port)

ZhengHang A4/A5 series Proprietary Direct connection

482
 Electronics protocol of (Serial port)

ZhengHang

 Pin definitions of SK series HMI COM1/COM2

SK HMI employs nine-pin plug so that it should be nine-pin receptacle for the connection

cable. Pin definitions are shown below:

SK HMI COM1/COM2

2 RX

3 TX

4 KZ

5 GND

6 RX-

7 RX+

8 TX-

9 TX+

 RX：RS232 Receiver of communication

 TX：RS232 Sender of communication

 KZ：Control port

 GND：Ground terminal

 RX-：RS422 Communication receiving-

 RX+：RS422 Communication receiving +

483
 TX-：RS422 Communication transporting -/RS485 Communication B

 TX+：RS422 Communication transporting +/RS485 Communication A

Note

·Terminals of 2/3/5 in case of RS232 communication ；

·Terminals of 6/7/8/9 in case of RS422 communication；

·Terminals of 8/9 in case of RS485 communication.

12.1 Samkoon device driver

The device driver is used for SK series HMI to read and write the data or state of Samkoon FGs
series PLC. The serial communication connection is established through the serial port of the HMI
and the serial port of Samkoon FGs series PLC, so as to operate Samkoon device. Prior to use of the
driver, please carefully read this chapter and the related technical specifications of the Samkoon
device.

How to establish connection with Siemens S7-200/300 series PLC

1. Hardware connection

Connecting cable:

RS232

SK HMI COM1/COM2 Samkoon FGs series

2 RX 5 TX

3 TX 4 RX

5 GND 3 GND

7
5 6 8
9
3 4 5
6 1 484
1 2
Terminal of SK series HMI is DB9F; that of Delta DVP series PLC is MD8M.

RS485

SK HMI COM1/COM2 Samkoon FGs series

8 TX- B

9 TX+ A

9 5

6 1

Terminal of SK HMI is DB9F, and that of Samkoon series PLC is two-wire terminal.

2. Software settings

Select Samkoon in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC
model or supported protocol.
Ensure that the communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC
station number are consistent with the PLC connected.
For settings of the PLC, refer to the technical documents of the Samkoon series PLC.

Default connection parameters of SK series HMI

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope

value

PLC type FGs Series (RTU) FGs Series (RTU)/SamFGS

Communication RS232 RS232/ RS485

port type

Baud rate 9600 4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200

Data bit length 8 8

485
 Parity bit NONE EVEN/ODD/NONE

Stop bit length 1 1/2

PLC station 1 0~255

number

HMI station 0 0~255

number

Supporting Whether it is supported

function

Off-line yes

simulation

On-line simulation yes

Extended mode yes

3. Operational register and address range

FGs Series (RTU)/SamFGS

Register name Address Input range Remarks

format

X 0~127 Bit: input connection point, read only

ooo 1000~2777 1000~2777(Extension module)

0~127 Bit: output connection point

Y
ooo 1000~2777 1000~2777(Extension module)

M dddd 0~8191 Bit: internal relay

T ddd 0~255 Bit: timer status

C ddd 0~255 Bit: counter status

S ddd 0~999 Bit: stepping relay

486
 D dddd 0~8191 Word: temporary data storage

TV ddd 0~255 Word: current value of timer

CV ddd 0~199 Word: current value of counter

V d 0~7 Word: indexed addressing register

Z d 0~7 Word: indexed addressing register

0~31 Word: analog input

AI
dd 100~379 100~379(Extension module)

0~31 Word: analog output

AO
dd 100~379 100~379(Extension module)

32CV ddd 200~255 Double Word: current value of counter

Note:
d represents decimal system, input range is 0-9;
o represents octal system, input range is 0-7;
Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;
Double-word in the remarks: represents that the data type of the register in configuration must be
32-bit;
Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;
Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;
The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the
scopes may also be different.
For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device

12.2 AIBUS device driver

487
The device driver is used for SK series HMI to read and write the data or state of AIBUS device via
AIBUS protocols. The serial communication connection is established through the serial port of the
HMI and the serial port of AIBUS device, so as to operate AIBUS device. Prior to use of the driver,
please carefully read this chapter and the related technical specifications of the AIBUS device.

1. Hardware connection
Connecting cable:
RS232 (serial port RS232 protocol)

SK HMI COM1/COM2 AIBUS device

2 RX User-defined pins TX
3 TX User-defined pins RX
5 GND User-defined pins GND

9 5

6 1

HMI series touch screen port is a 9P trapezoidal female connector. Definitions of AIBUS device
pins depend on particular AIBUS device.

RS422 (Serial port RS422 protocol)

SK HMI COM1/COM2 AIBUS device
6 RX- User-defined pins TX-
7 RX+ User-defined pins TX+
8 TX- User-defined pins RX-
9 TX+ User-defined pins RX+

9 5

6 1

HMI series touch screen port is a 9P trapezoidal female connector. Definitions of AIBUS device
pins depend on particular AIBUS device.

RS485 (Serial port RS485 protocol)

HMI series touch screen COM1/COM2 AIBUS device
8 D- User-defined pins B
9 D+ User-defined pins A

HMI series touch screen port is a 9P trapezoidal female connector. Definitions of AIBUS device

488
pins depend on particular AIBUS device.
2. Software settings

Select AIBUS Protocol in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC
model or supported protocol.
Ensure that the communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC
station number are consistent with the AIBUS device.
For settings of the AIBUS device, refer to the technical documents of the AIBUS device.

Default connection parameters of HMI series touch screen

Setting item Default Setting scope
parameter
value
PLC type AIBUS Protocol AIBUS Protocol
Communication RS232 RS232/RS422/RS485
port type
Baud rate 9600 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
Data bit length 8 7/8
Parity bit NONE EVEN/ODD/NONE
Stop bit length 1 1/2
PLC station 1 1~255
number
HMI station 0 0~255
number

Supporting Whether it is supported

function
Off-line Yes
simulation
On-line simulation Yes
Extended mode Yes

3. Operational register and address range

Register name Address Input range Remarks

format
Parameter ddd 0~255 Word: parameter item
PV d 0 Word: Output value
SV d 0 Word: Set value
MV d 0 Word: State value
Status d 0 Word: State value

489
 Note:
 ·d represents decimal system, input range is 0-9;
 ·”Word” in the remarks: represents that the register can only be used
as word;
 The names of the registers supported by different equipment model
may be different, and the scopes may also be different.

For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of
the connected device.

12.3 Allen-Bradley device driver

The device driver is used for SK series HMI to read and write the data or state of AIBUS device via
AIBUS protocols. The serial communication connection is established through the serial port of the
HMI and the serial port of AIBUS device, so as to operate AIBUS device. Prior to use of the driver,
please carefully read this chapter and the related technical specifications of the AIBUS device.

How to establish connection with AIBUS device

1. Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
RS232 (serial port RS232 protocol)
SK HMI COM1/COM2 AIBUS device
2 RX User-defined pins TX
3 TX User-defined pins RX
5 GND User-defined pins GND

7
6 8
9 5
3 4 5
6 1
1 2

ControlLogix/CompactLogix:
SK HMI COM1/COM2 Allen-Bradley（AB）
2 RX 3 TX
3 TX 2 RX
5 GND 5 GND

5 9 5
9

6 1 6 1

490
SK HMI port is DB9F, and AB device port is MD8M.

2. Software settings

Select Allen-Bradley in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC
model or supported protocol.
Ensure that the communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC
station number are consistent with the PLC connected.
For settings of the PLC connected device, refer to the technical documents of the
Allen-Bradley PLC.

Default connection parameters of SK HMI

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope

value
PLC type MicroLogix DF1_CRC MicroLogix DF1_CRC/MicroLogix DF1_BCC
Communication RS232 RS232/RS422/RS485
port type
Baud rate 19200 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
Data bit length 8 7/8
Parity bit NONE EVEN/ODD/NONE
Stop bit length 1 1/2
PLC station 1 1~31
number
HMI station 0 0~255
number
Check CRC BCC

Supporting Whether it is supported

function
Off-line simulation Yes
On-line simulation Yes
Extended mode No

3. Operational register and address range

SLC
series/MicroLogix:

Register name Address Input range Remarks

format
I 1:ddd/o 1:0/0~1:255/15 Bit: input shadow register
O 0:ddd/o 0:0/0~0:255/15 Bit: output shadow register
B ddd:ddd/o 3:0/0~255:255/15 Bit: bit memory
S_Bit 2:ddd/o 2:0/0~2:255/15 Bit: System state bit
N_Bit ddd:ddd/o 7:0、10:0/0~255:255/15 Bit: Bit of data register word

491
 S 2:ddd 2:0~2:255 Word: System state word
ST ddd:ddd.dd 0:0.0~255:255.40 Word: System state word
N ddd:ddd 7:0、10:0~255:255 Word: Data register
F ddd:ddd 8:0~255:255 Word: Floating number register
T_ACC ddd:ddd 4:0~255:255 Word: Timer ACC value
T_PRE ddd:ddd 4:0~255:255 Word: Timer PRE value
C_ACC ddd:ddd 5:0~255:255 Word: Counter ACC value
C_PRE ddd:ddd 5:0~255:255 Word: Counter PRE value
ControlLogix/CompactLogix:
Register name Address Input range Remarks
format
B-Bit ddd:ddd/dd 3~225:0~255/0~15 Bit: Bit of data register word
N_Bit ddd:ddd/dd 7~225:0~255/0~15 Bit: Bit of data register word
N_Bit ddd:ddd/o 7:0/0~255:255/7 Bit: Bit of data register word
S 2:ddd 2:0~2:255 Word: System state word
N ddd:ddd 7:0~255:255 Word: Data register
F ddd:ddd 8:0~255:255 Word: Floating number register

CompactLogix_L16ER_TCP (Port number:44818)

Register Addres Input range Remarks
name s
fo
r
m
at
B d 0.0~255.255
dd.ddd
Bit: bool type address
I D 0.0~255.255
dd.ddd
Word: 16 int int register
F d 0.0~255.99
dd.ddd Double word: : 32 float
float register

MicroLogix DF1_TCP (Port number:44818)

Register Addre Input range Remarks
name s
s
f
o
r

492
 m
a
t
I d 0.0/0~255.255/15
dd.dd Bit: input image register,
d/dd read - only
O d 0.0/0~255.255/15
dd.dd
d/dd Bit: output image register
B d 0.0/0~255.255/15
dd.dd
d/dd Bit: bit storage
T d 0.0~255.255
dd.dd
d Bit: timer state
C d 0.0~255.255
dd.dd
d Bit: counter state
S_Bit d 0.0/0~255.255/15
dd.dd Bit: the bit of the system
d/dd register
N_Bit d 0.0/0~255.255/15
dd.dd
d/dd Bits: bits of a data register
S d 0.0~255.255
dd.dd
d Word: system register
N d 0.0~255.255
dd.dd
d Word: 16-bit integer register
F d 0.0~255.255
dd.dd Double word: 32-bit floating
d point number register
TV d 0.0~255.255
dd.dd
d Word: current value of timer
CV d 0.0~255.255
dd.dd
d Word: counter current value
TS ddd.d 0.0~255.255
d
d Word: timer setting value

493
 CS d 0.0~255.255
dd.dd
d Word: counter set value

4. Instruction of connection between SK HMI and ControlLogix and CompactLogix series PLC of
Alleb-Bradley Company

Open RSLinx and set corresponding PLC communication drivers

Create a driver; select serial port connection and RS-232 DF1 devices

After the settings, the PLC device is available in RSLinx if there is a cable connecting PC and PLC

494
Open PLC programming software RSLogix 5000; create your project and new tags

Create tags: B003, N007 and F008

495
Tag list after creation:

Build address mapping

496
Set PLC parameters

497
 ·d represents decimal system, input range is 0-9;
·o represents octal system, input range is 0-7;
·Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only used as bit;
·Word in the remarks: represents the register can only used as word;
·Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;
·The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the
scopes may also be different.
For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected
device

Connect 1769 series CompactLogix series PLC

PLC new address label
Address tag correspondence
The register label type array size
B bool 255
I int 255
F real 100
The label format must be 3 characters, such as B003,I004, and F005

498
Connect the 1766 series MicroLogix DF1_TCP
Except I/O register cannot be set to size, other register array size is set to 256,The first file
number in the address input format is the file number. For example, the file number of F8 is 8, the
file number of I1 is 1, and so on.

12.4 CAN Device Driver

This device driver is used to communicate with SK series touch screen and CAN device.

499
Before using this driver, please read this chapter and related technical instructions
carefully.
How to establish a connection with a CAN device

1.Hardware connection
connecting cables:
SK series touch screen COM1/COM2 CAN
1 CANL Pin customization CANL
4 CANH Pin customization CANH
5 GND Pin customization GND

2.Software settings
The function of CANBus is realized by calling the script system function
onCanxStart(PortID): start the CAN device
onCanxstop(PortID): close the CAN device
setBitrate (Bitrate , PortID): set the CAN communication rate
onCanxstop( CanID, CanMask, PortID ): set CAN ID filtering
reciveData ( data, Len, PortID, &CanId ): Receive CAN data
sendData ( data, Len, PortID, CanId, CanType ): send CAN data
For details, please refer to "CAN Communication Function"

3.Case
Initialization function, it is recommended to use the initialization function to power on
and initialize once

#include "MacroInit.h"

void Macro_main(IN *p)

{
MarcoInit
//ToDo

int com = 1; // 0:COM2 1:COM1

int baudRate = 10*1000; // baud rate
int id = 0; // Set filter ID
int mask = 0; // Set filter mask

500
 onCanxstop(com); // Close CAN
setBitrate(baudRate, com); // Set the baud rate
onCanxStart(com); // Open CAN
// addFillter(id, mask, com); // Set filtering, enable filtering, CAN filtering rule references the last
CAN filtering calculation method
}

Read data function, it is recommended to use the global macro loop to execute

#include "MacroInit.h"

void Macro_main(IN *p)

{
MarcoInit
//ToDo

int com = 1; // 0:COM2 1:COM1

char buf[8] = {0}; // Receive data cache
int len = 0; // Receive data length
int canId = 0; // Receive data ID
int i = 0;

len = reciveData(buf, 8, com, &canId); // Receive CAN data

if(0 < len)

{
*((unsigned int *)(&LocalWord[50030])) = canId; // Display receiving CAN ID to LW50030
32-bit integer type
LocalWord[50032] = len; // Display receiving data length to LW50032 16-bit integer type
for(i=0; i< 8; ++i) // Display 8 addresses starting from LW50040
{
LocalWord[50040+i] = buf[i] & 0xff;
}
}
}

Write data function, trigger execution as needed

#include "MacroInit.h"

void Macro_main(IN *p)

{
MarcoInit
//ToDo

501
 int com = 1; // 0:COM2 1:COM1
char buf[8] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8}; // Set the send data is 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
int canId = 0x02; // Set the send data ID
int mondel = 0x0; // Standard frame:0 Extension frame:0x80000000 Remote frame:0x40000000
Remote extension frame:0xC0000000
int i = 0;

sendData(buf, 8, mondel, canId, com); // send data

}

12.5 Delta device driver

The device driver is used for SK series HMI to read and write the data or state of Delta
DVP series PLC register. The serial communication connection is established through the
serial port of HMI and the serial port of Delta DVP series PLC, so as to operate Delta DVP
series PLC. Prior to use of the driver, one shall carefully read related technical
specifications of the chapter and Delta DVP series PLC.

How to establish connection with Delta DVP series PLC

1. Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
RS232 (serial port RS232 protocol)
SK HMI COM1/COM2 Delta DVP series
2 RX 5 TX
3 TX 4 RX
5 GND 8 GND
7
6 8
9 5
3 4 5
6 1
1 2

Terminal of SK series HMI is DB9F; that of Delta DVP series PLC is MD8M.

RS485 (serial port RS485 protocol)

SK HMI COM1/COM2 Delta DVP series
8 TX- B

502
 9 TX+ A

9 5

6 1

Terminal of SK HMI is DB9F, and that of Delta DVP series PLC is two-wire terminal.

2. Software settings

Select Delta Corporation in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the
connected PLC model or supported protocol.
Ensure that the communication parameters in touch screen connection
parameters and PLC station number are consistent with the PLC connected.
For settings of the PLC, refer to the technical documents of the Delta DVP series
PLC.

Default connection parameters of SK series HMI

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope
value
PLC type Delta DVP Series Delta DVP Series
Communication RS232 RS232/RS422/RS485
port type
Baud rate 19200 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
Data bit length 8 7/8
Parity bit NONE EVEN/ODD/NONE
Stop bit length 1 1/2
PLC station 1 0~255
number
HMI station 0 0~255
number

Supporting Whether it is supported

function
Off-line Yes
simulation
On-line simulation Yes
Extended mode Yes

503
3. Operational register and address range

Register name Address Input range Remarks

format
X ooo 0~377 Bit: input connection point, read only
Y ooo 0~377 Bit: output connection point
M dddd 0~4095 Bit: auxiliary relay
S dddd 0~1023 Bit: internal relay
T ddd 0~255 Bit: timer status
C ddd 0~255 Bit: counter status
D dddd 0~9999 Word: temporary data storage
TV ddd 0~255 Word: current value of timer
CV ddd 0~199 Word: current value of counter
CV32 ddd 200~255 Double words: current value of 32-bit
counter

Note:
d represents decimal system, input range is 0-9;
o represents octal system, input range is 0-7;
Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only used as bit;
Word in the remarks: represents the register can only used as word;
Double-word in the remarks: represents that the data type of the register in configuration must
be 32-bit;
Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;
The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the
scopes may also be different.
For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected
device.

12.6 Emerson device driver

The device driver is used for SK series HMI to read and write the data or state of Emerson EC series
PLC register. The serial communication connection is established through the serial port of HMI and
the serial port of Emerson EC series PLC, so as to operate Emerson EC series PLC. Prior to use of the
driver, one shall carefully read related technical specifications of the chapter and Emerson EC series
PLC.

504
How to establish connection with Emerson EC series PLC

1. Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
RS232

SK series HMI COM1/COM2 Emerson EC

2 RX 5 TX
3 TX 4 RX
5 GND 3 GND 7
6 8

3 4 5

1 2

Terminal of HMI is DB9F, and that of Emerson EC series PLC is MD8M.

2. Software settings
Select Emerson Network Power in connection device service.
Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC
model or supported protocol.
Ensure that the communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC
station number are consistent with the PLC connected.
For settings of the PLC connected, refer to the technical documents of the Emerson EC series
PLC.
Default connection parameters of HMI series touch screen

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope

value
PLC type EC Series (RTU) EC Series (RTU)
Communication RS232 RS232/RS422/RS485
port type
Baud rate 9600 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
Data bit length 7 7/8
Parity bit EVEN EVEN/ODD/NONE
Stop bit length 1 1/2

505
 PLC station 1 0~255
number
HMI station 0 0~255
number

Supporting Whether it is supported

function
Off-line Yes
simulation
On-line Yes
simulation
Extended mode Yes

3. Operational register and address range

Register name Address Input range Remarks
format
X ooo 0~377 Bit: input connection point, read only
Y ooo 0~377 Bit: output connection point
M dddd 0~7999 Bit: internal relay
SM ddd 0~255 Bit: special internal relay
S ddd 0~999 Bit: Stepping relay
T ddd 0~255 Bit: timer status
C ddd 0~255 Bit: counter status
D dddd 0~7999 Word: temporary data storage
SD ddd 0~255 Word: special temporary data storage
TV ddd 0~255 Word: current value of timer
CV ddd 0~255 Word: current value of counter
Z dd 0~15 Word: indexed addressing register
D_Double dddd 0~7999 Double word: temporary data storage
CV_Double ddd 200~255 Double word: current value of counter
Double word: special temporary data
SD_Double ddd 0~255
storage

Note:
d represents decimal system, input range is 0-9;
o represents octal system, input range is 0-7;
Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;
Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;
Double-word in the remarks: represents that the data type of the register in configuration must be
32-bit;
Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;

506
The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the
scopes may also be different.
For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device.

12.7 Fatek device driver

The device driver is used for SK series HMI to read and write the data or state of Fatek FB series PLC
register. The serial communication connection is established through the serial port on the touch
screen and the serial port of Fatek FB series PLC, so as to operate Fatek FB series PLC. Prior to use
of the driver, one shall carefully read related technical specifications of the chapter and Fatek FB
series PLC.

How to establish connection with Fatek device

1. Hardware connection

Connecting cable:

RS232 (serial port RS232 protocol)

SK HMI COM1/COM2 Fatek FB series

2 RX 1 TX

3 TX 2 RX

5 GND 4 GND

3 1
9 5
4 2
6 1

Terminal of SK series HMI is DB9F, and that of Fatek FB series PLC is MD4M.

2. Software

settings

507
 Select Fatek Automation Corp. in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC

model or supported protocol.

Ensure that the communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC

station number are consistent with the PLC connected.

For settings of the PLC connected, refer to the technical documents of the Fatek FB series PLC.

Default connection parameters of HMI series touch screen

Setting item Default Setting scope

parameter

value

PLC type Fatek FB Fatek FB Series

Series

Communicati RS2 RS232

on port type 32

Baud rate 960 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/1

0 15200

Data bit 7 7/8

length

Parity bit EVE EVEN/ODD/NONE

Stop bit 1 1/2

length

PLC station 1 0~255

number

HMI station 0 0~255

number

Supporting Whether it is supported

function

508
 Off-line Yes

simulation

On-line Yes

simulation

Extended Yes

mode

3. Operational register and address range

Register name Address Input range Remarks

format

X dddd 0~9999 Bit: input connection point, read only

Y dddd 0~9999 Bit: output relay

M dddd 0~9999 Bit: internal relay

S dddd 0~9999 Bit: stepping relay

T dddd 0~9999 Bit: timer status

C dddd 0~9999 Bit: counter status

R dddd 0~9999 Word: data register

D dddd 0~9999 Word: data register

TR dddd 0~9999 Word: current value of timer

CR dddd 0~9999 Word: current value of counter

F dddd 0~9999 Word: file register

DRC Double word: current value of 32-bit

ddd 200~255 counter

Note:

d represents decimal system, input range is 0-9;

o represents octal system, input range is 0-7;

Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;

509
Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;

Double-word in the remarks: represents that the data type of the register in configuration must be

32-bit;

Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;

The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the

scopes may also be different.

For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device

12.8 Fuji device driver

The device driver is used for SK series HMI to read and write the data or state of Fuji NB series PLC
register. The serial communication connection is established through the HMI serial port and the
serial port of Fuji NB series PLC, so as to operate Fuji NB series PLC. Prior to use of the driver, one
shall carefully read related technical specifications of the chapter and Fuji NB series PLC.
How to establish connection with Fuji device

1. Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
RS422 (serial port RS422 protocol)

SK HMI COM1/COM2 Fuji NB series

6 RX- 4 TX-
7 RX+ 3 TX+
8 TX- 6 RX-
9 TX+ 5 RX+

5 1
9

6 1
8

Terminal of SK HMI is DB9F, and that of Fuji NB series PLC is RJ45.

2. Software settings

Select Fuji Electric Corporation in connection device service.

510
Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC model
or supported protocol.
Ensure that the communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC station
number are consistent with the PLC connected.
For settings of the PLC connected, refer to the technical documents of the Fuji NB series PLC.

Default connection parameters of SK HMI

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope
value
PLC type Fuji NB Series Fuji NB Series
Communication RS422 RS422
port type
Baud rate 19200 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
Data bit length 8 7/8
Parity bit ODD EVEN/ODD/NONE
Stop bit length 1 1/2
PLC station 0 0~255
number
HMI station 0 0~255
number

Supporting Whether it is supported

function
Off-line Yes
simulation
On-line simulation Yes
Extended mode Yes

3. Operational register and address range

Register name Address Input range Remarks

format
X hhh 0~7ff Bit: input connection point, read only
Y hhh 0~7ff Bit: output connection point
M hhhh 0~7fff Bit: internal relay
SM hhhh 8000~81ff Bit: internal relay
L hhh 0~5ff Bit: Lockout relay
S hh 0~ff Bit: Stepping relay
T hhh 0~1ff Bit: Status of timer
C hh 0~ff Bit: Status of counter
D hhhh 0~7fff Word: Temporary data storage
SD hhhh 8000~80ff Word: Temporary data storage
TV hhh 0~1ff Word: Current value of timer

511
 CV hh 0~ff Word: Current value of counter

Note:
h represents hexadecimal system, input range is 0-9, a-f;
Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;
Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;
Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;
The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the
scopes may also be different.
For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device.

12.9 GE device driver

The device driver is used for SK series HMI to read and write the data or state of GE Fanuc series
PLC register. The serial communication connection is established through the HMI serial port that
of GE Fanuc series PLC, so as to operate GE Fanuc series PLC. Prior to use of the driver, one shall
carefully read related technical specifications of the chapter and GE Fanuc series PLC.

1. Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
RS232 (serial port RS232 protocol)

SK HMI COM1/COM2 GE Fanuc series

2 RX 4 TX

3 TX 3 RX

5 GND 8 GND

9 5 1

6 1
8

Terminal of SK HMI is DB9F, and that of GE Fanuc series PLC is RJ45.

512
2. Software settings

Select GE Corporation in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC model
or supported protocol.
Ensure that the communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC station
number are consistent with the PLC connected.
For settings of the PLC connected, refer to the technical documents of the GE Fanuc series PLC.

Default connection parameters of SK HMI

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope

value

PLC type GE Fanuc SNP-X GE Fanuc SNP-X/ GE Fanuc CCM

Communication RS232 RS232/RS422/RS485

port type

Baud rate 19200 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200

Data bit length 8 7/8

Parity bit ODD EVEN/ODD/NONE

Stop bit length 1 1/2

PLC station 0 0~255

number

HMI station 0 0~255

number

Supporting Whether it is supported

function

Off-line Yes

simulation

On-line simulation Yes

Extended mode No

513
3. Operational register and address range

Register name Address Input range Remarks

format

%I ddddd 1~10000 Bit: Discrete Input

%Q ddddd 1~10000 Bit: Discrete Output

%M ddddd 1~10000 Bit: Internal Use

%S ddd 1~128 Bit: System Use, Read only

%SA ddd 1~128 Bit: System Use, Read only

%SB ddd 1~128 Bit: System Use, Read only

%SC ddd 1~128 Bit: System Use, Read only

%T ddd 1~256 Bit: Temporary Status

%G dddd 1~7680 Bit: Genius? Global

%AI ddddd 1~10000 Word: Analog Input

%AQ ddddd 1~10000 Word: Analog Output

%R ddddd 1~32640 Word: Register memory

Note:

d represents decimal system, input range is 0-9;

o represents octal system, input range is 0-7;

Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;

Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;

Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;

The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the

scopes may also be different.

For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device.

514
 12.10 HaiWell device driver

The device driver is used for SK series HMI to read and write the data or state of Haiwell E/S/H series
PLC register. The serial communication connection is established through the serial port on the touch
screen and the serial port of Haiwell E/S/H series PLC, so as to operate Haiwell E/S/H series PLC. Prior
to use of the driver, one shall carefully read related technical specifications of the chapter and
Haiwell E/S/H series PLC.

How to establish connection with HAIWELL device

1. Hardware connection

Connecting cable:

RS232 (serial port RS232 protocol)

SK HMI COM1/COM2 HaiWell E/S/H series

2 RX 2 TX

3 TX 1 RX

5 GND 3 GND

2 1
9 5
4 3
6 1

Terminal of SK series HMI is DB9F, and that of Haiwell E/S/H series PLC is
MD4M.

2. Software settings

Select Haiwell Technology Corp. in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC model
or supported protocol.

515
 Ensure that the communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC station
number are consistent with the PLC connected.
For settings of the PLC connected, refer to the technical documents of the Haiwell E/S/H series PLC.

Default connection parameters of HMI series touch screen

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope

value

Communication RS232 RS232/RS422/RS485

port type

Baud rate 19200 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200

Data bit length 8 7/8

Parity bit NONE EVEN/ODD/NONE

Stop bit length 2 1/2

PLC station 1 1~31

number

HMI station 0 0~255

number

Supporting Whether it is supported

function

Off-line Yes

simulation

On-line simulation Yes

Extended mode Yes

3. Operational register and address range

Register name Address Input range Remarks

format

X ddd 0~1023 Bit: External switch input

Y ddd 0~1023 Bit: External switch output

M ddd 0~12287 Bit: Internal relay

516
 SM ddd 0~215 Bit: System status

S ddd 0~2047 Bit: Step status

T ddd 0~1023 Bit: Timer status

C ddd 0~255 Bit: Counter status

AI ddd 0~255 Word: Analog input register

AQ ddd 0~255 Word: Analog output register

V ddd 0~14847 Word: Internal register

TCV ddd 0~1023 Word: current value of Timer

CCV ddd 0~47, Word: Current value of counter

80~255

SV ddd 0~154 Word: System register

CCV32 ddd 0~31 Double word: Current value of counter

Note:
d represents decimal system, input range is 0-9;
Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;
Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;
Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;
The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the
scopes may also be different.
For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device.

12.11 Hitachi device driver

The device driver is used for SK series HMI to read and write the data or state of Hitachi E/EH series
PLC register. The serial communication connection is established through the HMI serial port and
that of Hitachi E/EH series PLC, so as to operate Hitachi E/EH series PLC. Prior to use of the driver,
one shall carefully read related technical specifications of the chapter and Hitachi E/EH series PLC.

1. Hardware connection

517
Connecting cable:
RS232 (serial port RS232 protocol)

SK HMI COM1/COM2 Hitachi E/EH series

2 RX 5 SD

3 TX 6 RD

5 GND 1 SG

4 PHL 4-7

7 DR Short circuit

9 5 1

6 1
8

Terminal of SK HMI is DB9F, and that of AB device is RJ45.

2.Software settings

Select Hitachi Industrial in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC model
or supported protocol.
Ensure that the communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC station
number are consistent with the PLC connected.
For settings of the PLC connected, refer to the technical documents of the Hitachi E/EH series PLC.

Default connection parameters of SK HMI

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope

value

PLC type Hitachi E/EH Series Hitachi E/EH Series

Communication RS232 RS232/RS422/RS485

port type

Baud rate 19200 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200

518
 Data bit length 7 7/8

Parity bit EVEN EVEN/ODD/NONE

Stop bit length 1 1/2

PLC station 0 0~255

number

HMI station 0 0~255

number

Supporting Whether it is supported

function

Off-line simulation Yes

On-line simulation Yes

Extended mode Yes

3. Operational register and address range

Register name Address Input range Remarks

format

X hhhh 0~ffff Bit: external switch quantity input, read

only

Y hhhh 0~ffff Bit: external switch quantity output

M hhhh 0~ffff Bit: internal relay

R hhhh 0~ffff Bit: internal register

T hhhh 0~ffff Bit: status of timer

L hhhh 0~ffff Bit: link relay

WX hhhh 0~ffff Word: external switch quantity input

WY hhhh 0~ffff Word: external switch quantity output

WM hhhh 0~ffff Word: internal relay

WR hhhh 0~ffff Word: internal register

WL hhhh 0~ffff Word: link relay

519
 TC hhhh 0~ffff Word: current value of timer/counter

Note：
h represents hexadecimal system, input range is 0-9, a-f;
Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;
Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;
Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;
The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the
scopes may also be different.
For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device.

12.12 HollySys device driver

The device driver is used for HMI-TOOLS series touch screen to read and write the data or state of
HollySys LM series PLC register. The serial communication connection is established through the
serial port on the touch screen and the serial port of HollySys LM series PLC, so as to operate
HollySys LM series PLC. Prior to use of the driver, one shall carefully read related technical
specifications of the chapter and HollySys LM series PLC.

How to establish connection with HOLLYSYS series PLC

1. Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
RS232 (serial port RS232 protocol)

SK HMI COM1/COM2 HollySys LM series

2 RX 3 TX

3 TX 2 RX

5 GND 5 GND

9 5 9 5

6 1 6 1

520
Terminal of SK series HMI is DB9F, and that of HollySys LM series PLC is DB9M.

2. Software settings

Select HollySys Group in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC model
or supported protocol.
Ensure that the communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC station
number are consistent with the PLC connected.
For settings of the PLC connected, refer to the technical documents of the HollySys LM series PLC.

Default connection parameters of SK series HMI

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope

value

PLC type HollySys LM Series HollySys LM Series

Communication RS232 RS232/RS422/RS485

port type

Baud rate 38400 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200

Data bit length 8 7/8

Parity bit NONE EVEN/ODD/NONE

Stop bit length 1 1/2

PLC station 51 0~255

number

HMI station 0 0~255

number

Supporting Whether it is supported

function

521
Off-line simulation Yes

On-line simulation Yes

Extended mode No

3.Operational register and address range

Register name Address Input range Remarks

format

IX ddd.o 0.0~511.7 Bit: I storage area, read only

QX ddd.o 0.0~511.7 Bit: Q storage area

MX dddd.o 0.0~7816.7 Bit: M storage area

IW ddd 0~510 Word: I storage area, 8-bit register,

each word occupying two addresses

QW ddd 0~510 Word: Q storage area, 8-bit register,

each word occupying two addresses

MW dddd 0~8190 Word: M storage area, 8-bit register,

each word occupying two addresses

Note:

d represents decimal system, input range is 0-9;

o represents octal system, input range is 0-7;

Word in the remarks: represents the register can only used as word;

Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only used as bit;

8-bit register in the remarks: represents the address spacing between two adjacent words in the

register is 2;

Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;

The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the

scopes may also be different.

For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device

522
12.13 IDEC device driver

The device driver is used for SK series HMI to read and write the data or state of Macro Smart
FC4A/FC5A/FC6A series PLC register. The serial communication connection is established through
the serial port of HMI and that of Macro Smart FC4A/FC5A/FC6A series PLC, so as to operate Macro
Smart FC4A/FC5A series PLC. Prior to use of the driver, one shall carefully read related technical
specifications of the chapter and Macro Smart FC4A/FC5A/FC6A series PLC.

How to establish connection with Macro Smart FC4A/FC5A series

1. Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
RS232 (serial port RS232 protocol)
SK HMI COM1/COM2 Macro Smart FC4A/FC5A

2 RX 3 TX
3 TX 4 RX
5 GND 6 GND 6-7
7 GND Short circuit

7
6 8
9 5
3 4 5
6 1
1 2

Terminal of HMI is DB9F, and that of Macro Smart FC4A/FC5A series PLC is MD8M.

2. Software settings

Select Allen-Bradley in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC model
or supported protocol.

Ensure that the communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC station
number are consistent with the PLC connected.

For settings of the PLC connected, refer to the relevant technical documents of the Macro Smart

523
FC4A/FC5A/FC6A series PLC.

Default connection parameters of SK HMI

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope
value
PLC type Macro Smart FC4A Macro Smart FC4A/ Macro Smart FC5A
Communication RS232 RS232/RS422/RS485
port type
Baud rate 9600 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
Data bit length 7 7/8
Parity bit EVEN EVEN/ODD/NONE
Stop bit length 1 1/2
PLC station 1 0~255
number
HMI station 0 0~255
number

Supporting Whether it is supported

function
Off-line simulation Yes
On-line simulation Yes
Extended mode Yes

3. Operational register and address range

Macro Smart FC4A

Register name Address Input range Remarks
format
I Bit: external switch quantity input,
ddd 0~255 read only
Q ddd 0~255 Bit: external switch quantity output
M dddd 0~1023 Bit: internal relay
SM ddd 0~215 Bit: internal register
R ddd 0~255 Word: shift register
D ddd 0~1299 Word: data register
TV ddd 0~127 Word: current value of timer
CV ddd 0~127 Word: current value of counter

Macro Smart FC5A

Register name Address Input range Remarks
format
I ddd 0~255 Bit: external switch quantity input,

524
 read only
Q ddd 0~255 Bit: external switch quantity output
M dddd 0~2047 Bit: internal relay
SM ddd 0~215 Bit: internal register
R ddd 0~255 Word: shift register
D ddd 0~42000 Word: data register
TV ddd 0~255 Word: current value of timer
CV ddd 0~255 Word: current value of counter

Macro Smart FC6A Tcp/IP

Register name Address Input range Remarks
format
Bit: external switch quantity input,
I Ddo 0~627
read only

Bit ： Bit: external switch quantity

Q Ddo 0~627
output
0~7997
M Dddo 8000~8317 Bit：internal relay
10000~17497

R Ddd 0~255 Bit：shift register

T Dddd 0~1023 Bit: status of timer (read only)

C Dddd 0~511 Bit: Status of counter(read only)

0~8499
D ddddd Word: register
10000~55999
Word: current value of timer (read
TV dddd 0~1023
only)
Word: current value of counter (read
CV ddd 0~511
only)
 Word: timer set value(read
TS dddd 0~1023
only)
CS ddd 0~511 Word: counter set value (read only)

Note:
d represents decimal system, input range is 0-9;
Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;
Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;
Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;
The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the

525
scopes may also be different.
For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device.

12.14 Inovance device driver

The device driver is used for SK series HMI to read and write the data or state of Inovance H1u/H2u
series PLC register. The serial communication connection is established through the serial port of
HMI and the serial port of Inovance H1u/H2u series PLC, so as to operate Inovance H1u/H2u series
PLC. Prior to use of the driver, one shall carefully read related technical specifications of the
chapter and Inovance H1u/H2u series PLC.

7
6 8
9 5
3 4 5
6 1
1 2

Terminal of HMI is DB9F, and that of Inovance H1u/H2u series PLC is DB9M.

2. Software settings

Select Inovance Technology Corp. in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC model
or supported protocol.

Ensure that the communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC station
number are consistent with the PLC connected.

For settings of the PLC connected, refer to the technical documents of the Inovance H1u/H2u series
PLC.

Default connection parameters of SK HMI

526
 Setting item Default parameter Setting scope

value

PLC type H1u/H2u H1u/H2u

Communication RS232 RS232/RS422/RS485

port type

Baud rate 9600 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200

Data bit length 7 7/8

Parity bit EVEN EVEN/ODD/NONE

Stop bit length 1 1/2

PLC station 0 0~255

number

HMI station 0 0~255

number

Supporting Whether it is supported

function

Off-line simulation Yes

On-line simulation Yes

Extended mode No

3. Operational register and address range

Register name Address Input range Remarks

format

X oooo 0~377 Bit: input coil, read only

Y oooo 0~377 Bit: output coil

M dddd 0~7999 Bit: intermediate relay

SM dddd 8000~8999 Bit: special intermediate relay

S dddd 0~999 Bit: status bit

527
 T dddd 0~256 Bit: status of timer

C dddd 0~256 Bit: Status of counter

D dddd 0~7999 Word: register

SD dddd 8000~8999 Word: special register

TV dddd 0~255 Word: current value of timer

CV dddd 0~199 Word: current value of counter

CV32 Double word: current value of 32-bit

dddd 200~255 counter

Note:
d represents decimal system, input range is 0-9;
o represents octal system, input range is 0-7;
Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;
Double-word in the remarks: represents that the data type of the register in configuration must be
32-bit;
Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;
Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;
The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the
scopes may also be different.
For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device

12.15 Keyence device driver

The device driver is used for SK series HMI to read and write the data or state of Keyence KV/VisualKV
series PLC register. The serial communication connection is established through the serial port on the
touch screen and that of Keyence KV/VisualKV series PLC, so as to operate Keyence KV/VisualKV series
PLC. Prior to use of the driver, one shall carefully read related technical specifications of the chapter
and Keyence KV/VisualKV series PLC.

528
How to establish connection with Keyence KV/VisualKV series PLC

1. Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
RS232 (serial port RS232 protocol)
SK HMI COM1/COM2 Keyence KV/VisualKV series
2 RX 2 TX
3 TX 4 RX
5 GND 3 GND

9 5
6

6 1 1

Terminal of HMI is DB9F, and that of Keyence KV/VisualKV series PLC is 6-pin registered
jack.

2. Software settings

Select Keyence Corporation in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected
PLC model or supported protocol.
Ensure that the communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters
and PLC station number are consistent with the PLC connected.
For setting of the PLC connected, refer to the technical documents of the Keyence
KV/VisualKV series PLC.

Default connection parameters of SK HMI

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope
value
PLC type KV-1000/700 KV-1000/700 KV-L20(R)/ KV-10/16/24/40 KV-P16
KV-L20(R)
Communication RS232 RS232/RS422/RS485
port type
Baud rate 9600 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
Data bit length 8 7/8
Parity bit EVEN EVEN/ODD/NONE
Stop bit length 1 1/2
PLC station 0 0~255
number
HMI station 0 0~255

529
 number

Supporting Whether it is supported

function
Off-line Yes
simulation
On-line simulation Yes
Extended mode No

3. Operational register and address range

KV-1000/700 KV-L20(R)
Register name Address format Input range Remarks
R dddDD 0~99915 Bit: input/output relay
MR dddDD 0~3915 Bit: internal auxiliary relay
LR dddDD 0~3999 Bit: latching relay
CR ddDD 0~3999 Bit: control relay
T dddd 0~65534 Bit: timer
C dddd 0~65534 Bit: counter
DM ddddd 0~32766 Word: data storage
EM ddddd 0~511 Word: extended data storage
FM ddddd 0~11998 Word: file register
TM ddd 0~3999 Word: temporary data storage
CM ddddd 0~3999 Word: control storage
TV dddd 0~99915 Word: current value of timer
CV dddd 0~3915 Word: current value of counter

KV-10/16/24/40 KV-P16
Register name Address format Input range Remarks
RLY dddDD 0~99915 Bit: relay
T dddd 0~999 Bit: timer
C dddd 0~999 Bit: counter
DM ddddd 0~9999 Word: data storage
TM ddd 0~99 Word: temporary data storage
TV_c dddd 0~999 Word: current value of timer
TV_p dddd 0~999 Word: preset value of timer
CV_c dddd 0~999 Word: current value of counter
CV_p dddd 0~999 Word: preset value of counter
Word: current value of high speed
CTH dddd 0~9 counter

530
KV-Nano
Register name Address format Input scope Remarks
R ddddd 0~59915 Position: relay
B DDDD 0~1FFF Link Relay
MR ddddd 0~59915 Internal auxiliary relay
LR ddddd 0~19915 Latching relay
CR dddd 0~8915 Control relay
VB DDDD 0~1FFF Working relay
T ddd 0~511 Bit timer
C ddd 0~255 Bit: counter
DM dddd 0~32767 Data memory
W DDDD 0~3FFF Link register
TM dddd 0~511 Temporary data storage
Z dddd 1~12 Index register
TC dddd 0~511 Double word: timer (current value)
TS dddd 0~511 Double word: timer (set value)
CC ddd 0~255 Double word: counter (current value)
CS ddd 0~255 Double word: counter (set value)
CTH d 0~3 High speed counter
CTC d 0~7 Double word: high speed comparator
CM dddd 0~8999 Control memory
VM dddd 0~9999 Working memory

Note:

d represents decimal system, input range is 0-9;

DD represents 16 bits, input range is 0-15;

Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;

Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;

The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the
scopes may also be different.

For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device.

531
12.16 Koyo device driver

The device driver is used for SK series HMI to read and write the data or state of Koyo SN series PLC
register. The serial communication connection is established through the serial port on the touch
screen and the serial port of Koyo SN series PLC, so as to operate Koyo SN series PLC. Prior to use of
the driver, one shall carefully read related technical specifications of the chapter and Koyo SN series
PLC.

How to establish connection with Koyo SN series PLC

Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
RS232 (serial port RS232 protocol)

SK HMI COM1/COM2 Koyo SN series

2 RX 4 TX
3 TX 3 RX
5 GND 8 GND

9 5
1

6 1 6

Terminal of HMI is DB9F, and that of Koyo SN series PLC is 6-pin registered jack.

1. Software settings

Select Koyo Electronics in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC model
or supported protocol.

Ensure that the communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC station
number are consistent with the PLC connected.

For settings of the PLC connected, refer to the technical documents of the Koyo SN series PLC.

Default connection parameters of SK HMI

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope
value
PLC type Koyo SN Series Koyo SN Series

532
 Communication RS232 RS232/RS422/RS485
port type
Baud rate 9600 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
Data bit length 8 7/8
Parity bit ODD EVEN/ODD/NONE
Stop bit length 1 1/2
PLC station 1 0~255
number
HMI station 0 0~255
number

Supporting function Whether it is supported

Off-line simulation Yes
On-line simulation Yes
Extended mode Yes

2. Koyo SN Series

Register name Address Input range Remarks

format
I ooo 0~377 Bit: input relay, read only
O ooo 0~377 Bit: output relay
M oooo 0~1177 Bit: auxiliary relay
SP ooo 0~777 Bit: special auxiliary relay
S ooo 0~177 Bit: stepping relay
T ooo 0~177 Bit: timer
C ooo 0~177 Bit: counter
R ooooo 0~13777 Word: data register
TR ooooo 0~13777 Word: current value of timer
CR ooooo 0~13777 Word: current value of counter
SR ooooo 0~13777 Word: special data register

4. Koyo DIRECT Series

Register name Address Input range Remarks
format
X ooo 0~3777 Bit: input relay, read only
Y ooo 0~3777 Bit: output relay
GX oooo 0~7777 Bit: input relay, read only
GY oooo 0~7777 Bit: output relay
C oooo 0~7777 Bit: counter
S oooo 0~1777 Bit: stepping relay
SP oooo 0~1777 Bit: special auxiliary relay

533
 CT ooo 0~777 Bit: counter
T ooo 0~777 Bit: timer
V oooo 0~77777 Word: special data register
TV ooo 0~777 Word: current value of timer
CV ooo 0~777 Word: current value of counter

KV-Nano

寄存器名称 地址格式 输入范围 备注

R ddddd 0~59915 Position: relay

B DDDD 0~1FFF Position: Link Relay
MR ddddd 0~59915
Position：Internal auxiliary relay

LR ddddd 0~19915 Position: Latching relay

CR dddd 0~8915 Position: control relay
VB DDDD 0~1FFF Position: work relay
T ddd 0~511 Position: timer
C ddd 0~255 Position: counter
DM dddd 0~32767
Word：Data storage

W DDDD 0~3FFF
Word：Link register

TM dddd 0~511
Word：Temporary data storage

Z dddd 1~12
Word：Index register

TC dddd 0~511
Double word：Timer (current value)

TS dddd 0~511
Double word：Timer (setting value)

CC ddd 0~255
Double word：Counter (current value)

CS ddd 0~255
Double word：Counter (setting value)

CTH d 0~3
Double word：High-speed counter

CTC d 0~7
Double word ： High speed counter

comparator
CM dddd 0~8999
word：Control storage

VM dddd 0~9999
word：Working memory

534
Note:

o represents octal system, input range is 0-7;

Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;

Double-word in the remarks: represents that the data type of the register in configuration must be
32-bit;

Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;

Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;

The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the
scopes may also be different.

For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device

12.17 LG device driver

The device driver is used for SK HMI to read and write the data or state of LG Master-K series PLC
register. The serial communication connection is established through the serial port on the touch
screen and the serial port of LG Master-K series PLC, so as to operate LG Master-K series PLC. Prior
to use of the driver, one shall carefully read related technical specifications of the chapter and LG
Master-K series PLC.

How to establish connection with LG Master-K series PLC

1. Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
RS232-using CNet protocol (serial port RS232 protocol)

SK HMI COM1/COM2 LG Master-K

2 RX 7 TX
3 TX 4 RX
5 GND 5 GND

5 9 5
9

6 1 6 1
535
Terminal of HMI is DB9F, and that of LG Master-K series PLC is DB9M.

RS232-Employ KLoader protocol

SK HMI COM1/COM2 LG Master-K
2 RX 3 TX
3 TX 2 RX
5 GND 5 GND

9 5 9 5

6 1 6 1

Terminal of HMI is DB9F, and that of LG Master-K series PLC is DB9M.

RS485
SK HMI COM1/COM2 LG Master-K
8 D- B
9 D+ A

9 5

6 1

Terminal of HMI is DB9F, and that of LG Master-K series PLC is two-wire terminal.

RS232-K10S1
SK HMI COM1/COM2 LG Master-K

2 RX 4 TX
3 TX 1 RX
5 GND 6 GND
Terminal of HMI is DB9F, and that of LG Master-K series PLC is MD6M.

5 6
9 5
3 4
6 1
1 2

536
2. Software settings

Select LG Industrial Systems in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC model
or supported protocol.

Ensure that the communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC station
number are consistent with the PLC connected.

For settings of the PLC connected, refer to the technical documents of the LG Master-K series PLC.

Default connection parameters of SK HMI

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope
value
PLC type LG Master-K Cnet LG Master-K Cnet/K Loader/K10s1
Communication RS232 RS232/RS422/RS485
port type
Baud rate 19200 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
Data bit length 8 7/8
Parity bit NONE EVEN/ODD/NONE
Stop bit length 1 1/2
PLC station 0 0~255
number
HMI station 0 0~255
number

Supporting Whether it is supported

function
Off-line simulation Yes
On-line simulation Yes
Extended mode Yes

3. Operational register and address range

Operational address range of Kxxx series PLC:

Register name Address Input range Remarks
format
P_Bit dddh 0~255f Bit: input/output area
M_Bit dddh 0~255f Bit: auxiliary relay
K_Bit dddh 0~255f Bit: protection relay
L_Bit dddh 0~255f Bit: link relay
F_Bit dddh 0~255f Bit: special relay

537
 P dddh 0~255f Word: input/output area
M dddh 0~255f Word: auxiliary relay
K dddh 0~255f Word: protection relay
L dddh 0~255f Word: link relay
F dddh 0~255f Word: special relay
T ddd 0~255 Bit: timer relay
C ddd 0~255 Bit: counter relay
S dddd 0~9999 Word: stepping register
D dddd 0~9999 Word: data register
TV ddd 0~255 Word: current value of timer
CV ddd 0~255 Word: current value of counter

XGB CPU series PLC operable address range (via PLC RS232 download port communication)：

寄存器名称 地址格 输入范围 备注

P_Bit ddddh 0-1023f Bit: input/output area

M_Bit ddddh 0-1023f Bit: auxiliary relay
F_Bit ddddh 0-1023f Bit: special relay
L_Bit ddddh 0-2047f Bit: link relay
K_Bit ddddh 0-4095f Bit: protection relay
D_Bit ddddh 0-10239f
T dddd 0-1023 Bit: timer relay
C dddd 0-1023 Bit: counter relay
TV dddd 0-1023 Word: current value of timer
CV dddd 0-1023 Word: current value of counter
P dddd 0-1023 Word: input/output area
M dddd 0-1023 Word: auxiliary relay
F
Word: special relay （read only）
dddd 0-1023
L dddd 0-2047 Word: link relay
K dddd 0-4095 Word: protection relay
D dddd 0-10239 Word: data register
R dddd 0-10239 Word: stepping register
ZR dddd 0-10239 Word:
S ddd 0-127 Word: stepping register
Z ddd 0-127 Word:

538
 U
Word：（read only）
dd.dd 0.0-10.31

Operational address range of XGB CNET series PLC:

Register name Address Input range Remarks
format
P dddh 0~127f Word: input/output area
M dddh 0~255f Word: auxiliary relay
K dddh 0~2559f Word: protection relay
L dddh 0~1279f Word: link relay
F dddh 0~255f Word: special relay
T ddd 0~255 Bit: timer relay
C ddd 0~255 Bit: counter relay
S ddd 0~127.99 Word: stepping register
D dddd 0~5119 Word: data register
N dddd 0~3935
Z ddd 0~127
ZR dddd 0~1023
U d 0~7.31

XGB TCP/IP

寄存器名称 地址格 输入范围 备注

P_Bit ddddh 0-2047f Bit: input/output area

M_Bit ddddh 0-2047f Bit: auxiliary relay
F_Bit ddddh 0-2047f Bit: special relay
L_Bit ddddh 0-4095f Bit: link relay
K_Bit ddddh 0-8191f Bit: protection relay
T dddd 0-2047 Bit: timer relay
C dddd 0-2047 Bit: counter relay
TV dddd 0-2047 Word: current value of timer
CV dddd 0-2047 Word: current value of counter
P dddd 0-2047 Word: input/output area
M dddd 0-2047 Word: auxiliary relay
F
Word: special relay （read only）
dddd 0-2047
L dddd 0-4095 Word: link relay
K dddd 0-8191 Word: protection relay

539
 D ddddd 0-19999 Word: data register
R ddddd 0-16383
S ddd 0-127 Word: stepping register
Z ddd 0-127
U dd.dd 0.0-11.31
N
Word：（read only）
ddddd 0-10239

Note:

d represents decimal system, input range is 0-9;

h represents hexadecimal system, input range is 0-9, a-f;

Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;

Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;

The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the
scopes may also be different.

For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device

12.18 Matsushita device driver

The device driver is used for SK HMI to read and write the data or state of Matsushita FP series PLC
register. The serial communication connection is established through the serial port on the touch
screen and the serial port of Matsushita FP series PLC, so as to operate Matsushita FP series PLC.
Prior to use of the driver, one shall carefully read related technical specifications of the chapter and
Matsushita FP series PLC.

How to establish connection with Matsushita FP series PLC

1. Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
RS232-FP0/FP2/FP2SH/FPM

540
 SK HMI COM1/COM2 Matsushita FP series

2 RX 3 TX
3 TX 2 RX
5 GND 1 GND

5 4
9 5
3 2
6 1
1

Terminal of HMI is DB9F, and that of Matsushita FP series PLC is MD5M.

RS422-FP1
SK HMI COM1/COM2 Matsushita FP series

6 RX- 2 TX-
7 RX+ 5 TX+
8 TX- 3 RX-
9 TX+ 6 RX+

5 6 7
9
3 4 5
6 1 1 2

Terminal of HMI is DB9F, and that of Matsushita FP series PLC is MD8M.

2. Software settings

Select MATSUSHITA in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC model
or supported protocol.

Ensure that the communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC station
number are consistent with the PLC connected.

For settings of connecting PLC, please refer to the technical documents of the Matsushita FP series
PLC.

Default connection parameters of SK HMI

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope

541
 value
PLC type FP Series FP Series
Communication RS232 RS232/RS422/RS485
port type
Baud rate 9600 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
Data bit length 8 7/8
Parity bit ODD EVEN/ODD/NONE
Stop bit length 1 1/2
PLC station 1 0~255
number
HMI station 0 0~255
number

Supporting Whether it is supported

function
Off-line simulation Yes
On-line simulation Yes
Extended mode No

3. Operational register and address range

Register name Address Input range Remarks

format
X ddddh 0~9999f Bit: external input, read only
Y ddddh 0~9999f Bit: external output
R ddddh 0~9999f Bit: internal relay
L ddddh 0~9999f Bit: link relay
T dddd 0~9999 Bit: status of timer, read only
C dddd 0~9999 Bit: status of counter, read only
WX dddd 0~9999 Word: external input, read only
WY dddd 0~9999 Word: external output
WR dddd 0~9999 Word: internal relay
WL dddd 0~9999 Word: link relay
DT ddddd 0~99999 Word: data register
LD ddddd 0~99999 Word: link register
FL ddddd 0~99999 Word: file register
SV dddd 0~9999 Word: timer/counter set value area
EV Word: timer/counter process value
dddd 0~9999 area

Note:

542
d represents decimal system, input range is 0-9;

h represents hexadecimal system, input range is 0-9, a-f;

Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;

Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;

Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;

The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the
scopes may also be different.

For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device

12.19 Mitsubishi device driver

The device driver is used for SK HMI to read and write the data or state of Melsec FXxn/Q00J/C24N
series PLC register. The serial communication connection is established through the serial port on
the touch screen and the serial port of Melsec FXxn/Q00J/C24N series PLC, so as to operate Melsec
FXxn/Q00J/C24N series PLC. Prior to use of the driver, one shall carefully read the related technical
specifications of the chapter and Melsec FXxn/Q00J/C24N series PLC.

How to establish connection with Melsec FXxn/Q00J/Q00U/C24N series PLC

1. Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
RS422- Melsec-FXxn/FX3U/3G (serial port RS232 protocol)
SK HMI COM1/COM2 Melsec-FXxn
6 RX- 4 TX-
7 RX+ 7 TX+
8 TX- 1 RX-
9 TX+ 2 RX+

543
Terminal of HMI series touch screen is DB9F, and that of Melsec FXxn series PLC is
MD8M.

RS232- Melsec-Q00J/Q00U
SK HMI COM1/COM2 Q00J CPU

2 RX 2 TX

3 TX 1 RX

5 GND 3 GND

Terminal of HMI series touch screen is DB9F, and that of Melsec FXxn series PLC is
MD8M.

Note:
Q00U connection instructions
Q00U 6 pin 5,6 short connection
MITSUBISHI programming software parameters >PLC parameters -- > serial communication settings
Check the use of serial communication function, baud rate select 115200, tick and check, tick the
Run write
Using MITSUBISHI communications lines, via direct wiring and HMI connections

RS232- Melsec-QC24N module

SK HMI COM1/COM2 Q00J CPU

2 RX 3 TX

3 TX 2 RX

5 GND 5 GND

544
Terminal of HMI series touch screen is DB9F, and that of Melsec QC24N module is
MB9M.

2. Software settings

Select MITSUBISHI in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC model
or supported protocol.

Ensure that the communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC station
number are consistent with the PLC connected.

For settings of the PLC connected, refer to the technical documents of the Melsec FXxn/Q00J/C24N
series PLC.

Default connection parameters of SK HMI

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope
value
PLC type Melsec-FX2N Melsec-FX/ FX2N/ FX3U/3G /Q_C24N Q00J
Communication RS232 RS232/RS422/RS485
port type
Baud rate 9600 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
Data bit length 7 7/8
Parity bit EVEN EVEN/ODD/NONE
Stop bit length 1 1/2
PLC station 0 0~255
number
HMI station 0 0~255
number

Supporting Whether it is supported

function
Off-line simulation Yes
On-line simulation Yes

545
Extended mode No

3. Operational register and address range

Melsec-FXxn/FX3U/3G/ FX3U-Ethernet
Register name Address Input range Remarks
format
X oooo 0~377 Bit: input coil, read only
Y oooo 0~377 Bit: output coil
M dddd 0~7999 Bit: intermediate relay
SM dddd 8000~8999 Bit: special intermediate relay
S dddd 0~999 Bit: status bit
T dddd 0~256 Bit: status of timer
C dddd 0~256 Bit: status of timer
D_Bit dddd.dd 0.00~7999.15 Bit: bit of 16-bit register
D dddd 0~7999 Word: register
SD dddd 8000~8999 Word: special register
TV dddd 0~255 Word: current value of timer
CV dddd 0~199 Word: current value of counter
CV32 Double word: current value of 32-bit
dddd 200~255 counter

FX5U/FX5U-Ethernet
Register name Address Input range Remarks
format
X oooo 0~1777 Bit: input coil, read only
Y oooo 0~1777 Bit: output coil
M dddd 0~7679 Bit: internal relay
L dddd 0~7679 Bit: latching relay
F ddd 0~127 Bit: alarm relay
TS ddd 0~511 Bit: timer contact
CS ddd 0~255 Bit: counter contact
S dddd 0~4095 Bit: stepping relay
SM dddd 0~9999 Bit: special relay
B
0-ff（hexadecimal

notation） Bit: 位：link relay

hh
D_Bit dddd.dd 0.0~7999.15 Bit: bit of 16-bit register
D dddd 0~7999 Word: register
R Word: cumulative current value of
ddddd 0~32767 timer
W hhh 0-1ff Word: link register

546
 （hexadecimal

notation）

CN ddd 0~255 Word: current value of register

TN ddd 0~511 Word: current value of timer
SD ddddd 0~11999 Word: special register

Melsec-Q00J/QC24N
Register name Address Input range Remarks
format
X hhh 0~7ff Bit: input relay, read only
Y hhh 0~7ff Bit: output relay
M dddd 0~8191 Bit: internal relay
L dddd 0~2047 Bit: latching relay
F dddd 0~2047 Bit: alarm
V dddd 0~2047 Bit: indexing relay
S dddd 0~2047 Bit: stepping relay
B hhh 0~7ff Bit: conversion relay
SB hhh 0~3ff Bit: special link relay
T ddd 0~511 Bit: status of timer
C ddd 0~511 Bit: status of counter
D ddddd 0~11135 Word: data register
W hhh 0~7ff Word: conversion register
SW hhh 0~3ff Word: special link register
Z d 0~9 Word: index register
TV ddd 0~511 Word: current value of timer
CV ddd 0~511 Word: current value of counter

Q00U
Register name Address Input range Remarks
format
X hhhh 0~1fff Bit: input relay, read only
Y hhhh 0~1fff Bit: output relay
M dddd 0~8191 Bit: internal relay
L dddd 0~8191 Bit: latching relay
F dddd 0~2047 Bit: alarm relay
V dddd 0~2047 Bit: indexing relay
B ffff 0~1fff Bit: conversion relay
T ddd 0~2047 Bit: status of timer
C dddd 0~1023 Bit: status of counter
SB hhh 0~7ff Bit: special link relay

547
 SM ddd 0~2047 Bit: special relay
D_Bit Dddd.h 0.0~12287.f Bit: bit of 16-bit register
D Dddd 0~12287 Word: data register
W Hhhh 0~1fff Word: conversion register
TV Dddd 0~2047 Word: current value of timer
CV Dddd 0~1023 Word: current value of counter
SW Hhh 0~7ff Word: special link register
SD Dddd 0~2047 Word: special register
Z Dd 0~19 Word: index register

Melsec-E71
Register name Address Input range Remarks
format
X hhhh 0~1fff Bit: input relay, read only
Y hhhh 0~1fff Bit: output relay
M dddd 0~8191 Bit: internal relay
L dddd 0~8191 Bit: latching relay
F dddd 0~2047 Bit: alarm relay
V dddd 0~2047 Bit: indexing relay
S dddd 0~8191 Bit: stepping relay
B ffff 0~1fff Bit: conversion relay
T ddd 0~2047 Bit: status of timer
C dddd 0~1023 Bit: status of counter
SB hhh 0~7ff Bit: special link relay
SM ddd 0~2047 Bit: special relay
D_Bit Dddd.h 0.0~12287.f Bit: bit of 16-bit register
D Dddd 0~12287 Word: data register
W Hhhh 0~1fff Word: conversion register
TV Dddd 0~2047 Word: current value of timer
CV Dddd 0~1023 Word: current value of counter
SW Hhh 0~7ff Word: special link register
SD Dddd 0~2047 Word: special register
Z Dd 0~19 Word: index register

Melsec-LCPU

寄存器名称 地址格 输入范围 备注

X hhhh 0~1fff Bit: input relay, read only

Y hhhh 0~1fff Bit: output relay
M dddd 0~8191 Bit: internal relay

548
 L dddd 0~8191 Bit: latching relay
F dddd 0~2047 Bit: alarm relay
V dddd 0~2047 Bit: indexing relay
S dddd 0~8191 Bit: stepping relay
B hhhh 0~1fff Bit: conversion relay
SB hhh 0~7ff Bit: special link relay
T dddd 0~2047 Bit: status of timer
C dddd 0~1023 Bit: status of counter
D-bit ddddd.dd 0~45055.15 Bit: bit of 16-bit register
D ddddd 0~45055 Word: data register
TV dddd 0~2047 Word: current value of timer
CV dddd 0~1023 Word: current value of counter
W hhhh 0~1fff Word: conversion register
SW hhh 0~7ff Word: special link register
SD hhhh 0~2047 Word: special register
Z hh 0~19 Word: index register

Note:

d represents decimal system, input range is 0-9;

o represents octal system, input range is 0-7;

h represents hexadecimal system, input range is 0-9, a-f;

Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;

Double-word in the remarks: represents that the data type of the register in configuration must be
32-bit;

Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;

Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;

The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the
scopes may also be different.

For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device

4. Instruction of connection between SK HMI and FX5U PLC of Mitsubishi Company

549
Open GX work3 Software-New file-Series FX5CPU-Type FX5U

Navigation-Parameter-Module Parameter- Ethernet

Object Link-Particular set

550
SKTOOL Software General

Link-Parameter

5、The touch screen connects to the FX2n 485BD module：

551
The PLC parameters are set as shown below

12.20 Modbus device driver

The device driver is used for SK HMI to read and write the data or state of MODBUS device. The
serial communication connection is established through the serial port of the HMI series touch
screen and the serial port of MODBUS device, so as to operate MODBUS device. Prior to use of the
driver, please carefully read this chapter and the related technical specifications of the MODBUS
series PLC device.

How to establish connection with MODBUS series PLC

Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
RS232
SK HMI COM1/COM2 Modbus device

User-defined
2 RX TX
pins

User-defined RX
3 TX pins

User-defined GND
5 GND pins

552
 9 5

6 1

Terminal of HMI is DB9F. Definitions of Modbus device pins depend on particular Modbus device.

RS422
SK HMI COM1/COM2 Modbus device

6 RX- User-defined pins TX-

7 RX+ User-defined pins TX+

8 TX- User-defined pins RX-
9 TX+ User-defined pins RX+

9 5

6 1

Terminal of HMI is DB9F. Definitions of Modbus device pins depend on particular Modbus device.

RS485
SK HMI COM1/COM2 Modbus device

8 D- User-defined pins B

9 D+ User-defined pins A

9 5

6 1

Terminal of HMI is a 9P trapezoidal female connector. Definitions of Modbus device pins depend on
particular AIBUS device.

TCP/IP (RJ45 direct connection)

553
 SK HMI COM1/COM2 Modbus device
1 TX+ 3 RX+
2 TX- 6 RX-
3 RX+ 1 TX+
4 BD4+ 4 BD4+
5 BD4- 5 BD4-
6 RX- 2 TX-
7 BD3+ 7 BD3+
8 BD3- 8 BD3-

1 1

8 8

Terminal of HMI is RJ45, and that of Modbus device is RJ45.

TCP/IP (RJ45 connection via router)

SK HMI COM1/COM2 Modbus device
1 TX+ 3 RX+
2 TX- 6 RX-
3 RX+ 1 TX+
4 BD4+ 4 BD4+
5 BD4- 5 BD4-
6 RX- 2 TX-
7 BD3+ 7 BD3+
8 BD3- 8 BD3-

1 1

8 8

Terminal of HMI is RJ45, and that of Modbus device is RJ45.

1. Software settings

554
Select Modbus in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC model
or supported protocol.

Ensure that the communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC station
number are consistent with the PLC connected.

For settings of the PLC connected, refer to the technical documents of the Modbus device.

Default connection parameters of SK HMI

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope
value
PLC type RTU Master RTU/RTU_S/ASCII/ASCII_S Master
Communication RS232 RS232/RS422/RS485
port type
Baud rate 9600 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
Data bit length 8 7/8
Parity bit NONE EVEN/ODD/NONE
Stop bit length 1 1/2
PLC station 1 0~255
number
HMI station 0 0~255
number

Supporting Whether it is supported

function
Off-line simulation Yes
On-line simulation Yes
Extended mode Yes

Note: The function code used in RTU_S and ASCII_S for data writing is 0x10 (regardless of length of
the data written);
·If 0 is chosen for PLC station number, then the system is in broadcasting mode.

2. Operational register and address range

Register name Address Input range Remarks

format
0x ddddd 0~65535 Bit: input coil
1x ddddd 0~65536 Bit: input coil, read only

555
 3x_Bit ddddd.DD 0.00~65535.15 Bit: bit of 16-bit input register, read
only
4x_Bit ddddd.DD 0.00~65535.15 Bit: bit of 16-bit output register
3x ddddd 0~65535 Word: 16-bit input register, read only
4x ddddd 0~65535 Word: 16-bit output register
3x_D ddddd 0~65535 Double word: input register, reversing
the higher and lower 16 bits of 3x
double word, read only
4x_D ddddd 0~65535 Double word: output register,
reversing the higher and lower 16 bits
of 4x double word

Note:

d represents decimal system, input range is 0-9;

DD represents 16 bits, input range is 0-15;

Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;

Double-word in the remarks: represents that the data type of the register in configuration must be
32-bit;

Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;

Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;

The names of the registers supported by different equipment models may be different, and the
scopes may also be different.

For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device

Note:
Modbus rtu MCU is used to support standard modbus, such as single chip, converter, and
other devices that require special processing. When the PLC address interval is set to 1, the register
does not do any integration, and the data type length is read according to the control. When the
width of the PLC address is greater than 2, the length of the read is the maximum amount of the
actual PLC address interval. The bits address is in the position of j

12.21 Modicon device driver

556
The device driver is used for SK HMI to read and write the data or state of Modicon
NEZA/TWIDO/M218 series PLC register. The serial communication connection is established
through the serial port on the touch screen and the serial port of Modicon
NEZA/TWIDO/M218 series PLC, so as to operate Modicon NEZA/TWIDO/M218 series PLC.
Prior to use of the driver, one shall carefully read related technical specifications of the
chapter and Modicon NEZA/TWIDO/M218 series PLC.

How to establish connection with Modicon NEZA/TWIDO/M218 series PLC

1. Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
RS485

SK HMI COM1/COM2 Modicon NEZA/TWIDO/M218

8 TX- 2 TX-
9 TX+ 1 TX+
5 GND 7 GND

7
6 8
9 5
3 4 5
6 1
1 2

Terminal of HMI is DB9F, and that of Modicon NEZA/TWIDO/M218 series PLC is

MD8M.

2. Software settings

Select Modicon Corp. in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC model
or supported protocol.

Ensure that the communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC station
number are consistent with the PLC connected.

For settings of the PLC connected, refer to the technical documents of the Modicon
NEZA/TWIDO/M218 series PLC.

Default connection parameters of SK HMI

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope
value

557
 PLC type NEZA Series NEZA/TWIDO/M218 Series
Communication RS232 RS232/RS422/RS485
port type
Baud rate 9600 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
Data bit length 8 7/8
Parity bit ODD EVEN/ODD/NONE
Stop bit length 1 1/2
PLC station 1 0~255
number
HMI station 0 0~255
number

Supporting Whether it is supported

function
Off-line simulation Yes
On-line simulation Yes
Extended mode Yes

3. Operational register and address range

NEZA Series
Register name Address format Input range Remarks
%MW ddddd 0~65535 Word: word data register

TWIDO Series
Register name Address format Input range Remarks
%M ddddd 0~65535 Bit: bit data register
%MW ddddd 0~65535 Word: word data register

M218 Series
Register name Address format Input range Remarks
%MX ddddd.o 0~131071.7 Bit: bit data register
%MW ddddd 0~65535 Word: word data register

Note:

d represents decimal system, input range is 0-9;

o represents octal system, input range is 0-7;

Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;

Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;

558
The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the
scopes may also be different.

For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device

12.22 Nanda device driver

The device driver is used for SK HMI to read and write the data or state of Nanda NA-200/400
series PLC register. The serial communication connection is established through the serial port on
the touch screen and the serial port of Nanda NA-200/400 series PLC, so as to operate Nanda
NA-200/400 seriesPLC. Prior to use of the driver, one shall carefully read related technical
specifications of the chapter and Nanda NA-200/400 series PLC.

How to establish connection with Nanda NA-200/400 series PLC

1. Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
RS232

SK HMI COM1/COM2 Nanda NA-200/400

2 RX 3 TX
3 TX 2 RX
5 GND 5 GND

9 5 9 5

6 1 6 1

Terminal of HMI is DB9F, and that of Nanda NA-200/400 series PLC is DB9M.

2. Software settings

Select Nanda Auto Technology in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC model
or supported protocol.

559
Ensure that the communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC station
number are consistent with the PLC connected.

For settings of the PLC connected, refer to the technical documents of the Nanda NA-200/400
series PLC.

Default connection parameters of SK HMI

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope
value
PLC type Nanda NA-200 Nanda NA-200/400
Communication RS232 RS232/RS422/RS485
port type
Baud rate 9600 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
Data bit length 8 7/8
Parity bit NONE EVEN/ODD/NONE
Stop bit length 1 1/2
PLC station 1 0~255
number
HMI station 0 0~255
number

Supporting Whether it is supported

function
Off-line simulation Yes
On-line simulation Yes
Extended mode Yes

3. Operational register and address range

Nanda NA-200
Register name Address format Input range Remarks
I ddd 1~128 Bit: digital quantity input,
read only
Q ddd 1~128 Bit: digital quantity output
M dddd 1~1024 Bit: bit register
S ddd 1~256 Bit: system bit register
N ddd 1~256 Bit: bit register for power
failure protection
IW dd 1~32 Word: analog quantity input
QW dd 1~32 Word: analog quantity
output
MW dddd 1~1024 Word: word register
SW ddd 1~256 Word: system word register

560
 NW ddd 1~256 Word: word register for
power failure protection

Nanda NA-400
Register name Address format Input range Remarks
I ddd 1~2048 Bit: digital quantity input,
read only
Q ddd 1~2048 Bit: digital quantity output
M dddd 1~8192 Bit: bit register
S ddd 1~4096 Bit: system bit register
N ddd 1~2048 Bit: bit register for power
failure protection
IW dd 1~512 Word: analog quantity input
QW dd 1~512 Word: analog quantity
output
MW dddd 1~8192 Word: word register
SW ddd 1~2048 Word: system word register
NW ddd 1~2048 Word: word register for
power failure protection

Note:

d represents decimal system, input range is 0-9;

Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;

Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;

Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;

The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the
scopes may also be different.

For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device

12.23 Omron device driver

The device driver is used for SK HMI to read and write the data or state of SYSMAC C/CPM/CS/CJ

561
series PLC register. The serial communication connection is established through the serial port on the
touch screen and the serial port of SYSMAC C/CPM/CS/CJ series PLC, so as to operate SYSMAC
C/CPM/CS/CJ series PLC. Prior to use of the driver, one shall carefully read related technical
specifications of the chapter and SYSMAC C/CPM/CS/CJ series PLC.
How to establish connection with SYSMAC C/CPM/CS/CJ series PLC

1. Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
RS232

HMI series touch screen COM1/COM2 SYSMAC CS/CJ

2 RX 2 TX
3 TX 3 RX
5 GND 9 GND

9 5
9 5
6 1
6 1

Terminal of HMI is DB9F, and that of SYSMAC C/CPM/CS/CJ series PLC is DB9M.

2. Software settings

Select OMRON in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC model
or supported protocol.

Ensure that the communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC station
number are consistent with the PLC connected.

For settings of the PLC connected, please refer to the technical documents of the SYSMAC
C/CPM/CS/CJ series PLC.

Default connection parameters of SK HMI

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope
value
PLC type SYSMAC C/CPM SYSMAC C/CPM/CS/CJ Series

562
 Series
Communication RS232 RS232/RS422/RS485
port type
Baud rate 9600 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
Data bit length 7 7/8
Parity bit EVEN EVEN/ODD/NONE
Stop bit length 2 1/2
PLC station 0 0~255
number
HMI station 0 0~255
number

Supporting Whether it is supported

function
Off-line simulation Yes
On-line simulation Yes
Extended mode No

3. Operational register and address range

SYSMAC C/CPM Series

Register name Address format Input range Remarks
IR_Bit dddd.DD 0.0~4095.15 Bit: input/output relay
HR_Bit dddd.DD 0.0~4095.15 Bit: hold relay
LR_Bit dddd.DD 0.0~4095.15 Bit: link relay
AR_Bit dddd.DD 0.0~4095.15 Bit: auxiliary memory relay
T ddd 0~255 Bit: status of timer
C ddd 0~255 Bit: status of counter
IR dddd 0~4095 Word: input/output relay
HR dddd 0~4095 Word: hold relay
LR dddd 0~4095 Word: link relay
AR dddd 0~4095 Word: auxiliary memory relay
TC ddd 0~255 Word: value of timer
DM dddd 0~9999 Word: common data area

SYSMAC CS/CJ Series

Register name Address format Input range Remarks
CIO_Bit dddd.DD 0.0~3189.15 Bit: core I/O area
W_Bit dddd.DD 0.0~6143.15 Bit: work area
H_Bit dddd.DD 0.0~511.15 Bit: holding area
A_Bit dddd.DD 0.0~959.15 Bit: auxiliary area, read only:
7,168Bit: A00000～A447.15

563
 D_Bit dddd.DD 0.0~32767.15 Bit: common data area
T dddd 0~4095 Bit: status of timer
C dddd 0~4095 Bit: status of counter
CIO dddd 0~3189 Word: core I/O area
W dddd 0~6143 Word: work area
H dddd 0~511 Word: holding area
A dddd 0~959 Word: auxiliary area, read
only: 448Word: A000～A447
D dddd 0~32767 Word: common data area
TV dddd 0~4095 Word: current value of timer
CV dddd 0~4095 Word: current value of
counter

CP1L Tcp/Ip / Fins-udp

Register name Address format Input range Remarks
CIO_Bit dddd.DD 0.0~3189.15 Bit: core I/O area
W_Bit dddd.DD 0.0~6143.15 Bit: work area
H_Bit dddd.DD 0.0~511.15 Bit: holding area
A_Bit dddd.DD 0.0~959.15 Bit: auxiliary area, read only:
7,168Bit: A00000～A447.15
D_Bit dddd.DD 0.0~32767.15 Bit: common data area
T dddd 0~4095 Bit: status of timer
C dddd 0~4095 Bit: status of counter
CIO dddd 0~3189 Word: core I/O area
W dddd 0~6143 Word: work area
H dddd 0~511 Word: holding area
A dddd 0~959 Word: auxiliary area, read
only: 448Word: A000～A447
D dddd 0~32767 Word: common data area
TV dddd 0~4095 Word: current value of timer
CV dddd 0~4095 Word: current value of
counter

Note:

d represents decimal system, input range is 0-9;

DD represents 16 bits; input range is 0-15;

Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;

Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;

564
 Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;

The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the
scopes may also be different.

For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical documents of the connected device

Cp1l tcp/ip connection specificationSet

the -> built-in Ethernet -> set IP and port numberNote:
the proposed use of fins-udp communications, which can be connected to the same PLC in multiple
touchscreens, and the need for a handshake connection before normal communication requires a
certain amount of time
Fins-udp connection instructions:
Set the -> built-in Ethernet -> set IP and port number
The number of the number of nodes in the fins-udp configuration is consistent with the node
number in the ohmlong Ethernet Settings option

12.24 Siemens device driver

The device driver is used for SK HMI to read and write the data or state of Siemens
S7-200/300/1200 series PLC register. The serial communication connection is established through
the serial port on the touch screen and the serial port of Siemens S7-200/300 /1200tcp series PLC,
so as to operate Siemens S7-200/300/1200tcp series PLC. Prior to use of the driver, one shall
carefully read related technical specifications of the chapter and Siemens S7-200/300/1200tcp
series PLC.

565
How to establish connection with Siemens S7-200/300/1200tcp series PLC

1. 1 Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
RS485-Siemens S7-200
SK HMI COM1/COM2 Siemens S7-200 series
8 TX- 8 TX-
9 TX+ 3 TX+

9 5 9 5

6 1 6 1

RS232-Siemens S7-300

SK HMI COM1/COM2 Siemens S7-300 series

2 RX 3 TX
3 TX 2 RX
5 GND 5 GND

9 5 9 5

6 1 6 1

Terminal of HMI is DB9F, and that of Siemens S7-300 series PLC MPI is DB9M.

How to establish connection with Siemens S7-200/300/1200 series PLC

1. 2 Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
Cable RJ45；
Pins of RJ45:

566
Settings of IP and Port Number

Select “Ethernet Port” for Connection Interface in General page of Communication Port Properties
and “SIEMENS”, “Siemens S7-200(TCP/IP)/Siemens S7-300(TCP/IP)/Siemens S7-1200(TCP)” for
Connection Services;

In the Parameter page of Communication Port Properties, set the IP and Port number.
Notice：

Addresses of PLC and IP must be under the same subnet with HMI, i.e. it only needs to set the
subnet mask to 255.255.255.0.

In the settings of Siemens-1200 PLC, it is necessary to ensure whether the PLC has the protection
function of connection; check the particular option if necessary after then recompile and download
it to PLC.

Upload the PLC program or create a new one of Simens_1200 in the software of TIA Portal; right
click the item and select “Property”; check “Permit communication access of PUT/GET to remote
partners (PLC、HMI、OPC...) ” in “Protection”, as shown in the figure below:

567
2. Software Settings

Select SIEMENS in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC model
or supported protocol.

Guarantee that communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC station
number are consistent with the connected PLC.

For settings of the connected PLC, please consult related technical documents of Siemens
S7-200/300 series PLC

Default connection parameters of SK HMI

Setting item Default Setting scope

parameter
value
PLC type S7-200(PPI) S7-200(PPI)/ S7-300(MPI)
Communication RS485 RS232/RS422/RS485
port type
Baud rate 19200 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
Data bit length 8 7/8
Parity bit EVEN EVEN/ODD/NONE

568
 Stop bit length 1 1/2
PLC station 2 1 to 255
number
HMI station 0 0 to 255
number
Supporting Whether it is supported
function
Off-line Yes
simulation
On-line simulation Yes
Extended mode Yes: S7-200(PPI)/ No.: S7-300(MPI)

3. Operational register and address range

Siemens S7-200/ Siemens S7-200 tcp
Register name Address Input range Remarks
format
I dd.o 0.0 to 4095.7 Bit: input shadow register, read only
Q dd.o 0.0 to 4095.7 Bit: output shadow register
M dd.o 0.0 to 4095.7 Bit: bit memory
S dd.o 0.0 to 4095.7 Bit: sequence control relay
SM ddd.o 0.0 to 4095.7 Bit: special bit memory, SM0.0-SM29.7
read only
T ddd 0 to 255 Bit: timer state: read only
C ddd 0 to 255 Bit: counter state: read only
VB_Bit ddddd.o 0.0 to Bit: variable memory bit
10239.7
IW dd 0 to 4095 Word: input shadow register, read only,
8-digit register, each word occupies
two addresses
QW dd 0 to 4095 Word: output shadow register, 8-digit
register, each word occupies two
addresses
MW dd 0 to 4095 Word: bit memory, 8-digit register,
each word occupies two addresses
SW dd 0 to 4095 Word: sequence control relay, 8-digit
register, each word occupies two
addresses
SMW ddd 0 to 4095 Word: special bit memory,
SMW0-SMW29 read only, 8-digit
register, each word occupies two
addresses
VB ddddd 0 to 10239 Word: variable memory, 8-digit register

569
 VW ddddd 0 to 10238 Word: variable memory, 8-digit
register, each word occupies two
addresses
VD ddddd 0 to 10236 Double-word: variable memory, 8-digit
register, each double-word occupies
four addresses
TV ddd 0 to 255 Word: current value of the timer
CV ddd 0 to 255 Word: current value of the counter
AIW dd 0 to 62 Word: analog input, read only, 8-digit
register, each word occupies two
addresses
AQW dd 0 to 62 Word: analog output, write only, 8-digit
register, each word occupies two
addresses
ID dddd 0~4092 Binary word: input image register
QD dddd 0~4092 Binary word: output image register
MD dddd 0~4092 Word memory
SD dddd 0~4092 Double word: sequence control relay
SMD dddd 0~4092 Double word: special memory

Siemens S7-300 / Siemens S7-300(MPI) / Siemens S7-300tcp

Register name Address Input range Remarks
format
I dddd.o 0.0 to 4095.7 Bit: input shadow register
Q dddd.o 0.0 to 4095.7 Bit: output shadow register
M dddd.o 0.0 to 4095.7 Bit: bit memory
DB_Bit DDD:dddd.o 0:0.0 to Bit: bit of word of DB block storage
255:8192.7 area, block number DD 0 to 255,
word of each block dddd 0 to 8192,
bit of each word o 0 to 7
IW dddd 0 to 4095 Word: input shadow register, 8-digit
register, each word occupies two
addresses
QW dddd 0 to 4095 Word: output shadow register,
8-digit register, each word occupies
two addresses
MW dddd 0 to 4095 Word: bit memory, 8-digit register,
each word occupies two addresses
DBW DDD:dddd 0:0 to 255:8192 Word: DB block storage area, block
number DD 0 to 255, word of each
word dddd 0 to 8192, 8-digit
register, each word occupies two
addresses

570
 DBD DDD:dddd 0:0 to 255:8192 Double word: DB block storage
area, block number DD 0 to 255,
word of each word dddd 0 to 8192,
8-digit register, each double-work
occupies four addresses
ID dddd 0~4092 Binary word: input image register
QD dddd 0~4092 Binary word: output image register
MD dddd 0~4092 Double word: auxiliary memory

Siemens S7-1200tcp
Register name Address format Input range Remarks
I dddd.o 0.0~1024.7 Bit: input shadow register
Q dddd.o 0.0~1024.7 Bit: output shadow register
M dddd.o 0.0~8191.7 Bit: bit memory
DB_Bit DDD:dddd.o 0:0.0~255:8192.7 Bit: bit of word of DB block storage
area, block number DD 0 to 255,
word of each block dddd 0 to 8192,
bit of each word o 0 to 7
IW dddd 0~1024 Word: input shadow register, 8-digit
register, each word occupies two
addresses
QW dddd 0~1024 Word: output shadow register, 8-digit
register, each word occupies two
addresses
MW dddd 0~8191 Word: bit memory, 8-digit register,
each word occupies two addresses
DBW DDD:dddd 0:0~255:8192 Word: DB block storage area, block
number DD 0 to 255, word of each
word dddd 0 to 8192, 8-digit register,
each word occupies two addresses
DBD DDD:dddd 0:0~255:8192 Double word: DB block storage area,
block number DD 0 to 255, word of
each word dddd 0 to 8192, 8-digit
register, each double-work occupies
four addresses
ID dddd 0~1021 Binary word: input image register
QD dddd 0~1021 Binary word: output image register
MD dddd 0~8188 Double word: auxiliary memory

LOGO_TCP
Register name Address Input range Remarks
format
I dd 1~64 Bit: input shadow register

571
 Q dd 1~64 Bit: output shadow register
M ddd 1~112 Bit: bit memory
VB dddd.o 0.0~1023.7 Bit
AI dd 1~16 Word: input shadow register
AQ dd 1~16 Word: output shadow register
AM dd 1~64 Word: bit memory
VW dddd 0~511 Word

Note：

d represents decimal system, input range is 0-9;

o represents octal system, input range is 0-7;

DDD represents block number; input range is 0-255;

Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;

Double-word in the remarks: represents that the data type of the register in configuration must be
32-bit;

Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;

Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;

The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the
scopes may also be different.

For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device

12.25 TaiAn device driver

The device driver is used for SK HMI to read and write the data or state of TaiAn TP03 series PLC
register. The serial communication connection is established through the serial port on the touch
screen and the serial port of TaiAn TP03 series PLC, so as to operate TaiAn TP03 series PLC. Prior to
use of the driver, one shall carefully read the chapter and related technical specifications of TaiAn
TP03 series PLC.

572
How to establish connection with HOLLYSYS series PLC

1. Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
RS232

SK HMI COM1/COM2 TaiAn TP03 series

2 RX 3 TX
3 TX 2 RX
5 GND 5 GND

9 5 9 5

6 1 6 1

Terminal of HMI series touch screen is DB9F, and that of TaiAn TP03 series PLC is
DB9M.

2. Software settings

Select TaiAn Technology in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC model
or supported protocol.

Guarantee that communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC station
number are consistent with the connected PLC.

For setting of the connected PLC, please consult related technical documents of TaiAn TP03 series
PLC.

Default connection parameters of SK HMI

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope
value
PLC type TP03 Series TP03 Series
Communication RS232 RS232/RS422/RS485
port type
Baud rate 19200 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
Data bit length 8 7/8
Parity NONE EVEN/ODD/NONE

573
 Stop bit length 2 1/2
PLC station 1 0 to 255
number
HMI station 0 0 to 255
number

Supporting function Whether it is supported

Offline simulation Yes
Online simulation Yes
Extended mode Yes

3. Operational register and address scope

Register name Address Input scope Remarks
format
X ooo 0 to 377 Bit: input relay, read only
Y ooo 0 to 377 Bit: output relay
M dddd 0 to 7999 Bit: auxiliary relay
SM dddd 8000 to 8511 Bit: special auxiliary relay
S dddd 0 to 4095 Bit: stepping relay
T ddd 0 to 511 Bit: timer
C ddd 0 to 255 Bit: counter
D dddd 0 to 7999 Word: data register
SD dddd 8000 to 8511 Word: special data register
TV ddd 0 to 511 Word: current value of the timer
CV ddd 0 to 199 Word: current value of the counter
CV32 ddd 200 to 255 Double-word: current value of the
counter

Note：

d represents decimal system, input scope is 0-9;

o represents octal system, input scope is 0-7;

Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;

Double-word in the remarks: represents that the data type of the register in configuration must be
32-bit;

Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;

Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;

574
The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the
scopes may also be different;

For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device.

12.26 TaiLing device driver

The device driver is used for SK HMI to read and write the data or state of TaiLing DX series PLC
register. The serial communication connection is established through the serial port on the touch
screen and the serial port of TaiLing DX series PLC, so as to operate TaiLing DX series PLC. Prior to use
of the driver, one shall carefully read related technical specifications of the chapter and TaiLing DX
series PLC.

How to establish connection with TaiLing DX series PLC

1. Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
RS232 (serial port RS232 protocol)

SK HMI COM1/COM2 TaiLing DX series

2 RX 3 TX
3 TX 2 RX
5 GND 5 GND

9 5 9 5

6 1 6 1

Terminal of HMI is DB9F, and that of TaiLing DX series PLC is DB9M.

2. Software settings

Select TaiLing Electric in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC model

575
or supported protocol.

Guarantee that communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC station
number are consistent with the connected PLC.

For setting of the connected PLC, please consult related technical documents of Siemens TaiLing DX
series PLC.

Default connection parameters of SK HMI

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope
value
PLC type DX Series DX Series
Communication RS232 RS232/RS422/RS485
port type
Baud rate 9600 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
Data bit length 8 7/8
Parity NONE EVEN/ODD/NONE
Stop bit length 1 1/2
PLC station 1 1 to 31
number
HMI station 0 0 to 255
number

Supporting Whether it is supported

function
Offline simulation Yes
Online simulation Yes
Extended mode No

3. Operational register and address scope

Register name Address Input scope Remarks
format
X oooo 0 to 377 Bit: input coil, read only
Y oooo 0 to 377 Bit: output coil
M dddd 0 to 7999 Bit: intermediate relay
SM dddd 8000 to 8999 Bit: special intermediate relay
S dddd 0 to 999 Bit: state bit
T dddd 0 to 256 Bit: timer state
C dddd 0 to 256 Bit: counter state
D dddd 0 to 7999 Word: register
SD dddd 8000 to 8999 Word: special register
TV dddd 0 to 255 Word: current value of the timer

576
 CV dddd 0 to 199 Word: current value of the counter
CV32 Double-word: current value of 32-bit
dddd 200 to 255 counter

Note：

d represents decimal system, input scope is 0-9;

o represents octal system, input scope is 0-7;

Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;

Double-word in the remarks: represents that the data type of the register in configuration must be
32-bit;

Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;

Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;

The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the
scopes may also be different;

For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device.

12.27 Techwayson device driver

The device driver is used for SK HMI to read and write the data or state of TaiLing DX series PLC
register. The serial communication connection is established through the serial port on the touch
screen and the serial port of TaiLing DX series PLC, so as to operate TaiLing DX series PLC. Prior to
use of the driver, one shall carefully read related technical specifications of the chapter and TaiLing
DX series PLC.

How to establish connection with TaiLing DX series PLC

1. Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
RS232 (serial port RS232 protocol)

SK HMI COM1/COM2 TaiLing DX series

577
 2 RX 3 TX
3 TX 2 RX
5 GND 5 GND

9 5 9 5

6 1 6 1

Terminal of HMI is DB9F, and that of TaiLing DX series PLC is MD8M.

2. Software settings

Select TaiLing Electric in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC model
or supported protocol.

Guarantee that communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC station
number are consistent with the connected PLC.

For setting of the connected PLC, please consult related technical documents of Siemens TaiLing DX
series PLC.

Default connection parameters of SK HMI

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope
value
PLC type Techwayson V80 Techwayson V80 Series
Series
Communication RS232 RS232
port type
Baud rate 19200 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
Data bit length 8 7/8
Parity EVEN EVEN/ODD/NONE
Stop bit length 1 1/2
PLC station 1 0~255
number
HMI station 0 0~255
number

Supporting Whether it is supported

578
 function
Offline simulation Yes
Online simulation Yes
Extended mode Yes

3. Operational register and address scope

Register name Address Input scope Remarks

format
X oooo 0 to 377 Bit: input coil, read only
Y oooo 0 to 377 Bit: output coil
M dddd 0 to 7999 Bit: intermediate relay
SM dddd 8000 to 8999 Bit: special intermediate relay
S dddd 0 to 999 Bit: state bit
T dddd 0 to 256 Bit: timer state
C dddd 0 to 256 Bit: counter state
D dddd 0 to 7999 Word: register
SD dddd 8000 to 8999 Word: special register
TV dddd 0 to 255 Word: current value of the timer
CV dddd 0 to 199 Word: current value of the counter
CV32 Double-word: current value of 32-bit
dddd 200 to 255 counter

Register name Address Input scope Remarks

format
0x dddd 1~9984 Bit: output coil
1x dddd 1~2048 Bit: input coil, read only
3x dddd 1~512 Word: 16-bit input register, read only
4x dddd 1~9999 Word: 16-bit holding register

Note：

d represents decimal system, input scope is 0-9;

o represents octal system, input scope is 0-7;

Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;

Double-word in the remarks: represents that the data type of the register in configuration must be
32-bit;

Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;

579
Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;

The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the
scopes may also be different.

For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device

12.28 Vigor device driver

The device driver is used for SK HMI to read and write the data or state of Vigor V/VH/VB/M series
PLC register. The serial communication connection is established through the serial port on the touch
screen and the serial port of Vigor V/VH/VB/M series PLC, so as to operate Vigor V/VH/VB/M series
PLC. Prior to use of the driver, one shall carefully read related technical specifications of the chapter
and Vigor V/VH/VB/M series PLC.

How to establish connection with Vigor V/VH/VB/M series PLC

1. Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
RS232

SK HMI COM1/COM2 Vigor V/VH/VB/M series

2 RX 3 TX
3 TX 2 RX
5 GND 4 GND

9 5 1

6 1 4

Terminal of HMI is DB9F, and that of Vigor V/VH/VB/M series PLC is DB9M.

2. Software settings

Select Vigor Electric Corp. in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC model
or supported protocol.

580
Guarantee that communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC station
number are consistent with the connected PLC.

For settings of the connected PLC, please consult related technical documents of Vigor V/VH/VB/M
series PLC.

Default connection parameters of SK HMI

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope
value
PLC type V/VH/VB/M Series V/VH/VB/M Series
Communication RS232 RS232/RS422/RS485
port type
Baud rate 19200 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
Data bit length 7 7/8
Parity EVEN EVEN/ODD/NONE
Stop bit length 1 1/2
PLC station 0 0 to 255
number
HMI station 0 0 to 255
number

Supporting Whether it is supported

function
Offline simulation Yes
Online simulation Yes
Extended mode No

3. Operational register and address scope

Register name Address Input scope Remarks

format
X ooo 0 to 777 Bit: input contact
Y ooo 0 to 777 Bit: output contact
M dddd 0 to 8999 Bit: internal relay
SM dddd 9000 to 9255 Bit: special internal relay
S dddd 0 to 999 Bit: stepping relay
T ddd 0 to 255 Bit: timer state
C ddd 0 to 255 Bit: counter state
D dddd 0 to 8999 Word: data register
SD dddd 9000 to 9255 Word: special data register
TV ddd 0 to 255 Word: current value of the timer

581
 CV ddd 0 to 199 Word: current value of the counter
CV32 ddd 200 to 255 Word: current value of 32-bit counter

Note:

d represents decimal system, input scope is 0-9;

o represents octal system, input scope is 0-7;

Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;

Double-word in the remarks: represents that the data type of the register in configuration must be
32-bit;

Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;

Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;

The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the
scopes may also be different;

For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device.

12.29 Xinje device driver

The device driver is used for SK HMI to read and write the data or state of Thinget XC/XCM/XD series
PLC register. The serial communication connection is established through the serial port on the touch
screen and the serial port of Thinget XC/XCM/XD series PLC, so as to operate Thinget XC/XCM/XD
series PLC. Prior to use of the driver, one shall carefully read related technical specifications of the
chapter and Thinget XC/XCM/XD series PLC.

582
How to establish connection with Thinget XC/XCM/XD series PLC

1. Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
RS232

HMI series touch screen COM1/COM2 Thinget XC/XCM/XD series

2 RX 5 TX
3 TX 4 RX
5 GND 8 GND

7
6 8
9 5
3 4 5
6 1
1 2

Terminal of HMI is DB9F, and that of Thinget XC/XCM/XD series PLC is MD8M.

2. Software settings

Select Xinje Electronic in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC
model or supported protocol.

Guarantee that communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC
station number are consistent with the connected PLC.

For settings of the connected PLC, please consult related technical documents of Thinget
XC/XCM/XD series PLC.

Default connection parameters of SK HMI

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope
value
PLC type Thinget XC Series Thinget XC/XCM/XD Series
Communication RS232 RS232/RS422/RS485
port type
Baud rate 19200 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
Data bit length 8 7/8
Parity EVEN EVEN/ODD/NONE
Stop bit length 1 1/2
PLC station 1 0 to 255

583
 number
HMI station 0 0 to 255
number

Supporting Whether it is supported

function
Offline simulation Yes
Online simulation Yes
Extended mode Yes

3. Operational register and address scope

Thinget XC/XCM Series
Register name Address Input scope Remarks
format
X dddd 0 to 1037 Bit: input coil
Y dddd 0 to 1037 Bit: output coil
M dddd 0 to 8767 Bit: internal coil
S dddd 0 to 1023 Bit: process
T ddd 0 to 639 Bit: timer state
C ddd 0 to 639 Bit: counter state
D dddd 0 to 9023 Word: data register
TD ddd 0 to 639 Word: current value of the timer
CD ddd 0 to 639 Word: current value of the counter
FD dddd 0 to 9023 Word: FlashROM register
ED ddddd 0 to 16383 Word: extended internal register

Thinget XD2 Series

Register name Address Input scope Remarks
format
X o 0~7 Input coil
Y o 0~7 Output coil
M dddd 0~7999 Internal relay
HM ddd 0~959 Internal relay
SM dddd 0~2047 Special internal relay
S dddd 0~1023 Technological process
HS ddd 0~127 Technological process
T ddd 0~575 timer
TD ddd 0~575 Timer current value
HT dd 0~95 timer
ET dd 0~31 Precision timer
ETD ddd 0~31 Extended internal register
C ddd 0~575 Counter
CD ddd 0~575 Counter current value

584
HC dd 0~95 Counter
HSC dd 0~31 High-speed counter
D dddd 0~7999 Data register
HD ddd 0~999 Data register
SD dddd 0~2047 Special data register
HSD ddd 0~499 Special data register
FD dddd 0~4095 FlashROMregister
SFD dddd 0~1999 FlashROMregister
FS dd 0~47 Special security register
SEM dd 0~31 Sequential function block WAIT
Command coil

Thinget XD3 Series

Register Address Input scope Remarks
name format
X ooooo 0~20077 Input coil (X10000~X11177 belongs to extended module)
(X20000~X20277 belongs to extended BD module)
Y ooooo 0~20077 The output coil (Y10000~Y11177 belongs to the extended
module) (Y20000~Y20277 belongs to the extended BD
module)
M dddd 0~7999 Internal relay
HM ddd 0~959 Internal relay
SM dddd 0~2047 Special internal relay
S dddd 0~1023 Technological process
HS ddd 0~127 Technological process
T ddd 0~575 timer
TD ddd 0~575 Timer current value
HT dd 0~95 timer
ET dd 0~31 Precision timer
ETD ddd 0~31 Extended internal register
C ddd 0~575 Counter
CD ddd 0~575 Counter current value
HC dd 0~95 Counter
HSC dd 0~31 High-speed counter
D dddd 0~7999 Data register
HD ddd 0~999 Data register
SD dddd 0~2047 Special data register
HSD ddd 0~499 Special data register
FD dddd 0~4095 FlashROM register
SFD dddd 0~1999 FlashROM register
FS dd 0~47 Special security register
ID ddddd 0~20099 Ontology (ID10000~ID10999 is an extension module)
(ID20000~20099 belongs to the extended BD module)

585
QD ddddd 0~20099 Ontology (QD10000~QD10999 is an extension module)
(QD20000~QD20099 belongs to the extended BD module)
SEM dd 0~31 Sequential function block WAIT Command coil

Thinget XD5/XDM Series

Register Address Input Remarks
name format scope
X ooooo 0~20077 Input coil (X10000~X11177 belongs to extended module)
(X20000~X20277 belongs to extended BD module)
Y ooooo 0~20077 The output coil (Y10000~Y11177 belongs to the extended
module) (Y20000~Y20277 belongs to the extended BD module)
M ddddd 0~20479 Internal relay
HM ddddd 0~11999 Internal relay
SM dddd 0~4095 Special internal relay
S dddd 0~7999 Technological process
HS ddd 0~999 Technological process
T dddd 0~4095 timer
TD ddd 0~575 Timer current value
HT dddd 0~1023 timer
ET dd 0~39 Precision timer
ETD ddd 0~39 Extended internal register
C dddd 0~4095 Counter
CD ddd 0~4095 Counter current value
HC dddd 0~1023 Counter
HSC dd 0~36 High-speed counter
D ddddd 0~20479 Data register
HD ddddd 0~6143 Data register
SD dddd 0~4095 Special data register
HSD dddd 0~1023 Special data register
FD dddd 0~4095 FlashROM register
SFD dddd 0~5999 FlashROM register
FS dd 0~47 Special security register
ID ddddd 0~20099 Ontology (ID10000~ID10999 is an extension module)
(ID20000~20099 belongs to the extended BD module)
QD ddddd 0~20099 Ontology (QD10000~QD10999 is an extension module)
(QD20000~QD20099 belongs to the extended BD module)
SEM ddd 0~127 Sequential function block WAIT Command coil

Note:

d represents decimal system, input scope is 0-9;

586
o represents octal input range 0-7;

Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;

Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;

Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;

The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the
scopes may also be different.

For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device

12.30 Yokogawa device driver

The device driver is used for SK HMI to read and write the data or state of Yokogawa FA-M3 series
PLC register. The serial communication connection is established through the serial port on the
touch screen and the serial port of Yokogawa FA-M3 series PLC, so as to operate Yokogawa FA-M3
series PLC. Prior to use of the driver, one shall carefully read related technical specifications of the
chapter and Yokogawa FA-M3 series PLC.

How to establishment connection with Yokogawa FA-M3 series PLC

1. Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
RS232
SK HMI COM1/COM2 Yokogawa FA-M3 series

5 GND 5 SG 4-5 short-circuited

6 RX- 4 SDB 220Ω resistor in series
7 RX+ 3 SDA 2-3 short-circuited
8 TX- 2 RDB 220Ω resistor in series
9 TX+ 1 RDA
6 CSA 6-7 short-circuited
7 ERA
8 CSB 8-9 short-circuited
9 ERB

587
 Terminal of HMI is DB9F, and that of Yokogawa FA-M3 series PLC is SIO.

2. Software settings

Select Yokogawa Electric Corp. in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC model
or supported protocol.

Guarantee that communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC station
number are consistent with the connected PLC.

For settings of the connected PLC, please consult related technical documents of Yokogawa FA-M3
series PLC.

Default connection parameters of SK HMI

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope
value
PLC type Yokogawa FA-M3 Yokogawa FA-M3
Communication RS422 RS232/RS422/RS485
port type
Baud rate 9600 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
Data bit length 8 7/8
Parity EVEN EVEN/ODD/NONE
Stop bit length 1 1/2
PLC station 1 0 to 255
number
HMI station 0 0 to 255
number

Supporting function Whether it is supported

Yes
Offline simulation
Online simulation Yes
Extended mode No

3. Operational register and address scope

Register name Address Input scope Remarks
format
X ddddd 0 to 71664 Bit: input, discontinuous, determined
by the slot number
Y ddddd 0 to 71664 Bit: output, discontinuous, determined
by the slot number

588
 M ddddd 0 to 16384 Bit: special relay
I ddddd 0 to 71024 Bit: internal relay
L ddddd 0 to 9984 Bit: link relay, discontinuous
D ddddd 0 to 8192 Word: data register
B ddddd 0 to 32768 Word: file register
V ddddd 0 to 64 Word: external switching value output
W ddddd 0 to 71024 Word: link register, discontinuous
Z ddddd 0 to 512 Word: special register

Note:

d represents decimal system, input scope is 0-9;

Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;

Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;

Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;

The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the
scopes may also be different.

For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device

12.31 ZhengHang device driver

The device driver is used for SK HMI to read and write the data or state of ZhengHang A5 series PLC
register. The serial communication connection is established through the serial port on the touch
screen and the serial port of Yokogawa FA-M3 series PLC, so as to operate ZhengHang A5series PLC.
Prior to use of the driver, one shall carefully read related technical specifications of the chapter and
ZhengHang A5 series PLC.

How to establishment connection with ZhengHang A5 series PLC

4. Hardware connection

Connecting cable:
RS232

589
 SK ＨＭＩ COM1/COM2 ZhengHang A5

2 RX 2 TX

3 TX 3 RX

5 GND 5 GND

5 9 5
9

6 6 1
1

Terminal of HMI is DB9F, and that of ZhengHang A5 series PLC is DB9M.

5. Software settings

Select ZhengHang Electronics in connection device service.

Select the corresponding item in connection device service according to the connected PLC model
or supported protocol.

Guarantee that communication parameters in touch screen connection parameters and PLC station
number are consistent with the connected PLC.

For settings of the connected PLC, please consult related technical documents of ZhengHang A5
series PLC.

Default connection parameters of SK HMI

Setting item Default parameter Setting scope

value

PLC type A5 Series A5 Series

Communication RS232 RS232/RS422/RS485

port type

590
 Baud rate 9600 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200

Data bit length 8 7/8

Parity NONE EVEN/ODD/NONE

Stop bit length 1 1/2

PLC station 1 0~255

number

HMI station 0 0~255

number

Supporting function Whether it is supported

Yes

Offline simulation

Online simulation Yes

Extended mode Yes

6. Operational register and address scope

Register name Address Input scope Remarks

format

I dd.o 0.0 to 15.7 Bit: input image register, read only

Q dd.o 0.0 to 15.7 Bit: output image register

M dddd.o 0.0 to 4095.7 Bit: bit memory

VW dddd 0 to 1998 Word: variable memory, 8-digit

register, each word occupies two

addresses

AIW d 0 to 9 Word: analog input, read only

AQW d 0 to 9 Word: analog output, write only

Note:

d represents decimal system, input scope is 0-9;

591
o represents octal system, input scope is 0-7;

Word in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as word;

Bit in the remarks: represents the register can only be used as bit;

Read only in the remarks represents that the register can only be read but not be written;

The names of the registers supported by different equipment model may be different, and the
scopes may also be different.

For detailed name and scope, please consult related technical document of the connected device

592
 13. Number signals of communication errors
between HMI and PLC

Error Error
Information Information
Code Code
Local data-Real-time read-ECC Local data-Real-time read-No data
0x11 0x41
Error returned
Local data-Write operation-ECC Local data-Write operation- No
0x12 0x42
Error data returned
Local data-Read historical Local data-Read historical data- No
0x13 0x43
data-ECC Error data returned
Local data-Read alarm- No data
0x14 Local data-Read alarm-ECC Error 0x44
returned
Local data-Read formula-ECC Local data-Read formula- No data
0x15 0x45
Error returned
Local data-Write formula-ECC Local data-Write formula- No data
0x16 0x46
Error returned
Local data-Read data Local data-Read data
0x17 0x47
transmission-ECC Error transmission-No data returned
Local data-Write data Local data-Write data
0x18 0x48
transmission-ECC Error transmission- No data returned
Local data-Read clock- No data
0x19 Local data-Read clock-ECC Error 0x49
returned
Local data-Write clock- No data
0x20 Local data-Write clock-ECC Error 0x50
returned
Local data-Read macro- No data
0x21 Local data-Read macro-ECC Error 0x51
returned
0x22 Local data-Write macro-ECC Error 0x52 Local data-Write macro- No data

593
 returned
Local data-Real-time read-Wrong Penetrating data-Real-time
0x71 0x111
return length read-ECC Error
Local data-Write operation- Penetrating data -Write
0x72 0x112
Wrong return length operation-ECC Error
Local data-Read historical data- Penetrating data-Read historical
0x73 0x113
Wrong return length data-ECC Error
Local data-Read alarm- Wrong Penetrating data-Read alarm-ECC
0x74 0x114
return length Error
Local data-Read formula- Wrong Penetrating data-Read
0x75 0x115
return length formula-ECC Error
Local data-Write formula- Wrong Penetrating data-Write
0x76 0x116
return length formula-ECC Error
Local data-Read data
Penetrating data-Read data
0x77 transmission- Wrong return 0x117
transmission-ECC Error
length
Local data-Write data
Penetrating data-Write data
0x78 transmission- Wrong return 0x118
transmission-ECC Error
length
Local data-Read clock- Wrong Penetrating data-Read clock-ECC
0x79 0x119
return length Error
Local data-Write clock- Wrong Penetrating data-Write clock-ECC
0x80 0x120
return length Error
Local data-Read macro- Wrong Penetrating data-Read macro-ECC
0x81 0x121
return length Error
Local data-Write macro- Wrong Penetrating data-Write macro-ECC
0x82 0x122
return length Error
Penetrating data-Real-time Penetrating data-Real-time
0x141 0x171
read-No data returned read-Wrong return length
Penetrating data-Write Penetrating data-Write operation-
0x142 0x172
operation- No data returned Wrong return length
Penetrating data-Read historical Penetrating data-Read historical
0x143 0x173
data- No data returned data- Wrong return length

594
 Penetrating data-Read alarm- No Penetrating data-Read alarm-
0x144 0x174
data returned Wrong return length
Penetrating data-Read formula- Penetrating data-Read formula-
0x145 0x175
No data returned Wrong return length
Penetrating data-Write formula- Penetrating data-Write formula-
0x146 0x176
No data returned Wrong return length
Penetrating data-Read data Penetrating data-Read data
0x147 0x177
transmission-No data returned transmission- Wrong return length
Penetrating data-Write data Penetrating data-Write data
0x148 0x178
transmission- No data returned transmission- Wrong return length
Penetrating data-Read clock- No Penetrating data-Read clock-
0x149 0x179
data returned Wrong return length
Penetrating data-Write clock- No Penetrating data-Write clock-
0x150 0x180
data returned Wrong return length
Penetrating data-Read macro- No Penetrating data-Read macro-
0x151 0x181
data returned Wrong return length
Penetrating data-Write macro- Penetrating data-Write macro-
0x152 0x182
No data returned Wrong return length
0x201 Handshake failure

595
 14. Appendix

 Export data via U disk

 Picture format
 Import project via U disk
 Import formula via U disk
 Dial switch

14.1 Export data via U disk

SK series HMI supports exporting historical data, recipes, historical alarms and screenshots via

U disk.

Group number is necessary to export historical data resulting from the added function of

multiple groups of historical data in the SKTOOL. LW60408 is the group number of the selected

history data. For example: Set LW60408 to 1, which means the current historical data for import

and export via U disk is aims at historical data Group 0, instead of others.

Note: If the numerical input value exceeds the maximum group minus 1, this function does

not work.

How to export historical data via U disk

1. Insert the USB disk

2. Set the group number of history data for import and export in the LW60480 register.

3. Trigger LB60127 to ON and then HMI will copy the history data group file to USB disk,

named hisdatai.csv; hisdata1.csv if the group number is 1.

Trigger LB60128 to ON and then HMI will copy the history data group file to USB disk; if you

want to import the Group 1, name the file hisdata1.csv.

These triggers are automatically reset to OFF when the export is complete

When exporting local data, employ the LW register: LW60359-LW60429

596
 How to export formula

It needs to set LW61143 for formula export operation result from multiple groups of formula

in the SKTOOL.

1. Insert the USB stick.

2. Set the group number in LW61143.

3. Trigger LB60163 to ON; HMI will copy the group formula file to U disk

4. These triggers are automatically reset to OFF when the export is complete

Note: It cannot open directly the historical data exported to the computer, so it needs a data

conversion tool, SK_SQL_CSV.exe, which is under the root directory of SK

configuration software.

Use this tool to convert the exported file into a CSV file that can be opened directly.

Double-click to open the tool.

Progress: The progress of the file conversion.

File name: Select the file to convert.

Select historical data or alarm accordingly. The default encoding is ANSI that cannot be

modified. After settings, click "Generate CSV". When the progress bar reaches 100%, the

conversion is complete.

597
 How to get screenshots via U disk

1. Insert the USB disk

2. When configuring, create a Function button -> Screenshot, and select Export to U disk

3. Touch this function button and then HMI will capture the current screen to the

corresponding memory

Note:

• Do not disconnect the USB disk during the export operation;

• Maintain the power ON during the export operation;

• Make sure that your USB disk has enough storage space.

14.2 Picture Format

SK series HMI is compatible with a variety of image formats, such as JPG, BMP, GIF, PNG and so

on. However, in order to ensure the display efficiency, the picture format is compressed by default,

and also converted into the JPG format (except GIF display control).

If you want to retain the original format, select HMI parameter settings -> printer

downloading settings, and then set the picture option to keep the original format.

Note:

• Conversion to JPG format is meant to ensure more pictures to be used;

598
 • Employ of pictures whose resolution does not exceed that of the touch screen can improve the

display efficiency;

• The maximum number of frames for a GIF image is 32.

14.3 Update project via U disk

SK Series HMI supports importing and updating project via U disk.

How to update the project file via U disk

1. Compile the project

Run SKTOOL; open the project you want to update; click to generate the compiled file.
Select Extract U disk file,Select the corresponding version of the usb file,Select
save directory.As shown below

2. Click "Save Project As" in "Download", then select the save directory

The file u-disk-prj.bin will be stored in the selected directory.

599
 3. Copy the compiled file to the USB disk

Open the directory, copy u-disk-prj.bin to the U disk.

4. Insert the U disk to HMI

5. Copy the file and re-update the project

After inserting U disk into HMI, click YES in the pop-up window to execute the update

operation.

6. Restart HMI to complete updating

Restart the power supply or restart the HMI by clicking the "Restart" button on the screen.

Note

• Do not disconnect the USB flash drive during the update process;

• Maintain HMI ON during the update process.

14.4 Update recipe via U disk

SK Series HMI supports importing and updating recipe via U disk.

How to update the recipe file via U disk

1. Compile the project

Run SKTOOL; open the project you want to update; click to generate the
compiled file.

2. Copy the compiled file to the USB disk

Open the directory, copy u-disk-prj.bin to the U disk.

600
 3. Rename the recipe.bin
Rename the recipe.bin as u-disk-recipe.bin

4. Insert the U disk to HMI

5. Copy the file and re-update the project
After inserting U disk into HMI, click YES in the pop-up window to execute the update
operation.

6. Restart HMI to complete updating

Restart the power supply or restart the HMI by clicking the "Restart" button on the screen.

Note
• Do not disconnect the USB flash drive during the update process;
• Maintain HMI ON during the update process.

14.5 Dial switch

Each SK series HMI has dial switch, each of which has its functions.

Function list of dial switch

Dial switch (5-1) Function

All off Normal Operation Mode

On 1 Coordinate Calibration Mode

On 2 Parameter Display Mode

601
 On 3 Terminal Mode

On 1 and On3 Parameter Setting Mode

Note:

It needs to restart HMI after adjusting dial switch;

Please apply Normal Operation Mode when using HMI normally;

Parameter Settings Mode applies to set the time, luminance and IP address.

602
 15. Operation case (Supplement)

This chapter introduces mainly several cases of SKTOOL configuration software meant for SK

series HMI, for your reference.

Contents:

 QuickStart：A Simple Macroblock

 Free Port Communication Protocol Case

 Historical Data Collector Case

 Recipe Case

 Digital Alarm Login

 Analog Alarm Login

 Usb update PLC program

15.1 A simple macroblock

Create a new project; select the appropriate HMI model. The script module will implement the

following simple arithmetic functions: Initialize the "Numerical display" control with the array char

source [4] = {2, 3, 4, 5} element value through the Init script; read the input data from the external

through the numerical display control; and then the execution of the ADDSUM script will be

triggered by pressing the "=" button and the result of its execution will be displayed via this control.

603
Detailed steps are as follows:

Step 1: <Create a new script>

Click the shortcut function button "script editor" on the left side of the toolbar, and then it will pop

up a dialog box .

Step 2: <Create the macro Init>

Click the button in the script editor interface, it will appear a new script on “Not Save”list, as

shown in Figure 5-7; Modify the script name in Script edit control, and edit the source code on the

Script Edit Window,as shown in Figure 5-8

Figure 5-7 new a script

604
 Figure 5-8 Edit Init Script

Macro names can only consist of Arabic numerals (0-9), English characters (a-z, A-Z), and underline

(_). Enter the following contents as shown in Figure 5-9:

Step 3: <Variable settings>

Record the attribute settings such as variable name, variable type, etc, in the window as shown in

Figure 5-9. Double click in the "Variable Setting" window, or right click to pop up the shortcut menu,

and then select "New Variable" item to pop up a dialog box as shown in Figure 5-10 where to set

values of the external variables.

605
 Figure5-9 Script Code Tag

Name: Input LW0, LW1, LW2, LW3 respectively in variable name;

Data Type: Set the 16-bit integer;

Read / write: Select to read and write (read and write);

The address settings are: LW0 = 0, LW1 = 1, LW2 = 2, LW3 = 3;

After the settings, the results are shown in Figure 5-10.

Figure5-10 Variable Setting

Step 4: <Compile the source file>

After completing the above steps, the next is to compile; click the compile button as shown in

Figure 5-11, it will save, compile, connect and check other errors automatically.

Figure 5-11 Information Output

606
When the message output window displays "0 errors! Compile successfully”, it indicates that this

macro has been successfully created and will be automatically added to the compiled list box;

otherwise, an error message will be displayed while the macro will be added automatically to the

unsuccessful compilation list. Users can modify, edit the macro until the successful completion of

the compilation.

Step 5: <Create the script ADDSUM>

Follow steps 2 - 4 to create the script ADDSUM, as shown in Figure 5-13

<1>: Enter "ADDSUM" in the script name.

<2>: Enter the contents of the circle in the code-editing window.

<3>: Set the corresponding variable attribute value in the variable setting window.

<4>: Click the Compile button.

Figure 5-13 Creating the script ADDSUM

Step 6: <Edit Control>

<1>. Place controls on the project screen and adjust them to the appropriate size, as shown in

Figure 5-14.

607
 Figure 5-14 Control Layout

<2>. Set the corresponding control attribute parameters

Right click on the "Numeric Input" control and set the address value and attribute of each control,

as shown in Figure 5-15.

Figure 5-15 numeric input property setting

608
It is essential to ensure that the LW0, LW1, LW2, LW3, SumLW variable addresses correspond to the

"write address" (shown in Figure 5-15) of each control. Click "OK" button to save the settings.

<3>. Set properties of Bit button control

Figure 5-16 (Bit Button Property Setting)

<4>. Property setting of Timer

Select the script Init; click "OK" to save the settings.

609
 Figure 5-17 Timer Property Setting

<5>. Select the "Label" -> "Text" page of the Function button, and enter the "+" character in the

text box, as shown in Figure 5-18.

Figure 5-18 Function Button Property Setting

Step 7: Compile and download to HMI

610
<1>: Click the compile icon to execute the operation.

Figure 5-19 General Project Compile

<2>: Select "Download (D) -> USB download (D)", then click “Download” in the pop-up dialog box.

Restart the HMI.

You can also click the shortcut function button Compile Download.

Step 8: <Result Test>

After restarting the HMI, the following screen appears (Figure 5-20).

This is because at startup, the first instruction, Init, is the first to be executed by the timer.

Figure 5-20 showing the initial value

611
Input data such as "31,42,53,64" respectively in the "Numeric display" control, click on the "="

button to implement the ADDSUM script and the output result will be 190, as shown in Figure

5-21:

Figure5-21 result display

So far it has completed successfully the script editing, compiling, downloading, testing and all the

necessary functions.

15.2 Free Port Communication Protocol Case

First, create three configurations:

612
Configuration 1

Configuration 2

613
 Configuration 3

The six controls on the right side of Configuration 1 and 3 are numeric display controls whose

monitoring addresses are respectively LW60297, LW60298, LW60299, LW60300, LW60301 and

LW60302 = 1, from top to bottom. Two red controls are that of bit indicator light whose monitoring

addresses are LB100 and LB101, respectively. Controls below Configuration 3 are numeric display

controls, starting at address LW400 with an address interval of 1.

The "Advanced" settings for the two screen buttons in Configuration 2 are:

614
Global script setting:

615
616
 Code of Marco_COM：

#include "MacroInit.h"

void Macro_main(IN *p)

MarcoInit

LW60297=0;

LW60298=3;

LW60299=0;

LW60300=1;

LW60302=1;

char Pdata[20];

char Gdata[100];

int result;

if (LB0==0) // 0 means state of sending; 1 means state of waiting reception

Pdata[0]=LW200;

Pdata[1]=LW201;

Pdata[2]=LW202;

Pdata[3]=LW203;

PUTCHARS(0,Pdata,4);

LB0=1; //

return; //

else

result=GETCHARS(0,Gdata);

LW0=result;

if (result<=0) // 0 means no reception while 1 means wrong reception

617
 {

LW1++; // timeout, start to count

if (LW1>=3) // Wait for execution time of 3 macros

LW1=0; // zero clearing

LB0=0; // send the mark of zero clearing; send it the next time

return; // quit directly

else // correct reception

LW2=Gdata[0]&0xff; // data reception processing

LW3=Gdata[1]&0xff;

LW4=Gdata[2];

LW5=Gdata[3];

LB0=0; // processing completed; send it the next time of entrance

PUTCHARS(0,Pdata,0); //clear buffer

}
}

Code of Macro1：

#include "MacroInit.h"

void Macro_main(IN *p)

MarcoInit

LW60297=0;

LW60298=4;

LW60299=0;

LW60300=1;

618
 LW60302=2;

char Pdata[20]; //send data and save arrays

char Mdata[100]; //receive data and save arrays

int result; //length of received returning data

if (LB0==0) //LB0 stands for sending accepted flag, 0 for state of sending and 1 for state of

waiting reception

Pdata[0]=0x02; //send data, read holding register and the first byte is the address of slave

station

Pdata[1]=0x03; //function code; read holding register

Pdata[2]=0x00; // starting address of data to be read

Pdata[3]=0x00;

Pdata[4]=0x00; //word length of data to be read

Pdata[5]=0x03;

Wcrc=CRC(Pdata,6); //CRC check the previous data

Pdata[6]=(Wcrc&0xff); //execute high-low interchange of CRC; P6 takes the low one

Pdata[7]=(Wcrc>>8); //P7 takes the high one

PUTCHARS(0,Pdata,8); //send function; send the whole data to serial port

LB0=1; // complete sending; wait for reception instead of sending the next time of entrance

return; //quit to wait for reception

else

result=GETCHARS(0,Mdata);//receive function; save the received data to Gdata array

LW0=result; //check the receiving length

if (result<=0) //0 means no reception while 1 means wrong reception

LW1++; //timeout; start to count

if (LW1>=3) //wait for execution time of 3 macros

619
 LW1=0; //zero clearing

LB0=0; //send the mark of zero clearing; send it the next entrance

return; //quit directly

else //correct reception

LW400=Mdata[0]&0xff; //data reception processing

LW401=Mdata[1]&0xff;

LW402=Mdata[2];

LW403=Mdata[3];

LW404=Mdata[4];

LW405=Mdata[5];

LW406=Mdata[6];

LW407=Mdata[7];

LW408=Mdata[8];

LW409=Mdata[9];

LW410=Mdata[10];

LB0=0; //processing completed; send it the next entrance

PUTCHARS(0,Pdata,0); //clear buffer

}
}

Name and address of variable setting are the same in function compile box.

620
15.3 Historical Data Collector Case

The following example illustrates the combined application of Historical Data Collector,

Historical Data Display and Historical Trend Graph.

1. Create new historical data collector

Right click the “Historical Data Collector” in the "Project Manager" to create a new one, as

shown in Figure 1 below

Figure 1 Create a new historical data collector

2. Settings of Historical data collector

Double click to open Historical data collector, as shown in Figure 2

Figure 2 General settings of Historical data collector

621
Here, we add five data collection items named "Data1", "Data2", "Data3", "Data4" and "Data5"

whose addresses are set to "LW0", "LW1" "," LW3 "," LW5 "," LW6 "; set up the data type and name

for each, as shown in Figure 3. Since the data 2 and data 3 are 32-bit, it will read the register values

of the "LW0", "LW1 + LW2", "LW3 + LW4", "LW5" and "LW6" every time it takes sample. The total

sampling here is set to 1000, that is, take a total of 1000 samples, until it is full.

Figure 3 Data item setting of Historical Data Collector

Click “OK” button; after settings, execute “Historical data display” if you want to view the historical

data.

3. Settings of Historical data display：

622
 Figure 4 General settings of Historical data display

Select five for Display lines; Font and Background are up to you.

Figure 5 Data item settings of Historical data display

623
Check the data to be displayed; click “OK” button to complete; then a table appears on the screen,

as shown below:

Figure 6 Historical data display on the screen

Employ “Historical trend chart” to display the value change if it is needed.

4. Open Historical trend chart, as shown below

Figure 7 General setting of Historical trend chart

It needs to select the number of line to be displayed and its data source as well as color.

624
Figure 8 Line settings of Historical trend chart

Set the maximum value and time at XY axis.

Figure 9 XY axis settings of Historical trend chart

625
 Click “OK” button to complete; draw the trend chart as shown below:

Figure 10 Historical trend chart display on screen

15.4 Recipe Case

The following example shows the settings and display mode of recipe.

1. Create a new recipe

In the project manager, right click on the recipe, as shown in Figure 1:

Figure 11 Create new recipe

Double click to open the recipe, as shown in Figure 2:

626
 Figure 12 General settings of Recipe

Set the recipe length to 4, which means each recipe contains 4 data. The total number is 10, that is,

10 recipes. Set the address for writing recipe to PLC to D50, and select the 16-bit positive integer;

write the recipe to the register D50, D51, D52 and D53. Settings are the same as that of the write

address.

2. Data item setting of Recipe：

627
 Figure 13 Data item settings of recipe

After setting the recipe name, select "OK" to complete. Employ Numeric Input and Display control

to display recipe data on the touch screen. Select the internal memory address RWI0 for the

numerical display and input control; serial number of recipe is the value of input and display. The

value of RWI 0 stands for the serial number of recipe; value of 2 means serial number of recipe 2,

and so on. Employ the Numeric Input and Display control to display data from D50 to D53. You can

execute functions of "Function button" for saving or reading a recipe. For details, refer to "Function

button".

628
 Figure 14 “Numerical input and display” control for recipe data D50

Set up the Numerical input and display control and place it on the screen：

Figure 15 Screen view of Recipe display

It can change recipe parameters via Numerical input and display; realize functions of checking

recipe, reading recipe and writing recipe through function buttons.

15.5 Digital Alarm Login

629
Alarm Setting is employed to display alarm information, only with which the alarm control and

alarm bar run normally (in fact, the alarm control and alarm bar displays the alarm message of

"digital alarm login" and "analog alarm login").

Right click the "Alarm landing" in the Project Manager and select "New digital alarm", as shown in

Figure 7-22:

Figure 7-22 Select alarm log

Double click the "digital alarm login" option to open the digital alarm settings dialog box, as shown

in Figure 7-23:

630
 Figure 7-23 Select continuous digit

Steps to build a digital alarm log are as follows:

 Enter the read address first; it is assumed here that the internal address LB1 is set.

 In the "Size" column, select the total number of alarms, i.e. the total number of bit addresses,

which is continuous. It is assumed here that the set value is six.

 Set the bit alarm “Scanning time", that is, the scanning frequency.

 Click an item in the list box, and then move the mouse to the right of the "Message" module;

input text information in the “Text” edit box serving as the alarm content. Here assume that

the alarm messages are as shown in Figure 7-23.

 If "Use" is selected, the alarm information will be displayed in "Alarm Control" or "Alarm Bar".

Otherwise the alarm message will not appear even if the corresponding address is 1. If the

address value of this item is 0, the alarm information does not show.

 OFF Alarm: When this option is selected, the alarm will be generated when the corresponding

address value is 0 (OFF value). Otherwise, an alarm will be generated when the address value

is 1 (ON value). By default, an alarm occurs when the address value is 1 (ON).

 U export: export alarm settings information

 U import: import alarm settings information

Here is an example: Suppose the choice of type is "Continuous bit".

631
 If the value of LB1 address is 0, the alarm information will not be displayed in "Alarm Control"

and "Alarm Bar", regardless of whether the "Use" option is selected or not.

 If the value of the LB1 address is 1 and the "Use" option is not selected, the alarm information

is not displayed in the "Alarm Control" and "Alarm Bar".

 If the value of LB1 is 1 and the "Use" option is selected, the alarm information will be

displayed in "Alarm Control" and "Alarm Bar".

Click "OK" to complete digital alarm settings. Users can add 6 bit buttons with the function of

Alternation whose address is LB1-LB6; place controls of "Alarm" and “Alarm Bar" on the screen;

then execute offline simulation to check whether it displays alarm information.

The following is an example of offline simulation as shown in Figure 7-24:

Figure 7-24 Offline simulation example of digit alarm

When "Continuous Bit of Word" is selected as the Type, as shown in Figure 7-25 below:

632
 Figure 7-25 Select Continuous Bit of Word

If the “Use” of a certain bit number is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of this

bit value is 1.

Note: When copying the contents of alarm messages from other documents to the alarm text of

digital alarm log and analog alarm log, please make sure that there is no line break (invisible) in the

message. It is recommended to input the message manually rather than copy and paste, in case of

display error of alarm message.

If "Word value" is selected for the type, as shown in Figure 7-26 below:

633
 Figure 7-26 The "Word Value" digital alarm dialog box

When a value of the address is selected, the alarm is generated when the value of the address is

equal to the value selected in the list.

Place an Alarm control with 7 lines as the example in Figure 7-24 and a Dynamic alarm bar whose

attributes are set as shown in Figure 7- 27:

Figure 7-27 Dynamic Alarm Bar Properties dialog box

Add lastly six bit buttons whose write address is LB1-LB6 with the "Alternation", “Monitor” and

“Monitor Address identical to Write Address” functions set for each. After the settings, click the

634
"Save" button on the toolbar to save the project, execute the "Offline" command in the

"Download" item in the menu bar, and then click the bit buttons LB1, LB2, LB4 and LB6. In this case,

the Alarm control and Dynamic Alarm Bar will display the alarm information of LB1, LB2, LB4, and

LB6 in the "Digital Alarm" When click them again, "Alarm Control" and "Dynamic Alarm Bar" will

display nothing since their values are 0 because of the alternation function.

Note: Different alarm information is available for corresponding language through the function of

switching language.

Note: Number of digital alarm is up to 10 for SK series HMI.

15.6 Analog Alarm Login

Open the analog alarm settings dialog box, as shown in Figure 7-28:

It has two types: Numerical value and Numerical comparison.

The numerical comparison alarm is as shown below:

635
 Figure 7-28 Analog Alarm Login dialog box

If user needs to use the analog alarm, steps are as follows:

 First input the address in the "Read Address" column to alarm. It is assumed here that the
internal address LW1 is set.
 Select the total number of alarms in the "Size" option, which means the total number of
addresses; data type decides the way to read address. Each address value is set firstly as the
16-bit data type and it is continuous. But the data type can be changed. As shown in Figure
7-28, the LW1 address chooses a 32-bit positive integer while LW3 and LW4 values are 16-bit
positive integers. Therefore, when 32-bit data is selected for an address, the later address
value to be read is added by 2 on the basis of the former address value; and if the 16-bit data
type is selected, the later address value to be read is the former value plus 1.
 Users can set the "Scanning time" of the alarm, which means the scanning frequency.
 Click each item to input a value in the “Limit” box on the right; then enter the text information
(alarm content) in the “Text" box. Here assume that the message is as shown in Figure 7-28:
each address value can be classified into one of four ranges-- Low, Low Low, High, High High.

As shown in Figure 7-29:

Figure 7-29 Diagram of the four address values for the LW1 address

 Low Low: When the value of this item is less than the limit of this setting and the "Use" option
is selected, the alarm information of this item will be displayed in "Alarm Control" or
"Dynamic Alarm Bar";
 Low: When the value of this item is no less than the “Low Low” limit while less than the “Low”
limit and the "Use" option is selected, the alarm information of this item will be displayed in
"Alarm Control" or "Dynamic Alarm Bar";

636
 High: When the value of this item is greater than the “High” limit while no greater than the
“High High” limit and the "Use" option is selected, the alarm information of this item will be
displayed in "Alarm Control" or "Dynamic Alarm Bar".
 High High: When the value of this item is greater than the limit of this setting and the "Use"
option is selected, the alarm information of this item is displayed in "Alarm Control" or
"Dynamic Alarm Bar".
 U export: export alarm settings information
 U import: import alarm settings information

Refer to “Digital Alarm Login” for the application of “Use”.

Numerical value alarm means an alarm occurs when the value reaches the set limit value.

The settings are as follows: Alarm is triggered when the alarm value reaches 1, 12, 30 and 40.

Note: Number of analog alarm is up to 10 for SK series HMI.

15.7 Usb update PLC program

SK series touch screen support using U disk update Samkoon PLC program
How to update Samkoon PLC program using usb flash drive

1. Compile Samkoon PLC U disk update file

637
Official website download the latest Samkoon PLC software, design the completion of the PLC
program, click the following button, generate U disk update PLC required files

Generate the following U disk update file, copy to U disk root directory

2. Add U disk to update Samkoon PLC function button

3. Update Samkoon PLC program

Click the button on the touch screen and the interface as shown in the figure below appears

638
Put the PLC file into the root directory of U disk and insert it into the touch screen

A)Select the corresponding serial port and set the corresponding communication baud rate
B)Click the communication test to check whether the current communication parameters can
communicate with the PLC normally. When normal, enter the next step of operation, and
automatically switch the communication parameters if wrong. When communication succeeds,
enter the next step of operation

C)Click download, enter the update Samkoon PLC program, observe the message prompt, update
failure, according to the message prompt information to determine the cause of update failure, fix
the cause of failure, need to click a restore factory operation, restore factory success from the first
step to start again

D)When the update is complete, close the window

COM choose:
The serial port updates the samkoon PLC program, and temporarily only supports the serial port,
which selects the connection between the touch screen and the PLC.

COM set:
Set touch screen and samkoon PLC communication port rate

Message:
Prompts for various information that appears in the update process

639
Load progress:
Prompt update of PLC program schedule

Connect Test:
Test touch screen and samkoon PLC can communicate normally, and the communication test will be
able to perform normal update operation

restore:
When the error occurs in the update process, the advanced row is required to recover the factory
and update the operation

download:
Update the samkoon PLC program

injection ·Ensure that samkoon PLC updates the integrity of the files
. Please consult whether Samkoon PLC software meets the requirements when
there are problems in the update

640
 16. Remote

The touch screen supports remote function, this chapter details the attention and
use methods in the use of remote functions.

Remote profile
Remote configuration
VNC function
Remote case

16.1 Remote profile

SK series Touch screen support remote function,The user can use the computer or the mobile
phone side software to check the remote configuration of the touch screen after downloading the
touch screen, the user can monitor the touch screen and the PLC operation state in real time, the
detailed remote function introduces, the user can refer to the remote software help, and see more
remote operation information.
SKThe remote function currently has only the following type of touch screen to support this
function:
SK-070GG, SK-070GW, SK-070MG, SK-070MW, SK-102CG, SK-102CW
Instructions on different types of suffixes:
G:4G version
W:WIFI version
Please check the different types of touch screen parameters.

16.2 Remote configuration

This chapter introduces the basic sequence of the SKTOOL software middle distance configuration

1.Creation project
Currently, the sk series has the following touch screens to support remote functions, and when
new configuration is built, the touchscreen selects one of the following models:SK-070GG,

641
SK-070GW, SK-070MG, SK-070MW, SK-102CG, SK-102CW
withSK-070GWFor example,The new project is shown in the following figure:

Select touch screen type

Engineering face

If the selected touch screen type supports the remote function, the configuration creation is
completed, and there is a remote option in the engineering management device, which is used for
remote image creation.

642
 2.Remote setting

Jump to the remote interface as shown below

For remote engineering managers, users can refer to"Engineering manager"

Click remote Settings, set the remote device name and the connection password, and if not set the
connection password, the download is prompted as follows

After the setup is complete, the user can add remote or remote Windows for remote monitoring

3.Configuration setting

The remote configuration image is the same as the touch screen configuration image creation
process, and the remote configuration needs to be noted:

Remote alarm:The remote alarm currently only supports the discrete alarm, and the upload server
is checked, and the data will be sent to the remote

643
Control attribute:The remote configuration control attribute has a subtle difference to the touch
screen group attribute, which can be seen in the shape, style, and address migration, and the
macro instruction is the grey non-selected state. The relevant properties are not set in the remote
configuration. The other controls are the same. The grey state properties are not set

Remote bit control properties Touch screen control properties

Control replication:It is important to note that the touchscreen configuration control is copied to
the remote configuration control. The remote configuration USES the default property. The
resulting control is copied to the remote configuration after the display effect is inconsistent with
the original. For the remote configuration control is copied to the touch screen group state, the
relevant properties are restricted, and the properties are free in the touch screen group, and the
replication effect is shown in the figure below:

644
 Prereplication After replication
Control support:The remote configuration control is not fully supported by the touchscreen
configuration control, and the unsupported control is in a grey non-selected state, as shown below:

4. Configuration download

645
The same is the same as the download touchscreen configuration, but this is the option to
download the remote configuration, the configuration download is complete, the touchscreen end
is completed, and the user can connect the touch screen through the remote software.

Remote engineering manager

1.Remote setting

646
Remote Settings options:
Device name: user touch screen name when connecting to a remote connection
Connection password: must, remote client software enter the remote configuration time password
option
The width of the image and the height of the image: the same as the sk image properties, set the
configuration of the configuration area
2.Remote image
Add remote image
3.Remote window
Add remote window
return

16.3 VNC function

VNC remote monitoring capabilities, similar to Windows remote desktop features,Users can pass
VNCS,Remote monitor touch screen
The VNC configuration is set in the touch screen parameter setting -the VNC interface Settings. The
VNC port and the connection password are set correctly. The remote client software enters the
correct password and can enter the remote monitoring interface. It can operate the screen
interface remotely
Note: the current VNC port is fixed with 7530and cannot be modified to other values
VNC Setting interface

647
16.4 Remote case

1. Remote setting

SK The following type of touch screen supports remote function:SK-070GG, SK-070GW, SK-070MG,
SK-070MW, SK-102CG, SK-102CW, 以 SK-070GW connection Modbus RtuEquipment is an
example,The configuration of the configuration process is consistent with the touchscreen
configuration, which focuses on remote configuration production, creates a good configuration
project, and sets the following options:

VNC setting

Touch screen parameter Settings-->VNC setting.Set the VNC function, note: the port number is
fixed with 7530, password: free setting

648
 Remote setting

remote-->Remote Settings. Set the remote display device name and connection
password

2. Set up the configuration interface

Place the button control, set the background color in different state:0x (red)1 (green),Function:
alternate,Set the register address 0x0,Using multiple replication capabilities,The address is 1.Copy 8
buttons,As shown below:

649
The same step,Place the lw0~ ~ lw7 total 8 number input control

650
Set alarm information,The current remote only supports the discrete alarm,And you have to check
the upload server,So we create the discrete alarm here
Create the address alarm message,Address 0x0,The number of consecutive Numbers,On alarm,And
then when you click on that,Create 8 alarm information,Modify each alarm information,Alarm
color,As shown below,

The same step is shown in the lw0~ lw7 address alarm

651
 Create a macro instruction that sets the current value of the 4x0 at the current
value of the 4x0, setting the trigger of the set, as shown below:

652
3.Remote connection

653
 17. FAQ & Solutions

Reason
No. Phenomenon Solution
analysis

1、Check the power

supply connection;

2、Check the power

Power problems type; change the

type if it is not

independent

24VDC（±20%）.

There is something Dial the Dial switch

wrong with the 2 to ON and

configuration re-download
Black screen
project, such as configuration
Display Black Screen once powered
wrong application project to test
on
of macro, including simply; if macro

applying null runs improperly,

pointer, wild debug it and apply

pointer, off-normal correct macro

array, and divisor programming

of 0. methods.

Main engine

trouble: Flat cable Contact to the

corrosion of LCD, after-sale service

crystal oscillator for depot repair.

problem, etc.

654
 Sudden black Check whether the

screen during Power problem power wire and the

normal power are fine.

operation; or
Contact to the
sometimes Main engine
after-sale service
black screen, trouble
for depot repair.
crash

Contact to the

after-sale service
Lines on the screen, vertical or
LCD failure for depot repair if
horizontal line
each screen has the

line phenomenon.

1. Check whether

the open whole is

so small that it

squeezes HMI and

if so install it

according to right
Installation
hole size; 2. Check
problem
whether setscrews
Slow touch response and difficulty
Touch are too tight and
to touch controls
ensure the stress of

four corners as

consistent as

possible.

Too much
Improper
configuration
configuration
project message,
project
background macros

655
 and over range

screen variables

and controls;

modify the

configuration

program, add or

reduce controls and

screens reasonably.

1. Dial the dial

switch on 1 to

execute coordinate
Coordinate
adjustment;
adjustment or
Touch failure 2. Contact to the
touch panel
after-sale service
damage
for depot repair if

the former doesn’t

work.

Contact to the
Jump wire（In Keyboard, press A
Touch panel failure after-sale service
but display X or others）
for depot repair.

Failure of Ensure fine sate of

communication communication

port and rematch

Communication devices （ PLC,
Communication communication
Communication outage SCM, etc.）
is unavailable parameters.
failure between HMI
all the time Contact to the
and controller Communication
after-sale service
port failure of HMI
for depot repair.

Disconnection of Employ specific

656
 communication cable of Samkoon

cable as far as possible.

Communication

wire connection
Change
appears corrosion
communication
and oxidation due
wire or re-weld it.
to long-time

operation.

Shied interference
Communication
source reasonably;
interrupt after Environment
employ shielded
a period time interference
wire; proper
of normal
ground connection
operation
Main engine

trouble of HMI
Contact to the
（ due to strong
after-sale service
magnet and
for depot repair.
current or lightning

at scene）

Select

Wrong installation corresponding

of PC USB driver system driver and

reinstall USB driver.

HMI cannot connect PC and Modify and match

Size and model of
downloading is unavailable. the right model of
HMI are
HMI in
inconsistent with
configuration
the actual ones.
software.

Damage of HMI Contact to the

657
 downloading port after-sale service

for depot repair.

(check method:

Connect another

HMI with the same

USB cable and PC to

see whether

downloading is

available; if so, fault

point locates on the

USB

communication

port of HMI）

Illegal control or
Modify the
Unavailable configuration macro in
configuration
configuration

Bring forward the

Installation installation

directory of SK in directory of
Application Unsuccessful macro compilation
environmental SKTOOL in

variables environmental

variables.

Run without
Off-line and On-line simulation Run SKTOOL as
administrator
cannot function in the meantime. administrator
rights

658
 18. Contact

深圳市显控科技股份有限公司
Shenzhen Samkoon Technology Corporation
Ltd.

Contact
---------------------------------
·Address：4rd Floor, Block 2, Shenzhen software park, Middle Zone of High-tech,
Nanshan District, Shenzhen, China.
·Postcode：518057
·Tel：0755-29419038 29419068
·Fax：0755-29455559
·Email：[email protected]
·Web：http://www.samkoon.com.cn

659